Division 15 Sample

Month Year
Projects Name
City Country Phase Nbr Blocks Nbrs
DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL WORKS SECTION 15010 - BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. SUMMARY This section generally specifies administrative and procedure requirements regarding Mechanical Work. Additional requirements are specified in various sections of Division 15 and also may be required during the execution work due to project conditions. The requirements of this Section do not supersede or take precedence over any provision of the General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions, and should any discrepancy become apparent between these requirements and the General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing, and the Engineer shall interpret and decide such matters in accordance with the applicable provisions of the General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions. EXTENT OF WORK The Contractor shall supply all labor, materials, equipment, tools, appurtenances, storage, services and temporary work, necessary to completely install, in accordance with these specifications and the drawings. Work, materials, equipment or services not specifically mentioned in other clauses of these specifications or elsewhere, or indicated on the drawings but found necessary for the completion and perfect functioning of the installations must be included in the Contractors price. The work shall include also operation of the installations after completion and acceptance including maintenance and guarantee of the works as described hereinafter. The work shall be designed and carried out in accordance with the contract drawings and specifications as well as the standards of the country of origin. The following builders work shall be considered as part of this work : i. Concrete foundations and pads under pumps, chillers and other equipment.
B.
1.02
ii. All Builders work in connection with fixing support, hangers, anchors, etc. iii. Cutting or forming all openings, mortar, chase, etc., in floors, walls and ceilings required for the installation and making good after. iv. Painting items of equipment and exposed pipes and supports. v. Labeling. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Division 15 of this specification covers the supply and installation of the mechanical and Air _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-1
Month Year
Projects Name
Conditioning services as shown on the design drawings and in this specification. B. C. To balance, adjust and test heating and chilled water systems, air moving equipment, air distribution, exhaust air systems and other systems as herein specified. It shall be clearly understood that these specifications and design drawings are complimentary documents, intended for the selection of equipment having the general and specific characteristics as detailed in the documents. Unless otherwise specifically stated, the mechanical installation shall be complete, ready for operation and fully integrated and co-ordinated with all other building items. Materials and methods included in this Section are of a general nature, and apply to most systems and installations in this Contract. Refer to individual system sections for materials and methods specifically required for the respective systems. The systems described include the following : 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. G. Ventilation and Air Conditioning. Chillers and Ancillaries. Boilers and Ancillaries . Fuel systems. Water Treatment. Heating. Domestic and Specialized Water Fire Services. Automatic Controls. Underground Drainage. Sanitary Soil and Waste Drainage. Rain Water Drainage.
D. E.
F.
Air-conditioning equipment capacities are based on the following conditions: 1. Outdoor Temperatures In Summer In Winter 2. Indoor Temperatures 95 35C 26C 5.6C Dry Dry bulb temperature. Wet bulb temperature. Dry bulb temperature.
The indoor room conditions shall be as indicated on drawings.
_____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-2
Month Year
Projects Name
1.04 A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Materials and equipment shall conform to the latest edition of reference specifications specified herein and to applicable codes and requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Mechanical equipment shall conform to the latest version of ASHRAE Standard 90A-1980. 2. Reference Standards a. Provide materials and equipment listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. except in those cases where an Underwriters Laboratories listing is not available. b. Comply with the latest applicable standards of the following : 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) 11) 12) 13) 14) 15) ASME American Society of Engineers. ARI Air-conditions and Refrigeration Institute. ANSI - American National Standards Institute. ASTM - American Society of Testing Materials. AMCA - Air- moving and Conditioning Association. AGA American Gas Association. NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association. AWS American welding Society. NFPA National Fire Protection Association. BS British Standards. SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air-conditioning Contractors. DIN Deutsches Institute for Normalisierung FM Factory Matual. IRR Institute of Boiler and radiator Manufacturers. ISO International Standardization organization.
1.05 A.
SUBMITTALS Definitions :The required submittals of this division, in addition to the definitions of the General Conditions, and elsewhere in the contract documents, are further categorized for convenience as follows : 1. Product data shall include manufacturers latest standard printed literature such as manufacturers installation instructions, catalog cuts, color charts, roughing diagrams, wiring diagrams and performance curves on materials, equipment and systems for this project. Product data shall include references to applicable specification section and item number. Product data shall be provided in addition to the required shop drawing submittals. 2. Shop drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer for Approval as described hereinafter. 3. Samples shall include physical examples of materials in complete units for visual inspection. Samples shall indicate applicable specification section number and item numbers within that section. 4. Certificates shall include statements of applicability, certifying reports from governing and testing agencies, industry standards and applicable certificates specified in each Section of the specifications. 5. Test and inspection reports shall include reports specified in each section of the specifications.
6. Miscellaneous submittals shall include submittals related directly to the work (non_____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-3
Month Year
Projects Name
administrative) including warranties, maintenance agreements, workmanship bonds, reports, physical work records, copies of industry standards, record drawings, field measurement data and similar information applicable to the work and not processed as shop drawings, product data, samples or certificates. 7. No equipment or materials are to be purchased or delivered to site until the required submittals have been approved. 1.06 INTENT The purpose of the shop drawings and specification is to provide an approach for intended complete installations, finished, fully adjusted, tested commissioned and put in perfect operating condition. The spirit as well as the letter of the drawings and specification shall be followed, and all work shall be executed according to the true intent and meaning of the drawings and specifications. 1.07 DISCREPANCIES AND OMISSIONS It is the responsibility of the Contractor, to inform the Engineer of any discrepancies in the drawings and specifications before signing the Contract, default of which will make him responsible for any errors or omissions in the drawings and specifications even though these have been approved by the Engineer. All costs incurred by any changes or alterations necessitated by any errors or omissions shall be on the Contractors own expense without having the right to ask the employer for any indemnity. 1.08 ENGINEER'S DRAWINGS The Engineer's drawings are generally diagrammatic and include general layouts and typical details of the various systems to be installed. No deviations from the drawings shall made without receipt of prior written approval from the Engineer. The drawings shall not be scaled. The Contractor shall base all measurements both horizontal and vertical from established bench marks. All work shall agree with these established lines and levels. All measurements shall be verified on Site and checked as to correctness of same as related to the work. The Contractor shall check all Architectural, Structural and Electrical drawings in laying out work for verifying the adequacy of space in which work will be installed. Maximum headroom and space conditions shall be maintained all points. Where head room or space conditions appear inadequate the Engineer shall be notified before proceeding with installation.
Month Year
Projects Name
1.09
SHOP AND INSTALLATION DRAWINGS Prior to starting the work the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval detailed shop and installation drawings showing to scale dimensions of equipment, pipes, etc. in plan and elevation with clearances and relation of same to the space assigned. Minimum scale of shop drawings shall be 1/50 . Where the work will be installed in close proximity to, or will interfere with the work of other trades, the Contractor shall coordinate space conditions to make a satisfactory adjustment. The Contractor shall prepare composite installation drawings and sections to a suitable scale of not less than 1/50, clearly showing how work will be installed in relation with work of other trades. Prior to submissions of the drawings and approximately 30 days after award of the Contract, The Contractor shall submit lists of all equipment and materials with the names of proposed manufactures. Lists shall show submission dates. The drawings will not be accepted prior to submission of such lists. Drawings of interrelated items shall be submitted at approximately the same time. Drawings of equipment and material shall include detailed manufacturers drawings, cuts of catalogues and descriptive literature, showing specifications, type, performance characteristics, construction, component parts, dimensions, size arrangements, operating clearance, capacity, electrical characteristics, power requirements, motor, drive and testing information. Data of a general nature will not be accepted. Catalogues, pamphlets or manufacturers drawings submitted for approval shall be clearly marked in ink for proper identification of the item being proposed. Deviations from the specifications and drawings shall be indicated clearly with the reason for each deviation. All submissions for approval shall be furnished in three copies and submitted sufficiently in advance of requirements to allow the Engineer ample time for checking and approving. Failure of the Contractor to submit the drawing in ample advance time shall not entitle him to an extension of contract time, and no claim for extension by reason of such default will be allowed. No equipment or material shall be purchased, delivered to the site or installed until the contractor has in his possession the approved drawings for the particular equipment or material. Approval rendered on drawings shall not relieve the Contractor from his responsibility to provide equipment and material to meet the performance and quality standards as indicated on the drawings and as described in the specification or to be of physical size to fit the space assigned for it. Material not covered by drawings such as pipe, fitting and incidentals shall be submitted for approval in letter form giving ratings and names of manufacturers. During the progress of the work, drawings shall be submitted as required by the Engineer and as specified elsewhere in this specification. These drawings shall comprise but not necessarily be limited to concrete bases for equipment with location of anchors bolts, manufacturers certified installation drawings and instructions, certified performance characteristics of equipment, wiring diagrams of motor controllers and control systems, etc. Where required by the Engineer the Contractor shall submit for approval samples of material to be used and workmanship proposed. The Contractor shall not use material or workmanship that does not correspond to the approved samples.
Month Year
Projects Name
1.10
COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES The Contractor shall plan and coordinate the work with all other trades in advance of requirements and shall provide all necessary resources to ensure compliance with the construction program. Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a set of composite coordination drawings in plans and sections with minimum scale of 1/50. The Contractor shall coordinate the space requirements of all other trades involved and shall be responsible for the sufficiency of the size of shafts and chases and adequate clearance in double partitions, hung ceilings, etc. for the proper installation of the work. The Contractor shall give full cooperation to all other trades to permit the work of the trades to be installed satisfactorily and with the least possible interference or delay. The Contractor shall furnish to other trades, as required, all necessary templates, patterns, setting plans and shop details for the proper installation and coordination of adjacent work. The Contractor shall undertake to make, without extra charge, minor changes and modifications in the layout as needed to prevent conflict with work of other trades or for proper execution of the work . Any extra coast incurred by lack of coordination on the part of the Contractor shall be at his own expense.
1.11
RECORD DRAWINGS The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for record a complete set of as-built drawings including three sets of soft copies on CAD 2000 and electrical wiring diagrams, in tracing or other reproducible form reflecting all the changes made from the original drawings during the progress of the work. The drawings and electrical wiring diagrams shall show all labeled equipment, valves, controls, instruments and electrical devices.
1.12
INSTRUCTION MANUALS AND SPARE PARTS LISTS The Contractor shall furnish four copies of an instruction manual bound in booklet form containing the following information: Brief description of every system and equipment with basic operating features. Descriptive literature of all equipment and components with manufacturers name, model number, capacity rating and operating characteristic. Service manual for every major piece of equipment giving operating and maintenance instructions, starting and shutdown instructions, lubrication instructions and possible breakdown and repairs, the service manual shall be prepared specially by the manufacturer for the particular equipment. Manufacturers list of general spare parts for every piece of equipment with unit prices. Manufacturers list of recommended spare parts for one year of operation for every piece of equipment with unit prices. Detailed and simplified one line, color coded flow diagrams of every system with tag number, location and function of each valve and instrument.
The instruction manual shall be submitted in draft form to the Engineer for his review and approval as to the fulfillment of the specified requirements prior to final issue. _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-6
Month Year
Projects Name
The instruction manual shall be submitted to the Engineer at least four weeks in advance of the complete date of the system to be available for the final inspection prior to acceptance of the respective systems. 1.13 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Deliver products to the project properly identified with name, model number, types, grades, compliance labels and other information needed for identification. 1.14 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL QUALITY WORKMANSHIP All equipment and material provided by the Contractor shall be new, free from defects and of the same type, standard and quality as set forth in the specification. Equipment and material of similar application shall be of the same manufacturer unless otherwise specified. All workmanship shall be of the highest standards of the industry, of accepted engineering practice and to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer. Poor workmanship shall be rejected and the work reinstalled when in the judgment of the Engineer, the workmanship is not of the highest quality. 1.15 SUBSTITUTION OF EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL Reference in the drawings and specifications to any equipment or material by name, make or catalogue number, as well as any list of approved manufacturers, shall be interpreted as establishing a standard of quality and performance and shall not in any way be construed as an intention to eliminate the products of other manufacturers and suppliers having approved equivalent products. Approval of a manufacturer does not necessarily constitute approval of his equipment as equal to those specified. After award of Contract and before start of construction, the Contractor shall submit for the approval of the Engineer a complete summary of proposed equivalent to be furnished indicating service, manufacturer, figure number, type and pressure rating. The Tender shall be based on the trade name and catalogue reference named in the specification and products of the approved manufacturers. Should the Contractor wish to use any equipment, material or products other than those specified, he should so state as an alternative to the Tender, naming the proposed substitutions and indicating what difference, if any, will be made to the Contract, price and detailing all differences entailed by the substitution. All the times the Engineer shall be the only judge of equality between the proposed alternative and the item specified. No alternative shall be implemented without the written approval of the Engineer. Where the Contractor proposes to use equipment other than that specified or indicated which requires any redesign of the structure, partitions, foundations, piping, wiring or any other part of the works, all such redesign, new drawings and detailing required shall be prepared by the Contractor at his own expense. All additional costs resulting from such substitution if approved by the Engineer in writing, shall be paid by the Contractor. Where such approved substitution requires a different quantity or arrangement of piping, wiring, conduit and equipment from that specified or shown on the drawings, the Contractor shall provide all such piping, structural supports, installation, controllers, motors, starters, electrical wiring and conduits and any other additional equipment required by the system, at no additional cost to the _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-7
Month Year
Projects Name
Employer. 1.16 PROTECTION The Contractor shall order all equipment from the manufacturer specifying adequate packing for export at the factory to avoid damage during shipment to the Site. The Contractor shall be responsible for safe storage and the adequate protection of all material and equipment until finally installed, tested and accepted. He shall protect work against theft, injury or damage and shall carefully store material and equipment received on Site in their original crates or containers until they are installed. This responsibility shall embrace any delay pending final testing of systems and equipment due to any condition. The Contractor shall close open ends of work with temporary covers or plugs during construction and storage to prevent entry of obstructing material. The Contractor shall coordinate the protection of the work of all trades and shall be liable for any damage sustained to other trades resulting from his work. If any equipment is damaged during shipment be before it is tested and accepted, the Contractor shall replace or repair the equipment depending on the extent of damage and as determined and decided by the Engineer, on the Contractors own account and without additional cost to the Employer. 1.17 ACCESSIBILITY Contractor shall be responsible for determining in advance of purchase that equipment and materials proposed for installation shall fit into the confines indicated areas, allowing adequate space for maintenance. All work shall be installed so as to be readily accessible for operation, maintenance and repair. Deviations from the drawings may be made to accomplish this, after the written approval of the Engineer. Concealed valves and devices shall be grouped together in as practical a way as possible in order to be accessible through access doors. 1.18 ACCESS DOORS The Contractor shall arrange for access doors and frames to be provided for easy access to concealed equipment, controls, valves, traps, vents, drains, cleanout and other devices that require periodic operation, inspection or maintenance. However, the dimensions and locations of access doors shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and shall have the approval of the Engineer before the work is installed. Requirements of access doors shall be submitted in sufficient advance time to be installed in the normal course of the work. The Contractor shall be responsible for the correct identification of access doors by means of buttons, tabs or markers to indicate the location of concealed work. The method and schedule for identification of access doors shall be approved by the Engineer. _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-8
Month Year
Projects Name
1.19
NAMEPLATES Each piece of equipment provided shall carry, at a conspicuous location, attached in a permanent manner to the equipment at the factory, a certified nameplate on which shall be printed or stamped clearly the name and address of the manufacturer, the equipment model number, serial number, date of manufacture, Electrical characteristics, performance rating or duty, pressure, temperature or other limitations and all other pertinent data as deemed necessary by the manufacturer for any future reference to the equipment.
1.20
LABELING The Contractor shall label and identify all equipment, instruments, controls, electrical devices, valves, etc. as to duty, service or function. Labels on equipment shall be of laminated bakelite with black surface and white core, with incised lettering nomenclature written in English. Labels shall be attached to equipment, instruments, controls, electrical devices, etc. or to adjacent permanent surfaces, in an approved permanent manner. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for his approval prior to installation a schedule of all equipment and devices to be labeled and the suggested nomenclature. Controls and electrical devices shall be labeled to indicate clearly which equipment they control.
Month Year
Projects Name
1.21
GUARANTEE All works are to be guaranteed for a period of two years dated from the final acceptance of the work by the Owner. Repairs or replacements made under the guarantee shall bear an additional two years guarantee dated from the final acceptance of the repair or replacement. Provide complete warranty information for each item to include product or equipment, date of beginning of warranty or bond, duration of warranty or bond, and names, addresses, and telephone numbers and procedures for filling a claim and obtaining warranty services. The guarantee is to cover perfect mechanical operation of systems, acceptable noise and vibration levels, reasonable consumption of power, fuel and water, and perfect attainment of temperatures and humidities within specified design conditions for HVAC systems. If during the guarantee period any equipment or material proves defective or any part of a system fails to function properly, equipment is to be replaced and defects and malfunctions corrected as directed by the Engineer. If during the guarantee period any piece of equipment is replaced or rebuilt, the guarantee period for this equipment is to be extended for a new period equal to the original guarantee period. During the guarantee period, provide necessary skills and labor to assure proper operation and to provide regular and preventive maintenance for equipment and controls, on a continuous 24 hour basis. Act promptly to correct problems arising in operation of equipment or system. Provide Owner with monthly inspection certificates of equipment, record findings on a check list and certify that each piece of equipment has been examined, is operating as intended and has been properly maintained as recommended by manufacturer. Check all controls monthly to ascertain that they function as designed. Spare part for normal wear and tear during guarantee period are to be provided by Contractor.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS NOT USED
Month Year
Projects Name
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 A. 3.02 A. 3.03 A. B. C. D. E. F. EXAMINATION Examine conditions at the job site where Mechanical Work is to be performed to insure proper arrangement and fit of the work. Start of work implies acceptance of job site conditions. PREPARATION The Engineers drawings issued with these specifications show the approximate location of mechanical apparatus, the exact locations are subject to the approval of the Engineer. INSTALLATION Sequence, coordinate and integrate the various elements of mechanical systems, materials and equipment. Comply with the following requirements. Coordinate mechanical systems, equipment and material installation with other building components. Verify dimensions by field measurements. Arrange for chases, slots and openings in other building components during progress of construction, to allow for electrical installations. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed. Sequence, coordinate and integrate installations of mechanical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing in the building. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install systems, material, and equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible. Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies and controlling agencies. Provide required connection for each service. Install systems materials and equipment to conform with approved submittal data, including coordination drawings, to greatest extent possible. Conform to arrangements indicated by the Contract Documents, recognizing that portions of the work are shown only in diagrammatic form. Where coordination requirements conflict with individual system requirements, refer conflict to the Engineer. Install systems, materials and equipment level and plumb, parallel; and perpendicular to the other building systems and components, where installed exposed in finished spaces. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance and repair or replacement of equipment components. As much as practical, connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations. Install access panels or doors where units are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Section 15050 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods .
G. H.
I.
J. K.
L.
Month Year
Projects Name
M. N.
Install systems, materials and equipment giving right-of-way priority to systems required to be installed at a specified slope. Painting 1. Follow manufacturers recommendations for surface preparation and application procedures for paints and finishes. 2. Thoroughly clean surfaces requiring prime painting of rust, loose scale, oil, grease and dirt by the use of wire brushes, solvent and other required means. 3. Do not paint on damp or frosty surfaces or during wet, foggy or freezing weather. 4. Spread and brush paint evenly to eliminate drips, runs or sagging. 5. Fill voids, open or hollow places and irregularities with compound. 6. Thoroughly clean and retouch damaged or dirtied shop coat surfaces. 7. Do not paint controls, nameplates or labels. 8. Paint thickness is measured when dry. 9. Machinery : Before shipment, paint machinery including fans, compressors, pumps and motors with the manufacturers standard shop prime coat. 10. Piping a. Prime coat steel and cast iron piping and related pipe supports, immediately after insulation, regardless of whether or not they will be subsequently covered with insulation and / or finished paint. Apply prime coat in accordance with manufactures specifications. Do not prime galvanized metals. b. Approved Manufacturers: Primers - Ungalvanized Steel Piping. 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Dutch boy Hempel Sipes Tinol Or approved equal.
O.
Cutting and Patching 1. Perform cutting and patching in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents. In addition to the requirements specified, the following requirements apply: a. Perform cutting, fitting and patching of equipment and materials required to : 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) Uncover Work to provide for installation of ill-timed Work. Remove and replace defective Work. Remove and replace Work not conforming to requirements of the Contract Documents. Remove samples of installed Work as specified for testing. Install equipment and materials in existing structures. Upon written instructions from the Engineer, uncover and restore Work to provide for Engineer observation of concealed Work.
2. Cut remove and legally dispose of selected electrical equipment, component and materials as indicated, including but not limited to removal of mechanical items indicated to be removed and items made obsolete by the new work. 3. Protect the structure, furnishings, finishes and adjacent materials not indicated or scheduled to be removed. _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-12
Month Year
Projects Name
4. Provide and maintain temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to prevent the spread of dust and dirt to adjacent areas. 5. Protection of Installed Work : During cutting and patching operations, protect adjacent installations. 6. Patch existing finished surfaces and building components using new materials matching existing materials and experienced Installers. Installers qualifications refer to the materials and methods required for the surface and building components being patched. 7. Patch finished surfaces and building components using new materials specified for the original installation and experienced Installers. Installers qualifications refer to the materials and methods required for the surface and building components being patched. 3.04 A. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Tests 1. Perform tests on individual equipment, systems and controls in the presence of the Representatives of the Employer, Engineer and such other parties as may have legal jurisdiction. 2. Supply labor, materials, properly calibrated instruments, power, etc., required for testing, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Before conducting any tests on system or equipment, thoroughly clean the associated systems or equipment just prior to testing. 4. Test equipment and systems which normally operate during certain seasons during the appropriate seasons. Where the equipment or system under test is interrelated with and depends upon other equipment, systems, and/or controls for proper operation, functioning and performance, operate the latter simultaneously with the equipment or system under test. 5. The duration of tests shall be as determined by authorities having jurisdiction, but in no case less than the time prescribed in each section of the specifications. 6. In general, apply pressure tests to piping only, before connection of fixtures, equipment and appliances. Do not subject any piping, fixtures, equipment or appliances to pressures exceeding their test rating. 7. Promptly repair or replace defective work and repeat the tests until the particular system and components parts thereof receive the approval for the Engineer. Replace any damages resulting from tests, as directed by the Engineer. 8. Submit test records on reproducible sheets to the Engineer for approval and include approved copy in the instruction Manual. The Engineer shall approve the format of the record sheet prior to actual testing of equipment. 9. During tests of equipment and systems, fully instruct the Employers representative on the operation and maintenance of the equipment and systems. This period is in addition to any required special instruction, elsewhere specified. B. Final Inspection
1. At final inspection, it is essential that certain trades be properly represented including the _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-13
Month Year
Projects Name
following : a. b. c. d. Mechanical Contractor including people thoroughly familiar with the project, its intent, equipment and system installation and operation. Air-conditioning equipment manufacturer. The automatic control manufacturer representatives familiar with the installation who can demonstrate to the Employers satisfaction that the controls perform according to the specified requirements. The Electrical Contractors, representatives familiar with the installations wiring and interlocking.
2. The Mechanical Contractor shall verify the actual operation of equipment and controls prior to final inspection 3.05 A. B. 3.06 A. B. C. D. CLEANING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING-GENERAL Thoroughly clean any apparatus before placing in operation. Restore finished surfaces if damaged and deliver the entire installation in an approved condition. Adjust and balance systems to operate as shown and specified. INSERTS AND SLEEVES Refer to Division 15 Section PIPES AND PIPE FITTINGS for the installation of pipe sleeves. Inserts in concrete for supports are to be as specified in other Division 15 Section. Lay out the work in accordance with approved shop drawings. Furnish and set in place, in advance of placing of slabs or construction of walls, all inserts and sleeves necessary to complete the Work. Pipe Sleeves : Unless otherwise indicated or specified, pipe sleeves are to be as follows : 1. General floor sleeves are to be standard weight galvanized steel pipe with bottom and flush with surface, calked with glass wool and sealed at top and bottom with butyl mastic. Top end is to extend 25 mm above floor level in mechanical rooms. Top end of sleeves is to be flush with finished floor surface in finished rooms. 2. Sleeves in Foundation Walls : Cast iron fabricated sleeves, flush inside and outside, calked water tight. 3. Sleeves in Concrete Walls : Standard weight galvanized steel pipe, flush with wall surface at both ends, calked with glass wool and sealed at both faces with butyl mastic. 4. Sleeves in Interior Partitions and Ceilings : 20 gauge galvanized steel with lock joints. 5. Sleeves for uninsulated piping are to be approximately 20 mm larger than pipe passing through. Sleeves for insulated piping are to be large enough to accommodate the full thickness of the pipe covering with clearance for expansion and contraction. 6. Fire Rated Wall or Floor Sleeves-Galvanized Pipe : Annular space between pipe and sleeve in the fire rated wall or the fire rated floor is to be packed with fire rated silicon foam. E. Duct Sleeves : Where ducts pass through walls and partitions, provide sheet metal sleeves and pack tight between duct and opening with fiber glass. The exposed side of ductwork is to have galvanized 40 mm angle iron closure around duct. The angle irons are to be secured to the wall _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-14
Month Year
Projects Name
construction. 3.08 A. EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING PIPE TRENCHES Excavation and backfilling of trenches required for the installation of all utility services and underground piping within the building, and to points of connection with exterior underground utilities outside of the building, are to be performed by each trade for its work as specified. Excavate to the required depths and grade, the bottoms of trenches to secure the required slope for pipe lines. Rock or existing concrete, where encountered, are to be excavated to a minimum depth of 150 mm below the bottom of pipe. Where mud or otherwise unstable soil is encountered in the bottom of the trench which is incapable of supporting the pipe or utility lines, such soil is to be removed to firm bearing and the trench is to be backfilled with sand to the proper grade and tamped to provide uniformly firm support. Pipe is not to be laid on frozen subgrade. Trench Size: Sides of trenches at point 300 mm above the top of pipe is not to be more than 4/3 overall lateral dimension of the pipe, expressed in millimeters plus 200 mm. Above this point the sides of trenches are to be kept as nearly vertical as possible and are to be braced and shored to protect foundations, utility pipe lines and workmen. Where machines are used to excavate pipe trenches, such machine excavation is to terminate 75 mm above the invert of the pipe. Final excavation and shaping of the trench is to be performed only for short distances in advance of the pipe laying. Separation : Separate trenches are to be provided for potable water and sewer lines. The trenches are not to be backfilled until the piping has been tested by the Contractor as required and reviewed by the Engineer and any local authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
C.
D. E.
Month Year
Projects Name
3.09 A.
MAINTENANCE AND GUARANTEE OF EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEM PRIOR TO FINAL ACCEPTANCE Take necessary measures to insure adequate protection of equipment and materials during delivery, storage, installation and shutdown conditions. This responsibility shall include provisions required to meet the conditions incidental to the delays pending final test of systems and equipment under seasonal conditions. Operate the completed systems for a period of time prescribed by the Engineer to determinate the capability of the equipment and controls to conform to the requirements of the drawings and specifications. Guarantee period for mechanical works shall be 2 years from the date of issuance of taking over certificate. Make final operating tests with systems in simultaneous operation and building in normal operating modes. TRAINING The Contractor shall instruct and train Owners designated personal in the operation and maintenance of every part, device and piece of equipment in the systems with emphasis on proper startup and shutdown procedures, preventive maintenance and lubrication procedures with recommended lubricants, overhaul and maintenance methods, adjustment and calibration of instruments and controls, use of special tools and safe practices. The duration of training shall be for a total period of ninety working days, eight hours a day. This period shall follow the final inspection date and shall not necessarily consists of a single series of consecutive days. Apportion time between Summer, Winter, and intermediate operating seasons as mutually agreed.
B.
C. D. 3.10 A.
B. C.
All expenses for training Owners personnel shall be at Contractors own cost.. Commencement date of training shall be subject to client approval. END OF SECTION
Month Year
Projects Name
SECTION 15030 ELECTRICAL WORKS FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEM A. SCOPE Supply and install all Electrical Works, equipment and accessories specified under the various Mechanical Systems. Electrical Works shall comply with any of the following standards: ANSI, NEMA, BS, VDE, DIN, IEC, UTE. All electrical equipment, materials, accessories, etc,... to be supplied for the Mechanical Systems, as well as all electrical works and tests to be done shall conform also with the requirements of the relevant Specifications for the Electrical Systems. The scope of the Electrical Works under this section and executed by the Mechanical Contractor includes the supply and installation of the followings: a. b. c. Motor control centers, motor control panels for each item or system and housing all protection gear, switches and controls required for the specified function. All cables and wires between equipment and the corresponding motor control center or motor control panel. All electrical equipment, wiring, cables, conduits, boxes, earth connections, control switches, starters, circuit breakers, isolating switches, relays, contactors, protective gear or equipment, transformers, etc,... and all other necessary item or components required for the satisfactory operation, control and protection of the systems.
B.
WORKS NOT INCLUDED The following electrical items will be supplied and installed by the Electrical Contractor. a. b. Power close to each electrically operated equipment not fed from a control panel. Main feeder to the motor control centers and control panels of mechanical equipment.
C.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS a. Ratings of circuit breakers serving electric motors are design values and must be checked and readjusted, if need be, to conform with motor actual power and rating as recommended by motors Manufacturers. Power supply connections to vibrating or rotating machinery shall be made through adequate metallic flexible conduits or tubings through which cables and wires shall be drawn. Cables shall be colour coded for identification. Red, Yellow and Blue shall be used for phase conductors, Black for neutral and Green for earth conductors. Control voltage for starters and control circuits shall not exceed 240 volts.
b.
c. d. e.
Shop and Installation Drawings are to be submitted for approval prior to ordering materials and equipment. Drawings to include the following: _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-17
Month Year
Projects Name
i. ii. iii. iv. v. vi. f. g. h. j.
Complete technical data on all motor starters, motor protection relays, sensing units, control accessories, etc. Instructional details of equipment, particularly motor control centers and panels Wiring diagrams of all power and control circuits Installation details of motor control centres and panels and of control and sensing accessories Exact routing of power and control cables, wiring and conduits Feeder termination details at motor control centres, starters, motors, isolating switches, control and sensing accessories etc.
Power and control wiring to run in conduit unless otherwise specified. Power and control wiring to run in separate conduits. Rigid conduits are not to terminate in nor be fastened to a motor frame or base. Flexible conduits to be used at motor connections. Allow sufficient slack to permit motor to slide over adjustable length of motor base. Length and radius to be sufficient to permit bending of feeder cables without damage to conductor or its insulation. Flexible conduits are not to used in place of rigid conduit except at motor connections, unless otherwise specified. Conduits are to be supported with conduit supports in an adequate approved manner. Conduits are not to cross pipe or vent shafts, ducts or openings. They are to be run a minimum 100 mm away from pipes of non-electrical services. Detailed control wiring diagrams and a list of control equipment with descriptive literature are to be submitted for approval. Free hand field wiring diagrams or sketches will not be accepted. Circuits to be arranged to satisfy operating requirements specified for various equipment driven by electricity and other requirements pertaining to proper functioning and operation of equipment. Circuits to be protected with high rupturing capacity fuses or circuit breakers. Auxiliary supply for controls, other than from main power circuit, to be effectively isolated by auxiliary contacts on main isolator. Motors to be earthed by connecting green insulated conductor from earthing bushing in starter to motor frame. Run earth conductor together with circuit wiring and terminate in motor terminal box, provided earth terminal in box is connected to motor frame. If this is not feasible, extend earth conductor through insulated bushed opening in terminal box and connect to motor base. Equipment to be earthed by connecting non-current carrying metal parts of system to earth source. Non-current carrying metal parts include conduits, cable trays, outlet boxes, cabinets, enclosures, doors, grilles, and barriers protecting or shielding electrical equipment from direct access. Detailed wiring diagram is to be fixed inside each starter enclosure cover to clearly indicate circuits.
k. l. m.
n.
p.
q.
r.
s.
t. Control and power wires are to be identified either by distinctive coloured insulation, _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-18
Month Year
Projects Name
engraved tags or other approved method. u. v. D. Circuit breakers earth fault detection and interruption are to be coordinated with those of main incoming breaker on main distribution panel. Manufacturers to be proposed by Tenderer as part of his Tender, in all cases to be approved by Consultant.
CONDUITS Size is to be minimum 20 mm unless otherwise specified. Steel conduits are to be welded, drawn, heavy gauge, to BS 4568 Part 1 or approved equal, galvanized internally and externally and threaded both ends. Fittings for steel conduits are to be threaded, galvanized or cadmium plated malleable iron specifically designed for size and type of conduit.
E.
WIRES AND CABLES Power wires and cables are to be 600/1000 V grade, to BS 6004. Single conductor wires and multicore cables to have high conductivity tinned copper wire conductors insulated with PVC compound, with additional PVC sheath for multicore cables. Control wires and cables are to have conductors tinned annealed copper, minimum area 1.5 sq mm. Insulation to be moisture resistant flame retardant PVC compound. Wires and cables to be rated for 240 V service. Multicore cables for control and signaling to be PVC insulated copper conductors, PVC sheathed, to BS 6346. Control wires and cables are to be provided with special heat resistant insulation or corrosion resistant sheath where required. Armoured cables to have the armour as single layer of galvanized steel wire under the PVC sheath. Connections to motors to be single conductor wires pulled inside conduits, or multicore cables armoured or non armoured and fixed on cable trays or supports. Special conditions: where required high temperature resistant cables, silicone rubber, cross linked polyethylene, MICC, or approved equal, corrosion resistant sheath is to be provided.
F.
ELECTRIC MOTORS Motors are to be supplied by driven equipment manufacturer, to be as specified for equipment concerned and specifically supplied for available supply voltage and frequency. Motors 1/2 horsepower and under to be single phase and over 1/2 horsepower to be three phase. Motors to be totally enclosed, fan cooled type, unless otherwise specified. Motors are to have Class B insulation as a minimum requirement as defind in IEC 85 and 34-I. Motors that will operate outdoors are to have Class F insulation. IEC
Month Year
Projects Name
Motors operating in ambient temperatures exceeding 45 deg. C to be tropicalized and derated for satisfactory operation. Motors to be rated for continuous operation. Power to be adequate to operate driven equipment without motor overload under all operating conditions and loads and throughout capacity range of equipment. Motor to be capable of delivering full rated output when operating at voltage deviating by 5% from rated voltage at rated frequency. Starting and torque characteristics to be as required by driven equipment. Speed to be as specified for equipment concerned. Conduit terminal box on motor to be approved model for type of motor enclosure. Motor windings to be connected to terminals in terminal box at factory. One additional earthing terminal to be connected to motor frame. Motor base to be adjustable where motors are directly connected to driven equipment, unless otherwise specified. Motors connected to equipment through V-belt drive to have adjustable sliding base. Fractional horsepower motors to have slotted mounting holes in base. G. STARTERS The starting current of all motors above 10 hp shall not exceed twice its rated full load current, for 15 seconds. For motors of rating 10 hp and below, the starting current shall not exceed 6 times its rated full load current, for 5 seconds. In general, motors above 10 hp shall have assisted start in the form of Star-Delta starters of the close transition type. Motors below 10 hp can be Direct on line Start. Motors above and including 50 HP should be assisted by soft-starter. Each three-phase motor shall be provided with means of automatic starting and to disconnect the supply to the motor in case of: a. Failure of one or more phases. b. Serious drop in voltage. c. Flow of excess current. All starters shall be properly derated for operation in an ambient temperature of 45C. All starters shall be of the magnetic automatic type fitted with thermal over load relays/devices calibrated for close motor protection. These devices shall trip the starters in case of overload and shall not allow it to reset except manually. The starters shall be capable of making and breaking their rated current adequately and shall withstand as high as 5 times their rated current for at least 10 seconds without any injury or failure. Starters shall be fitted with On/Off/Fail Pilot lights, start and stop push buttons, Hand/Off/Auto selector where required. All starters shall be provided with contacts for BMS control and signaling (start/ stop and fault). Contacts to be provided to show the position of the selector switch on BMS. The contactors shall be capable of withstanding an intermittent duty and the number of switching _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-20
Month Year
Projects Name
cycles required in the Standards. They shall be AC3 duty rated. The contactors shall be provided with auxiliary contacts for connection of signaling, interlocking, and other circuits required for controls. The enclosures of the contactors, starters, etc., as well as their installation and accessibility for operation and repair shall be suitable for the corresponding motors with which they are related. The contactors shall be suitable for mounting in any position. The contacts shall be silver plated, bounce free and fully enclosed. All motors control gear and ancillary equipment shall be protected by thermal and magnetic circuit breakers in addition to the protective starter mentioned above. Where starter operating circuits and ancillary apparatus are energized by an auxiliary supply other than the main power circuit to the motor, the isolator shall also incorporate auxiliary contacts to effectively isolate all poles of phases of such other power supply. All Starters not in a central panel shall have a sheet metal enclosure with a removable lid and cover and necessary brackets for mounting on panel or wall. A clear schematic diagram of the starter circuit shall be fixed inside the cover of each starter.
Month Year
Projects Name
H.
ISOLATING SWITCHES Isolating switches to be non fusible, single throw type, housed in separate metallic enclosure, with arc quenching devices on each pole capable of interrupting at least six times its rated current. They are to simultaneously interrupt power supply to all line conductors, any neutral and control circuits. Isolating switches for single phase fractional horsepower motors to be single pole, dolly operated type, rated 15/20 A at 250 V AC, quick make, quick break, with silver alloy contacts, flush or surface mounted to suit application. They shall be AC3 duty rated. Operating mechanism to be quick make quick break type, with external operating handle mechanically interlocked with enclosure cover to necessitate disconnecting switch to be in OFF position for access to inside of enclosure. Means are to be provided for by passing interlocks. Position of isolating switch to be clearly indicated on cover. Isolating switches for motors with star/ delta starting shall be interlocked with the starter control circuit to reset the starter to the star connection in a way to prevent the starting of the motor on delta connection after closing the switch. Enclosure to be general purpose type, unless otherwise indicated or required, with provision for locking operating handle in OPEN and CLOSED positions. Enclosures where indicated or required by location to be weatherproof totally sealed water and dustproof type.
J.
COMBINATION STARTERS ISOLATING SWITCHES Components to comprise magnetic starter, isolating switch and short circuit protection devices required by the Standards, in approved sheet metal enclosure to suit application. Isolating switch operating mechanism quick make, quick break, with external operating handle mechanically interlocked with enclosure cover necessitating disconnecting switch to be in OFF position for access to inside of enclosure. Means are to be provided for by passing interlocks. Position of isolating switch to be clearly indicated on cover. Short circuit protection gear to be HRC fused cartridges or moulded case circuit breakers of appropriate current rupturing capacity. Operation of circuit breaker to be possible from outside of enclosure. Position of breaker ON/OFF/TRIPPED to be clearly indicated by position of handle.
K.
PUSH BUTTONS Push buttons to be one unit momentary contact START/STOP with normally open or normally closed contacts as required by wiring diagrams and with lockout attachments. Heads to be colour coded and STOP button to be protected. Push buttons controlling one piece of equipment to be housed in separate enclosure.
Month Year
Projects Name
L.
RELAYS Relays to be multipole with normally open or normally closed contacts, electrically operated at 240 V maximum, and magnetically held. Contacts to be double break, silvered type, interchangeable from normally open to normally closed without additional parts. Relays are to be rated at 10 A, 600 V.
M.
CIRCUIT BREAKERS Circuit breakers to be thermal magnetic type, with moulded case, manually operated for normal switching functions and automatically operated under overload and short circuit conditions. Circuit breakers to give positive trip free operation on abnormal overloads, with quick make quick break contacts under both manual and automatic operation. Stationary and movable contacts to be non welding silver alloy adequately protected with effective and rapid arc interruption. Branch circuit breakers to be minimum 125 A frame size, unless otherwise shown. Main circuit breakers to be 125 A frame size or larger as shown on the Drawings. Breakers of 250 amp frame size and larger to have electronic trip units. Main incoming breakers to be current operated, earth leakage type, or suitably equipped to provide earth fault protection. Earth fault detection and interruption to be time coordinated with those of main incoming breaker on main distribution board. Multiple pole breakers to have single handle mechanism. Each pole to have inverse time delay thermal overcurrent trip element and magnetic instantaneous overcurrent trip element for simultaneous tripping of all poles. Trip elements to be ambient temperature compensated type.
N.
MOTOR CONTROL CENTER (MCC) Totally enclosed freestanding sectional type, cubical and with-drawable type with sections joined to form one assembly. Sections to be designed to allow other sections to be easily added or removed. MCC shall be of unit construction single or double fronted type with a common bus bar. It shall be made up of any number of steel plat cubicles with turned edges and subdivided into compartments to suit the control gear items, all bolted together to form self-contained switchboard. Enclosure shall be NEMA type 1 unless otherwise required or indicated on the drawings or required by the equipment location. Enclosure shall have provision for locking the operating handle in the OPEN and CLOSED positions. MCC shall be constructed such that all compartments doors are interlocked preventing access to the starter until the corresponding isolating switch or breaker is in the off position. Motor control centers are to be provided with Automatic transfer switches.
Construction to be 2 mm thick sheet steel, adequately reinforced and braced for maximum rigidity, _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-23
Month Year
Projects Name
sand blasted, rust inhibited after fabrication and sprayed with one coat primer and two coats enamel internally and externally. Components motor control centre to include the following: 1. Main incoming circuit breaker or isolating switch as shown on the Drawings for terminating incoming supply cables and isolating the busbar system 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Main copper busbars rated as main incoming circuit breaker or as shown on the Drawings Branch copper busbars of adequate capacity to distribute power to each circuit breaker and starter served Neutral copper busbar rated at half capacity of main busbar and distributed throughout whole motor control centre Earth copper busbars to be minimum half the neutral busbar rating extending full length of motor control centre One voltmeter with commutator range 0-415 V Ammeters on main supply with necessary current transformers Starters, circuit breakers, push buttons, indicating lights, switches, relays, contactors and accessories as shown on the Drawings Interconnecting and interlock wiring. Provision for KWHM.
Busbars to be adequately isolated and braced to sustain maximum possible short circuit current. Compartment doors to be interlocked so that isolators or breakers must be in OFF position before door can be opened. Spare positions to be fully equipped cells ready for connection to motors are to be provided in adequate number. Space positions to be fully equipped cells ready to receive control unit are to be provided in adequate number. Space positions to have blank cover plates. Starters, Switches, other components and electrical devices to be clearly labelled in English as to number and function, with incised letters on black Bakelite with white laminated core. Labels to be permanently fixed under each component. Incoming line connections to be made with solderless, terminal four bolt type clamps. Labels starters, switches, electrical devices and accessories to be clearly labelled in English as to function and number. Labels to be permanently fixed under each component. Schematic and wiring diagrams to be firmly fixed within motor control centre, showing each component and cross- referenced with component labels. Submit for approval electrical schematic diagram of whole installation, suggested layout of motor control centre, interior wiring details and complete technical literature on all proposed components, prior to fabrication or purchase. P. MOTOR CONTROL PANELS _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-24
Month Year
Projects Name
Motor control panels to be wall mounted or unit mounted, lockable type. Construction to be minimum 1.5 mm thick hot-dip galvanized steel sheet, finished with one coat etch primer and one coat stove enamel internally and externally. Panels installed outdoors to have weatherproof totally sealed water and dustproof enclosures. Panels are to contain necessary breakers, starters, push button switches, selector switches, relays, indicating lights, interconnecting and interlock wiring and all devices and accessories required for automatic or manual operation of equipment as specified under equipment concerned. Labels starters, switches, electrical devices and accessories to be clearly labelled in English as to function and number. Labels to be permanently fixed under each component. Schematic and wiring diagrams to be mounted in permanent approved manner on inside of panel door. Diagrams are to show each component cross referenced with component labels. Q. SWITCHES Float switches to be level operated, heavy duty, bracket mounted type, suitable for application in open tanks, complete with 178 mm spun copper float, brass rod, two stops, floor mounting stand, lever and counterweight. Switch to have oil tight and dust tight enclosure and 2 pole double throw silver contacts that open on liquid rise. Pressure switch to be industrial, heavy duty, bellows actuated type, suitable for water service, with contacts to close on falling pressure. Range to be 0.1 to 8 kg/cm2. Switch to be good for 1720 kPa operating pressure and to have 6 mm pipe tap bottom connection. It is to have oil tight and dust tight enclosure, single pole double throw contacts and setting adjustment. Low suction pressure switch to be industrial, sensitive, low range, diaphragm actuated type, suitable for water service, with range of 2 to 20 kPa of falling pressure, preset at factory to 3 kPa. Switch to be good for 690 kPa operating pressure and to have 6 mm pipe tap bottom connection. It is to have oil tight and dust tight enclosure, single pole double throw contacts, range adjustment knob, sealing cap and range locking nut.
Month Year
Projects Name
R.
SWITCHBOARD INSTRUMENTS 1. General. Instruments shall be supplied and arranged as called for on the drawings and herein specified. All instruments shall be housed in identical 4 inch white enameled square metal cases suitable for switchboard flush installation. Instruments shall be with linear scales and markings in according. Instruments shall be suitably protected and sealed for tropical use. Accuracy of all instruments shall be within 1% unless otherwise specified. 2. Voltmeters Voltmeters shall be moving coil type 90 scale and a center zero adjuster. Voltmeters shall be fitted with a rotary type 7-position selector switch permitting both line to line and line to neutral readings and OFF position. 3. Ammeters Ammeters shall be moving coil shunt operated type with 90 scale and center zero adjuster. 4. Kilowatt Hour Meters
Kilowatt hour meters shall be switchboard type with built-in test facilities, a front nameplate on which CT and PT ratios and meter constants shall be stamped. The counters shall be of cyclometer type with six digits and a register multiplier as indicated on the drawings. 5. Test Terminal Block Test terminal block shall permit Site testing of switchboard instruments without interrupting the load circuit. Test block shall be fitted with 4 voltage terminals and links, and 3 sets of current terminals and links. All terminals shall be of solid brass and rated 50 Amps at 50 C. 6. Current Transformers Current transformers shall be suitable for withstanding thermal and dynamic stresses due to switchgear short-circuit currents. Current transformers connections to protective and control devices and all outgoing current terminals shall be by means of terminals which can be short circuited, isolated, and in addition provided with plug in test points for portable instruments. Unused secondary terminals shall be short-circuited. Additional taps on current transformers shall be wired to the outgoing terminal block. The current transformer range shall match the associated device. _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-26
Month Year
Projects Name
S.
APPROVED MANUFACTURERS WESTING HOUSE GENERAL ELECTRIC SIEMENSE MERLIN GERIN KLOCKNER MOLLER GEC SQUARE D Or approved equal END OF SECTION ( USA ) ( USA ) (Germany ) ( France ) (U.K.) ( U.K ) ( USA)
Month Year
Projects Name
SECTION 15050 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. SUMMARY
Provide labor, materials, equipment and services, and perform operations required for complete installation of basic mechanical materials and related work as indicated on the drawings and specified herein. Related Work Division 15 : Division 16 : Mechanical Electrical
B.
C.
Work Included : The work shall include, but not be limited to, the following : 1. Excavation for underground utilities and service . 2. Miscellaneous metals for support of mechanical materials and equipment. 3. Access panels and doors in walls, ceilings and floors for access to mechanical materials and equipment. 4. Mechanical equipment nameplate data. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Materials and equipment shall conform to the latest edition of reference specifications specified herein and to applicable code and requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction. 1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. B.
Submit the following submittals in accordance with Section 15010 Basic Mechanical Requirements. Provide product data for the following products : 1. Access panels and doors. 2. Joint sealers. 3. Pipe and duct sleeves.
C. D. E.
Shop drawings detailing fabrication and installation for metal fabrications, and wood supports and anchorage for mechanical materials and equipment. Coordination drawings for access panel and door locations in accordance with Section15010 Basic Mechanical Requirements . Schedules indicating proposed methods and sequence of operations for selective demolition prior to commencement of work. Include coordination for shutoff of utility service, and details for dust, fire and noise control. Coordinate sequencing with construction phasing and Employer occupancy specified in the contract Documents.
Month Year
Projects Name
1.04 A.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Deliver joint sealer materials in original unopened containers or bundles with labels informing about manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use, pot life, curing time and mixing instructions for multi-component materials. Store and handle joint sealer materials in compliance with manufacturers recommendations to prevent their deterioration and damage.
B.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 A. MATERIALS Mechanical Equipment Nameplate Data 1. Nameplate : For each piece of mechanical equipment provide a permanent operational data nameplate indicating manufacturer, product name, model number, serial number, capacity, operating and power characteristics, labels of tested compliances, and similar essential data. Locate nameplates in an accessible location, as approved by Engineer. 2. Relocate nameplates as required and approved after installation to permit easy reading. B. Sealant 1. Provide ready-to-use silicone penetration seal that will stop passage of fire, smoke, and water will cure in the presence of atmospheric moisture to product durable and flexible seal, and will form airtight and watertight bonds with most common building materials in any combination including cement, masonry, steel, and aluminum. 2. Sealant Composition shall be one-part ready-to-use materials with consistency of soft caulk at temperatures ranging from -35 to 160 F, and extension and compression properties of plus/minus 40% of original gap. C. Access Doors 1. Steel Access Doors and Frames : Factory-fabricated and assembled units, complete with attachment devices and fasteners ready for installation. Joints and seams shall be continuously welded steel, with welds ground smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. 2. Frames : 16-gauge steel , with a 1 inch wide exposed perimeter flange for units installed in unit masonry, precast or cast-in-place concrete, ceramic tile or wood paneling. a. For installation in Masonry, Concrete, Ceramic Tile, or Wood Paneling : 1 inch wide exposed perimeter flange and adjustable metal masonry anchors. b. For full-Bed Plaster Applications : Galvanized expanded metal lath and exposed casing bead, welded to perimeter of frame. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 A. EXAMINATION Examine conditions at the job site where work of this section is to be performed to insure proper arrangement and fit of the work. Start of work implies acceptance of job site conditions.
3.02 PREPARATION _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-29
Month Year
Projects Name
A. B. C. D.
Examine the Contract Drawings and Specifications in order to insure the completeness of the work required under this Section. Verify measurements and dimensions at the job site and cooperate in the coordination and scheduling of the work of this Section with the work related trades, so as not to delay job progress. Provide templates as required to related trade for location of support and anchorage items. Preparation for Joint Sealers. 1. Thoroughly clean surfaces, removing foreign matter such as dust, oil grease, water, surface dirt and frost. Materials must be applied to the base surface. 2. Prior to any priming and sealing, joints shall be masked by masking tape or other approved means to prevent soiling of adjacent surfaces. 3. Immediately prior to application of materials test adhesion of materials, to each substrate material and apply primer to any surface sharing poor adhesion. 4. Where required support material with damming materials specified herein. Where sealant materials require damming provide duct tape or compatible backer rod.
3.03 A.
INSTALLATION, ERECTION AND APPLICATION Erection of Support and Anchorage 1. Cut, fit and place miscellaneous metal fabrication accurately in location, alignment and elevation to support and anchor electrical, plumbing and HVAC materials and equipment. 2. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads.
B.
Installation of Access Doors 1. Set frames accurately in position and securely attach to supports, with face panels plumb and level in relation to adjacent finish surfaces. 2. Adjust hardware and panels after installation for proper operation.
3. Location a. Locate access doors in hung ceilings, walls, furred spaces, partitions and other components of the structure, where required to service fire dampers, smoke detectors, duct access doors, controls, valves, cleanouts and other items installed under this Division of the specification. b. Contractor shall coordinate the exact location and quantity with Mechanical and Electrical requirements. Access doors are not required in suspended acoustical lay-in tile ceilings unless specifically shown. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-30
Month Year
Projects Name
A. B. C. D. 3.05 A. B. C.
Inspect seal after 48 hours for complete adhesion, and seal and correct any deficiencies. Follow manufacturers installation instructions precisely, including 4-point field quality control check which consist of foam color, foam cell structure, snap time, and free foam density. Inspect seal after 24 hours. Remove damming materials to inspect under site. Correct any deficiencies by adding foam or sealant. Reinspect after 24 hours. ADJUSTING AND CLEANING Clean excess cured sealant from nonporous surfaces with commercial solvent such as naphtha mineral solvents, following instructions on container label. Clean spills of liquid components with high-flash mineral spirit solvent, following instructions on container label. Trim excess foam with sharp knife or blade. Remove equipment, materials and debris. Leave area in undamaged, clean condition. END OF SECTION
Month Year
Projects Name
SECTION 15051 WELDING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK
A. Division 15 : Mechanical 1.02 A. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
This section covers the standard of shop welding and erection welding of mechanical equipment, steel structure, framework, supports and piping. 1.03 REFERENCES
A.
Reference Standards The latest editions of the following standards and recommendations shall apply in applicable parts. 1. American Standards a. American Welding Society ( AWS ) AWS B 1.0 AWS B 3.0 AWS D 10.4 Guide for the non-destructive inspection of welds. Welding procedure and performance qualification. Recommended practices for welding austenitic chromium-nickel stainless steel piping and tubing.
AWS D 10.9 Qualification of welding procedures and welders for piping and tubing. b. American National Standards Institute ( ANSI ) ANSI / AWS B4.0 Standard methods for mechanical testing of welds.
ANSI B 31.3 Chemical plant and petroleum refinery piping. c. International Institute for Welding ( IIW) IIE XV-50 - 56E Rules for welded constructions.
Month Year
Projects Name
1.04 A.
SUBMITTALS Product Data 1. All electrode rode types, and sizes shall be given indicating the intention of use.
B. 1. 2.
Qualified Staff The name, certificates of standard of welding obtained, and picture of each welder to be used in a list indicating the level of welding the person is intended to be used for. A simple, clearly shown, overall identification system to indicate the individual capacity of experience.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 OPERATORS A. Each operator shall wear an identification system to indicate their level of experience. Operators shall be certified welders or from an approved governmental institute. Records of the welding procedures and welder performance qualification tests for work done shall be maintained by the Supplier for review. The method and procedure adopted for welding in workshops and at the site shall be approved before production starts. The applicable parts of the following documents from the American Welding Society shall apply : AWS B 3.0 AWS D 10.9 ANSI / AWS B 4.0 B. Processes 1. Carbon Steel Manual shielded, metal-arc, submerged arc, gas metal -arc, flux-cored arc, gas tungsten arc, and other applicable welding processes and methods may be used in the construction and fabrication of welded carbon steel equipment shall as far as possible be prefabricated in the workshop. Use electrodes for steel 6010 root pass and 7018 filler pass, and for copper use 15% silver electrodes for copper brazing, and non lead on antimony rod for solder. For the welding of carbon steel piping, ANSI Code B 31.3 shall apply.
Month Year
Projects Name
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. B. 3.02 TESTS Contractor shall execute X-ray test at random as requested by the Engineer for 50 welds. If tests fail Contractor shall redo the X-ray test after re-welding till the Engineer is satisfied. END OF SECTION The Standards and practices referred to are applicable. Reference is also made to the relevant system and/or material specification.
Month Year
Projects Name
SECTION 15060 PIPES & PIPES FITTINGS 1.01 A. 1.02 A. 1.03 A. RELATED WORK Division 15 - Mechanical SYSTEM DESCRIPTION This section covers the general piping and fittings supply and installation required for the works. REFERENCES Reference Standards The latest edition of the following standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): a. ASTM A53B Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe for Ordinary Use, Specification for Black and Hot Dipped Zinc Coated. b. ASTM B88 Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube. 2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): Standards as specified herein. 3. Manufacturer's Standardization Society (MSS): Standards as specified herein. 4. American Welding Society (AWS): Standards as specified herein. 5. American Petroleum Institute (API): Standards as specified herein. 1.04 A. SUBMITTALS Product Data: Descriptive literature for each of the actual proposed material to be used including: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. B. Operating Pressure Ranges Pressure Losses. Fluid Flows. Test Reports. Certificates of approval.
Shop Drawings Shop drawings for each of the actual proposed systems shall include the following: 1. Working or manufacturing drawings. 2. Calculations 3. Installation details
4. Connections to other services _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-35
Month Year
Projects Name
5. Accessories available indicating those included 6. System diagrams. 1.05 A. B. QUALITY ASSURANCE Qualify welding processes and operators for structural steel according to AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code--Steel". Qualify welding processes and operators for piping according to ASME "Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code", Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications". 1. Comply with provisions of ASME B31 Series "Code for Pressure Piping". 2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for the welding processes involved and that certification is current. 3. Submit welder certificated signed by the Contractor certifying that welders comply with the requirements specified above. 1.06 A. B. WORK INCLUDED ELSEWHERE Section 15405: Soil, Waste, and Roof Drainage Piping Systems. Sections related to External Site Utilities .
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 A. PIPES Service Schedule Service 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Heating water pipes (exposed) Heating water pipes (embedded) Chilled Water Condensate Drain (in mechanical rooms and on roof). Condensate Drain (above false ceiling). Underground Cold Water. Domestic Water (Hot & Cold) & Drinking water above false ceiling and embedded in walls. Domestic Water (Hot & Cold), & drinking water in mechanical rooms, shafts, roof and in attic. Refrigerant Pipes Pipe Material Schedule 40 Black Mild Steel, Seamless Triple layer Poly-Propylene with aluminum layer Schedule 40 Black Mild Steel , Seamless. Schedule 40 Galvanized mild Steel , buttWelded UPVC Drainage type UPVC - 16 bar Tripple layer Poly-propelene with aluminum layer. DIN 2440 Galvanized Mild Steel , Seamless
8.
9.
Copper Type L.
Month Year
Projects Name
10. 11. 12. 13. 14 15 B.
Fire Water Pipes Oil Lines Water Tank over flow and drain pipes. FM200 & CO2 Fire Protection Soft Water Expansion Pipes Sizes
Schedule 40 Black Mild steel, Seamless. Black Mild Steel Schedule 40, Seamless. Galvanized Steel DIN 2440, Seamless. Black malleable Steel Seamless Class 300, Sch.80. Type L Copper Schedule 40 Black Mild Steel, Seamless
1. Unless otherwise specified pipework of 65 mm nominal bore and over shall be welded, while 50 mm nominal bore and below the pipework shall be threaded. 2.02 A. PIPING MATERIALS Copper Piping 1. Pipework shall be Type L hard temper copper tubing conforming to ASTM B 88, or table Y to BS 2871 with PVC coating or tape. 2. Copper fittings shall be streamlined wrought copper solder type of pattern to suit requirements ( ANSI B 16.22 ) . 3. Flanges for copper pipes shall be cast bronze with raised ground face and bolt hole spot faced . Flanges shall be rated for 1.5 MPa water working pressure. 4. Gaskets shall be of a material suitable for the fluid, temperature, and pressure for which they will be used. 5. Lead-and antimony based solders should not be used for potable water system. Brazing and silver solders should be employed. Use 15 % silver rods for brazing.
Month Year
Projects Name
B.
Galvanized Steel Piping Galvanized steel pipes shall be to BS 1387 Medium Weight, Seamless type. 1. Galvanized steel pipe fittings for 50 mm and smaller . a. Galvanized malleable iron, threaded. b. Threads, ANSI Bz.1. 2. Galvanized steel pipe fittings for 65 mm and larger. a. Standard weight galvanized. 3. Flanges for galvanized steel pipes: Pipes 65 mm diameter & larger. 4. Gaskets shall be of material suitable for the fluid temperature and pressure for which they are used. 5. All fittings shall comply with Standard of pipes.
C-
Poly Propylene Pipe 1. Polypropylene Pipe (Type 1) This specification covers requirements for polypropylene random (PP-r) piping system (pipe and fittings) for domestic water and heating water pipes embedded under tiles. Approved Manufacturer: The pipe and fitting manufacturer shall have an established quality control program responsible for inspecting incoming and outgoing materials. The manufacturer shall have a document control procedure, which allows for traceability of manufactured products It is mandatory for the manufacturer to be operating and producing under ISO9001:2000 quality requirements. PP-r pipe shall be manufactured from approved Raw materials in accordance with DIN 8078 and/or prEN 12202-Part 1 and Part 2. Embedded heating water and domestic cold and hot water pipes shall be triple layer type with aluminum alloy coating inserted in the surface layer and over lapping the pipe. PP-r pipe shall be rated PN20 or PN25 Wall thickness. Mechanical Characteristics, Mean outside diameter and out of roundness together with their tolerances must comply with DIN 8077 and /or prEN 12202-Part 2. Pipe Packaging All pipe sizes will be supplied in straight lengths of 4 m each. Packaging of pipes will differ according to size.
Marking of Pipe - All pipes shall bear permanent identification markings that will remain legible during the service life of the product. Marking on pipe shall include the following and shall be applied at intervals of not more than 1.5 meters: 1. Trademark and Nominal diameter and thickness (i.e. APITHERM 32 x 5.4) 2. Standard PPr designation (i.e. PPr80 or PPr-type3) 3. The Standard Dimension Ratio (i.e. SDR 5 or SDR 6) and Nominal Pressure (i.e. PN20) 5. Marking the product with the applicable standards designation (i.e. DIN 8077/8078) _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-38
Month Year
Projects Name
6. Quality System used ((i.e. ISO 900X) 7. Date and time of manufacture reference 8. Manufacturer's name and country of manufacture. 2. Polypropylene Fittings All fittings supplied under this scope of work must be pressure rated (PN20) and manufactured from the same material used to manufacture pipes and shall pass all tests required under DIN 16962/5 and/or PrEN 12202- Part 3. Fitting Inserts - All inserts used in the manufacturing of threaded fittings must be made of Nickel Plated Brass. All male threads must be serrated to ease the application of sealing tape. Male threaded fittings must have PP-r coverage extending to the outer tip of the insert (on inner surface) Marking of Fittings- All fittings shall have permanent identification markings indicating the following: 1- Trademark, size and pressure rating of fitting (PN20) 2- Standard PP-r designation (i.e. PPr80 or PPr-type3) 3- Day and Year stamp indicating period of manufacturing 4- Manufacturers Quality Control 3. Joining Polypropylene Pipes and Fittings Socket Fusion Joining: This procedure shall be the predominant process to be used to join PP-r pipes to PP-r accessories. In this form of joining, which requires heating tools, a pipe end and fitting socket are heated simultaneously to fusion temperature (260 C) using a heating bush and a heating spigot, and are then pushed together. Thus resulting in a homogeneous joint. Electrofusion Joining: This technique shall be used strictly for repair and emergency work only. In electrofusion, the pipe and electrofusion fitting are heated by means of resistance wires and fused together. Power is supplied through an automatic fusion control unit supplied by the manufacturer of fittings. 4. System Inspection and Testing Upon completion of a section of or the entire piping system, the system completed, shall be inspected and proved tight under water pressure. The inspection must take place before embedding or concealing the system under concrete or in walls. For PP-r pipes, the inspection process is broken down in two sections: visual and operational. Visual inspection: A visual inspection should cover, but not limited to the following basic steps: No pipe shall be secured to another pipe or used as a support for other pipes. Pipes shall be laid as to prevent the formation of air locks or pockets. Where pipes are laid above one another, cold water pipes shall be installed under hot water pipes to prevent condensation. 3The supply pipes for each floor and those in individual flats shall be capable of being shut separately. 4All inlets and outlets of completed pipe work shall be tightly closed with stoppers _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-39 12-
Month Year
Projects Name
or caps to prepare for operational phase of the system inspection. Operational inspection: The visually inspected pipe work shall be filled with fresh water and completely vented. The presence of air pockets in the system will lead to premature explosive failure of the system with dangerous consequences to human life near the failure point. The operational phase of the inspection shall be carried out in two stages: 1First stage: a test pressure equal to the permissible working pressure plus 10 bars shall be produced twice within 30 minutes at 10-minute interval. Then it shall be checked whether, over an additional period of 30 minutes, the pressure has dropped by more than 2.0 bars and leakage has occurred (ambient and testing medium temperatures must be taken in consideration when performing this test, consult with manufacturer for correction factors). Second stage: It shall follow the first stage without interval and shall last 24 hours at a pressure of 15 bars. The system should hold a stable pressure with no variation. An overall drop of 2.0 bars is acceptable if a stable pressure is achieved. Any other behavior indicates a leak.
2-
D.
Multi Layer Composite PEX Pipes (Provisional) 1- Multi layer composite pipes consisting of a longitudinally lap welded aluminum pipe with inner and outer layers of a special polyethylene tightly bonded to aluminum by special adhesive. The PE used shall be a non-cross linked and shall have high temperature stability according to DIN E16833. Pies shall be manufactured as per ASTM F1281 and approved by NSF Standard, similar to UNICOR or approved equal. 2- Fittings: Nickel plated brass fittings with press fitting joints. Fittings shall be of the same manufacturer of pipes 3- Pipes shall be suitable for potable water system and should withstand constant temperature of 95C at 10 Bar. 4- All fittings and accessories shall be standard fittings of the manufacturer. Pipes shall be installed and supported as recommended by manufacturer. 5- Pipes shall have a 10 years warranty from the manufacturer for application of this project the specified
Month Year
Projects Name
E.
Black Steel Piping 1. Steel piping other than steam and steam condensate system shall be to ASTM A53, Schedule 40 , seamless type grade B for systems shown in section 15060, paragraph 2.01A. Condensate drain pipes shall be butt-welded. 2. Steam & steam condensate pipes shall be ASTM seamless made of high grade A106-C. hot oil bath treated after extrusion with no need of primer. Pipes shall be Schedule 40 for steam pipes & Schedule 80 for condensate pipes . 3. Malleable iron threaded fittings : ANSI B 16.3 Class 150, standard pattern, with threads according to ANSI B1.20.1. 4. Steel fittings : ANSI B16.9 for welded joints. 5. Welding shall be according to ANSI B31.
F.
UPVC Pressure Piping 1. Pipework : The pipework and fittings shall be U.P.V.C. in accordance with EN 1452, suitable for pressure pipes ( 16 bar). Fittings shall be in accordance with EN 1452. The pipework and fittings shall be installed strictly in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations, copies, of technical instructions on the laying of U.P.V.C. pipework shall be obtained from the manufacturers Technical Service Department before work proceeds. When jointing pipework the spigot and socket ends shall be supported clear of the ground to prevent dirt deposits on the joint, solvent or lubricant. Only solvent and lubricant made by the manufacturer of the pipe shall be used. When making flanged joints the correct flanges and seal rings shall be used with seal gasket set square between mating flange and all bolts secured evenly. Where solvent joints are used a mechanical joint incorporating a seal ring shall be incorporated where necessary to allow for thermal movement. Test pressure shall be applied to the system after a period of not less than 24 hours. Where joints are to be made between dissimilar materials a proper purpose made flanged adapter shall be used. No attempt shall be made to alter or manufacture U.P.V.C. fittings on site. All underground UPVC pipes shall be encased with reinforced concrete 150mm thick.
Month Year
Projects Name
2. Mechanical Joints: When making a mechanical joint a check shall be made to ensure that the depth of entry mark is indicated on every spigot before insertion into the socket, so that the spigot enters the socket within 13/25 mm of the bottom of the socket. The spigot end of the pipe shall be chamfered to half the wall thickness and made with suitable hand tools provided by the manufacturer When making a mechanical joint care shall be taken to ensure that the seal ring is not misplaced. Due allowance shall be made for the control of thermal movement. 3. Solvent Joints : When making a solvent joint the spigot and sockets shall be wiped clean and thoroughly degreased with cleaner to remove oil, grease, etc,. after which the spigot and socket shall have solvent adhesive applied. The sockets and spigots shall be assembled as quickly as possible after applying the adhesive and within forty seconds after which it shall be held together for up to five minutes. Special care shall be taken to prevent dirt and rubbish entering the open ends of pipes during erection. Wrought iron screwed caps or plugs, or plastic covers only shall be used. Wood, rag or paper plugs shall not be used. Failure to comply with this instruction shall mean that the Engineer shall have the right to order the pipework to be dismantled for as far as considered necessary and the pipework to be cleaned internally. Such work shall be carried out by the Contractor and all cost shall be borne by the Contractor. The Contractor is reminded that the valve fitted to the open end of a disconnected pipes is not considered satisfactory to prevent the entry of rubbish. The open end shall be capped, plugged or crimped. 2.03 A. PIPE FITTINGS AND SPECIALTIES General 1. Refer to individual piping system sections for required pipe fittings and specialties not covered herein. 2. Fittings whether black, galvanized, copper or brass shall be compatible with the pipework system they are connected to. 3. Iron fittings shall be generally of the malleable iron type: while steam and condensate services shall use wrought iron fittings.
Month Year
Projects Name
B.
Elbows, Tees, Reducers 1. These fittings shall comply with ASTM and ANSI B16 as described in relevant sections of specifications. The wall thickness shall at least be as specified for the straight pipes. 2. All fittings shall be factory made. 3. Unless otherwise stated, elbows shall be long radius bends with a radius of 1.5 times the nominal size, and shall be smooth and not made of welded segments. 4. Tees up to and including an outside diameter of 323.9mm shall be of the pressed type. 5. Unless otherwise specified, reducers shall be made with a length L = 3 (D-d), where L is the construction length, D the outer diameter of the large end and d that of the small end. Unless otherwise stated, the wall thickness of a reducer shall be the same as that of the adjacent large straight pipe.
C.
Flanged Joints 1. Flanges shall, unless otherwise stated be welding neck over 100mm pipe or slip on weld for 100mm pipe and under, with raised faces complying with ANSI B16-5. Screwed flanges can be used, but welded flanges shall be preferable. 2. The material of the flange shall be compatible to the pipe and service the flange is connected to. 3. Galvanized flanges are to be screwed wherever possible. If this is not possible, black steel flanges are to be welded to the pipework in the normal way and before final fitting, the whole prefabricated section shall be proprietary hot dipped in a galvanized bath depositing the amount of zinc specified for the galvanized tube. 4. A corrugated brass rings for flanged joints shall match the pair of flanges they are gasketting and shall be used between the flange faces to form the seal.
D.
Blank Flanges and Gaskets 1. Blank flanges shall comply with ASTM & ANSI B16-5 and shall be of the same material as the connecting pipework. 2. All flanges shall be gasketed whatever the size or system.
E.
Bolts and Nuts 1. Bolts, nuts and washers for flange connections shall be of hot dip galvanized steel. 2. Bolts and screws shall comply with ANSI B 18.2.1 specification ASTM A449. 3. Nuts shall comply with ANSI B 18.2.2. 4. The length of the thread protruding from the tightened nut in bolt couplings shall be equivalent to at least half and at most once the bolt diameter. 5. Washers shall be placed under both nuts and bolt heads.
Month Year
Projects Name
F.
Unions 1. Unions in steel pipe other than steam piping shall be malleable iron and have female pattern, brass to iron seat, and ground joint, for 65mm and smaller, and flanged connections for larger than 65mm. Unions shall be rated for minimum of 1.5 MPa water working pressure. Threaded unions for steam & condensate pipes shall be used for pipes up to 32 mm only. 2. Unions in copper piping shall be cast bronze, female pattern, brass to brass seat and ground joint threaded end connections for 50mm and smaller, and flanged connections for larger than 50mm. Unions shall be rated for minimum of 1.0 MPa water working pressure.
2.04 A.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS Mechanical Installation System 1. All installation material used for supporting and fixing mechanical pipe systems should be of a modern flexible type that gives a tested and reliable supporting solution without the need for welding, drilling or subsequent galvanizing for corrosion protection. 2. The system should provide for easy access and disassembly for future maintenance, and shall be product of well known manufacturer such as HILTI or approved equal. 3. The Contractor should provide shop drawings and load calculations to verify the suitability of the system for critical load applications as per the engineers requirement. 4. The system should consist of the following components: a- C-channels should be used as the main item for supporting pipe and duct and runs and structures. C-channel should be made in accordance with British Standards of width 41 mm, and height of channel shall be selected according to load calculation, made of cold rolled steel strip of thickness 2.5 mm steel grade ST32-2 as per DIN 10025. The steel is Sendzimir galvanized to a thickness of 20 microns. The channel in ward side should include fine serrations that insure strong friction hold of the assemble nuts and accessories. The channel inward side should be slotted for greater flexibility and should include longitudinal swaging to increase rigidity and stiffness. Double channels connected with tubular rivets shall be used where greater strength and stiffness is required. Supporting distance and calculation of pipe loads for pipe nuts should be verified by channel design in accordance with manufacturer recommendations. b- C-channel accessories as recommended by the channel manufacturer should be used for assembly of various channel structures as appropriate for the application. These accessories include fixing nuts with serration, angles, brackets and pipe ring saddles. c- Pipe Ring Clamps : Galvanized, pre-engineered pipe ring clamps should be used for fixing all pipes to channel system or directly to the concrete structure. The contractor should verify that the pipe supported weight does not exceed the recommended maximum load of the clamp as provided by the manufacturer. The clamps should consist of two half rings suitably connected with welded on connection nut for fixing the clamp to the threaded rod. Where copper pipes, hot water and chilled water steel pipes are used, the rings should provided with a pre-fitted rubber inlay with suitable temperature resistance characteristics for the application.
d- Pipe Hangers for Sprinkler Fire Fighting Systems : Galvanized band hangers and screw _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-44
Month Year
Projects Name
clamping pipe rings should be used for supporting fire-fighting system. The system should be approved for loading as per UL, FM regulations for Fire Fighting Systems. e- Threaded Rods used should be manufactured as per DIN 976 of Steel Grade 4.6, galvanized and used to support pipe duct ring clamps onto the C-channel or directly to concrete anchors depending on the application. The threaded rods, nuts and flat washers used should have a clean thread and flawless galvanized condition. f- Concrete Anchors: Internally threaded Anchors used for fixing threaded rods and pipe clamps should be made from galvanized steel, anchors should have a flared end for accurate setting flush with the surface, and should have an intelligent expansion selection that adapts to suit strength of the base material. Concrete stud anchors should be used for fixing C-channels to the concrete suitable for through in-place fattening with reliable fixing. All Concrete anchors used should be provided with full load characteristics and used in accordance with manufacturer recommendations with regards to application and setting details. Concrete Anchors should also be fire rated to verify that they can withstand the required loads within the fire integrity limits of the supporting building structure. g- For riser pipes, Anchor Fixed Point Clamps should be used to support the weight of the riser pipe . Fixed Point Clamps should be used in location as recommended by supporting system manufacturer and approved by the Engineer. B. Pipe Hangers, Upper Attachments 1. Individual or continuous preset concrete inserts. 2. Beam clamps and anchor bolts may be used for steel construction. 3. Self-drilling expansion shells for 75 mm pipe and smaller may be used in existing concrete structures. See special details for larger piping. C. Hanger Rods 1. Galvanized solid steel, all thread rods, with lock-nuts.( 10mm dia. Per pipe) 2. For trapez supports submit calculation for threaded hager rod diameter with at least 8 times load factor.
Month Year
Projects Name
D.
Pipe Hangers, Lower Attachments 1. Lower attachments for individual runs of pipe shall be as follows, unless indicated otherwise: a. steel piping up to 125 mm: steel clevis; b. steel piping 150 mm and larger, not subject to thermal expansion: steel clevis; c. steel piping 150 mm and larger, subject to thermal expansion: pipe roller support; d. copper tubing, all sizes: copper-plated steel clevis, except where hanger is installed around the outside of insulation, not in contact with pipe, where steel clevis hangers may be used; e. cast iron pipe, all sizes: steel clevis.
E.
Vertical Pipe Supports 1. At intermediate floors use extension pipe clamps. 2. At top of risers, use hangers as specified above. 3. At base of risers, use stiff-leg pipe support immediately adjacent to elbow. For cast iron soil or storm riser use solid concrete block.
F.
Trapeze Hangers 1. Where numerous pipes are run in parallel to one another, they may be supported from a trapeze type hanger arrangement. Rollers supports shall be used to support each run of piping on trapeze hangers to permit independent movement of individual pipes. 2. Piping supports shall consist of channels, fittings, pipe brackets, pipe rollers, pipe clamps, post bases, stud nuts, etc., as required to properly support and hang piping.
G.
Stiff-legs or Stanchions 1. Stiff-legs or two-leg stanchion supports shall be provided in cases where support from overhead structure is not possible. Pipe rollers shall be provided for pipe rigidly supported from floor.
H.
Alignment Guides 1. Guides to be constructed with steel base and T-bar with teflon or graphite plates bonded to the steel components to allow minimum static friction and self-lubrication for unlimited movement. Units shall be factory painted. Guide base shall be welded to the pipe; like F & S "Unislide", Elcen, or equal.
Month Year
Projects Name
I.
Flexible Ball Joints 1. Units shall be carbon steel construction, screwed, flanged, or welded connection as required, suitable for temperatures of 274 degrees C and pressure of 8.3 MPa;. Provide for 15 degrees angular flex and 360 degrees rotation.
J.
Anti-Vibration Suspension Hangers 1. Combination type, shall have a double-deflection neoprene element in series with a steel coil spring; deflection of 8 mm; steel coil spring shall be selected from a 25 mm static deflection series with a minimum additional travel of 12 mm; spring diameter shall be large enough to permit 15 degree angular misalignment of the rod connecting the hanger to the upper attachment without rubbing the hanger box.
K.
Spacing of Pipe Supports 1. Spacing Support Schedule: The maximum spacing for pipe supports shall be as follows: NOMINAL BORE mm 10-12 15 20-32 40-50 65-80 100 & above HORIZONTAL (m) STEEL 1.8 2.4 2.4 2.5 2.5 COPPE R 1.0 1.2 1.8 2.4 2.5 2.5 UPVC 0.8 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.2 VERTICAL (m) STEEL 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 COPPE R 1.2 1.8 2.4 2.5 2.5 2.5 UPVC 0.8 1.0 1.5 1.7 1.7
Hangers and supports shall in no case be less than one (1) hanger per 2.5 m and at every change indirection. 2. The spacing of pipe group supports shall be based on the smallest nominal bore pipe using the hanger, in accordance with the spacing support schedule above. Alternatively intermediate supports can be given to a particular pipe, if conditions permit. 2.05 A. PASSIVE FIRE PREVENTION SYSTEM All openings through fire rated walls, ceilings and floors due to penetrations of mechanical installations as well as those due to construction joints, should be sealed with fire rated products suitable for the specific application as specified hereunder. The product shall be capable of stopping the passage of fire, smoke, air and water through wall, floor and ceiling penetrating, cladding and expansion joints. The product shall exhibit the minimum designed fire resistant properties. The products shall be obtained from an approved, established and proven firm (similar to Hilti or approved equal) and quantities shall be applied strictly in accordance with the written instructions of the manufacturer, international standards such as UL, FM or BS, and to the approval of the Engineer. The recommended treatments for various applications shall be as follows:
B.
C.
D.
Month Year
Projects Name
1.
Metal pipe bare or insulated: the annular space around the pipe shall be packed with fire rated high density backing material such as RockWool and the ends shall be filled and sealed with fire rated intumescent mastic, or Elastic sealant according to UL, FM, or BS and manufacturer data to attain the required rating. The size of the circular opening shall be maintained as the barest minimum as recommended by the mastic manufacturer. Non-metal pipe and conduit crossings less than 75 mm in diameter : The annular space around the pipe shall be packed with fire rated foam or high density RockWool as backing material. The ends should then be filled and sealed with intumescent, graphite based, fire rated mastic with expansion pressure of minimum 6 bar, depth as per standard to attain the required fire rating. The circular opening shall be maintained strictly as the barest minimum recommended by the mastic manufacturer. For non metal pipes/conduits equal or more than 75mm in diameter, the pipe/conduit shall have fire stop jacket installed flush on wall or floor or inside sleeve with fire rated mortor to fill the free volume of the sleeve. Material used shall be similar to Hilti or approved equal. Fire stop jackjet : CP642 & CP643 Fire stop intumescent mastic: FS-one Fire stop mortor : CP636 RockWool : minimum 4psf density
2.
3.
2.06 A.
PIPE SLEEVES General 1. Sleeves for all pipes passing through floors, walls, partitions, (except where floors and walls are a part of fire-rated assembly) concrete beams, girders, and any other building construction shall be provided in types as described below, and of adequate diameter to allow minimum of 19mm clearance all around between sleeve and pipe. When pipe is insulated, insulation shall pass continuously through sleeve with 19 mm clearance between insulation and sleeve. 2. Pipes passing through fire-rated walls, partitions, or floor shall be sealed, smoke-tight, with a fire proof compound. Insulation shall not pass through the sleeve as specified above. Fill inner space with Rockwool insulation with fire rated compound up to the rating of the wall. 3. Allow 50 mm of steel sleeve above F.F.L, and flush with walls.
B.
Pipe Sleeves Material 1. Galvanized Schedule 40 steel pipe when installed in: a. b. c. d. concrete or masonry walls and concrete bases. beams with poured concrete fireproofing. concrete floors and mechanical equipment room floors. concrete floors with metal under deck (tack weld to deck).
2. 18-Gage Galvanized Steel when installed in: a. plaster or dry wall. b. air plenums. 2.07 A. B. FLASHING Steel Flashing : 26 gauge ( 0.50 ) galvanized steel. Lead Flashing : 24.5 kg/m2 (5lb/sq.ft.) sheet lead for waterproofing, 5kg/m2 ( 1 lb/sq.ft.) sheet lead
Month Year
Projects Name
to sound proofing. C. D. 2.08 A. Safes: 24.5kg/m2 (5lb/sq.ft.) sheet lead or 0.20 mm (8mil) thick neoprene. Caps: Steel, 22 gauge ( 0.80 mm) minimum, 16 gauge (1.50 mm) at fire resistance structures SEALANTS Sealant for Pipe Sleeves 1. All sealants materials shall be a single compounds, primerless, non-sagging type in neutral color. 2. Polysulfide: one part, gun grade. 3. Acrylic Latex: one part, gun grade, paintable, with a temperature range from -17 to +82 degrees C. 4. Butyl: one part, gun grade, suitable for both horizontal and vertical joints. 5. Fire rating compound similar to wall rating and as described under paragraph 2.05 of this section. 2.09 A. COMPENSATORS General 1. All compensators shall be selected for the function it is to perform and the suitability for the fluid type; pressure and temperature to be conveyed. 2. The compensator shall be the same size bore as the pipework it shall be connected to, and shall have flanged connections for ease of maintenance. B. Isolating Compensators 1. This type of compensator shall be to isolate a treated vibrating piece of equipment from the pipework system. The compensator shall not allow for any expansion and contraction movement nor misalignment of interconnecting flanges. 2. The single neoprene rubber convolution and rubber facing flange in a single moulding shall have a mild steel backing flange. 3. The compensator shall be capable of a working pressure of 1.5 MPa and a temperature range of -15 to 90C. 4. This type of compensator shall be suitable for vibration and noise control on LPHW, chilled water and HWS systems. C. Axial Compensators 1. This type of compensator shall absorb movement under strict guiding in an axial direction only. No side thrusts can be permitted. 2. The stainless steel convolutions of the number required to accommodate the determined movement shall be protected internally and externally by a heavy mild steel sleeve for physical protection against damage. _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-49
Month Year
Projects Name
3. The compensator shall be capable of a working pressure of 2.5 MPa and a temperature range of -15 to 400C. 4. Large expansion compensators capable of up to 200mm shall be considered to keep the number of compensators to a minimum. 5. This type shall be suitable for LPHW, steam, condensate, chilled water, HWS in long straight runs such as crawlways and service tunnels. D. Angular Compensators 1. This type of compensator, similar to the axial, has a hinged restrain in one plane only. When used in a controlled condition with more than one compensator together with natural pipe movement it shall allow for large movement with minimum thrust upon the anchor points. 2. The stainless steel convolutions shall be protected with an internal lining. 3. The compensator shall be capable of a working pressure of 1.5 MPa and a temperature range of -15 to 400C. 4. This type of compensator shall be suitable for LPHW, steam, condensate, chilled water, and HWS where the pipework can have natural 90 bends incorporated between anchor points. E. Articulated Compensator 1. This type of compensator is a purpose made unit containing two axial compensator units contained within a set of hinged tie bars which together with natural pipe curving movement permits a controlled angular expansion movement with minimum internal pressure on the axial compensator and the least external thurst upon the anchor point. 2. The stainless steel convolutions shall be protected with an internal lining. 3. The compensator shall be capable of a working pressure of 1.5 MPa and a temperature range of -15 to 400C. 4. This type of compensator shall be suitable for LPHW, steam, condensate, chilled water, and HWS where the pipework can have natural 90 bends incorporated in a limited space with little thrust upon pipe anchors, in cases such as equipment rooms adjacent to equipment connection.
2.10 A.
THERMAL EXPANSION FIXED POINT SYSTEM Where metal chilled pipes are subject to thermal expansion, particular attention should be given and pipe runs should be studied and designed to compensate for the expansion forces and reduce the stress on the pipes and supporting system. The contractor should provide sufficient shop drawings and load calculations to verify the suitability of the system for critical thermal applications run as per the engineers requirement. Allowance for free thermal expansion distance at pipe bends should be marked. The following components should be used to control thermal expansion :
B.
C.
1. Slide Guides : Use side and Roll Connectors with integrated sliding components on all pipe _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-50
Month Year
Projects Name
runs subject to high thermal movement. The guide should be used in accordance with manufacturer load limits and movement limits. The slides should be resistant to operating temperatures of the supported pipes. 2. Anchor fixed Point Pipe Clamps : Where necessary and according to the thermal study, use fixed point for a flexible and reliable fixing system against axial thermal expansion forces. The anchor points should be used strictly in accordance with the manufacturer recommendations and loading characteristics and in accordance with the calculated expansion forces provided by the thermal study. 3. Expansion compensators : For critical application and if expansion movement cannot be taken up by free movement of the pipe bends, expansion compensators or bellows of the axial and/or angular type should be used in conjunction with the fixed anchor points and in accordance with the thermal study. Expansion compensators should be used in accordance with manufacturer recommendations. 2.11 A. ACCESSORIES Safety or Relief Valves 1. The relief valves shall be set to a maximum of 0.3 bar above the working pressure of the line in which they are fitted or as indicated on drawings. Safety and relief valves shall be suitable for the operating condition of the system. 2. They shall be of the totally enclosed spring loaded type with padlock. 3. Safety valves and relief valves shall have a full bore discharge connection. Where any law point occurs in the discharge run, it shall be fitted with a 22 mm size copper waste pipe carried clear of the insulation for drainage. The discharge and waste pipes shall be run to visible safe positions to be agreed.. 4. Relief valves shall be ASME approved and labeled, size, capacity and setting as indicated. B. Temperature and Pressure Test Pugs 1. Provide temperature and pressure test plugs as described in Section 15990. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 A. PIPING INSTALLATIONS General 1. Installation instructions contained in this Section pertain to most systems. For specific requirements for installation of each system, refer to individual system specification sections.
B.
Piping Installation Generally 1. Conceal all pipe installations in walls, pipe chases, utility spaces, above ceilings, etc. unless other wise indicated. Under slab piping shall be kept to the absolute minimum.
2. Install all piping free of sags or bends and with ample space between piping to permit proper installation. _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-51
Month Year
Projects Name
3. Install piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal or bent piping will not be permitted. 4. Install piping tight to slabs, beams, joints etc. where possible and such that any removable ceiling panels may be removed for access above ceilings. 5. Protect all piping from entrance of dirt or other foreign materials during the construction period. At the completion of the project, all dirt and foreign matter in piping shall be removed completely. 6. Piping passing through exterior building walls shall be caulked whethertight. 7. Provide drain lines from all relief valves and condensate pans and run drain line full size to the nearest floor or equipment drain. 8. All water piping shall have draining points at all low points. For mains, risers and branch lines there shall be at least a 20 mm drain valve with a threaded hose connection for other points a15 mm drain valve and hose and hose connection shall be provided. 9. Water piping shall be securely anchored to insure proper direction of expansion and contraction. 10. Expansion loops or expansion joints shall be provided as indicated and required, and shall be cold sprung. 11. Verify existing grades, inverts, and topographic conditions prior to any trenching, excavation, or installations. 12. Horizontal piping shall slope uniformly without sags or humps to provide for complete drainage of systems and elimination of air. 13. High points in closed piping systems shall be vented by Automatic air vents. Drainage piping shall slope as required by code or as indicated. Steam and condensate shall slop down in direction of flow 12 mm per 500 mm unless otherwise indicated. Slope water piping up in the direction of flow 12 mm per 500 mm. 14. Piping shall be cut accurately to measurements established at the site, worked into place without springing or forcing, and shall clear all windows, doors and other openings. Cutting or other weakening or building structure to facilitate piping installation is not permitted, install to permit free expansion and contraction without damage. 15. Swing joints at runouts to equipment and risers. Provide expansion loops at all other points for flexible piping systems. 16. Drain piping from pump glands, relief valves, condensate drain pan etc., to spell over open sight drains, floor drains, or other acceptable discharge points terminating drain line with plain end ( unthreaded ) pipe. 17. Provide necessary temporary connections, valves, oversize flushing connections, pumps, etc., as required to properly clean and test systems. 18. Coordinate piping installations with ductwork, structure, lighting, electrical conduit and all other materials and equipment. _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-52
Month Year
Projects Name
19. Use flexible pipe connectors for all inlet and discharge final connections to pumps ( except in line pumps ) and other vibration producing equipment. 20. Provide flanges on all valves, apparatus, and equipment having 50 mm and larger connections. 21. Reduction in pipe sizes except in drainage pipe, shall be made using eccentric reducer couplings installed with the level side up on water piping and level side down on steam and condensate piping. 22. Provide unions adjacent to each valve at the final connection to each piece of equipment of plumbing fixture having 50 mm and smaller connections and where otherwise indicated. 23. Wherever wells are installed in piping for thermometers, pressure gages, probes, etc., pipe size shall be increased by one pipe diameter to accommodate same. 24. Provide air chambers at the top of all hot and cold domestic risers, at the end of each water header in utility spaces, at the end of each branch line, and at the top of all branches to fixtures. Provide shock absorbers at each solenoid valve or piece of equipment that has a quick closing type valve. Air chambers shall be a minimum of two pipe sizes larger than the terminating pipe and shall be equipped with an accessible drain valve and air recharging petcock or installed at least 600 mm above fixture to permit recharging by draining air chamber. 25. Use fittings for all changes in direction and all branch connections and take - off from mains. Changes in direction and branch connection in welded piping shall conform to Section 15051 Welding. 26. Connect dissimilar piping material using dielectric unions or insulating flanges. C. Hangers and Supports 1. Approved hangers and stiff leg supports shall be installed in quantity and size as required to carry the weight of pipe, contents, and insulation and shall be arranged to prevent vibration transmission to the building and allow for pipe movement. All supports and hangers shall be factory fabricated such as HILTI, Erico, or approved equal. Site fabricated supports and hangers are not approved. 2. Support on pipework requiring a vapor barrier shall be installed on the outside of the insulation. Approved material shall be provided between the pipe and the support to give adequate support and thermal isolation. The vapor barrier will cover the chock. 3. Hangers spacing shall be as per clause 2.03 J1 of this section. 4. Hangers shall be supplied with lock nuts in sufficient number and location to lock all rod adjustments permanently at the adjusted height. Two lock nuts shall be used unless the nut tightens against a threaded socket. Minimum rod diameters shall be as follows : NOMINAL PIPE SIZE ROD DIAMETER
12 mm through 50 mm 9 mm 60 mm and 75 mm 12 mm 100 mm and 125 mm 15 mm 150 mm 19 mm 200 mm through 250 mm 22 mm 300 mm 25 mm _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-53
Month Year
Projects Name
5. Location of hangers shall be coordinated with light fixtures as shown on reflected ceiling plans. Piping shall not be supported from ductwork, duct supports, or other piping. Hanger rods shall not penetrate ductwork 6. Provide all necessary supplementary steel for support and attachment of hangers, and pipe , and duct supports in shafts and between building structural members. 7. Piping at pumps, tanks, etc., shall be supported independently so that pipe weight will not be supported by equipment. Each piece of pipework system shall be supported so that no stress shall be imposed on equipment connections or flexible joints to equipment. 8. Provide anchors, guides, and bracing as indicated to prevent lateral movement 9. Where an excessive number of fittings or accessories are installed between hangers, provide additional hangers or adequate support. 10. Rods for trapeze hangers supporting several pipes shall be sized for the equivalent load. 11. Hangers rods shall be attached to structural members of the building. 12. Provide additional hangers or anchoring devices necessary for support of piping at corners, tops of risers, etc. 13. Anchors shall consist of rigid members clamped or welded to the pipe to prevent pipe movement at that point. Attach anchors to structural members of the building. D. Joints 1. Any leaking joints shall be completely disassembled and remade with new materials. 2. Caulked joints in drainage piping shall be made using spun oakum to within 25 mm of hub and the remaining space filled with poured pure pig lead and swigged. 3. Ends of all copper tubing and the interior of the cup of the fitting shall be thoroughly cleaned and polished prior to the application of the flux and solder. The flux shall not be used as a substitute for proper joint preparation. 4. All pipe shall be carefully reamed. Threaded pipe shall have full length clean cut threads. 5. All sockets and pipe ends of PVC shall be cleaned and solvent cement applied for full circumferential cover. E. Pipework Expansion 1. The contractor shall supply and fix expansion devices, anchors and guides to adequately allow for the expansion and contraction of the pipework. The minimum number considered necessary are shown on the contract drawings.. 2. Whenever possible, such as brunch take-offs , natural expansion shall be used within the configuration of the pipework system. 3. Pipe work expansion shall be carefully controlled to prevent damage to the pipework system, equipment, structure, etc. _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-54
Month Year
Projects Name
4. Special consideration shall be given to steam , condensate, LTHW and hot water services. 5. Chilled water and cold water pipework generally where installed in the services building , main services duct, equipment rooms and other areas where relatively high ambient temperatures may occur , and where movement cannot be absorbed naturally, shall incorporate flanged joints of the type which allow expansion, contraction and some measure of lateral movement. These joints shall be a mechanical pipe coupling consisting of a center sleeve, and flanges wedge shaped rubber sealing rings and nuts and bolts. The main components shall be constructed from high quality malleable or cast iron for sizes up to 80 mm diameter and steel above this size. All nuts and bolts shall be galvanized . Sealing rings shall be suitable for the liquid type, temperature and pressure range. Sizes up to 345 mm diameter shall be supplied preassembled. Larger sizes shall be supplied unfitted for ease of handling. Coupling shall allow for a setting regularity of + 6 up to 600 mm + 5for 600 mm to 750 mm and 4 for 750 to 900 m. Each coupling shall allow for a repeated maximum pipe movement of 9.5 mm and sufficient couplings shall be installed on this basis. 6. All expansion devices shall be suitable insulated to prevent accident to personnel, but does not restrict the movement of the pipework 7. All expansion devices and natural expansion pipework systems shall be installed with 50 % cold draw of the total movement. 8. Anchor points shall be provided as shown on the drawings. The anchor shall be capable of resisting the maximum stresses that be applied. The contractor shall ensure that the structure, that the anchor is attached to, shall also be capable of withstanding the same stresses. 9. The method of anchoring the pipework to a secured point shall be : a. b. Mild Steel Cast Iron Welding Two wrought iron stirrups acting as clamps, bolted, with sufficient thread for tightening, to a secured cast iron chair A wide copper strap, undersized to give sufficient grip, when bolted together around the pipe shall be attached to the secured point.
c.
Copper
10. Care shall be taken when installing and positioning guides to ensure that the amount of free play in the pipeline is kept to an absolute minimum and that the resulting thrust of expansion is taken up in the designed manner. Means for Lubrication shall be provided where necessary . Guides for pipework over 50 mm shall be of the type incorporating re-inforced PTFE in order to allow reduced frictional resistance to movement. Guides and skid supports shall be provided in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations and shall form part of the submission. 3.02 A. VIBRATION CONTROL General 1. All vibrating equipment connected to the pipework system shall be isolated to eliminate transmission of noise and vibration. B. Noise Criteria
Month Year
Projects Name
1. Each piece of mechanical equipment selected shall be evaluated for quietness. Particular care shall be taken to evaluate acoustical performance as well as mechanical function. Sound pressure level within spaces shall not exceed the NC curves indicated.
Month Year
Projects Name
C.
Piping Insulations 1. All piping 65 mm and larger specified with vibration isolation shall have anti - vibration hangers . Static deflections as follows : a. First three hangers away from any spring isolated piece of equipment shall have hangers with same static deflection as equipment isolators. b. All others shall have 25 mm static deflection. 2. All piping 50 mm and smaller shall have isolators as follows : a. First three hangers away from any spring isolated piece of equipment shall have hangers with same static deflection as equipment isolators. b. For insulated piping outside equipment rooms isolators are not required. 3. Install temporary anchors as required to permit readjustment of springs in risers and to fix direction of pipe movement and final operating deflection of springs 4. Provide permanent limit stops to prevent excessive vertical motion in risers in event system is drained and to prevent excessive lateral motion.
3.03 A. B. C. 3.04 A.
ACCESSIBILITY Locate all equipment that must be serviced, operated , or maintained, in fully accessible positions. Minor deviations from the drawings may be allowed for better accessibility at written approval. Allow ample space for removal of parts that may require replacement or service in the future. Extend all grease fittings to an accessible location. MECHANICAL CUTTING AND PATCHING Contractor shall be responsible for all cutting, fitting, or patching of his work which may be required to make its several parts come together properly and fit it to receive, or be received, by work of other trades. Cutting of structural members shall not be done without written approval. Any cost caused by defective or ill-timed work shall be borne by the contractor, as determined by the Engineer. Contractor shall not endanger any work, persons, or construction by cutting, digging or otherwise. Place sleeves through all walls , floors, and ceilings during the initial construction where it is necessary for piping to go through. When this is not done, do all cutting and patching required for the installation of the work. Any damage caused to the building by this cutting and patching, shall be corrected at no additional cost. Patching of all openings for new installations and all openings resulting from the removal or relocation of any installations shall be done by craftsmen skilled in the particular trade effected, with materials of like type adjoining openings. END OF SECTION
B.
C.
D.
Month Year
Projects Name
SECTION 15100 VALVES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. B. SUMMARY Provide labor, materials, equipment and services, and perform operations required for complete installation of Valves and related work as indicated on the drawings and specified herein. Work Included: The work shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. Types of valves specified in this section include the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. Gate Valves. Check Valves. Globe Valves. Butterfly Valves. Valve Box Double regulating Valve Check Valves Float Valves Strainers Air Vents
2. Valves furnished as part of factory-fabricated equipment, are specified as part of equipment assembly in other Division 15 sections. C. Related Work Specified Elsewhere 1. Basic Mechanical Requirements - Section 15010. 2. Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods - Section 15050. 1.02 A. QUALITY ASSURANCE Materials and work shall conform to the latest edition of reference specifications, industry standards listed below and specified herein and to applicable codes and requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent. Tests: Test valves in accordance with the appropriate section of the specification describing each system. SUBMITTALS Submit the following in accordance with requirements specified under Submittals in Section 15010. 1. Product Data: Submit copies of manufacturer's latest published literature for materials and equipment specified herein for approval; obtain approval before ordering materials. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
B. 1.03 A.
Month Year
Projects Name
A.
Exercise proper care in the handling of work so as not to injure the finished surfaces, and take proper precautions to protect the work from damage after it is in place. PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 A. B. C. D. E. F. 2.02 A.
GENERAL Valve ratings shall exceed respective system operating pressures. All valves shall be line size, except control valves or calibrated orifice flow indicating valves, which shall be sized to achieve proper flow control and mid-range flow readings, respectively. Valves and specialties specified in this Section are of a general nature and are appropriate for most systems. For special use valves and specialties refer to the individual system sections. All cast iron valve bodies used for water service shall be internally and externally epoxy resin coated. Control and regulating valves shall be of the globe type. All valves must be rated for minimum of 16 bars at 192C fluid temperature. GATE VALVES For Water Use : 1. Valves up to 50 mm size shall have ASTM B62 bronze bodies with PN20 pressure rating. They shall have threaded inlet and outlet connection and shall have the capability of being repacked while under pressure. 2. Valves for 65 mm size and larger shall be non rising stem, inside screw and yoke type with cast iron body and bronze trim. Cast iron shall conform to ASTM A126, Class B. Valve shall have solid wedge bronze disc, steel hand wheel, and flanged inlet and outlet. Valve shall be rated at PN 16 water working pressure and have the capability of being repacked while under pressure. 3. The rubber on wedges and in sealing rings etc. shall be of a synthetic quality which can withstand storage for at least five years and shall be suitable for the water qualities specified PN16. 4. Valves installed on pressure UPVC & CPVC pipes shall be of PVC
Month Year
Projects Name
2.03 GLOBE VALVES A. For Water Use 1. Generally the valves shall be suitable for water at a working pressure of PN20. 2. Valves for 50 mm size and smaller shall be of the screwed in bonnet type with a renewable disc and threaded ANSI B2.1. The body and bonnet shall be bronze to ASTM B62. The disk shall be a composition plug type. The gland to be capable of being repacked while under normal pressure. 3. Valves for 65 mm size and larger shall be outside screw with integral yoke, bolted bonnet, rising stem with plug type disc, and flanged to ANSI B16.5. The body and bonnet shall be cast iron conforming to ASTM A126 Class B. The fully guided disc shall be of bronze. The replaceable seat shall be of bronze. The stem shall be of manganese bronze and the packing in the gland shall be renewable and suitable for the application. 2.04 A. CHECK VALVES: For Water Use 1. Valves for 50 mm size and smaller shall be horizontal swing check, Y - pattern with a bronze body and trim. Valve shall have bronze disc, threaded inlet and outlet, and shall be rated for PN20 water working pressure 2. Valves for 65 mm size and larger shall be horizontal swing check type, non-slam design having iron body and bronze for brass trim. Valve shall have bronze or brass disc, and flanged inlet and outlet and shall be rated for PN16 water working pressure. 2.05 A. BALL VALVES : Valves shall be bronze ball type with threaded ends, Teflon stem packing seals, Teflon seats, T handle for 25 mm and smaller, insulated operating lever for 30 mm and larger, and blowout proof silicone bronze stem. Valves shall be rated for PN25. BUTTERFLY VALVES : Valves shall be designed for minimum of 0.68 MPa differential pressure with the down stream flange removed through 300 mm size. Factory test data of differential pressure rating is required. Valves shall have cast iron body, conforming to ASTM A126 Class B body, tin bronze disc, in accordance with ASTM B30 copper alloy and EPDM seals. Shafts design shall be 416 stainless steel. All valves shall have extended necks for a minimum of 50 mm insulation. Valves 63 mm through 150 mm shall be provided with lever operators and memory stop. Valves 200 mm and larger shall be driven by a worm gear operator or screw driven operator with position indicator. Operators shall be fully enclosed in cast iron housing, be watertight, and require no more than 150 N rim pull. Operators shall be designed to withstand, without damage, an input torque of 1.3 KN. Valves shall be rated for PN16 .
2.06 A.
Month Year
Projects Name
2.07
VALVES BOXES Supply and install, wherever shown on the drawings and as specified herein, all valve boxes. Size and number of valves in each valve box shall be as shown on drawings. Each valve box shall be of masonry wall construction or metaic wall construction encased within masonry. Each valve box shall conform with the following requirements: abcdDepth shall conform with site conditions and pipe inverts. Valve boxes located outside shall provide a minimum cover of 30cms over pipes passing through. Indoor valve boxes shall have a steel cover matching space internal finish. Outdoor valves boxes shall be provided with a heavy duty cast iron cover, lockable.
2.08
PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES (PRV) Pressure reducing and regulating valves shall be of the self-contained, direct acting, spring loaded, diaphragm bars type, suitable for inlet pressure of up to 21 bars for steam pressure reducing station refer to section 15602. PRV shall be capable of maintaining same outgoing pressure irrespective of fluctuation of inlet pressure. PRV shall be fitted with 2 pressure gauges. The valves shall be of a design which permits the complete replacement or inspection of any part without removal of the valve body from the pipe. The valve body shall be of bronze, with threaded ends. The valve trim shall be of bronze and all trim in direct contact with water shall be of bronze or stainless steel. The valve seat shall be of the removable type and shall be of stainless steel. The diaphragm shall be of synthetic rubber. The valve shall be provided from the factory with the correct spring for the outlet pressure range specified. The valve shall be provided with a means for adjusting the outlet pressure within the range of the spring. The valve shall be suitable for installation in any position. Pressure reducing and regulating valves shall be as Manufactured by HONEYWELL, WILKINGS, BRAUKMANN, WATTS or any approved equal.
2.09
DOUBLE REGULATING VALVES Double regulating valve shall be of the Y-pattern bronze globe valves for 50 mm and below and cast iron for 65 mm and above. It shall have a characterized throttling disk with sufficient authority to regulate flow in a circuit incorporating a Flow Measurement Valve. The valves shall have a unique device which enables the disk to be locked in position to control flow at a pre-determined rate. An Allen key (3mm) shall be supplied for lock adjustment. Tight closure of the valve shall be assured by use of a PTFE disc insert. The valves shall be rendered 'tamper proof'. An in-built drain valve shall be used for draining, back filling or air venting. Valves up to 50 mm diameter shall be PN20 and for valves 65 mm and above to be PN16.
2.10
FLANGES AND GASKETS
Month Year
Projects Name
Flanges shall be class 300 flat faced forged carbon steel, weld neck to ANSI B16.5. Gaskets shall be non asbestos to ANSI B16.21 and dimensions to suit ANSI B16.5 class 300, flat faced compressed sheeting 1.6 mm thick. Stud bolts shall be to ASTM A193 grade B7, threaded full length complete with 2 nuts ASTM A194 grade 2 H. Bolts & nuts to be galvanized steel. 2.11 TEMPERATURE AND PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE 2.12 A. B. C. D. This valve shall be used on domestic hot water lines wherever applicable. Temperature and pressure relief valve shall be self-closing type with test lever and screwed connections. Valve shall be suitable for a pressure of 75 to 150 psi (520 to 1030 Kpa) service and shall be supplied with temperature relief set at 210 oF (100 oC). Valve shall be AGA and ASME rated and similar to watts Regulator Co. or approved equal.
BACK FLOW PREVENTERS Provide backflow preventers as indicated, of the reduced pressure principle type, consisting of assembly including shutoff valves on inlet and outlet, and strainer on inlet. Backflow preventers to include test cocks and pressure- differential relief valve located between two positive seating check valves. Construct backflow preventers in accordance with ASSE Standard 1013. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide backflow preventers of one of the following manufacturers, or approved equal: JOSAM ZURN ITT Lawler, Fluid Handling Div. Watts Regulator Co.
Month Year
Projects Name
2.13
SECTION VALVES AND SPECIALTIES A. Combined Pressure/Temperature Relief Valves: diaphragm operated, cast-iron or brass body valve, with low inlet pressure check valve, inlet strainer removable without system shut-down, and non-corrosive valve seat and stem. Select valve size, capacity, and operating pressure to suit system. Valve shall be factory-set at operating pressure and have the capability for field adjustment. Safety relief valve designed, manufactured, tested, and labeled in accordance with the requirements of Section IV of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Valve body shall be cast-iron, with all wetted internal working parts made of brass and rubber, 1.5 MPa working pressure and 121 C maximum operating temperature. Select valve to suit actual system pressure and kCal capacity. Provide with fast fill feature for filling hydronic system.
B.
2.14
ORIFICE FLOW MEASURING PLATES Orifice flow measuring plated shall be supplied and installed in the pipelines in the positions where required and advised by the Engineer for flow measurement included in the unit rate of pipe run . Plates to be of the same pressure rating as valves installed on the line. The orifice plates shall be complete with carrier ring containing upstream and downstream tappings drilled through the ring to communicate with the upstream and downstream side of the orifice. The orifice plate shall be constructed from stainless steel to a thickness sufficient to prevent distortion by the differential pressure across it. The orifice plate shall be located in the pipeline such that there is no valve head or any other restriction which could cause abnormal flow conditions for at least 12 pipe diameters upstream and 6 pipe diameters downstream of the plate. The carrier shall be suitable for installation between flanges suitable for the system in which they are installed. The hydraulic pressure drops across the orifices shall not exceed the figures given on the schematic drawings.
2.15
WATER STRAINERS Strainers shall be located at inlets to control valve arrangements and pump sets and generally as detailed on the drawings. The strainer shall be simplex or duplex as indicated on the drawings. Each strainer shall be provided complete with a stainless steel screen AISI 304 as follows: Application In pipework 15 mm to 50mm nominal bore on inlets to all control valves In pipework 65 mm to 100 m nominal bore In pipework 125 mm nominal bore and above. Cold water Applications, HWS and LTHW: Perforation Size mm 0.8 1.2 1.6
Month Year
Projects Name
Strainers up to 50 mm shall be Y type of bronze or gunmetal construction in PN25, accordance with ASTM B62. Strainers over 50 mm shall be of cast iron construction PN16 to ASTM 126 with flanged connections to the same minimum rating as a pipelines in which they are installed. Units up to 150 mm shall be provided with a yoke closure or similar quick opening cover. Over 150 mm units shall have bolt down covers and each cover provided with a lift eye. 2.16 AUTOMATIC AIR VENT Automatic air vents shall b e installed in accessible positions and shall be of aluminum bronze construction with brass spindle nickel alloy valve and seat, brass float and integral lockshield isolating valve. Operating pressure PN16 and temperature up to 120 in all cases the air vent shall be preceded by a lockshield pattern stop valve and the discharge from the air vent shall be 10 mm copper pipe. Automatic air vents shall be provided on each service with the exception of HTHW and MTHW ,at the highest point of the service within each plant area and on each vertical distribution riser. Discharge pipe shall be collected over a covered tundish and the outlet piped to the nearest drain gully. Discharge pipes shall be labeled according to the service 2.17 EXPANSION DEVICES Expansion devices on copper pipework shall be manufactured with convolutions of single wall 18/8T1 stainless steel, argon arc welded to a stainless steel ring with a M.S. backing flange. All internal parts in contact with the fluid shall be stainless steel and the ends shall be flanged to BS 4504. Expansion devices on steel pipework size 50 mm and below shall be manufactured with convolution of single wall 18/18T1 stainless steel, argon arc welded to heavyweight mild steel end flanged to BS4504. Expansion devices on steel pipework size 65 mm and above shall be manufactured with convolutions of heavy wall hot formed Cr-Mo steel welded to mild steel end flanged to BS 4504. All expansion devices shall be provided with internal sleeves. External sleeves shall be provided on devices in plant-rooms and underground ducts. Pressure rating of expansion devices shall be as per valves and accessories installed on line. Angular compensators shall be restrained longitudinally by means of hinged tie bars, the hinges shall be located at the center of movement of the allow single axis of movement. Articulated bellows shall be of the fully articulated type with belows used in sets of two with intermediate pipe of mild steel to BS 6129 . The bellows shall be restrained lengthwise with ball ended tie bars allowing off set movements in all directions at right angles to the axis. Each Gimbal shall have a double linked tie bar system to enable one end of the unit to take an angular movement in any direction in relation to the other end. Gimbal units shall be used in sets of two to provide the necessary movement. The Specialist Manufacturer shall advise the required length of interconnecting pipework based on the pipework layout and the movement required. Before finalizing his working drawings the Contractor shall consult with and take advice from the Specialist Manufacturer to confirm that the allowance for expansion made in the contractors engineering drawings is compatible with the final selection of expansion devices. _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-64
Month Year
Projects Name
The Contractor shall also allow in his tender for all expenses incurred by the specialist manufacturer in attending site to inspect and monitor the installations during the construction stage and to ensure all expansion joints are installed in an acceptable manner before operation of the systems commence. 2.18 FLEXIBLE PIPEWORK CONNECTIONS On pipework connections to heating (excluding pipeline pumps here natural attenuation of noise and vibration is adequate) and hot water pumps , E.P.D.M. synthetic rubber connectors shall be installed. The connectors shall be corrosion protected steel wire reinforced with mild steel backing flanges behind rubber raised faces. On chilled water, cold water services and pump chillers E.P.D.M. synthetic rubber connectors shall be installed. The connectors shall be nylon cord reinforced with mild steel backing flanges behind raised faces. All synthetic rubber connectors shall be restrained with tie bars. The pipework installations shall be electrically continuous up to and including the plant and equipment. The contractor shall provide and install earth bonding across all flexible joints including those on plant and equipment. The Contractor shall fit these items so that they are readily accessible. They shall not be concealed. 2.19 AUTOMATIC FILTERS Automatic filters shall be RainBird Model AF 150-LSS with 1 Y filter or approved equal. Filters shall have automatic backwash. 2.20 WATER HAMMER ARRESTOR Supply and install water hammer arrestors where shown on drawings. Each water hammer arrestor shall be complete as specified herein: a. Stainless steel shell and adapter. b. Elastomer bellow. c. Hydraulic displacement fluid. d. Pressurized insert gas pneumatic displacement chamber. e. 15 mm NPT threaded connection f. Isolating ball valve. 2.21 FLOAT VALVES Float valves shall be of all bronze construction including levers and arms, with PVC float and suitable for a cold water working pressure of 10 bars. Float valves shall have screwed inlets. Float valves shall be of the full bore, equilibrium ball type, designed to close tight against maximum pressure when half submerged. They shall have renewable synthetic rubber valve discs and balancing piston buckets. APPROVED MANUFACTURERS JOSAM ( USA ) ZURN ( USA) Or approved equal _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-65
Month Year
Projects Name
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 A. GENERAL Floor plans and flow diagrams are intended to be complimentary since not all valves can be shown on the floor plans. In general, flow diagrams and details show valving arrangement and floor plans show locations when possible. All water valves which regulate flow shall be globe, ball or butterfly type and valves that are either open or closed shall be gate, ball or butterfly type. Steam valves for all purposes shall be globe type and for condensate gate type . For valves for use on medical and non-medical gases, air and vacuum systems refer to Section 15310. Provide shut-off valves in each supply branch from mains and at each supply connection to equipment. Provide a balance valve at each return branch to mains at each return connection from equipment, and in the bypass line of a three-way control valve.
B.
C.
END OF SECTION
Month Year
Projects Name
PUMPS SECTION 15140 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. E. F. 1.02 A. B. C. D. RELATED WORK Section 15050 : Section 15200 : Section 15401 : Section 15530 : Section 15602 : Section 15606 : Section 15802 : Section 15803 : Section 15900 : Section 15991 : Basic Materials and Methods. Noise, Vibration & Seismic Controls Potable Water Piping System. Fire Protection System. Steam Generation System. Oil Storage Tanks and Piping. Heating System. Cooling System. Instrumentation Testing and Commissioning.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION This section covers the manufacture and supply of various pumps required for the mechanical services. Fire pump fabrication, installation, and testing shall be in conformance with latest NFPA Standards. Centrifugal, rotary, and reciprocating pump fabrication, installation, and testing shall be in conformance with HIE.35.01, E.37.01, and E.39.01 respectively. The selection of pump type and pump drive shall be based on each specific application requirements. Wherever possible, vertical pump drive shall be used and shall be installed above maximum anticipated water level in order to protect it from flooding and to facilitate maintenance. Pump drivers shall be selected to be non- overloading over the whole range of the Q-TDH curves, considering temperature variation of the fluid being pumped. Pump Q-TDH curve shall be progressively dropping from shut-off head to runout. It shall be such that it provides stable operation for the pump when operating at any point on the curve. Shut - off head shall approximately be 25 to 35 percent above the rated head. Pumps shall be capable of parallel operation. Constant speed pumps shall have the first critical speed at 25% below, or above, the running speed. Variable speed pumps shall have the first critical speed at 25 % above the maximum speed. REFERENCES
E.
F. G. 1.03
A. Reference Standards _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-67
Month Year
Projects Name
The following codes and standards are intended to provide an acceptable level of quality for materials and products. The Contractor may propose alternative codes and standards provided they give an equivalent degree of quality as the referenced codes and standards and are submitted for review and approval in advance of their use. 1. American National Standards Institute ( ANSI) : a. ANSI B15.1 Safety standards for transmission apparatus. mechanical power
2. American Society for Testing and Materials ( ASTM ): a. b. c. d. e. A36 A48 A53 A108 A120 Structural Steel. Gray Iron Castings Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot Dipped Zinc-Coated, Welded or Seamless. Steal Bars, Carbon, Cold Finished, Standard Quality. Pipe Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized), Welded and Seamless for Ordinary Uses. Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Bars and Shapes. Gray Castings for Pressure Containing Parts for Temperatures up to 650F ( 345C). Corrosion -Resistant, Iron-Chromium, IronChromium-Nickel, and Nickel-Base Alloy Castings for General Application. Ferritic Ductile Iron Pressure Retaining Castings for Use at Elevated Temperatures. Ductile Iron Castings. Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings. Aluminum-Bronze Sand Casting. Copper Alloy Sand Casting for General Application.
f.
A276
g. h.
A278 A296
j. k. l. m. n.
A395 A536 B62 B148 B584
3. American Water Works Association ( AWWA ): a. E101 Vertical Tubing Pumps - Line shaft and submersible.
Month Year
Projects Name
4. National Fire Protection Association ( NFPA ): a. 20 Centrifugal Fire Pumps.
5. Hydraulic Institute ( HI ): a. b. c. E.35.01 E.37.01 E.39.01 Centrifugal Pumps. Rotary Pumps. Reciprocating Pumps.
6. International Organization for Standardization ( ISO): a. Refer to ISO 2585.
7. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration & Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE ). 8. American Petroleum Institute: a. 9. MEMA 10. NEC 1.04 A. B. SUBMITTALS Manufacturer's Data: Submit manufacturer's data on pumps, including but not limited to, pump characteristics and performance curves. Pump Characteristics Curves: 1. Submit for each pump specified, copies of the characteristic curves of the proposed pump. Such curves shall be plotted on 216 mm by 276mm graph paper. For each pump (or pumping unit where overall efficiency is specified) the following characteristic curves shall be shown as ordinates plotted against the rate of flow of the pump: Standard API 610.
Month Year
Projects Name
a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) i) j) k)
Total Dynamic Head. Pump Efficiency. Brake Horsepower. Net Positive Suction Head. Power Input to Electric Drive Motor. Overall Efficiency of Pumping Unit. Total Inertia. Tests Reports Certificates of Approvals. Operation & Maintenance Data. Recommended Spare List
2. Indicate the limits of the range of rate of flow at which the pump can successfully operate on such curve when the operable range differs from the complete range shown. Approval of the characteristic pump curve shall in no way be construed to be permissive to proceed with the manufacture of the pump. Upon receipt of an approved pump curve, the Contractor shall submit, if he has not previously done so, all other drawings, material lists and other information specified, requested and/or necessary to coordinate the pumping installation with the balance of the work and to show complete compliance with all details of the Contract Documents. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit drawings and information necessary for final design of foundations, structural supports, connected piping and valves, pump drip and drainage piping, electrical connections, starting and protective equipment and auxiliary equipment. 2. Submit for all pumping units, a dimensioned and scaled assembly outline drawing or drawings of the complete pump, drive and all associated equipment furnished. Such drawing or drawings shall show plan, elevation and any other view or section requested. 3. For all pumping units a scaled cross-sectional drawing of the assembled pump showing full details and materials of construction shall be submitted for approval. For pumping units powered by motors rated at 20 horsepower or less, catalog cuts may be submitted to supplement the outline and cross furnished with steel base plates, sub-bases and similar components, detailed dimensioned drawings giving full information thereon shall be submitted for approval. Steel components shall be at least 9.5 mm thick and no undrained pockets will be permitted. 1.05 A. B. C. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Deliver all hardware in manufacturers original protective packaging. Inspect hardware at time of delivery for shipment damage and for compliance with specification. When damaged equipment or hardware that will require repair or replacement, or equipment that does not comply with Specification is found, immediate action shall be taken to repair or replace equipment, so that the projects performance and schedules are not impaired. Store hardware as recommended by manufacturer to prevent damage and deterioration. QUALITY ASSURANCE
D. 1.06
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of general use centrifugal pumps with _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-70
Month Year
Projects Name
characteristics, pipe sizes and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. Electrical Standards: Provide electric motors and products which have been listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories and comply with National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) standards. Certification, Pump Performance, Provide pumps whose performance under specified conditions, is certified by the manufacturer. Contractor to submit certificate of origin with shipment certificate to the engineer. All pumps shall be assembled in country of origin. Local assembly is not acceptable. All pumping units shall be designed and built for twenty-four hour continuous service at any and all points within the specified range of operation, without overheating, without cavitation, without excessive vibration or strain and requiring only that degree of maintenance generally accepted as normal for the specific type of pump required. All parts and components of all pumping units shall be designed and built for interchange ability so that replacement parts may be installed without any additional fitting or machining. Upon request, or if hereafter specified, the manufacturer shall submit evidence that the tolerances and finishes on the detail drawings so permit, and the manufacturer's shop is equipped with the necessary machinery, jigs, fixtures and gauges to assure such interchange ability. Failure to successfully comply with the requirements of the previous paragraphs will constitute grounds for disqualification of the pump manufacturer. Poor performance of similar pumping equipment now in operation under the specified conditions of service and pump rating constitute grounds for disqualification of the pump manufacturer, supplier or both, unless such poor performance has been corrected. APPROVED MANUFACTURER AURORA Pumps PEERLESS Pumps WORTHINGTON RITZ Pumps KSB Pumps PULLEN Pumps FLYGT Pumps Or approved equal (USA) (USA) (USA) ( Germany ) ( Germany ) ( UK ) ( Sweden )
C.
D. E.
F.
1.07
Month Year
Projects Name
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 A. MATERIALS General 1. All goods and products covered by these specifications shall be factory tested and assembled and not locally assembled. 2. Pumps shall be made of materials meeting specific application requirements, and in accordance with specifications detailed below. B. Pump casing shall be made of any one of the following materials and as described in each pump specifications. 1. Gray iron casting conforming to ASTM A48 or A278. Class of castings shall be as specified in the documents. 2. Composition bronze or ounce metal casting conforming to ASTM B62. 3. Stainless steel casting conforming to ASTM A296. 4. Ferritic Ductile Iron Casting conforming to ASTM A395. C. Pump shaft shall be made of either of the following materials as described in each pump. 1. Stainless steel conforming to ASTM A276, Type 316 L. D. Impeller and impeller seal ring shall be made of any one of the following materials and as described in each pump specifications. 1. Gray iron casting conforming to ASTM A48 or A278. 2. Bronze casting conforming to ASTM B584 or B184. 3. Stainless steel casting conforming to ASTM or A296. E. F. Tubing and pipe shall conform to ASTM A53 or A120, and in any case, shall be suitable for the service under consideration. Base plate shall be made of either of the following materials and as described in each pump specifications. 1. Gray iron casting conforming to ASTM A48. 2. Structural steel conforming to ASTM A36. G. H. J. Commercial prelubricated, or water, grease, or oil-lubricated bearings shall be used according to application requirements. Mechanical or packing seals suitable for specific application shall be used.
All other pump parts shall be made from material compatible with pumps basic material and suitable for the liquid being pumped. _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-72
Month Year
Projects Name
K.
The pumps shall be equipped with drains and vents, with copper pipes for draining and aerating the pumps to the floor drain. Waste oil shall be conducted to a waste oil collector located on the base plate. The suction and discharge flanges for the pumps shall comply with ANSI B16-5. The electric motors shall, unless otherwise stated, be squirrel cage induction type, as specified generally in Section 16150 but with Class F insulation and shall be suitably rated for the duty as shown in the schedules. The pumps shall, unless otherwise stated, be suitable for temperatures up to 100C and a working pressure up to 1.0 MPa in an ambient of 50C. FABRICATION All like parts of same type pumps fabricated by the same manufacturer shall be interchangeable. Whenever possible the pumps shall be manufactured such that it shall be possible to disassemble the rotor assembly with minimum disassembly of other parts such as suction and discharge nozzles, bearing supports, etc. being left in place. All castings shall be clean without defect. All foundry and machine work shall be in accordance with good practice for the class of work involved . All parts shall conform to the required dimensions and shall be free from defects that will prevent proper functioning of the pump. Assembly of parts shall be well fitted and smoothly operating. All internal parts, such as impeller, requiring surface treatment shall be sprayed with a primer in accordance with pump manufacturers standards practice. Pump sets shall be assembled as completely as possible as a unit including base plate, driver, couplings and guards, lubrication, seal flush, etc. by the supplier, as the requirement allows. Seal flush systems shall be equipped with appropriate controls, strainers and filters as recommended by the manufacturer. Pump exterior shall be sprayed with a primer and shall be painted to meet specific application requirements in accordance with pump manufacturers standard practice.
L. M.
N. 2.02 A. B.
C. D. E. F. G. H.
J.
Month Year
Projects Name
2.03 A.
WATER PUMPS General: Provide electric motor driven, volute type centrifugal pumps as indicated on drawings. Equip with insulated, quiet, TEFC, when installed outside, or drip proof, for indoor installation, ball bearing type motor of rotation speed, hp rating and power characteristics indicated; factory align and couple motor to pump. Provide pumps rated for capacities, pressures and suction/discharge heads as shown on drawings, with flanged pipe connections, with dynamically balanced enclosed type impellers locked to pump shafts and shall be rated for 120 oC water temperature and shall be close-coupled or with flexible coupling as indicated on drawings. Domestic Booster pumps shall be centrifugal vertical type multi stage pump complete with control panel. Chilled water pumps shall be centrifugal, split case type, single stage, horizontal, and as specified.. The pumps shall be of cast iron bronze fitted construction. The volute and bearing brackets are to be cast iron the impeller of bronze and the pump shaft of stainless steel. The pumps shall employ a mechanical seal, with a carbon seal ring and ceramic seat. The motor shall be resilient mounted equipped with oil lubricated journal bearings or as indicated on the drawings.
B.
Pump characteristics: The Contractor shall provide pumps according to the capacities and schedules as shown on drawings. The pump shut-off pressure shall not be less than 25% higher than the design load. The speed shall not exceed 1450 RPM unless otherwise specified on drawings. Equip pumps with sleeve bearings and forcefeed lubrication systems, and protect pump shafts internally with non-ferrous sleeves, Provide bearing bracket assemblies of the type which can be removed without disturbing piping or motors. All pumps shall be connected to building control system as indicated under electrical section. END SUCTION CENTRIFUGAL PUMP Type: horizontal, base mounted, end suction, single stage, centrifugal type, directly connected to motor through a heavy duty flexible coupling, with heavy gauge coupling guard. Base: pump and motor to be mounted on common steel base adequately reinforced against deflection, with drip rim, drain tapping, bolt holes and grouting hole. Bearings: pump rotating element to be supported by two heavy duty grease lubricated ball bearings mounted in heavy iron frame with adequate supports to base for maximum rigidity. Pump casing: high tensile strength close grain cast iron with smooth waterways, register fitted and bolted to bearing frame for permanent alignment, with bronze wear rings and tapped and plugged bottom drain and top vent connections. Impeller: bronze, enclosed type, fitted to shaft with key and locked in place. Shaft: one piece stainless steel, sized to carry axial and radial thrust with minimum deflection. Mechanical seal: Ni-resist face, carbon washer and stainless steel metal parts. Electric motor: totally enclosed, fan cooled, squirrel cage, induction type, with permanently lubricated and sealed ball bearings.
C.
D. 2.04
Month Year
Projects Name
Manufacturers to be proposed by Tenderer as part of his Tender, in all cases to be approved by Consultant. 2.05 IN-LINE CIRCULATORS Description: In-line, centrifugal, single-stage, bronze-fitted, split case design; rated for 860kPa minimum working pressure and a continuous water temperature of 107C include the following: 1. Casing: cast iron, with threaded companion flanges for piping connections smaller than 65mm and threaded gate tappings at inlet and outlet connections. a. Connection Option: Include unions, instead of threaded companion flanges, at connections for casings that are not available with threaded companion flanges. 2. Impeller: ASTM B584, cast bronze, statically and dynamically balanced, closed, overhung, single suction, and keyed to shaft. 3. Shaft and Sleeve: stainless steel shaft with oil-lubricated copper sleeve. 4. Seals: mechanical DUNA-N type. Include carbon-steel rotating ring, stainless steel spring, ceramic seat, and flexible bellows and gasket. 5. Pump bearings: Oil lubricated, bronze journal and thrust type. 6. Motor bearings: Oil lubricated, sleeve type. 7. Coupling: flexible, capable of absorbing torsional vibration and shaft misalignment. 8. Motor: resiliently mounted to pump casing. 9. Manufacturers to be proposed by Tenderer as part of his Tender, in all cases to be approved by Consultant. 2.06 VERTICAL MULTI STAGE PUMP General
Supply and install wherever shown on the Drawings vertical multi stage centrifugal pumps of capacities as indicated in the capacity schedule and/or shown on the Drawings. Each pump shall be of the type specified and shall be directly coupled to an electric motor. Pump casing shall be of stainless steel, with smooth water ways and fitted with stainless steel wear ring. Impeller shall be stainless steel, enclosed, accurately machined and statically and dynamically balanced. Shaft shall be one piece stainless steel with stainless steel sleeve of ample size to carry any axial and radial thrust. Pump shall have mechanical shaft seal of extra hard carbon and ceramic type. Pump ball bearings shall be of ample size to withstand all axial and radial thrust. Each pump, for water supply application, shall be complete with the following; Electric control panel complete with circuit breakers, starters, automatic electric alternators, indicating lights and selector switches. Panel shall be made of sheet steel of dust and rust proof type with lockable door. Panel to be from the same pump manufacturer. Float switches, installed in both domestic water reservoirs, and control cables between the _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-75
Month Year
Projects Name
float switches and the electric control panel. Pump speed shall be as shown in the pump schedule. Method of Control of Pumps used for Water Supply application

One pump shall act as a standby (as indicated in the pump schedule) A low water level float switch installed in the lower water tank shall prevent either of the pumps to run dry if the lower tank is empty. A float switch installed in the roof water tank with two predetermined levels. The high level when reached shall stop the pump automatically and the low level when reached shall start the pump automatically. An electric alternator shall alternate the duty and standby pumps on every cycle. In case of failure of duty pump to start, the standby shall be automatically started.
2.07
SUBMERSIBLE SEWAGE SUMP PUMPS Supply and install all sewage sump pumps wherever shown on the drawings and as specified herein. Sump pumps shall be submersible direct connected with a guide rail system, duplex assembly complete as specified in the following clauses: 1. Pumps Each pump shall be of the non-clog, centrifugal, submersible, type designed for pumping raw sewage suitable for continue operation and shall be suitable to transfer water at 120C complete with: a. Stainless steel casing. b. Open channel type bronze non-clog impeller able to pass solids up to 75mm diameter (3"). c. Stainless steel shaft (316). d. Mechanical seal. e. Water cooled, totally enclosed electric motor, rated for continuous duty. Motor speed shall not exceed 2900 rpm. Motor to have thermal overload protection and moisture sensing probes, pump and motor bearings shall be heavy duty, permanently lubricated and sealed ball bearings guaranteed for a minimum of 100,000 hours continuous operation. Include a 3 conductor waterproof power cable of length required, but not less than 6m with a grounding plug and cable sealing assembly for connecting at pump. f. Oil casing.
g. Cables and floats fixing frame. h. One check valve and one gate valve at pump outlet. _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-76
Month Year
Projects Name
j.
Air tight access cover and frame.
k. Level regulators of the pear-shaped type. l. Guide rail with stainless steel chain.
Sump pumps shall be installed in a concrete pit to be constructed by the Concretor with checker plate cover over each pump. The Contractor shall coordinate his piping with the Concretor and shall install all pipes connected to the sumps pit in accordance with the layouts shown on the drawings. It shall be his responsibility to coordinate and determine pipes inverts and locations of pipe connections to the pit. Control panel to be factory tested and assembled. 2. Controls An automatic operating and control panel shall be provided for sump pumps operation. Pumps shall be monitored by the BMS system. Control voltage not to exceed 24 Volts. The panel shall be of light alloy construction, perfectly sealed against dust and water and shall house pumps starters, breakers, floats, relays, interlocks, pilot lights, cables, wires, etc,... to obtain to following results: a. At low water level in the collecting pit, controls shall be inoperative. b. When water level rises to the first normal level in the collecting pit, the lead pump shall start. c. When water level rises to the second normal level in the collecting pit, the second pump shall start. d. When water level drops to the first level, the last pump to start shall stop. The first pump shall keep on running until water level drops to the low water level setting. e. An automatic alternating relay shall alternate pumps lead role after each cycle. f. Should the water level rise to the alarm preset level or drop to the alarm preset low level, controls shall act to operate an alarm bell which shall remain in operation until put off manually. Alarm shall be indicated on the central alarm panel and BMS. Level switches shall be of the heavy duty sealed mercury tube type condensate complete with twin core PVC insulated cable and shall be of a type intended for use with domestic sewage. 3. Capacity Capacity of each sump pump shall be as shown on the drawings. 2.08 MAIN FIRE PUMPS Supply and install main fire pump wherever shown on drawings and as specified herein. a. Type: Horizontal end suction, centrifugal, pump directly coupled to an electric motor through heavy duty flexible coupling. Pump and motor shall be mounted on steel base plate with drip rim, drain tapping, bolt holes and grouting hole. Pumps shall be factory assembled and tested.
Month Year
Projects Name
b. c.
Standard: pump and accessories is to be listed Under Writers Laboratories and meet requirements of NFPA pamplet No. 20, FM approved. Capacity and Pressure to be as shown on the drawings. Pump is to deliver not less than 150% of rated capacity at pressure not less than 65% of rated pressure. Shut-off pressure is not to exceed 120% of rated pressure. Unit to be complete with pump, driver, controller and accessories from factory. Casing: cast iron, minimum tensile strength 35000 psi, designed for working pressure of 17kg/cm2 and hydrostatically tested at factory to not less than 17kg/cm2. Impeller to be vacuum cast bronze, enclosed type, dynamically balanced, keyed to shaft and held in place with bronze threaded shaft sleeve. Shaft sleeves: to extend entire length of seal boxes to protect shaft and key locked and threaded to tighten with rotation of shaft. Teflon gaskets to be provided between impeller hub and shaft sleeves to protect pump shaft. Bearings: pump rotating element to be supported by two heavy duty, grease lubricated ball bearings mounted in machined moisture proof and dust proof cast iron housing and bolted to pump casing with register fits to ensure permanent alignment. Grease seals and water slingers to be provided to protect bearings from contamination. Bearing housings to be designed to flush lubricant through bearing. Easily accessible grease fittings to be provided for positive bearing lubrication. Shaft to be high strength steel accurately machined to give true running rotating element. Mechanical seals: carbon washer, Ni-resist face and stainless steel parts. Electric motor: totally enclosed, fan cooled, squirrel cage, induction type with permanently lubricated and sealed ball bearings. Motor speed is not to exceed 2900 rpm. Accessories: pump to be supplied complete with the following: Lifting lugs Coupling guard Tapped holes in suction and discharge flanges for pressure gauge connections. Suction and discharge pressure gauges, with minimum 100 mm reading in psi and kg/cm2 and having range equal to twice rated design working pressure of pump and complete with gauge valves, eccentric tapered reducer at suction inlet, eccentric tapered reducer (increaser) at discharge outlet, Relief valve, factory set to open at pressure slightly greater than rated design working pressure of pump, with capacity to pass all water discharged by pump without developing excessive pressure on system. Casing relief valve sized to prevent overheating of pump when operating at shut-off, factory set to open just higher than rated design working pressure of pump and lower than shut-off discharge pressure
d. e. f. g.
h.
i. j. k. l.
Automatic air release valve on casing vent, _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-78
Month Year
Projects Name
Test header manifold to include bronze or cast-iron exposed type valve header with nozzle outlets and round brass escutcheon plate, hose valves straight way pattern bronze, ball drip valve. m. Fire Pump Controller Fire pump controller shall be FM approved and UL listed specifically for electric-motordriven fire pump service, and shall meet the requirements of NFPA 20. It shall be a combination Fire Pump Controller and Power Transfer Switch. Each pump shall have its own controller and transfer switch. The fire pump controller shall include the following components, all other devices necessary for the proper operation of the controller and compliance with NFPA20 shall be provided: - Voltage Surge Arrester - Isolating Switch (with operating handle outside the panel) - Circuit Breaker (with operating handle outside the panel) The isolating switch and the circuit breaker shall be interlocked such that the isolating switch can neither be opened nor closed while the circuit breaker is closed. - Locked Rotor Over Current Protection - Motor Contactors for Wye-Delta Starting - Visible Indicators of the following: - Power Available - Phase Reversal - Pump Running - Pump Failed To Start - Voltage Free Contacts (one NO & one NC) for indicating the following: - Loss of any phase at the terminals of the motor contactor - Pump Running - Phase Reversal - Pump Failed To Start - Loss Of Control Power - Pressure Switch - Second Pressure Switch (with a NO/NC contacts for remote indication of drop of pressure below the starting pressure) - Pressure Recorder - Manual Start/Stop Push Buttons - Minimum Running Period Timer - Sequential Start Timer (to prevent the pumps from starting simultaneously) - Remote Start Circuit - Motor Current & Voltage Readout (on all three phases) - Control Circuit Transformer (fed from two electric power phases feeding the fire pump) Wye-Delta starting shall be of the closed transition type to prevent current surges and disturbances to be fed back to the main power source. The controller shall incorporate a mechanical and electrical interlock to prevent the Wye connecting contactor to be energized at the same time as the Delta contactor. The power transfer switch shall be electrically operated and mechanically held. It should _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-79
Month Year
Projects Name
be rated not less than 115 percent of the motor full-load current and also suitable for switching the locked rotor current. A means for safe (nonelectrical) operation of the power transfer switch shall be provided. Power transfer to the emergency power supply shall be initiated by any of the following signals: - Voltage on any phase at the load terminals of the circuit breaker falls below 85% of motor rated voltage. - Phase reversal of the normal source power. Transfer to the emergency source shall be inhibited until there is adequate voltage and frequency to serve the fire pump load. Means shall be provided to prevent higher than normal inrush currents when transferring the fire pump motor from one source to the other. The fire pump power transfer switch shall include the following components, all other devices necessary for the proper operation of the installation and compliance with NFPA20 shall be provided: - Emergency Power Isolating Switch - Emergency Power Circuit Breaker - Visible Indicators of the following: - Emergency Power Available - Emergency Power Phase Reversal - Position of the Power Transfer Switch (2 indicators) - Voltage and frequency Sensing Devices for the emergency power source - Re-Transfer Timer - Delay Starting Timer for the generator - A Momentary Test Switch to simulate a normal power source failure - Voltage Free Contacts (one NO & one NC) for indicating the following: - Emergency Power Isolating Switch in open position - Alternate Source Generator Command (disabled if the Emergency Power Isolating Switch is open) - Power Transferred To Emergency Power (mechanically operated by the transfer switch mechanism) - Load Shedding Signal During Pump Start-up Only n. Control sequence and panel board of fire pumps: Fire pumps shall start manually by a star delta reduced voltage start controllers located in control panel. The control panel shall be factory designed and fabricated. UL/FM approved. Controller shall include all accessories & controls not mentioned here to meet NFPA requirement & UL listing. The motor start electric motor controller designed to meet NF standards for automatic connection in star/delta for reduced voltage start complete with all control devices, alarms, functions and operations. All electrical components shall be contained in a free standing, sheets steel, rain-right enclosure with lockup front access door. Automatic operation can be initiated by any of the following demand signals. Low pressure m piping system Flow switch Fire detection/alarm switch Remote start signal
Jockey pump shall pressurize the system and fulfill small demands. Upon increase of demand and _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-80
Month Year
Projects Name
drop in pressure, the duty pump will come into operation first, then if pressure continues to drop, second pump shall start. Pump will retire according to increase in system pressure. An alternator shall interchange between the duty pumps and standby pump. If duty pump fails standby pump shall come into operation automatically. Low level switch located in fire water tank shall stop pumps and give alarm if tanks are empty. Controller door sets shall be interlocked mechanically when the main switch is on position. Manual operated spring assisted closing air circuit breaker. Manual protection by magnetic type over current release unit which trips the circuit breaker. Stalled rotor protection with definite trip time 90 seconds at 600% of full load current. Short circuit protection with instantaneous trips at 1200% of motor full load current. Normal setting at 300% of motor full load current with trip time in excess of 60 seconds. Auto closing heavy duty line, start and run contactors rated at least 115% of motor full load current. Push button operated for local, manual or remote start. Lever operated mechanically for emergency direct on line start. Control panel enclosure shall be NEMA ICS 6, Type 2 drop-off. Panel shall be complete with push button operated for local, manual or remote electric start. Panel board shall be equipped with auto-stop control with wiring terminals at clearly marked connector rail and external cable connection shall be through bottom fitted cable glazed plate. Performance Test: pump to be completely tested at factory with positive suction pressure and with a 4.5m suction lift. Certified performance curves for both conditions to submitted for approval prior to shipment. 2.09 JOCKEY FIRE PUMP Supply and install jockey fire pump wherever shown on drawings and as specified herein; conformity with NFPA Standards requirement is required . Pump shall be UL/FM approved. a. Type: horizontal end suction pump, centrifugal, directly coupled to motor. b. Construction: casing to be cast iron. designed for working pressure of 17kg/cm2 and hydrostatically tested at this pressure at factory. Impeller to be bronze, double suction, hydraulically balanced design, dynamically balanced, keyed and bolted to stainless steel shaft. c. Construction: pump to have internal sealing water passages, removable chrome-plated cast iron channel rings, mechanical seal with carbon washer, Ni-vesist face and stainless steel parts, water slingers to protect bearings and 'O' ring gaskets to prevent leakage. d. Electric Motor to be close-coupled to pump, totally enclosed, fan cooled squirrel cage, induction type, with permanently lubricated and sealed ball bearings. Motor speed is not to exceed 2900 rpm. e. Starter: totally enclosed, wall mounted, direct-on-line, with no-volt and overload protection in each phase and suitable for automatic operation. 2.10 COLD WATER HYDRO-PNEUMATIC PRESSURE SET (BOOSTER SET) _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-81
Month Year
Projects Name
Supply and install all Cold water hydro-pneumatic pressure sets wherever shown on the drawings and as specified herein. Each Cold water pressure set shall be of the type indicated on drawings, variable speed or constant, packaged type, triplex or duplex type as shown on drawings, complete with pneumatic pressure tank, interconnecting piping, fittings, controls, specialties and control panel variable frequency drives (one per pump for variable speed unit only), all mounted on the same steel frame with heavy gauge steel protective casing, and all factory assembled and tested. Field assembled pumps and panels are not approved. Each Cold water pressure sets shall be complete as specified in the following clauses: 1. Pumps Each pump shall be centrifugal, vertical split case, single or multistage, silent type, complete with flexibly coupled electric motor and couplings. The pump and motor assembly shall be mounted on a steel bed plate with an approved vibration isolator. Pumps construction shall be stainless steel 304, impeller Lazer weld , stainless steel shaft and mechanical seal. Pumps shall be flexibly coupled to the electric motor thru a flexible coupling. Motor speed not to exceed 2900 rpm and as indicated on equipment schedule. Each pump shall include: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. Casing drain and vent plugs. Gauge tappings. Drip Chamber or tray with drain connection. Gate valve and strainer at its suction. Silent check valve and globe valve at its discharge. Pressure switches. Pressure gauge and gauge cock at its discharge. Reinforced type flexible connectors at pump's suction and discharge.
2. Hydro-Pneumatic Pressure Tank Each pressure tank shall be cylindrical or spherical, closed type, constructed in compliance with an approved international code for unfired pressure vessels. Each pneumatic pressure tank shall include: a. An inert gas chamber. b. Flexible butyl or neoprene membrane separating the inert gas chamber from water, and suitable for drinking water applications. c. Air recharge valve if tank is not permanently charged at factory. d. Pressure gauge and gauge cock. e. Gate shut-off valve. 3. Capacity _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-82
Month Year
Projects Name
Capacity of each Cold water pressure set shall be as given in the schedules of capacities and/or the Bills of Quantities. Cold Water Pressure Set Operation and Control Control panel to be factory tested and assembled. Supply and install for each Cold water pressure set a system control and control panel which shall include all necessary pressure switches, pressure regulating valves, instruments, operating relays, safety relays as well as cables, wires, etc,... connecting it to the corresponding pump and storage tank or reservoir to obtain the following functions: a. When line pressure drops, the pump shall operate and remain in operation until flow stops or the pressure switch reaches its high limit setting. A minimum run-time relay, adjustable type shall be provided to prevent frequent on/off operation. If pressure drops below a preset value, the second pump shall operate. b. When suction water level drops to 100 mm above top of suction pipe, the pump shall stop by the action of a low level float switch; it shall not be able to run even if other controls call for its operation. After water level rises to 150 mm above suction pipe, controls shall allow pump operation again. c. If operating pump fails to start the second pump shall operate automatically. d. An automatic sequencing control shall be provided to operate pumps in a rotational sequence after each cycle. e. Panel shall be provided with OFF-MANUAL-AUTO selector switch to allow the system to be stopped and/or put on manual or automatic operation. f. Panel shall be provided with an alarm buzzer and switch which shall be put in operation in case of fault.
g. For each function specified with the panel, a pilot light shall be provided to indicate the status of the particular function. Pilot lights colors shall be selected in accordance with the function to be indicated. h. A delay relay shall be incorporated within the panel to prevent immediate start-up upon reestablishment of power after power failure. j. 2.11 A. Booster set shall be monitored by the building management system.
FUEL OIL ROTARY GEAR PUMPS (PROVISIONAL) Pumps to be of the monoblock rotary gear type with suction and discharge connections screwed ANSI parallel thread. Casing and gears to be of cast iron construction with the drive shaft in high tensile steel. Generally s clause 2.01. The shaft shall be supported by PTFE impregnated carbon bearings, and sealed by either PTFE impregnated packing or carbon faced mechanical seal. The pumps shall be fitted with an integral relief valve for protection from excessive pressure.
B.
Month Year
Projects Name
C. D. E. 2.12
The pump unit shall be close-coupled driven through a flexible coupling. Gear pumps shall be applied to oil supply systems. Oil pumps shall be UL Listed and explosion proof type. VARIABLE SPEED PUMPING SYSTEM FOR SECONDARY CHILLED/HEATING WATER PUMPS Supply and install wherever shown on drawings split case pumps ,with number and capacities as shown on drawings. Contractor should check & filter all harmonic disturbances for Hospital equipment, which might be interfering with frequency drive of chilled water pumps a) Variable Speed Pumping Package Pumping package shall include: * * * * * Pumping Skid ( complete with valves & fittings as per detail drawing) Pump Control Panel Adjustable Frequency Drive Sensor Transmitters Sequence of Operation
Pump base shall be floating slab installed on spring isolators to prevent vibration when pumps are running at low frequencies. b) References A. Hydraulic Institute B. ANSI - American National Standards Institute C. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association D. UL - Underwriters Laboratories. Inc. G. NEC - National Electrical Code H. ISO - International Standards Organization I. IEC - International Electrotechnical Commission
Month Year
Projects Name
c)
Submittals i) Submittals shall include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. ii) System summary sheet Sequence of operation Shop drawing indicating dimensions, required clearances and location and size of each field connection Power and control wiring diagrams System profile analysis including variable speed pump curves and system curve. The analysis shall also include pump, motor and AFD efficiencies, job specific load profile, horsepower and kilowatt/hour consumption. Pump data sheets
Submittals must be specific to this project. Generic submittals will not be accepted.
d)
Quality Assurance i) The pumping package shall be assembled by the pump manufacturer. An assembler of pumping systems not actively engaged in the design and construction of centrifugal pumps shall not be considered a pump manufacturer. The manufacturer shall assume "Unit Responsibility" for the complete pumping package. Unit responsibility shall be defined as responsibility for interface and successful operation of all system components supplied by the pumping system manufacturer. The manufacturer shall have a minimum of 10 years experience in the design and construction of variable speed pumping systems. All functions of the variable speed pump control system shall be tested at the factory prior to shipment. This test shall be conducted with motors connected to AFD output and it shall test all inputs, outputs and program execution specific to this application. The manufacturer shall be fully certified by the International Standards Organization per ISO 9001. Proof of this certification shall be furnished at time of submittal. Manufacturer shall be listed by Underwriter's Laboratories as a manufacturer of packaged pumping systems. Bidders shall comply with all sections of this specification relating to packaged pumping systems. Any deviations from this specification shall be bid as a voluntary alternate clearly defined in writing. If no exceptions are noted, the supplier or contractor shall be bound by these specifications.
ii) iii)
iv)
v) vi)
e)
Acceptance Manufacturers
Subject to compliance with the specifications, the following manufacturers shall be _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-85
Month Year
Projects Name
acceptable: 1. 2. 3. ITT Bell & Gossett Armstrong Aurora Pump Co. (USA) (USA) (USA)
or approved equal f) Manufactured Units i) ii) Furnish and install as shown on the plans a Variable Speed Pumping System. The control system shall include, as a minimum, pump & motor assemblies, the programmable logic pump controller, adjustable frequency drive(s), suction and discharge piping, valves and additional equipment as specified or as required to properly execute the sequence of operation. Furnish field installed remote sensor/ transmitters as indicated on the plans. System shall require only suction and discharge connections and a single point power connection with all interface connection to existing Building Management System of the Hospital. All components shall be mounted on a structural steel base suitable for grouting. The base shall be large enough to support the system's pumps, piping and control panel. All welded pressure bearing piping must be fabricated with full penetration welds. Qualification of the welding procedures and performance of the welders shall comply with the requirements of ANSI/ASME B31.1 and ASME code, Section IX. Provide pumps as indicated on the pump schedule. Pumps and motors shall be furnished as specified in respective sections of this document. Pressure gauges shall be furnished for system supply and return headers. Gauges shall be installed to be clearly visible from front of control panel.
iii)
iv)
v) vi) g)
Components i) Pump Logic Controller 1. The Technologic pump logic controller assembly shall be listed by and bear the label of Underwriter's Laboratory, Inc. (UL). The controller shall be specifically designed for variable speed pumping applications. The controller shall function to a proven program that safeguards against damaging hydraulic conditions including: * * * * 3. motor overload pump flow surges hunting end of curve
2.
The pump logic controller shall capable of accepting 4 analog inputs from zone sensor/transmitters indicated on the plans. The controller shall scan each analog input a minimum of once every 500 milliseconds. It will then select the analog signal that has deviated the greatest amount from its _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-86
Month Year
Projects Name
setpoint. This selected signal will be used as the command feedback input for a hydraulic stabilization function to minimize hunting. Each input signal shall be capable of maintaining a different set point value. 4. 5. 6. The pump controller shall be capable of controlling all pumps in parallel with one pump as standby. The controller shall be field expandable to control up to 3 pumps in parallel and one standby and accept up to 16 analog inputs. The hydraulic stabilization program shall utilize a proportional-integralderivative control function. The proportional, integral and derivative values shall be user adjustable over an infinite range. The pump logic controller shall be self prompting. All messages shall be displayed in plain English. The operator interface shall have the following features: a. b. c. d. 8. Multi-fault memory and recall On-screen help functions LED pilot lights and switches Soft-touch membrane keypad switches.
7.
The readout shall be two lines of forty 0.50" brightly lit fluorescent characters capable of displaying the following values: a. b. c. d. e. f. Differential pressure in PSIG Pressure in PSIG Temperature in degrees F or C Differential temperature in degrees F or C Kilowatt consumption Wire to water efficiency calculation
All read outs shall be interfaced with the BMS for remote reading by BMS. 9. The following communication features shall be provided to the BAS: a. b. c. d. ii) Remote system start / stop Failure of any system component Process variable AFD speed
Adjustable Frequency Drive 1. 2. 3. The adjustable frequency drive(s) shall be pulse width modulation (PWM) type, microprocessor controlled design. The AFD, including all factory installed options, shall have CSA approval. Enclosure shall be NEMA 1 ventilated for installation as a wall mounted or free-standing unit, depending on the amp rating. A hand-off-automatic switch and speed potentiometer shall be mounted on the front of the enclosure.
Month Year
Projects Name
4.
AFD shall utilize a diode bridge rectifier to convert three phase AC to a fixed DC voltage. Power factor shall remain above 0.95 regardless of speed or load. AFDs employing power factor correction capacitors shall not be acceptable. Insulated gate bipolar transistors shall be used in the inverter section to convert the fixed DC voltage to a three phase, adjustable frequency, AC output. A DC line reactor shall be provided to minimize harmonic and current distortion of the input power line. The following customer modifiable adjustments shall be provided: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. Accel time: 0.1 to 1800 seconds Decel time: 0.1 to 1800 seconds Minimum frequency: 0 HZ Maximum frequency: 100 HZ Analog input filter: 0.1 to 10 seconds Analog outputs: 10 to 1 gain Volts / Hertz ratio
5.
6.
7. 8.
Speed reference signal shall be customer selectable for 0-10 VDC or 4-20 mA. The AFD shall be suitable for elevations to 3300 feet above sea level without derating. Maximum operating ambient temperature shall not be less than 104 degrees F. AFD shall be suitable for operation in environments up to 95% non-condensing humidity. The AFD shall be capable of displaying the following information in plain English via a 40 character alphanumeric display: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. Frequency Voltage Current Kilowatts per hour Fault identification Percent torque Percent power RPM
9.
10. iii)
All AFDs shall be warranted for a period of 24 months after shipment. This warranty shall cover parts and labor.
Sensor / Transmitters Provide 16 field mounted differential pressure sensor transmitters as indicated on the plans. Unit shall transmit an isolated 4-20mA dc signal indicative of process variable to the pump logic controller via standard two wire 24 DC system. Unit shall have stainless steel wetted parts with two 0.25" male NPT process connections. It shall be protected against radio frequency interference and shall have a watertight, NEMA 4 electrical enclosure capable of withstanding 2000 PSI static pressure with a 0.5" NPT conduit connection. Accuracy shall be within 0.25% of full span.
iv)
Sequence of Operation
Month Year
Projects Name
1. 2.
The system shall consist of a Technologic pump logic controller, multiple pump/AFD sets with manual and automatic alternation and pump staging. The pumping system shall start upon the closure of customer's contact when the pump logic controller Mode of Operation selector switch is in the REMOTE position. When the pump logic controller selector switch is in the LOCAL position, the pumping system shall operate auto-matically. Sensor/transmitters shall be provided as required and shown on plans. Each sensor/transmitter shall send a 4-20mA signal to the pump logic controller, indicative of process variable condition. The pump logic controller shall compare each signal to the independent, engineer/user determined set points. When all set points are satisfied by the process variable, the pump speed shall remain constant at the optimum energy consumption level. The Technologic pump logic controller shall continuously scan and compare each process variable to its individual set point and control to the least satisfied zone. If the set point cannot be satisfied by the designated lead pump, the pump logic controller shall initiate a timed sequence of events to stage a lag pump . The lag pump shall accelerate resulting in the lead pump(s) decelerating until they equalize in speed. Further change in process variable shall cause the pumps to change speed together. When the set point criteria can be safely satisfied with fewer pumps, the Technologic pump logic controller shall initiate a timed destage sequence and continue variable speed operation. As the worst case zone deviates from set point, the pump logic controller shall send the appropriate analog signal to the AFD to speed up or slow down the pump/motor. When in the "AUTOMATIC" mode, the pump(s) shall operate through the AFD(s) being controlled by a signal generated by the pump logic controller. In the event of a system differential pressure failure, due to a pump, AFD, overload fault, the pump logic controller shall automatically initiate a timed sequence of events to start the remaining pump/AFD set(s) in the variable speed mode. A message on the display shall indicate the fault, pump/motor, or AFD. Subsequent failures shall initiate a timed sequence of events to the variable speed mode as available.
3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
9.
10. 11. 12.
13.
14.
15.
Month Year
Projects Name
16.
In the event of the failure of a zone sensor/transmitter, its process variable signal shall be removed from the scan/compare program. Alternative zone sensor/transmitters, if available, shall remain in the scan/compare program for control. The zone number corresponding to the failed sensor/transmetter shall be displayed on the operation interface of the pump logic controller. In the event of failure of any pump or its AFD, the standby pump shall operate automatically. A message on the display shall indicate the fault , pump/ motor or AFD with remote signal to BMS.
17.
18.
In the event of failure to receive all zone process variable signals, the AFD shall maintain 100% speed, reset shall be automatic upon correction of the zone failure. PUMP, AFD, OVERLOAD fault shall be continuously scrolled through the display on the operator interface of pump logic controller until the fault has been corrected and the controller has been manually reset.
19.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 A. SHOP TESTING Pump performance tests shall be conducted in accordance with Hydraulic Institute test codes as described in HI E.35.01, E.37.01,and E.39.01. In addition, each pump shall be tested at five points of operation from shut-off head to runout condition including the guaranteed pumps performance point. All pumps shall be hydrostatically tested for leaks at 1.5 times the design pressure. There shall be no leakage during the one hour test period. The manufacturer shall submit certificate including test data to show that the pump meets performance specifications. INSPECTION The Contractor shall inspect each pump prior to installation to verify that pumps are in conformance with these specifications. INSTALLATION
B. C. 3.02 A. 3.03
A. Pumps shall be installed in strict conformance with manufacturers written instructions. _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-90
Month Year
Projects Name
B. C. 3.04 A.
If flexible coupling is used between the pump and its driver, shafts shall be so supported and aligned as not to produce undesirable stresses and noise during normal operation. If oil or grease lubricated bearings are supplied with the pump, the oiler shall be filled with the specified lubricating oil or bearings shall be pre-lubricated with specified grease prior to start-up. TESTING Field testing of the pumps shall be performed at the time of overall system start -up and testing. Installed pumps shall meet the performance specifications. See Section 15991. END OF SECTION
Month Year
Projects Name
SECTION 15150 METERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. B. SUMMARY Provide labor, materials, equipment and services, and perform operations required for complete installation of Meters and related work as indicated on the drawings and specified herein. Work Included: The work shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. Extent of meters required by this section is indicated and/or specified in other Division 15 sections. C. Related Work Specified Elsewhere 1. Basic Mechanical Requirements - Section 15010 2. Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods - Section 15050 3. Meters furnished as part of factory-fabricated equipment, are specified as part of equipment assembly in other Division 15 sections. 1.02 A. QUALITY ASSURANCE Materials and work shall conform to the latest edition of reference specifications and industry standards listed below and specified herein and to applicable codes and requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent. Certification: Provide meters whose accuracies, under specified operating conditions, are certified by manufacturer. SUBMITTALS Submit the in accordance with the requirements specified under Submittals in Section 15010. 1. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and spare parts lists for of meter Include this data and product data in Maintenance Manual. 1.04 A. B. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Deliver materials specified herein in manufacturer's unopened containers, with manufacturer's name and point of origin on each container. Store materials and equipment where designated by Engineer. Contractor shall assume responsibility and security for materials and equipment. Protect from detrimental conditions.
B. 1.03 A.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-92
Month Year
Projects Name
2.01
WATER METER
The water meter over 50mm diameter, shall be Woltmann horizontal type extra dry, magnetic transmission with an hydrodynamically balance helix type sensitive at low flow rates and resistant to high flow rates. The minimum reading must be minimum 0.05 liter with a head loss lower than 0.05 bars at nominal flow (Qn), an EEC approval is compulsory. The totalizer must be equipped by an index wiper to always be easily readable numbers. The meter must be class B in all positions with internal mechanism interchangeable on site by an already calibrated one. The calibrated device of the meter should be accessible without removing the internal chamber of measurement. The protected epoxy coating body must be in cast iron for maximal admissible pressure 20 bars and in steel for bars for nominal diameter 100 mm and above and be able to function under 3 meters of water. The water meter under 40 mm diameter, shall be Turbine Single jet extra-dry type with magnetic transmission, protected by two anti-tampering rings from any magnetic tampering attempt, excellent sensitivity at tiny flow rate maximum 5 l/hr and the minimum reading must be minimum 0.05 liter head loss lower than 0.2 bars at nominal flow (Qn). The totalizer must be equipped by an index wiper to always be easily readable numbers and should have a filter inserted at the inlet. The meter must be Class C for horizontal position + 15C and Class B in any other position , and should not be recalibrated. The body must be brass for no corrosion with permanent pressure 16 bars and can accept as an option, anon-return valve inserted at the outlet. The register must be with minimum of 8 rollers and be able to rotate 360C on site for easy reading and must be protected with a solid cap made either of plastic or metal. All water meters must be pre-equipped for remote reading system: The choice of pulse value must be independent from the pre-equipment. The proposed compatible communication equipment must be able to be installed on site without breaking any meteorological seal. The pre equipment and the proposed communication equipment must be both insensitive to magnets of 2500 gauss. The pre equipment should allow to upgrade the meter with a remote reading device absolutely reliable in the long term ( the register and the remote indicator must always indicate the same amount of forward volume, hence back flow must not be computing as forward volume).
Month Year
Projects Name
2.02
CHILLED / HEATING WATER FLOW MEASUREMENT DEVICE The measurement of the flow must be done with a water meter equipped with a pulse head connected to a digital / analogic converter to monitor pumps & chillers. a. The digital/analogic converter with a maximum 0.1% resolution of the measure range, should be linked to a water meter, verifying water meters specs, equipped with a pulse head, giving an output current proportional to the pulses frequency, means to the flow passing through the meter. The converter should have as display, on LCD screen 16 characters, at any time of instantaneous bi-directional flow or volume as a choice, output current in mA, maximum and minimum flow measurement, configuration parameters, visualization on LED the status of the output relays. The converter should have as technical features pulse input ( maximum frequency 200 Hz), free voltage contact : ILS or relay, Opto-coupler TLO, output current of 4-20mA on maximum load 750 Ohms, normal or reverse evolution and four(4) outputs relays programmable for a choice among input pulses recopy, dosage monitoring, high or low flow thresholds with hysteresis, volume thresholds on totalized cumul. The converter must be housing in a standard DIN enclosure, fixed at maximum distance of 5 meters from water meter, with functions Keypad, LED visualization of the working relays status, Fuse : 100mA-13 VA for 240 Vac-50/60 Hz and 500mA-5W for 12 Vdc and having the possibility to be fitted into a watertight cabinet IP 55. No battery needed or Sauvegarding of the configuration, the converter should have an EEPROM. b. The pulse head must have an output direction signal indicating that the output flow signal corresponds to a flow of water in either the forward or reverse directions and it is off when the output flow signal corresponds to the forward direction of the water. The pulse head must have a pulse output giving the same signals for both directions of flow. Flanged water meter over 50 mm diameter, shall be Woltmann horizontal type extra dry, magnetic transmission with an hydrodynamically balance helix type sensitive at low flow rates and resistant to high flow rates. The minimum reading must be minimum 0.05 liter with a head loss lower than 0.05 bars at nominal flow. (Qn), an EEC approval is compulsory. The totalizer must be equipped by an index wiper to always be easily readable numbers and an adequate filter unit must be installed upstream the meter. The meter must be Class B in all positions with internal mechanism interchangeable on site by an already calibrated one. The calibration device of the meter should be accessible without removing the internal chamber of measurement. The protected epoxy coating body must be in cast iron for maximal admissible pressure 20 bars and in steel for 50 bars for nominal diameter 100 mm and above and be able to function under 3 meters of water. The maximum working temperature is 30C for cold water and 90C for hot water. The register must be with minimum of 8 rollers and be able to rotate 360 on site for easy reading and must be protected with a solid cap made either of plastic or metal.
c.
Month Year
Projects Name
The water meter must be pre-equipped for remote reading system: The choice of the pulse value must be independent from the pre-equipment The proposed compatible communication equipment must be able to be installed on site without breaking any metrological seal. The pre-equipped and the proposed communication equipment must be both insensitive to magnets of 2500 gauss. The pre-equipment should allow to upgrade the meter with a remote reading device absolutely reliable in the long term (the register and the remote indicator must always indicate the same amount of forward volume, hence backflow must not be computing as forward volume). Approved Manufacturer Water meter Pulse Head Digital/ Analogic converter Or approved equal 2.03 FUEL OIL METER Fuel oil meter shall be rotary motion positive displacement type. Meter shall be constructed of cast aluminum with a capacity up to 22.7m3/hr, a pressure rating up to 150 psi ( 10 bar) and temperature rating from -40C to + 71C. Meter connections shall be 50 mm diameter with suitable adaptors. Oil meter shall have a superior accuray of 0.05% repeatability over a 100:1 range from maximum nominal meter capacity. Fuel oil meter shall operate on gravity flow or pump pressure. Fuel oil meter shall be complete with: 1234567Counter, 8 digit totalizer in liters. Printer Preset Air Eliminator Strainer Valve Pulsers SCHLUMBERGER SCHLUMBERGER DATAM FLUTEC
Flow meter shall be similar to liquid LC controls model M-7 meters or approved equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 A. EXAMINATION
Examine conditions at the job site where work of this section is to be performed to insure proper arrangement and fit of the work. Start of work implies acceptance of job site conditions.
Month Year
Projects Name
3.02 A. B.
PREPARATION
Examine the Contract Drawings and specifications in order to insure the completeness of the work required under this Section. Verify measurements and dimensions at the job site and cooperate in the coordination and scheduling of the work of this Section with the work of related trades, so as not to delay job progress.
END OF SECTION
Month Year
Projects Name
SECTION 15175 TANKS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. SUMMARY Provide labor, materials, equipment and services, and perform operations required for complete installation of Plumbing Equipment and related work as indicated on the drawings and specified herein. Work Included: The work shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. C. Water storage tank. Water Softeners. Expansion Tanks. Chemical Feed pot. Hypochlorinators. Filters. UV sterilizer.
B.
Related Work Specified Elsewhere 1. Basic Mechanical Requirements - Section 15010. 2. Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods - Section 15050.
1.02 A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Materials and work shall conform to the latest edition of industry standards, reference specifications listed below and specified herein and to applicable codes and requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent. Qualifications 1. The Contractor shall provide the equipment specified, or equipment of the same standard of construction and performance as produced by one of the listed manufacturers. 2. Approval of the manufacturer does not necessarily constitute approval of its products as equal to those specified. Immediately after the awarding of the contract and prior to the start of construction, submit to the Engineer for approval a complete written summary of the proposed manufacturer's equipment.
B.
C.
Test 1. Factory Tests a. Before shipment, the manufacturer shall test components hydrostatically at 150% of rated design pressure for ability to withstand maximum design pressures and for tightness. b. Conduct factory performance test on actual pumps to be furnished. Furnish sufficient lead notice to Engineer to permit witnessing of test. Furnish certificate of test.
1.03 SUBMITTALS _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-97
Month Year
Projects Name
A.
Submit the following in accordance with Section 15010. 1. Product Data a. Submit copies of manufacturer's latest published literature for materials specified herein for approval; obtain approval before ordering materials. b. Data shall include manufacturer's technical product data, including installation instructions, and dimensioned drawings for each type of manufactured piping specialty. Include pressure drop curve or chart for each type and size of pipeline strainer. Submit schedule showing manufacturer's figure number, size, location, and features for each required piping specialty. 2. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for work specified herein for approval. a. A complete detailed set of construction and erection drawings for equipment including vibration isolators and bases indicating dimensions, materials of construction and methods of assembly. b. Complete capacity and performance data including items indicated in the equipment schedules and specifications.
B.
Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and spare parts lists for each type of manufactured piping specialty. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in maintenance manual in accordance with requirements of Section 15010. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Deliver materials and handle so as to prevent the inclusion of foreign materials and the damage of materials. Store materials and equipment where designated and assume responsibility and security for materials and equipment. Take precautions for protection from detrimental conditions. APPROVED MANUFACTURERS CULLIGAN BURNER THE PERMUTIT CO. EBD FILTRINE AQUAFINE Filters CALGON CORP. Or approved equal (USA ) (USA ) (USA ) (USA ) (USA ) (USA ) (USA )
1.04 A. B. 1.05
Month Year
Projects Name
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 A. MATERIALS/EQUIPMENT
Polyethelyne Tanks Tank shall be constructed of triple layer polyethylene, to the capacities indicated on the drawings. Tank shall be tested for leaks before installation. Tank shall be U.V. proof. Tank shall be mounted on a steel support and shall be equipped with the following: a- Tight access cover. b- Level indicator with valve. c- Fill, vent and overflow pipe. d- drain valve. e- supply line with valve & float valve. Tank shall be as manufactured by Nassar Group or approved equal.
B.
Stainless Steel Water Tank Tank shall be constructed of 3 mm thick (or 4mm when shown on drawings), welded stainless steel sheet metal (316L) to the capacities indicated on the drawings. Tank shall be tested for leaks before installation. Tank shall be mounted on a steel support and shall be equipped with the following: a- Access cover. b- Level indicator. c- Fill, vent and overflow pipe. d- drain valve. e- supply line with valve.
C.
Chemical Feeder Pot The unit shall be of a quality construction with dished ends for safe operation at pressure and shall be supplied complete with all valves and funnels all factory assembled. The feeder unit shall be supplied with a stand and shall be pressure tested with a certificate from the factory. Chemical feeder pot shall be similar to Houseman dosage pots or approved equal.
D.
Expansion tank 1. Provide compression tank ( expansion tank) as shown on the drawings, constructed for 930 Kpa working pressure, stamped with U symbol and supplied with National Board From U-1 denoting compliance with ASME boiler and pressure vessel code. Provide fittings and connections to related equipment in accordance with tanks manufacturers recommendations. Tank shall be insulated externally. Insulation shall be same type used for exposed ductwork, specified hereinbefore. Tank diaphragm shall withstand 10 deg. C up to 120 deg C suitable for heating and chilled water systems.
Month Year
Projects Name
2. E.
Refer to drawings for tank support.
Concrete Water Tanks Supply and install in each compartment of the basement reservoir the followings: a. Balancing piston type float valve with shut-off valve. b. Low level float switches assemblies as required and as necessary for the control of the relevant systems. c. High water level alarm float switches connected to central alarm panel, located in the maintenance block. d. Drain valve. e. Drain and overflow to nearest drain provision or as shown on the drawings and vent pipes with insect copper mesh screen. f. gAll pipes into the water tank shall be located in place before concreting and shall be provided with no-leak flanges welded to the pipe. Contractor shall supply all material and labour to treat concrete water tanks with internal lining, non toxic, solvent free epoxy paint, two epoxy resin system with water proofing capabilities minimum thickness 200 micron. Material used shall be suitable for potable water and accordingly will not contaminate water.
h. Water tanks shall have interface for future monitoring by BMS with all necessary controls. E. Hypochlorinator 1. One hypochlorinator ( HC) consisting of: a. Chemical Injection Pump: positive displacement diaphragm-action type, with parts exposed to chemicals made of corrosion resistant plastic or special rubber compound, electric motor driven, complete with suction strainer, ball check valve, injection nozzle for screwing water pipe, anti-syphon device and necessary lengths of suction and delivery tubing all of corrosion resistant plastic materials. Capacity of feeder shall be recommended by specialist. Hypochlorite dosing set consisting of: Chemical dosing pump, positive displacement, rated at 1.6 L/hr at 60 psi discharge pressure. Solution tank. Electrical mixer Electrical switch Lot Interconnecting Hoses In-line static mixer bTranslucent polyethylene storage tank, for sodium hypo-chloride solution, with a minimum capacity as specified on the Drawings.
Tank shall have a molded fiberglass cover of recesses for the mounting and _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-100
Month Year
Projects Name
installation of feeder, agitator, and liquid level switch assemblies. Tank shall have clearly marked 5 gallons (20 lit) graduations. Connecting PVC valves and fittings and polyethylene tubing. 2Hypochlorinator shall operate automatically to maintain an accurate control of residual chlorine in the water by constantly testing a water sample for chlorine residual and automatically adjusting the chlorine dosing apparatus to maintain the residual chlorine in the water. Chlorine system shall be complete with chlorine residual analyser , chlorine residual controller, chlorine residual recorder, hypochlorinate solution metering pump, hypochlorite tanks , tubing and accessories. Chlorine residual analyzer shall have an acetate reagent buffer solution system with a constant head reagent feed system utlizing a control valve to meter reagent into the sample cell. Chlorine residual controller shall be wall mounted and have in addition to set point adjustment for setting the frequency of corrective action when a difference exists between set point and measured residual chlorine. Chlorine residual recorder wall mounted solid state type requiring no ink and incorporating a 30 day strip chart, an indicator strip for 0 to 2 PPM range and a front clear glass cover with high and low level alarm contacts to actuate a remote visual and audible alarms.
3-
4-
5-
F.
DOMESTIC WATER CHEMICAL TREATMENT Domestic water chemical treatment shall consist of 100 liters tank and dosing pump with back pressure of 15 bar complete as specified for hypocholrinator.
2.02 A.
EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS UV Sterilizer UV sterilizer shall be heavy duty stainless steel pressure vessel with heavy duty quartz jacket to protect UV lamp and insure peak UV radiation to the liquid complete with built in flow control, view port, light sensor with audible alarm, 120 VAC, 30000 micro watt. sec/cm2 of 2537 A ( 254 nm) UV energy. Working pressure shall be 16 bar with 9000 hr bulb life (approx. 1 year). Unit shall be provides with a set of 3 spare lamps. Contractor shall install ahead of the UV sterilizer cartridge filter ( 5 microns) with capacity suitable for the UV sterilizer and included in the unit rate of the UV sterilizer. APPROVED MANUFACTURERS Ideal Horizon Aqua fine filters Calgon Corp. Or approved equal
2.03.
Cartridge Filter Cartridge filtration system shall be complete with stainless steel 316 housing and filter elements (0.5 microns rating), differential pressure indicator, air relief valve, isolation and drain valves with inlet & outlet pressure gauges.
Month Year
Projects Name
PART 3 - GENERAL 3.01 A. 3.02 A. B. EXAMINATION Examine conditions at the job site where work of this section is to be performed to insure proper arrangement and fit of the work. Start of work implies acceptance of job site conditions. PREPARATION Examine the Contract Drawings and specifications in order to insure the completeness of the work required under this Section. Verify measurements and dimensions at the job site and cooperate in the coordination and scheduling of the work of this Section with the work of related trades, so as not to delay job progress. INSTALLATION Construct apparatus of materials and pressure ratings suitable for the conditions encountered during continuous operation. Where corrosion can occur, appropriate corrosion-resistant materials and assembly methods use including isolation of dissimilar metals against galvanic interaction. Where components are or may come in contact, although the materials may basically be similar, use hardness differentials of at least 50 Brinell to prevent seizure and reduce wear. Grout base plates completely to provide a rigid non-deflecting support. Provide OSHA approved sheet metal guards over couplings. Pipe vents, bleeds, gland and base drains, and blowoff connections to nearest floor drain using copper tubing. Provide nameplates; attach to unit showing the following information: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. H. 3.04 A. Maker's name, date of manufacture, size and type. Rated capacity, design and operating pressure ratings. Rated horsepower, full load amperes. Voltage, number of phases, frequency. Temperature rise or class of insulation. Other information, as applicable, as noted herein or directed by Engineer.
3.03 A. B. C. D. E. F. G.
Provide direction arrow indicating direction of rotation of pump, where pumps are included in assembly. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Field Tests
1. Perform field test to demonstrate the ability of the equipment to meet contract requirements. 2. Should any part of the apparatus or system fail to meet the contract requirements, adjust, repair or replace any defective or inoperative parts and, on completion, again conduct the complete performance tests. 3. Refer to appropriate sections for additional required test data. _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-102
Month Year
Projects Name
B.
Include results of factory and field tests in the Instruction Manual as described in the appropriate sections. END OF SECTION
Month Year
Projects Name
SECTION 15190 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. SUMMARY Provide labor, materials, equipment and services, and perform operations required for complete installation of Mechanical Identification and related work as indicated on the drawings and specified herein. Work Included: The work shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. Extent of mechanical identification work required by this section is indicated on drawings and/or specified in other Division 15 sections. C. Related Work Specified Elsewhere 1. Basic Mechanical Requirements - Section 15010 2. Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods - Section 15050 3. Mechanical identification furnished as part of factory-fabricated equipment, is specified as part of equipment assembly in other Division 15 sections. 4. Refer to other Division 15 sections for identification requirements at central station mechanical control center; not work of this section. 5. Refer to Division 16 sections for identification requirements of electrical work; not work of this section. 1.02 A. QUALITY ASSURANCE Materials and work shall conform to the latest edition of reference specifications and industry standards listed below and specified herein and to applicable codes and requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent. SUBMITTALS Submit the following in accordance with the requirements specified under Submittals in Section 15010. 1. Samples: Submit samples of materials specified herein for approval; obtain approval before ordering materials. Sample shall include samples of each color, lettering style and other graphic representation required for each identification material or system. Provide mockup type sample installation for review and approval by Engineer. 2. Product Data: Submit copies of manufacturer's latest published literature for materials specified herein for approval; obtain approval before materials are delivered to the site. Data shall include manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions for each identification material and device required. 3. Maintenance Data: Along with product data and schedules, submit manufacturers in maintenance manuals for maintaining identification work specified herein. _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-104
B.
1.03 A.
Month Year
Projects Name
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 A. MATERIALS Mechanical Identification Materials: Provide manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required for each application as referenced in other Division 15 sections. Where more than single type is specified for application, selection is Engineer's option, but provide single selection for each product category. Plastic Pipe Markers 1. Snap-On Type: Provide manufacturer's standard preprinted, semi-rigid snap-on, color-coded pipe markers as directed by the Engineer 2. Pressure-Sensitive Type: Provide manufacturer's standard preprinted, permanent adhesive, color-coded, pressure-sensitive vinyl pipe markers with arrow tape banding both ends to indicate flow direction as directed by the Engineer 3. Insulation: Furnish 25 mm thick molded fiberglass insulation with jacket for each plastic pipe marker to be installed on uninsulated pipes subject to fluid temperatures of 50 degrees C or greater. Cut length to extend 50 mm beyond each end of plastic pipe marker. 4. Small Pipes: For external diameters less than 6" (including insulation if any), provide full-band pipe markers, extending 360 degrees around pipe at each location; fasten by one of the following methods: a. Snap-on application of pretensioned semi-rigid plastic pipe marker. b. Taped to pipe (or insulation) with color-coded plastic adhesive arrow tape, not less than 20 mm wide; full circle at both ends of pipe marker, lap tape 40 mm. 5. Large Pipes: For external diameters of 150 mm and larger (including insulation if any), provide either full-band or strip-type pipe markers, but not narrower than 3 times letter height (and of required length); fasten by one of the following methods: a. Laminated or bonded application of pipe marker to pipe (or insulation). b. Tape to pipe (or insulation) with color-coded plastic adhesive arrow tape, not less than 40 mm wide; full circle at both ends of pipe marker, lap tape 80 mm. c. Strapped-to-pipe (or insulation) application of semi-rigid type, with manufacturer straps or powerlock. 6. Lettering: Manufacturer's standard preprinted nomenclature which best describes piping system in each instance, as selected by Engineer in cases of variance with name as shown or specified. 7. Lettering a. Comply with piping system nomenclature as specified, scheduled or shown, and abbreviate only as necessary for each application length. b. Arrows: Print each pipe marker with arrows indicating direction of flow, either integrally _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-105
B.
Month Year
Projects Name
with piping system service lettering (to accommodate both directions), or as separate unit of plastic. C. Plastic Duct Markers 1. Provide manufacturer's standard laminated plastic, color coded duct markers. Conform to the following color code: a. b. c. d. e. Green: Cold air. Yellow: Hot air. Yellow/Green: Supply air. Blue: Exhaust, outside, return, and mixed air. For hazardous exhausts, use colors and designs recommended by ANSI A13.1.
2. Nomenclature: Include the following: a. b. c. d. e. D. Direction of air flow. Duct service (supply, return, exhaust, etc.) Duct origin (from). Duct destination (to). Design cfm. Plastic Tape 1. Provide manufacturer's standard color-coded pressure-sensitive (self-adhesive) vinyl tape, not less than 3 mils thick. 2. Width: Provide 40 mm wide tape markers on pipes with outside diameters (including insulation, if any) of less than 150 mm, , 65 mm wide tape for larger pipes. 3. Color: As directed by the Engineer E. Valve Tags 1. Brass Valve Tags: Provide (19) gauge polished brass valve tags with black filled, stamp-engraved piping system abbreviation in (6 mm) high letters and sequenced valve numbers ( 15 mm ) high, and with (4 mm ) hole for fastener. a. b. c. d. Provide ( 40 mm ) diameter tags, except as otherwise indicated. Fill tag engraving with black enamel. Provide plain stamped tags. Provide color anodized and engraved aluminum tags.
2. Etched Aluminum Valve Tags: Provide manufacturer's standard 1 m thick etched aluminum valve tags, with piping system abbreviation in (6 mm ) high letters and sequenced valve numbers (13 mm ) high, and with (4 mm ) hole for fastener. Provide (40 mm ) square black tags with white lettering, except as otherwise indicated. 3. Plastic Valve Tags: Provide manufacturer's standard solid plastic valve tags with printed enamel lettering, with piping system abbreviation in approximately (5 mm ) high letters and sequenced valve numbers approximately (10 mm ) high, and with (4mm) hole for fastener. Provide (32 mm ) square white tags with black lettering. 4. Valve Tag Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's standard solid brass (plated steel) chain (wire link or beaded type), or solid brass S-hooks of the sizes required for proper attachment of tags _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-106
Month Year
Projects Name
to valves; manufacture specifically for that purpose. 5. Access Panel Markers: Provide manufacturer's standard 1.6 mm thick engraved plastic laminate access panel markers, with abbreviations and numbers corresponding to concealed valve. Include 3 m center hole to allow attachment. F. Valve Schedule Frames: For each page of valve schedule, provide glazed display frame, with screws for removable mounting on masonry walls. Provide frames of extruded aluminum, with SSB-grade sheet glass.
G.
Engraved Plastic-Laminate Signs

1. Provide engraving stock melamine plastic laminate in the sizes and thicknesses indicated, engraved with engraver's standard letter style of the sizes and wording indicated, black with white core (letter color) except as otherwise indicated; punch for mechanical fastening except where adhesive mounting is necessary because of substrate. a. Thickness: 1.6 mm, except as otherwise indicated. b. Thickness: 3 mm , except as otherwise indicated. c. Thickness: 1.6 mm for units up to 129sq.cm. or 200 mm length; 3 mm for larger units. 2. Fasteners: Self-tapping stainless steel screws, except contact-type permanent adhesive where screws cannot or should not penetrate the substrate.
H.
Lettering and Graphics 1. Coordinate names, abbreviations and other designations used in mechanical identification work, with corresponding designations shown, specified or scheduled. Provide numbers, lettering and wording as indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as recommended by manufacturers or as required for proper identification and operation/maintenance of mechanical systems and equipment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 A. 3.02 A. B. C. EXAMINATION Examine conditions at the job site where work of this section is to be performed to insure proper arrangement and fit of the work. Start of work implies acceptance of job site conditions. PREPARATION Examine the Contract Drawings and specifications in order to insure the completeness of the work required under this Section. Cooperate in the coordination and scheduling of the work of this Section with the work of related trades, so as not to delay job progress.
Where applying identification to surfaces which require insulation, painting or other covering or finish, including valve tags in finished mechanical spaces, install identification after completion of covering and painting. Install identification prior to installation of acoustical ceilings and similar _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-107
Month Year
Projects Name
removable concealment. 3.03 A. INSTALLATION/APPLICATION Ductwork Identification 1. Identify air supply, return, exhaust, intake and relief ductwork with duct markers; or provide stenciled signs and arrows, showing ductwork service and direction of flow, in black or white (whichever provides most contrast with ductwork color). 2. In each space where ductwork is exposed, or concealed only by removable ceiling system, locate signs near points where ductwork originates or continues into concealed enclosures (shaft, underground or similar concealment), and at 30 feet spacings along exposed runs. 3. Provide duct markers or stenciled signs on each access door in ductwork and housings, indicating purpose of access (to what equipment) and other maintenance and operating instructions, and appropriate safety and procedural information. 4. Where access doors are concealed above acoustical ceilings or similar concealment, install plasticized tags for identification in lieu of specified signs, at Engineer's option. B. Piping System Identification 1. Install pipe markers of one of the following types on each system indicated to receive identification, and include arrows to show normal direction of flow: a. Plastic pipe markers, with application system as indicated under"Materials" in this section. Install on pipe insulation segment where required for hot non-insulated pipes. b. Stenciled markers, black or white for best contrast, wherever continuous color-coded painting of piping is provided. 2. Locate pipe markers and color bands as follows wherever piping is exposed to view in occupied spaces, machine rooms, accessible maintenance spaces (shafts, tunnels, plenums) and exterior non-concealed locations. a. Near each valve and control device. b. Near each branch, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units; mark each pipe at branch, where there could be question of flow pattern. c. Near locations where pipes pass through walls or floors/ceilings, or enter non-accessible enclosures. d. At access doors, manholes and similar access points which permit view of concealed piping. e. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. f. Space intermediately at maximum spacing of 15 m along each piping run, except reduce spacing to 7.5 m or less in congested areas of piping and equipment.
g. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings, except omit intermediately spaced markers. _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-108
Month Year
Projects Name
C.
Valve Identification 1. Provide valve tag on every valve, cock and control device in each piping system; exclude check valves, valves within factory-fabricated equipment units, plumbing fixture faucets, convenience and lawn-watering hose bibs, and shutoff valves at plumbing fixtures, HVAC terminal devices and similar rough-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List each tagged valve in valve schedule for each piping system. Prepare and mount valve tagging schedules for the following systems: 2. Mount valve schedule frames and schedules in machine rooms where indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, where directed by Engineer. Where more than one major machine room is shown for project, install mounted valve schedule in each major machine room, and repeat only main valves which are to be operated in conjunction with operations of more than single machine room.
D.
Mechanical Equipment Identification 1. Install engraved plastic laminate sign or plastic equipment marker on or near each major item of mechanical equipment and each operational device, as specified herein if not otherwise specified for each item or device. Provide signs for the following general categories of equipment and operational devices: a. Main control and operating valves, including safety devices and hazardous units such as gas outlets. b. Meters, gauges, thermometers and similar units. c. Pumps, compressors, condensers and similar motor-driven units. d. Heat exchangers, coils, evaporators and similar equipment. e. Fans, blowers, primary balancing dampers and mixing boxes. f. Packaged HVAC central-station and zone-type units.
g. Tanks and pressure vessels. h. Strainers, filters, water treatment systems and similar equipment. 2. Optional Sign Types: Where lettering larger than 1" height is needed for proper identification, because of distance from normal location of required identification, stenciled signs may be provided in lieu of engraved plastic, at Engineer's option. 3. Lettering Size: Minimum 6 mm high lettering for name of unit where viewing distance is less than 0.6 m, 13 mm high for distances up to 1.8 m , and proportionately larger lettering for greater distances. Provide secondary lettering 2/3 to 3/4 of size of principal lettering. 4. Text of Signs: In addition to name of identified unit, provide lettering to distinguish between multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations. 5. Optional Use of Plasticized Tags: At Engineer's option, where equipment to be identified is concealed above acoustical ceiling or similar concealment, plasticized tags may be installed within concealed space to reduce amount of text in exposed sign (outside concealment). _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-109
Month Year
Projects Name
3.04 A. B.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING Relocate any mechanical identification device which has become visually blocked by work of this division or other divisions. Clean face of identification devices, and glass frames of valve charts. END OF SECTION
Month Year
Projects Name
NOISE, VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS SECTION 15200
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. WORK INCLUDED Sound Noise Levels Attenuators Vibration Control Machinery Bases RELATED WORK Division 15 Mechanical. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION General 1. Acoustic and vibration transmission control shall be applied on all work to obtain the limits specified. 2. Work included : a. All duct systems and associated equipment will be attenuated to prevent both transmission noise and breakout from the equipment at any part of the system. b. All rotating plant will be adequately isolated from the main structure of the building to prevent the transmission of vibration. c. All pipework will be suitably installed to prevent undue strain upon equipment it is connected to and isolation of rotating equipment is also required to prevent the transmission of vibration. 3. All systems and equipment shall be selected and installed to meet the required noise criteria specified herein. Where items are not covered then ASHRE Guide shall be taken as the reference. B. Noise Control Generally 1. System Description a. Systems shall be installed on the basis of noise control to produce the results set out in the schedule below. b. The equipment provided by the Contractor shall be designed and arranged to maintain these criteria. c. Where sound characteristics of selected equipment gives excessive noise then attenuation treatment shall be applied to achieve the desired criteria. Where silencers are scheduled on the drawings the Contractor shall be responsible for any adjustment in size required the meet the desired criteria, based on equipment finally selected. _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-111
1.02 A. 1.03 A.
Month Year
Projects Name
2. The Back-ground noise level inside the building The values of the back-round noise level will be represented by the noise criteria curves, noted NC. All the mechanical equipment, including plumbing, ventilation, elevators and airconditioning should be designed and installed to meet with the noise criteria levels: Bedrooms Public spaces Restaurants Kitchen and Laundry Lounges Labs Executive offices General offices Lobby Lounge Auditorium Classroom Library N.C. and N.C. N.C. N.C. N.C. N.C. N.C. N.C. N.C. N.C. N.C. 30 35 40 35 35 30 35 35 30 30 30
For ventilation, noise levels shall be measured at 1.5 meters from room air outlets at an angle of 45 degrees with a sound level meter having an Octave band analyzer. Noise levels shall be corrected according to the referenced reverberation time.
With all the following collective equipment, the generated noise should not exceed 30 dB(A) inside the building: 3. 4. Lifts Boilers Electrical transformers Motorized parking doors The tolerance of the measurement during the commissioning is fixed to 3 dB (A). this tolerance could not be used in the calculation. It is applied for the site measurement only. The maximum Outdoor Airborne Sound Level It should be less or equal 50 dB (A) from the faade of the building for the inlet and outlet ventilation. For parking, it should be less or equal 55 dB (A). 5. Selected chiller shall have a maximum noise level of 65 dB (A) at 10 m from chiller. The chillers and all other equipment on roof or in rooms shall be surrounded with additional sound proof enclosure to attain a maximum noise level of NR 30 in the nearest room. All to be done by sound specialist.
6. In-Duct Attenuation a. Purpose made attenuators shall be provided in the positions indicated on the drawings. The attenuators shall reduce the sound level produced by the fan to an acceptable level in the occupied spaces. The attenuator shall have adequate strength and cohesion to resist erosion by the air flow and shall not produce dust. The acoustic infill shall be free from
Month Year
Projects Name
odour and proof against rot, damp, vermin. Adhesive shall be compatible with the sound absorbent material and shall be non - flammable. C. Vibration Control Generally 1. System Description a. All equipment and plant shall be so designed that it does not, in itself, vibrate excessively, particularly if its natural frequency is below 20 Hz. The apparatus shall be mounted upon resilient mountings such as cork, rubber or springs, loaded close to the maximum and designed to transmit the least energy to the base without permitting excessive oscillation of machines. b. Select equipment with minimum out-of-balance forces, use control devices to isolate equipment, piping and ducting as necessary. c. All rotating parts of equipment shall be balanced to best commercial tolerances before leaving the factory. 1.04 A. REFERENCES The latest editions of the following standards shall apply : 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM ) a. ASTM E477 : Testing Duct Liner Materials and prefabricated Silencers for Acoustical and Airflow performance. 2. ASHRAE Handbook : Systems - Chapter 35 Sound and Vibration Control. This shall be referred to for items not specifically covered in this section. 1.05 A. SUBMITTALS Product Data 1. Description literature for each of the actual proposed equipment to be used including: a. b. c. d. f. Capacity. Insertion Losses. Pressure Losses. Fluid Flows. Certificates of approval.
B.
Shop Drawings 1. Shop drawing for each of the actual proposed equipment shall include the following: a. b. c. d. e. Working or manufacturing drawings. Calculations. Installation details. Accessories available indicating those included. Pictures.
Month Year
Projects Name
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 A. ATTENUATORS Construction 1. The attenuator casting shall be constructed from not less than 1.6mm thick mild steel, galvanized after manufacture, with all joints continuously welded. The internal splitters shall be manufactured from perforated galvanized sheet steel not less than 0.5 mm thick, with aerodynamically shaped leading and trailing edges. Each splitter shall be secured to the casing by sealed rivets or Pk screws. The acoustic fill shall be an inert, non - combustible, nonhygroscopic and vermin proof mineral wool or fiberglass packed to a density of not less than 70kg/m3 and shall be sealed and protected from particle migration by an impervious membrane B. Performances 1. Attenuator performance should meet the following criteria : Straight Silencers Length (mm) 900 1200 1500 1800 Elbow Silencers Effective Length ( mm ) 1200 1500 5 6 6 9 11 11 18 22 23 25 31 33 27 32 34 23 26 38 16 19 19 10 11 11 Dynamic Insertion /loss (dB) Octave Band Center Frequency ( Hz ) 63 125 250 500 1K 2K 4K 8K 5 5 6 7 7 9 11 13 14 18 22 26 20 25 31 36 22 27 32 37 19 23 26 30 14 16 19 21 9 10 11 12
1600 1800 7 13 26 36 37 30 21 12 2000 7 14 29 40 41 33 23 12 2400 9 17 34 45 47 37 26 14 2. Internal lining of ductwork shall be applied where necessary to achieve the required level. The lining shall be 25 mm thick and 48kg/m3 density otherwise as described for attenuators above with minimum thermal conductivity of 0.055 W/mC.. 3. Where internal duct lining is to be applied the duct sheet metal sizes shall be increased to compensate and thus maintain the net free airway sizes noted on the drawings as duct sizes. 4. Internal duct lining shall have a factory bonded PVC coating fixed to the insulation with a synthetic rubber base adhesive which is flame retardant when dry. 2.02 A. BOXES CASING NOISE The sound power level of the noise radiated from the casings of the boxes shall not exceed the levels schedule below. The noise criteria refer to the spaces below the box location. Noise Criteria Octave Band Center Frequently ( HZ )
Month Year
Projects Name
N. C. N. C. N. C. B. C.
35 40 45
125 59 dB 63 dB 67 dB
250 56 dB 60 dB 65 dB
500 52 dB 57 dB 62 dB
Sound power levels are dB re 10 - 12 watts and are based upon terminal boxes operating with 500 pa inlet air static pressure. Sound power levels shall be determined from reverberate room laboratory test in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 36B-63. Supporting test data shall be submitted showing conformance with the above specification. VIBRATION CONTROL DEVICES General : Select control devices in accordance with Schedule in Part 3. For each item of isolated equipment, supply and install devices for equal deflection, ensure that equipment is leveled and that there is adequate clearance under for cleaning. Isolating Compensators : Where equipment is located on vibration isolation mounts or hangers, isolating compensators shall be used, such that the vibration isolation of the equipment shall be bridged out. See Section 15060. Spring Mounts: 1. Where specified shall generally be of the unhoused steel compression type having a height to diameter ratio not above 2.0 in the loaded condition and providing means for leveling the equipment. Housed type spring mounts may be used only if the design is submitted and approved. 2. The spring design shall be such that the operating deflection does not exceed 2/3rds of the maximum available deflection. 3. Each mount shall incorporate a ribbed neoprene pad at least 8mm thick, to provide isolation of acoustic frequencies . Holding down bolts are not to be used. 4. The number and location of spring mountings shall be such that the supported equipment does not move or rock excessively under starting and normal operating conditions.
2.03 A.
B.
C.
D.
Ribbed Neoprene Pads : Where specified these to be 8 mm to 10mm thick ribbed or waffle patterns of approximately 40 diameter. Pads are to be sized for a resultant load of about 350 kpa and to achieve this loading any necessary bearing feet or pads are to be added to equipment. Where multiple layers of pad are specified or used each layer shall be separated by a 20 gage steel shim. Neoprene Mounts : These shall be of Rubber in Shear mounts in which the rubber material is moulded to steel inserts and is loaded in a composite of compression and shear. These mounts shall be supplied only by manufacturers who provide complete load deflection data and guarantee that data. The mounts shall by design and management be fail safe . The rubber material shall be used where resistance to oil, solvents etc., so dictates. Generally springs shall be suitable for apparatus having a rotational speed of up to 12 revs. Resilient pads shall be so disposed that they are equally compressed whatever the vibration or loading.
E.
F.
G.
Where cork is used the Contractor shall supply the material and be responsible for its correct positioning. All other antivibration mountings shall be supplied and fixed by the Contractor. _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-115
Month Year
Projects Name
2.04 A.
MACHINERY BASES Provide 100mm high concrete bases for all equipment .Each base shall comprise a concrete filled four sided welded galvanized surrounded of 50mm x 50mm x 1.6mm MS angle with return edges fitted with rag-lugs for building in. Accurately position each surrounded before filling with concrete and cove to floor finish. Submit shop drawings of all surrounded and bases. Integrally mount each driving and driven piece of equipment on a suitable steel or cast iron bedplate or in a fabricated frame and isolate as a single unit. Where inertia base is specified in the schedule mount the inertia base on the machinery base specified above. The inertia base shall be of rigid steel and concrete construction of equivalent weight to the machine and motor assembly, the whole mounted on spring and neoprene pad assembly.
B. C.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 A. EQUIPMENT CONSIDERATION Fans 1. Flexible collar connections between fans and ductwork shall be correctly aligned. 2. Centrifugal fans and motor assemblies shall be mounted on a rigid common inertia base, the whole mounted on spring and rubber vibration isolation mounts. 3. For all fans having motor size 7.5 kw or larger, bases shall be of steel and concrete weighing as much as the fan motor assembly. Bases shall be sufficiently rigid to resist any twisting or bending forces, and any dynamic forces, without creating vibration of the base of any other member of the assembly. 4. All holding down bolts shall be installed so as to avoid bridging of isolation. B. Pumps
1. All pumps shall be selected for the highest efficiency consistent with the specified duty, but it is generally desirable that the pump impeller diameter should not exceed 0.90 of the maximum impeller diameter capacity of the pump housing to reduce the possibility of tonal effects. Departure from this to be made only with the approval of the Engineer. The motor and pump assembly shall be mounted on a rigid steel and concrete inertia base of equivalent weight to the pump-motor assembly, the whole mounted on spring isolation mount selected for at least 90% isolation efficiency but in any case having a minimum deflection of 25mm. _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-116
Month Year
Projects Name
2. Pump bases shall be designed to support the weight of elbows, valves and other fittings without creating undue stress on the pump assembly. C. Refrigeration Equipment 1. Chilled water systems incorporating centrifugal compressors shall include bases, frames, etc., to provide proper alignment of the various components. 2. The whole assembly shall be isolated from the structure on pads providing at least 90% isolation efficiency at rotational speed. 3. Ensure that the movement of the equipment during start-up or running is not excessive and if this cannot be met supply the equipment with an inertia base. 3.02 A. B. PIPING All valves, including control valves, shall be adequately sized to prevent unduly high local velocities and cavitation effects. Layout piping for flexibility in each of three planes. All piping connected to spring mounted equipment and up to a distance of 50 diameters shall be supported on hangers having spring and rubber in series and providing at least 32mm static deflection. All other pipe supports or hangers shall incorporate an isolating medium such as felt, ribbed rubber, or high density fiberglass between pipe and hanger or hanger and structure. This applies to all piping installed in horizontal runs or vertical risers. At pipe suspension point : fit pipe with 75mm to 100mm length of rigid fiberglass pipe lagging of appropriate size and then provide oversized clamping bracket to hold pipe firmly without crushing the insulation unduly. For small copper pipes under 25 mm diameter , use wrapping of hair-felt or similar of minimum 15mm thick. Springs to be capable of an additional 50% travel after normal loaded condition takeup. Where uninsulated pipelines penetrate masonry walls and floors between equipment rooms and riser ducts, riser ducts and ceiling spaces etc., they shall be isolated from direct contact with the structure be sleeving with high density fiberglass, felt or other approved material. Care shall be taken to provide a full acoustical seal at such penetrations. Power leads, earthwires, and service pipes shall be provided with flexible connections at convenient points close to the machine. VIBRATION ISOLATOR SCHEDULE Equipment Supply air Fans Return Fans Isolator Type Centrifugal Spring Mounts Spring Mounts Spring Mounts 50 35 25 95 90 90 Minimum Operating Deflection ( mm ) Isolation Efficiency %
C.
D.
E. F.
G. 3.03
Air Centrifugal
All other Exhaust Fans
Month Year
Projects Name
Centrifugal Pumps Chillers
Inertia base plus spring mounts 25 Concrete beams with 12 anti-vibration sylomer pads
98 90
3.04 A. B.
FIXING OF INTERNAL DUCT LININGS Fix lining on the inside of the duct with adjacent sides overlapping at the corners. Lining shall be secured by impaling it over stud-welded rust-proof pins or spot-welded sheet metal split lugs at not less than 300mm centres with a minimum of two rows of fastenings per duct side. Washers shall be fitted over the pins or lugs and applied flush to the face of the insulation without depressing the surface more than 3mm. END OF SECTION
C.
Month Year
Projects Name
SECTION 15250 INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. WORK INCLUDED The work includes the supply and fitting of insulation for : 1. Pipe Work. 2. Ductwork. 1.02 A. 1.03 A. B. RELATED WORK Division 15 Mechanical. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Provide insulation as indicated and specified. Work included : 1. The following piping systems shall be insulated : a. b. c. d. e. f. Domestic hot water systems ( including hot water return ) . Chilled water supply and return. Condenser water pipes (Dry cooler). Steam supply, and condensate return piping. Boiler blow down and relief valve vent piping. Boiler feed water and condensate pump piping.
2. The following duct systems shall be insulated : a. b. c. d. e. High and low pressure supply air ductwork ( both exposed and concealed ). Air conditioning plenums, housings, and cold sections that are not factory insulated. Return air ductwork . Fresh air ductwork located in air-conditioned spaces. Kitchen hood exhaust ducts.
3. The following equipment shall be insulated: a. Hydronic system expansion tanks. b. Heat exchangers, converters and water tanks c. Chilled & heating water pump housings. C. Work Not Included: 1. The following ductwork systems shall not be insulated: a. General space exhaust air ductwork. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Month Year
Projects Name
A. B.
Piping shall be tested before insulation is applied. All insulation, jacket or facing, and adhesive used to adhere jacket o facing to the insulation, (installed indoors), shall have fire and smoke hazard ratings as tested by procedure ASTM E-84, not exceeding flame spread of 25, and smoke developed of 150. Accessories such as adhesives, mastics, comments, tapes and cloths for fittings shall have similar component ratings. Installers Qualifications : 1. Use only applicators regularly engaged in the business of insulating mechanical systems.
C.
D. E.
Application details shall be in accordance with the insulating material suppliers recommendations except where a higher standard is specified herein. To ensure the correct specification and thickness of insulation has been applied, The Contractor shall , if required by the Engineer , cut one of the sections from the finished covering. If defects are revealed, the Contractor shall, at his own expense remove the whole of the covering and provide and fix new insulation to the satisfaction of the Engineer. REFERENCES Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials ( ASTM ). a. E84, Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
1.05 A.
1.06 A.
DEFINITIONS Concealed refers to insulation: 1. Above ceilings. 2. Enclosed in equipment casings or metal enclosures . 3. In partitions, pipe shafts, or furred spaces. 4. In unfinished spaces, providing that it is at least 2.5 m above floor , and further providing that it is at least 1.25 m from any equipment.
B. C. D.
Exposed refers to insulation in view, in finished spaces. Exterior Refers to outdoors. Interior Refers to indoors.
1.07 A.
SUBMITTALS Provide submittals identified in the following paragraphs:
1. Submit product data on insulation materials , mastics, adhesives, and accessories defining insulation values, installation methods, flames spread/smoke develop rating, and certificates indicating that the insulation materials meet the specified requirements. _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-120
Month Year
Projects Name
2. Submit samples of each type of insulation material specified in this Section. Samples shall be as follows: a. Pipe Insulation: mean pipe diameter, 150mm long. b. Duct Insulation : 300 mm square by listed thickness. c. Equipment Insulation : 300 mm square by listed thickness. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 A. DUCTWORK THERMAL INSULATION Material 1. The thermal insulation material shall be made from long, Rockwool or fine glass fibers with aluminum foil vapour barrier . Insulating material applied to rectangular ductwork shall be bonded with a temperature resistant binder and formed into rigid slabs. Insulating material applied to circular or spirally wound flat oval ductwork shall be formed into a flexible mat. 2. The thermal insulating material shall be classed as being of low flammability. A material shall be deemed to be non-combustible if , during the test, non of the three samples either cause the reading from either of the two thermometers to rise by 50C or more above the initial furnace temperature or is observed to flame continuously for 10 seconds or more inside the furnace. 3. The thermal insulating material shall also be free from objectionable odour at the temperature at which it is also be used, unable to encourage pests or support the growth of fungi , suffer deterioration under the specific conditions of use or as a result of contact with moisture due to condensation, and capable of being applied to the surfaces concerned without causing corrosion under site conditions. 4. The thermal conductivity of the insulation shall be between 0.04 W/mC and 0.055 W/mC at the normal working temperature of the fluid and shall be of a minimum thickness of 40mm when applied in equipment rooms and 40 mm thick when applied elsewhere. Tests to prove the thickness, the uniformity of thickness, and the thermal conductivity of the thermal insulation are described below. These tests shall be carried out after the application of the thermal insulation to the ductwork by the Contractor and shall be witnessed by the resident mechanical engineer or his representative. 5. The thickness of the insulation shall be tested by nine probe measurements at a given location and if the arithmetical mean thickness derived by these probes is less than the stated thickness above , within a tolerance of 15%, the material shall be deemed not to comply with this specification. 6. The uniformity of thickness shall be assessed from the previous measurements. If any one of the measurements varies from the arithmetical mean of all readings by +13 mm or 15% whichever is less that portion of insulation shall be replaced. 7. The insulation shall be deemed to be unsatisfactory and shall be replaced if the results of tests show that the thermal conductivity of the material at the normal working temperatures of the fluid in the duct is greater than the range of thermal conductivities specified, within a tolerance of +15%. B. Thermal Insulation Inside Equipment Rooms & Outdoor Ducts.
Month Year
Projects Name
1. Insulation shall be 40 mm thick rigid Rockwool or fibreglass not less than 48kg/m3 (K=0.04 to 00.043 w/mk) with aluminum foil. The insulation panels shall be implied on pin and clip fasteners spaced 300mm to 400mm centers on the metal surface. The top and bottom panels shall be applied to lap the sides. 2. The thermal insulation shall have the required vapor barrier finishes factory applied and shall comprise a highly burnished, heavy duty aluminum foil facing, to provide a degree of vapour seal and backed by a non-hygroscopic glass fibre reinforcing fitted both longitudinally and laterally, a non flammable synthetic resin laminate and a flame-proof Kraft paper. The insulation shall be cut to suit, so that top and bottom pieces overlap the sides, and the whole bonded to the ducting. All joints shall be sealed with tape 50mm minimum wide, consisting of the finish specified above with a pressure sensitive adhesive on the paper surface and backed with a quick release silicone coated paper. Care shall be taken that no dirt or grease is allowed to come in contact with the edges of the insulating material prior to the application of the sealing tape. 3. All unavoidable penetrations of foil vapor seal and terminations shall be sealed. 4. All insulated ductwork shall be wrapped with Aluminum jacketing 0.6 mm thick. C. Thermal Insulation Outside Equipment Rooms and in shafts: 1. Insulation shall be 40 mm thick flexible blanket of glass fibre or Rockwool with aluminum foil with a density of not less than 30 kg/m3 and K = 0.04w/k. 2. All insulated ductwork outside equipment rooms and I shafts shall have a finish as specified for inside equipment rooms, wrapped with cartoon and closed knit glass fiber scrim with Vaposeal water base, 1mm thick similar to IDENDEN FAB link and IDENDEN 30-90 respectively or approved equal. Alternative wrapping is 8-ounce canvas with adhesive plaster similar to KLEBRVIL or approved equal. Exposed insulated ducts and pipework shall have an additional 2 layers of water base paint to an approved color by the architect (Tinol, Sipes etc).
Month Year
Projects Name
2.02 A.
PIPEWORK THERMAL INSULATION ( Type A) Material 1. Thermal insulating material shall be made from long, fine fiber glass, Rockwool, free from short or coarse fibers, bonded with a temperature resistant binder and formed into a cylindrical or semi-cylindrical rigid pipe sections with aluminum foil facing as described in duct insulation of thickness as specified below with a thermal conductivity of not greater than 0.05W/mC. Insulation exposed on roof tank and in Mechanical Rooms shall have a density of 96kg/m3. Insulation in false ceiling voids and shafts shall have a density of 64 kg/m3. Insulation shall be Rockwool fabricated by Al Fujairah Rockwool factory. 2. Thickness of Insulation
a. STEAM NOM-BORE MM 15-40 50-65 80-125 150-300 above 300 b. CONDENSOR WATER PIPS NOM-BORE MM 15-32 40-100 100-200 200-300 above 300 c. DOMESTIC HOT WATER SUPPLY NOM-BORE MM 15-32 40-100 125 150 & above THICKNESS MM 25 30 40 50 THICKNESS MM 25 32 40 50 65 CHILLED WATER NOM-BORE MM. 15-40 50-100 150 & above THICKNESS MM 40 50 65 THICKNESS MM 30 40 50 50 65 CONDENSATE NOM-BORE MM. 15-35 42-76 108 133-300 THICKNESS MM 25 30 40 50
above 300& flat 50 surface
3. The insulation shall have an alkalinity of between PH6.0 and PH10.0. Then insulation shall not include substances which will promote corrosive attack on the services with which it is to be in contact. The insulation shall also be free from objectionable odour at the temperature at which it is to be used, unable to encourage pests or support the growth of fungi, or suffer deterioration _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-123
Month Year
Projects Name
under the specific conditions of use or as a result of contact with moisture due to thickness, uniformity of thickness and internal diameter from manufacturers standards dimension are as follows: Thickness : Uniformity of thickness Internal Diameter : B. + 3 mm The local thickness at any point shall not differ from the average thickness by more than 3 mm. -0+1.5 or 1% , whichever is the greater.
Thermal Insulation in Equipment Rooms & Outdoor 1. For all services the performed Section shall have aluminum foil facing factory applied with an overlap of 38 mm on longitudinal joints and 25 mm on end joints. The overlap shall be secured by adhesive and additionally secured with aluminum bands 25mm wide applied a each end joint, ( two, one on each side ) and intermediately at 600 mm centers. The whole shall then be protected and finished by a fabricated aluminum casing with hammered finish. The aluminum shall not be less than 0.6mm thick on pipework of under 150mm, measured over the insulation, and not less than 0.8mm thick on pipework of 150 mm and over, measured over the insulation. Bends, elbow, tees, etc., shall be fabricate from the same gauge aluminum as the straight length adjacent. For detachable valve and flange boxes the aluminum shall not be less than 1.0 mm thick. Valve bodies and flanges shall be insulated by muff covers. They shall be arranged for easy removal and finished with fabric sewn-on or applied with an adhesive. 2. For chilled water systems the performed sections shall have a vapor seal comprising an aluminum foil facing backed by a non-hygroscopic glass fibre reinforcing both longitudinal and laterally, or non - flammable synthetic resin laminent and flameproof Kraft paper. The seal shall be adhered to the insulation at the manufacturer's works and shall be provided with overlaps of 38mm on longitudinal joints, for sealing on site. All unlapped joints shall be sealed with a tape consisting of the paper surface and backed with a tape consisting of the paper surface and backed with a quick release silicon coated paper. The whole shall then be protected and finished by a fabricated aluminum casing with hammered finish as described above.
C.
Thermal Insulation Outside of Equipment Rooms and Shafts 1. In permanently concealed situations on systems, the insulation shall have aluminum foil facing, factory applied. The facing shall have well passed down overlaps of 38mm on longitudinal joints and 25 mm on end joints and adjacent lengths clipped together with circumferential aluminum bands 25mm wide. Additional bands shall be applied at 600mm centers.
Month Year
Projects Name
2. In all enclosures on systems the insulation shall have aluminum foil facing wrapped with a cotton canvas finish, not less than 272 g/m2 site applied with adhesive plaster similar to KLEBERVIL or approved equal. The canvas shall have well pasted overlaps of 38mm on longitudinal joints and 25mm on end joints and secured with aluminum circumferential bands and 25mm wide, and finally painted with two coats of good quality heat resistant water paint. A coat of primary paint shall be applied, of the color specified. 3. On visible pipework for all systems the insulation shall have a finish comprising of a white water proof vinyl facing to provide a hard, washable surface backed by a non- hydroscopic glass fiber reinforcing both longitudinally and laterally, a non-flammable synthetic resin laminate and flameproof Kraft paper. The finish shall be adhered to the sectional insulations at the manufacturers works with overlaps of 38mm on longitudinal joints and sealed on site. All end and unlapped joints shall be sealed with a tape consisting of the above finish with a pressure sensitive adhesive on the paper surface and backed with a quick release silicone coated paper. Care shall be taken that no dirt or grease is allowed to come in contact with the edges of the insulation material prior to the application of the sealing tape. D. Equipment Insulation 1. Condensate receivers tank, calorifiers, chilled water expansion vessels, chilled water pumps and heat exchangers shall be insulated with insulation in the form of a flexible mating. Rockwool 120 kg/m3, 50 mm thick. The insulation mating shall be securely fixed by aluminum wire mesh and aluminum bands. The whole shall be protected and finished by a 1.0 mm fabricated aluminum casing with a hammered finish as specified above for pipework. 2. Surfaces of chilled water expansion vessels and chilled water pump casings shall be insulated as described in D.1 except that in lieu of the hard setting compound described, a fire resistive mastic vapor proof barrier shall be applied to the surface of the insulation. The vapor barrier shall be applied in 2 coats with an open weave glass cloths between. The overall water vapor transmission shall not exceed 0.08 per m at 1.9mm dry film thickness. 3. The minimum thickness of equipment insulation shall be 50mm. E. Duct and Pipe Fittings Insulation 1. Where hangers are installed on the pipe covered with insulation, the entire hanger up to the rod shall be insulated. 2. Where insulated piping is subject to movement and supported on rollers and chairs, or sliding plate brackets, steel protection saddles shall be provided. 3. All insulated pipework not supported as described in Section 15060 but subject to movement, shall be provided with protection shields at all hanger locations. Shields shall be No. 10 gauge galvanized iron extending on each side of the hanger for a distance equal to the diameter of the insulation and shall be provided with cork pad support. 4. Special care shall be exercised in insulating chilled water pipework and cold supply ductwork to prevent sweat leaks at hanger locations and to ensure continuity of vapor seal over brackets. Provide cork or timber blocks/between duct or/pipe and bracket and run vapor seal continuously between block and bracket. 5. Insulate valves, strainers, fittings and flanges with identical material, density, thickness and finish as the pipe insulation. Use premoulded material where available, otherwise use shaped block segments wired on with all edges filled with insulating cement or filler. _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-125
Month Year
Projects Name
6. Insulate strainers to permit removal of the basket without disturbing the insulation of the strainer body. 2.03 PIPEWORK THERMAL INSULATION ( TYPE B) This type of insulation shall apply to refrigerant pipes, condensate drain pipes from Airconditioning equipment and to domestic hot water system under tiles or in walls. Pipes shall be insulated with rubber type insulation Armaflex 19 mm thick. Insulation shall be closed sell tubing with finished skin, chemical and oil resistant with minimum water absorption. Insulation shall stand extremes temperatures ranging from 40C to 120C. Inner tubing insulation diameter shall be equal to outer utility pipe diameter. Rubber insulation shall be wrapped with 2 layers of PVC tape. Insulation density shall be 0.111 Gms/m3 with thermal conductivity K value at 40C mean temperature 0.041 W/M-K insulation shall be self extinguishing. Insulation shall be ASTM approved similar to Gulf O Flex or approved equal. 2.04 PIPEWORK INSULATION - TYPE C This type of insulation shall apply to Laundry exhaust ducts, boiler breeching, chimney and exhaust pipe of the diesel fire pump and generator exhaust pipe. Insulation shall be of rockwool ( 120kg/m3) 100 mm thick with aluminum sheet metal jacket 0.8 mm thick as described for heating water pipes in Mechanical Rooms 2.05 RANGE HOOD EXHAUST DUCT - INSULATION Insulation shall be 50 mm thick Rockwool having a density of 90 kg/m3 wrapped with aluminum wire mesh, cartoon, canvas and close knit glass fiber scrim with vapor-seal water base, 1 mm thick similar to IDENDEN FAB link and IDENDEN30-90 respectively and as described for ductworks in false ceiling and in shafts. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 A. B. C. INSPECTION: Prior to all work of this Section, carefully inspect the installation of the materials and equipment to be insulated to verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence. Verify that all insulation may be installed in accordance with all governing codes and regulations, the original design, the referenced standards, and the manufacturers written instructions. Verify that equipment surfaces are thoroughly clean and dry.
3.02 A. 3.03
TESTS Do not install insulation until specified tests have been conducted on the system to be insulated and results approved. QUALITY
Month Year
Projects Name
A.
Particular attention shall be given to the finished appearances of all thermal insulation and cladding which must present a neat and symmetrical appearance running true in line with pipe layouts. Any rough, irregular or badly finished surfaces shall be removed and replaced to the satisfaction. All pipework shall be insulated separately, adjacent and parallel pipes shall not be married together with insulating materials. Thermal insulation materials and their finishes shall be asbestos free. Canvas jackets shall be noncombustible and flame-resistant. For painting and identification of the finished insulation refer to Sections 09900 and 01086. Due allowance shall be made in all insulation applications to cater for movement due to expansion and the Contractor shall provide and fix the necessary space piece to ensure that the insulation is continuous where pipework passes through walls, floors, pipe brackets etc. and other thin fire divisions. The Contractor shall ensure that particular attention shall be paid to sealing the insulation against water or water vapor ingress at all flanges, expansion joints, valves, anchors and pipe supports. APPROVED MANUFACTURERS Johns Manville ( USA ) Armstrong ( France ) Fiberglass Limited ( UK ) Isotoprack ( Turkey ) ST. Goban ( France ) Al Fugairah Rockwool Factory END OF SECTION
B. C. D. E.
F. 3.04
Month Year
Projects Name
SECTION 15310 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. SUMMARY Provide labor, materials, equipment and services, and perform operations required for complete installation of Plumbing Equipment and related work as indicated on the drawings and specified herein. Work Included: The work shall include, but not be limited to, the following: Portable Fire Extinguishers. Fire hose cabinets 1. Wet Chemical extinguishers for kitchen hood. 3. FM200 automatic fire protection system for hazardous rooms 4. Wet riser. 5. Sprinkler system in general stores (4th basement).
1. 2.
B.
C.
Related Work Specified Elsewhere 1. 2. Basic Mechanical Requirements - Section 15010. Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods - Section 15050.
1.02 A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Materials and work shall conform to the latest edition of industry standards, reference specifications listed below and specified herein and to applicable codes and requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent. SUBMITTALS A. 1. a. 2. Submit the following in accordance with Section 15010.
1.03
Product Data Submit copies of manufacturer's latest published literature for materials specified herein for approval; obtain approval before ordering materials. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for work specified herein for approval.
1.04 A. B.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Deliver materials and handle so as to prevent the inclusion of foreign materials and the damage of materials. Store materials where designated and assume responsibility and security for materials and equipment. Take precautions for protection from detrimental conditions.
Month Year
Projects Name
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL DESCRIPTION Supply and install, wherever shown on the Drawings, complete fire fighting systems of the following types:

Wet piping network with complete automatic sprinkler systems, fire hose cabinets & landing valve where shown on the drawings. Portable fire extinguishers wherever prescribed and shown on the drawings. Wet chemical extinguishers for kitchen hood. FM200 system for fuel oil room, and boiler room. FM 200 system for electrical rooms. Siamese connection for fire brigade.
All valves shall be located where readily accessible and shall be of the rising stem with and switch for monitoring in the fire alarm panel. No item shall be installed in breach of any of the existing local fire department regulations. In all cases, however, installation shall comply fully with National Fire Codes (NFPA Latest Edition). All fire fighting equipment and accessories including but not limited to fire pumps, jockey pumps, controllers, valves, zone valves, flow switches, landing valves, sprinkler heads, smoke and fire dampers etc shall be UL / FM approved. All local alarms shall be linked with the electrical fire control panel wherever shown on the Drawings in such a way that whenever any local alarm is initiated, a corresponding pilot light and alarm shall be actuated on the control panel to indicate occurrence of fire in the particular zone. Control Wiring shall be part of the fire fighting system and is included under the Electrical Section and shall be fire rated according to NFPA-70.
The wet riser system shall be supplied and installed complete with: Landing Valves Siamese connections Hose Cabinets Automatic sprinklers Fire Pumps Flow switch and Necessary Piping Network Necessary Fire Alarm Bells
All as specified hereinafter.
Month Year
Projects Name
2.02
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Piping shall be pitched to permit complete draining of the system. Fire standpipe shall not be used in any way to provide water for other purposes. All valves shall be readily accessible and risers shall be securely supported at each floor. All valves shall be located where readily accessible and shall be of the rising stem type with supervisory switch connected to fire alarm panel. No item shall be installed in breach of any of the existing local fire Department regulations. In all cases, however, installation shall comply full with NFPA with all equipment and accessories UL/FM approved. Contractor shall submit hydraulic calculations for all fire fighting systems to the Engineer for approval including product data, shop drawings, certificate of installation in accordance with NFPA requirements, as built drawings and maintenance data.
2.03
PIPES & FITTINGS A. Indoor Pipes 1. ASTM A53, Schedule 40, Black seamless steel pipe as described in section 15401 paragraph 2.02 C. Contractor to provide use victaulic mechanical pipe coupling with mechanical locking device with central cavity pressure responsive gasket all subject to the Engineer approval and at no additional cost to the contract. All components of the system shall be UL listed, FM approved and complying with NFPA Standard 13. All system components shall be furnished by the same manufacturer, Victaulic Company of America, or approved equal. Engineer can reject to use this alternative if he finds that the proposal is unacceptable without giving any justification to the contractor. All fittings shall be of ductile iron conforming to ASTM A 536 or malleable iron to ASTM A-47. Valves shall be Grooved ends from the same system manufacturer UL/FM approved and in accordance with NFPA Standard.
B.
Fittings ( 50 mm and smaller ) 1. 2. ANSI B16.3, 1 MPa, malleable iron, threaded. Threads : ANSI B1.20.1.
C.
Fittings ( 65 mm and larger ) 1. ANSI B16.9, standard weight.
D.
Flanges : ANSI B16.5, Class 150
Month Year
Projects Name
E.
Gaskets 1. Full faced, 1.5 thick corrugated brass ring suitable for the fluid temperature and pressure for which they will be used.
F.
Nuts and Bolts ( for flanged joints) 1. Steel regular unfinished square head machine bolts shall be threaded U.S. National Coarse Threads Series, ANSI B1.1 , Class 2 fit, and shall be furnished with heavy pattern unfinished hex nuts, ANSI, B18.2.1 and B18.2.2. Threads shall be coated with a rust preventative lubricant and bolts and nuts packaged separately.
G.
Sleeves 1. Malleable iron having female pattern, bras to iron seat, and ground joint. Unions shall be rated at 1 MPa working pressure.
2.04
TESTS Fire line piping shall be tested at 300 psi hydrostatic pressure. Prescribed test shall be maintained for two hours without any perceptible drop in pressure. Test shall be performed in the presence of, and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
2.05 A)
VALVES Gate Valves Gate valves shall be designed for the indicated working pressure whether valves are opened or closed. a) Bronze gate valve on wall equipment to be heavy duty type, heavy weight and meet ASTM B62, non rising stem, PN20. b) Cast iron gate valve for all equipment except fire fighting, shall be heavy duty type and in accordance with ASTM A126, O.S & Y, rising stem, PN16. c) Gate valve for fire fighting to be : Carbon steel body, flanged, class 150, O.S&Y, rising stem, flexible wedge, metal seated, flanges to B16.5, with temper switch, in accordance with: ASTM A216 WCB Carbon Steel Body ASTM A105 Carbon Steel Wedge AWS A5.9 ER430 Stainless Steel Facing Hydrostatic shell pressure test 450 lbs/in2 Hydrostatic seat pressure test 315 lbs/in2
Month Year
Projects Name
d) Valves with rising stems shall be with outside screw and yoke, O.S & Y and shall be provided for fire fighting systems and for all equipment isolating valve 2 diameter and above located in mechanical areas and rooms such as chillers, pumps, AHUs, water tanks .etc. B) Check Valves Check valves shall be used on the discharge side of pumps and whenever shown on the drawings or requested by the Engineer. Material & pressure to be as 2.01. Check valves shall be swing type. 2.06 WET RISER Wet riser system shall comprise a wet stand pipe ,fire brigade Siamese connection, and fire hose cabinets and landing valves. 2.07 A. WET RISER SYSTEM SIAMESE CONNECTION Siamese connection shall be installed where shown on Drawings at a convenient height from finished side walk level and shall be chrome plated extra heavy cast brass complete with the following: 6" x 2 1/2" x 2 1/2" (150 x 65 x 65 mm ) Free standing Siamese connection 300 psi (2070 Kpa) UL/FM approved with drain cock and check valves with thread adaptor to suit local fire brigade requirements. All chains, caps and screws used for fixing.
Approved Manufacturers GRINNEL ( USA ) W.D. ALLEN MANUFACTURING ( USA ) ELKART BRASS Mfg. Co. ( USA ) B. FIRE HOSE LANDING VALVE Fire hose landing valve shall be angle type, 300 psi (2070 Kpa) pressure regulating globe valve housed in steel cabinet with glass door complete with polished, chrome-plated brass body and trim, red cast iron wheel handle, bronze stem, renewable composition disc, threaded 2 1/2" (65mm) psi female inlet and quick coupling adapter outlet with polished brass chrome plated cap and chain. Landing valve shall be UL/FM with thread adaptor to comply with local fire brigade requirements. Cabinet shall be painted with electro-static powder paint over baked.
Month Year
Projects Name
C) i)
Fire Hose Cabinet General Supply and install fire hose cabinets wherever shown and to the details indicated on the Drawings. Cabinet shall be constructed of steel 16-gauge for trim, 18 gauge for "tub" and 20-gauge for door. Cabinet size shall be in accordance with the details shown on the Drawings. Cabinet door shall be flush, all-steel with chrome-plated, pull handle and tension latches, and shall be equipped with full length piano hinges on the right or the left as conditions require. Cabinet shall receive an approved shop coat of paint inside and outside.
Approved Manufacturers MARCON FIRE LARSENS Mfg. Co. ELKHART BRASS Mfg. Co. Or approved equal ii) Fire Hose Cabinet FHC Fire hose cabinet shall be exposed type as required and shall include the following: Fire hose diameter 1" (25 mm) , 30 m long, rubber type fire hose with a working pressure of 150 psi. (1030 Kpa) with brass hose coupling attached. BS certified with Kite mark. Hose reel of the swinging type, up to 180 o full swing complete with guide arm. BS certified with Kite mark. All brass, chromium plated diameter 1" (25 mm) fog nozzle capable of complete shut off, straight stream or any degree of solid conical fog. BS certified with Kite mark. Diameter 1" (40 mm) bronze gate valve (UL/FM approved) with 1 reducer. Diameter 2 (65mm) landing valve (UL/FM approved). 6 kgs. Nitrogen operated dry chemical fire extinguisher with spray hose and nozzle. UL/FM approved. Flow switch on fire pipe. UL/FM approved with connection to fire panel. ( England ) ( USA ) ( USA )
iii)
Hose & Equipment Cabinet Contractor shall supply and install where advised by the Engineer Hose & Equipment steel
Month Year
Projects Name
cabinet, exposed type approx. size 1 x 0.7 m made of 1.5 mm steel sheet with corrosion protection paint and coating as FHC complete with full metal hinged door, 2 linear type hoses 65 mm diameter, 30 meter long with 2 no spray/fog nozzles 65 mm diameter and 2 couplings for connection to landing valves and all accessories, all UL FM approved. 2.08 A) FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Sprinkler installations shall comply fully with the requirements of NFPA section 13 and/or the rules of the fire offices committee, 29th edition. All equipment and accessories of sprinkler system shall be UL / FM approved. Provision shall be made for flushing the system. All piping shall be installed so that the system may be thoroughly drained. The piping shall be pitched in the direction of drainage. Drain valves shall be provided where necessary, where shown on the Drawings and at all sectional valves to help draining the major part of the system. On all risers 4" (100mm) or larger, drain valve shall be 2"(50mm) size, on 2 1/2" (65mm) and 3" (80mm) risers, 1 1/4" (32 mm) valves shall be used and on small risers, 3/4" (20mm) drain valves shall be provided. No direct interconnections shall be made between sewers and sprinkler drain systems. Sprinkler piping shall not be used, in any way, for domestic water supply purposes. All valves controlling the water supply shall be located where readily accessible. Provision shall be made for test connections and valves. Contractor shall submit hydraulic calculation for approval prior to commencing the works.
B) TESTS -
The system shall be subjected to a hydrostatic pressure test, to the satisfaction and in the presence of the Engineer. Pressure shall not be less than 300 psi (21kg/cm2).
If leaks develop during the test, the contractor shall make all necessary repairs and shall retest the system at no additional cost to the Employer.
C)
SIGNS Provide at sprinkler test valve a metal sign 100 x 200 mm size with white letters on red background, reading "SPRINKLER TEST VALVE". Letters shall not be less than 50 mm in height.
D) SPRINKLER HEAD-CEILING TYPE _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-134
Month Year
Projects Name
Sprinkler heads in spaces without false ceiling, shall be upright, pendent or side wall to conform with site conditions and as approved by the Engineer. Sprinkler heads shall conform to ordinary hazard temperature rating with fusible bulb and protective guard. Not less than 12 spare sprinkler heads shall be provided together with sprinkler head wrenches, all supported on steel clip in a suitable steel cabinet with hinged door and latch. Cabinets shall be finished in red enamel with white letters on door reading: " SPARE SPRINKLER PARTS". Cabinets shall be wall hung and in compliance with all authorities having jurisdiction. Location of cabinet shall be as directed by the Engineer. Each sprinkler shall be complete as specified herein:
a) b) c) d) e) f)
15 mm bulb type High quality brass body and deflector K factor equal 5.5. Temperature rating to conform to hazard classification of various areas as indicated above. Sprinkler heads shall be UL/FM approved. Protection guard of chrome plated steel construction for sprinkler in parking floors, mechanical and technical areas. (USA ) (USA ) ( USA )
Approved Manufacturers Automatic Sprinkler Coporation of America GRINNEL VIKING Or approved equal E) FLOW SWITCH - ELECTRIC TYPE
The water flow alarm device shall consist of an electrical switching device actuated by means of a vane extending inside the standpipe so designed that when water flows inside the standpipe the moving vane shall close the circuit in the motor switch which shall complete the circuit and actuate an alarm. Flow switch shall be installed on each fire hose cabinet and main fire pipe serving sprinklers in each floor and where indicated on drawings. Flow switch shall be UL / FM approved. Approved Manufacturers GRINNELL VIKING Automatic Sprinkler Corporation of America Or approved equal. ( USA ) ( USA ) ( USA )
Month Year
Projects Name
F)
DRAIN & TEST VALVE The drain and test valve is to drain the sprinkler installation of water after a fire has been extinguished and before replacing the sprinklers that have operated. It is also used to test the running pressure of the water supplies. Drain & test valve shall be UL/FM approved.
G)
SUPERVISORY SWITCHES Provide UL listed and FM approved tamper switches on all valves of fire water system. arranged to detect the open or close position of control valves. Switches to be attached to the various control valves being supervised and to be complete with tamper switches. required trim and electrical characteristics compatible with those of the fire alarm system supervisory switches.
H)
ALARM BELLS Provide alarm bell at each water flow indicator and at central location where indicated. Bells to be 150 mm size single stroke or vibrating type as required by the service and are to operate on 240 V single phase 50 Hz. Alarm bells shall be UL/FM approved.
I)
ALARM CHECK VALVE Supply and install alarm check valve assembly with all trims and accessories UL/FM approved wherever shown on drawings and as specified herein. a. Alarm Check Valve: constructed and equipped to give clear positive audible alarm at water flow equal to or greater than from single sprinkler. Suitable for vertical installation and for variable pressure water supply. Alarm Check Valve to be flanged. designed for 300 psi (21kg/cm2) working pressure with cast iron body and clapper hinge bronze clapper assembly. pilot valve assembly and other moving parts. Alarm Check Valve: to be complete with retarding chamber, 50 diameter angle main drain valve, upstream and downstream pressure gauges with gauge cocks, alarm control and test valves. pressure operated alarm switch to actuate bell, horn or siren or perform other electrical functions and set to operate at 0.25 or 0.5 kg/cm2 water pressure. with alarm drain and check valve and all interconnecting galvanized steel piping. Alarm Check Valve: as manufactured by Automatic Sprinkler Corporation, of America, Grinnel ( USA), Reliable USA or approved equal. FIRE ZONE CONTROL VALVE Shall conform to NFPA requirement complete with indicating type gate valve water flow switch with signal to fire alarm, sight glass, test valve, sectional drain valve and pressure reducing valve complete as shown on drawings. All UL/FM approved. All rated to 20 bar working pressure.
b.
c.
d. J)
Month Year
Projects Name
2.09 A)
FM-200 TOTAL FLOODING FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM General Supply and install complete non toxicgases fire fighting systems of FM-200 or equal agents wherever shown on the drawings and as specified hereinafter. The System shall be of the total flooding type in compliance with standard 2001. The FM-200 system shall be complete with duty and standby banks of storage cylinders, releasing devices, detection devices, alarm signals, piping network and a control panel with battery standby. All components shall be UL listed and FM approved.
B)
Agent Storage Containers The suppressant sub-system provide high speed release of FM-200 based on the concept of total flooring fire protection for enclosed areas. A uniform extinguishing concentration shall be seven (7) percent concentration of FM-200 at 70 oF. FM-200 shall be stored central storage steel alloy storage containers complying with D.O.T. Specifications 4BA or 4DW and shall be equipped with differential pressure valves. No replacement parts shall be necessary to recharge the FM-200 containers. The FM-200 discharge shall be provided by an output directly from the control panel, which will activate ht solenoid in the releasing device. FM-200 agent is stored in the container as a liquid, having a natural vapor pressure of 66.4 psia at 77 oF. To aid release and distribution, the container shall be supper pressurized to 360 psig at 70 oF with dry nitrogen. Storage container shall be located as close to the protected area as possible to insure complete liquid discharge of the suppressant agent within 10 seconds.
C)
Releasing Devices FM-200 shall be discharged through the operation of a solenoid operated device which releases the agent through a differential pressure valve. Systems which employ explosive or pyrotechnic devices shall not be permitted. The system discharge time shall be in accordance with the NFPA Standard 2001 or 10 seconds. The releasing device shall also be capable of direct mechanical actuation, providing a means of discharge in the event of total electrical malfunction. All agent storage containers shall be activated by either an electrical manual discharge station, an automatic device (or devices) or by direct mechanical actuation.
FM-200 storage cylinders shall be provided with a safety rupture disc. An increase in internal pressure due to high temperature shall rupture the safety disc and allow the _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-137
Month Year
Projects Name
contents to vent before the rupture pressure of the container is reached. The contents shall not be vented through the discharge piping and nozzles. FM-200 containers shall be equipped with a pressure gauge to display internal pressures. A low pressure switch shall be provided as standard equipment on the containers. A decrease in pressure will cause the normally open contacts to close, indicating a trouble condition at the control panel. A liquid level device shall be standard equipment on all the containers. This device will provide a reliable means other than weighing for determining the agent weight with the storage container during normal routine servicing. Discharge Nozzles Discharge nozzle shall be used to disperse the FM-200. The nozzles shall be brass with female/male threads and available in 1" through 2" size. Each size shall come in tow styles: 180o and 360o dispersion patterns. The nozzle used shall be provided with pipe threads that correspond to the nozzle size. Nozzle design shall be such that deflector plates shall not be necessary to protect ceiling tiles. The nozzle used shall be FM approved and UL listed. Each FM-200 system shall utilize a solenoid operated releasing device which causes discharge of all storage containers in the system. Each releasing device shall be separately series supervised and operated directly from the control panel. The extinguishing agent shall be FM-200 bromotrifluoromethane (CBrF3). Detection The detection and control system shall employ photoelectric, ionization smoke detectors and heat detectors. A single detector activated shall cause an alarm signal to be generated. A second detector activated shall generate a pre-discharge signal and start the predischarge conditions. a) Ionization Smoke Detectors The products of combustion detectors, ionization type, shall utilize solid state circuitry and be of the dual chamber, bipolar configuration. One chamber shall be opened to sense particles of combustion while the other will be used as a reference chamber for stability. The unit shall be designed so as to be unaffected by FR and energy from 1 kHz through 1000 mHZ in a field strength of up to 10 millivolts per meter. Ionization detectors which are designed such that sensitivity decreases in the presence of air movement shall not be permitted. The detectors shall also be unaffected by air velocities up to 1000 FPM.
D) -
E)
b)
Photoelectric Smoke Detectors The products of combustion detectors, photoelectric type, shall utilize solid state circuitry, a pulsed, infrared, L.E.D. light source and a silicon photo diode receiving element. The receiving element will normally not sense any light from the L.E.D
Month Year
Projects Name
source. When smoke particles enter the sensing chamber, the light source shall be reflected to the sensing element. Comparator circuitry shall be used so as to discriminate between a valid fire signal and an intermittent non-fire source. The entrance to the sensing chamber shall be surrounded by a fine stainless steel mesh so as to prevent ready entry by insects, lint or dust. Unit shall be dew-proof and uninfluenced by high air velocity. The detectors shall be Factory Mutual Approved and UL listed to meet UL Standard 268. c) Thermal Detector The thermal detector shall be a rate-compensated fixed temperature type. The fixed temperature setting shall be in accordance with NFPA 72E recommendations. d) Detection System for Fuel Rooms The detection and control system shall employ photoelectric ionization smoke detectors and heat detectors. A single detector activated shall cause an alarm signal to be generated. A second detector activated shall generate a pre-discharge signal and start the pre-discharge conditions. 1. Optical Smoke detectors: shall be installed in all areas where required either by the appropriate NFPA standard or the authorizing having jurisdiction. Flame Detectors: Radiant energy fire detection that is intended to detect flames and is designed to operate in dark normally lit enviroments where sunlight or other ambient lighting is assumed.
2.
e)
Detection System in Electrical Rooms and Computer Rooms The detection and control system shall employ two optical smoke detectors so that is a single detector is activated it shall activate an alarm signal, and when the second detector is activated it shall generate a predischarge signal and shall start the pre-discharge conditions.
f) -
Audible Alarm Devices Upon entering the alarm mode, audible indication shall be supplied by the steady sounding of an alarm electronic sounder. This unit shall be polarized for full supervision and UL listed. Upon entering the pre-discharge mode, the electronic sounder shall provide a pulsed output. Upon system discharge, the electronic sounder shall provide a steady output and a strobe light shall flash.
G)
Electrical Control Equipment The Control panels shall include the following:
a) Cross-zone detection. b) Disconnect Switch. c) Series supervised FM-200 release circuits. _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-139
Month Year
Projects Name
d) e) f) g) H)
Battery standby power of sufficient capacity for 24 hours of stand-by operation plus 5 minutes of alarm operation. Supervised audible/visual output circuits. Container Disable switch with corresponding release circuit trouble indication. Voltmeter to indicate system voltage and amp meter to indicate battery charge/discharge current.
Manual Release The manual release station shall provide a means of manually discharging the automatic fire extinguishing system when used in conjunction with the control panel. The manual release switch shall be the dual action type, to prevent accidental operation. The switch shall remain in the operated position until reset by means of a key.
I)
Sequence of Operation Actuation of any detector will: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Provide steady alarm electronic Sounder signal associated with the area in which the detector was actuated. Annunciate to owners monitoring equipment. Shut down emergency generator (if in generator room). De-enerize all operating fans and close all doors and motorized dampers. Actuation of a second detector will discharge the agent as described before.
2.10
PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS Supply and install wherever shown on the drawings portable fire extinguishers of the capacities and ratings indicated on the drawings. Each extinguisher shall be complete with a frame for hanging, a cabinet, 36cm. long hose, discharge valve and pressure gauge. Heavy duty drawn steel cylinder with hard scratch resistant enamel finish with color as per international fire regulations. Extinguisher shall be rechargeable dry chemical type or carbon dioxide with capacities as shown on the drawings.
All extinguishers shall be located in recessed steel cabinets. Approved Manufacturers: Walter Kidde ( USA ) CHUBB ( USA ) W.D. Alen Mfg. Co. ( USA )
or approved equal 2.11 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINET
Fire extinguisher cabinet and door leafs shall be made of 1.5 mm steel sheet with all around folded edges. Cabinets shall be fitted with continuous piano hinges made of stainless steel. Cabinet and door shall be painted with electrostatic powder paint oven baked. Instructions signs shall be in Arabic and English silk screened painted on cabinet. Stickers are not acceptable. _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-140
Month Year
Projects Name
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 A. 3.02 A. B. EXAMINATION Examine conditions at the job site where work of this section is to be performed to insure proper arrangement and fit of the work. Start of work implies acceptance of job site conditions. PREPARATION Examine the Contract Drawings and specifications in order to insure the completeness of the work required under this Section. Verify measurements and dimensions at the job site and cooperate in the coordination and scheduling of the work of this Section with the work of related trades, so as not to delay job progress. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Field Tests 1.Perform field test to demonstrate the ability of the equipment to meet contract requirements. 2.Should any part of the apparatus or system fail to meet the contract requirements, adjust, repair or replace any defective or inoperative parts and, on completion, again conduct the complete performance tests. 3.Refer to appropriate sections for additional required test data. END OF SECTION
3.03 A.
SECTION 15401 DOMESTIC AND SOFT WATER PIPING SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 A. 1.02 A. B. SCOPE The work described in this section of the specification is related to the hot , cold, Brackish and soft water distribution systems. RELATED WORK Section 15010 : Basic Mechanical Requirement. Section 15050 : Basic Materials and Methods.
Month Year
Projects Name
C. D. E. F. 1.03 A. B. C. D. 1.04 A.
Section 15060 : Pipe and Pipe Fittings. Section 15100 : Valves. Section 15250 : Insulation. Section 15991 : Testing and Commissioning. REFERENCES Refer to Individual Materials for Specified Reference Standards . Uniform Plumbing Code ( UPC ) . American Society of Plumbing Engineers ( ASPE ) Manual. American Water Works Association ( AWWA ) Standards as specified in the section. SYSTEMS DESCRIPTION The hot and cold water systems comprise of a system of pipework, valves fittings and appurtenances providing hot, cold and drinking water to the various plumbing fixtures situated throughout the buildings. The work includes recirculation hot water and specialties. The soft water system comprises of a system of pipework, valves, fittings and appurtenances providing soft water for steam and cooling plants, and where indicated on drawings.
B.
Month Year
Projects Name
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 A. 2.02 A. WATER SERVICES. See section 15060 Pipe and Pipe Fittings for Water Service Piping Materials and Installation. MATERIALS Copper Piping Refer to Section 15060 Paragraph 2.02 A. B. C. D. F. Galvanized Steel Piping Refer to Section 15060 Paragraph 2.02 B. Black Steel Piping. Refer to Section 15060 Paragraph 2.02 C. UPVC Pressure Piping Refer to Section 15060 Paragraph 2.02 D. Accessories 1. Flexible pipe connectors shall have a stainless steel bellows with a woven flexible bronze wire reinforcing protective jacket. Connectors shall be minimum of 300 mm in length with thread male or flanged ends as required for proper installations. Sweat end connections re not acceptable. Connectors shall be rated for 2 MPa water working pressure, 120C operating temperature and suitable for up to maximum 20 mm misalignment. 2. Shock absorbers shall be elastomer bellows type, with stainless steel shell, glycerin hydraulic displacement fluid and pressurized argon pneumatic displacement cushion. Shock absorbers shall be individually sized as required for equipment served. G. Valves and Specialties 1. Hose bibs shall be polished chrome faucet with flange, indexed lever handle, 20 mm female inlet and 20 mm hose thread spout, single for concealed piping. 2. Wall Hydrant a. Loose-key operator, lock type Packing nut, stainless steel stem, cast brass body to fit one modular brick course and 20 mm hose threaded spout with vacuum breaker. Wall hydrants shall be located on the exterior ground floor of all buildings at an average interval of approximately 30 meters. b. Exposed surfaces shall be polished chrome plated.
3. Float valves for use on incoming supplies to cold water storage tanks shall be cast brass or gunmetal up to 75 mm dia. And cast iron with bronze seats for 100 mm dia. And above. H. Domestic Hot Water Storage Heater (With heating water coil)
Type: vertical or horizontal as shown on drawings copper-lined steel tank type, with fixed convex ends, complete with removable copper tube U- bend heating section suitable for heating tank _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-143
Month Year
Projects Name
contents with hot water. insulation and outer jacketing, accessories and controls all factory packaged and tested. Heating section shall be provided in storage heater connected to boilers. Heating coil shall be provided with 2 way motorized valves, strainers, valves and all other accessories as detailed on drawings. Operating pressure: tank to be designed for 10 bars working pressure in tank and 10 bars working pressure in tubes and to be hydrostatically tested at factory to 12 bars. Tank to be welded carbon steel plate In accordance with ASME Code or equivalent European Norm, with two permanently attached lifting lugs. manhole with cover and all necessary connections for water inlet, water outlet. drain, relief valve, anti-vacuum valves, pressure gauge, thermometer, temperature controller and heating section. Tank lining internal surfaces and surfaces in contact with water including manhole and cover and heating section connection surfaces are to be lined with glass lining. Flanges to be copper lined with copper gasket surface. Before lining the steel tank is to be thoroughly cleaned, welding slag removed and weld deposits, sharp edges and projections ground smooth. Connections 50 mm diameter and under to be threaded and over 50 mm diameter to be flanged. Heating section connection to be flanged. Connections to be non-ferrous couplings suitably capped at factory to preclude dirt and protect threads. Heating sections to be constructed of' seamless copper tubes expanded into copper or copper lined steel tube sheet with copper spun into each tube hole. Tubes to be supported on non-ferrous tube spacer and cross-bar. Adequate number of supports to be provided to prevent tube sag. Heating section to have flanged, close grain cast iron head with inside baffle and necessary connections for heating medium inlet and outlet. drain and vent. Accessories: heaters to be complete with anti-vacuum valves, pressure and temperature relief valve of type and size recommended by heater manufacturer and two mild steel supporting cradles. shipped loose for field installation. Test: steel tank and lining to be hydrostatically tested at factory. Certificate of test to he furnished by manufacturer. Shop drawings: submit for approval outline drawing of heater showing dimensions and size. location and rating of connections. prior to manufacturing heater. Manufacturers obtain heater from one of the following: The Patterson Kelly Co. Inc. (U.S.A) Rycroft (U.K.) Adamson (U.S.A) Die Detrich (France) or approved equal
Month Year
Projects Name
I.
Electric Water Heater Supply and install electric water heaters wherever shown on the drawings of capacities as indicated on the drawings. Each electric water heater shall be of the cylindrical storage type constructed of heavy gauge steel with white enamel finish and glass lining from inside. Heater shall have polyurethane foam insulation wall between the outer casing and the glass lining all around top and bottom of cylinder. Heater shall be suitable for a working pressure of 100 psi (690 Kpa) and shall be certified by UL or equivalent European Norm. Each electric water heater shall be complete with the following: - Fast acting surface mounted thermostat for automatic temperature control. - Factory installed sensitive high limit energy cut-off (for safety to prevent overheating) present at 210 oF (99 oC ) and shall be listed and labeled by UL, AGA or CE. - Electric element of 3000 watt capacity and smaller as indicated on the drawings. Element shall be constructed of highest quality resistance wire sheathed in mineral filling and the whole encased in a copper tube and subjected to a high voltage test. - Removable heating water seamless copper coil, U bend heating section with 3 way motorized valve and all valves and accessories as detailed on drawings. - A nonreturn valve at the cold water inlet to the heater. - Pressure relief valve installed between heater and non return valve and shall be listed by AGA and shall be labeled by AGA, ASME or CE. - Removable access panel to the heating element and thermostat. - Factory installed nipples. - Gate valves on cold and hot water connections. - Wall fixing brackets and support. Approved Manufacturers: Rycroft Thermor De-edtrich Ariston Atlantic
-1 -2
or approved equal.
Month Year
Projects Name
J.
Pumps 1. Pump casings shall be bronze or rubber lined cast iron with TEFC motor refer to section 15140.
k.
Approved Manufacturers: Paterson Kelly CO. - USA Adamson - USA Rycroft UK PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 A. B.
INSTALLATIONS See Section 15050 : Basic Materials and Methods, for general piping installation instructions. Supplies and Trim 1. All supplies, hardware, trim, traps, etc. to fixtures and equipment shall be chrome plated brass if exposed to view.
C.
Vacuum Breakers 1. Vacuum breakers shall be furnished and installed on all faucets and valves which have provisions for hose connections and water supplies to equipment or devices that have inlets below the overflow rim.
D.
Underground Piping 1. No underground or underslab water piping within building shall be permitted unless specifically shown otherwise on the drawings.
E.
Joints 1. Joints shall be made using 95-5 Tin- Antimony solder ASTM B-32. Joints for underground ( if any ) shall be made using a brazing compound containing silver alloys having a melting point of 520C or higher. Wrought copper and bronze fittings shall be to ANSI B16.22.
F.
Flushing of pipework Systems Prior to the chemical cleaning or treatment of any pipework system, the entire system, sectionally or as whole, shall be subjected to a full bore rapid flush to ensure the complete removal of any loose foreign material. This shall also apply to pipework systems where chemical cleaning is not called for. Flushing shall be carried out without circulating water through any filter, pump, coil, heat exchanger etc., and the Contractor shall be responsible for providing temporary by-pass connections where necessary to enable this to be achieved. The Contractor shall also be responsible for providing temporary fill and drain points on each system and for making whatever temporary arrangements that may be necessary to have adequate raw water available at the fill points and for the removal of flushing water from the drain points. Temporary drain points for flushing shall not be less than 65 mm diameter in pipework of 65 mm nominal bore or larger and pipeline size in pipework of less than 65 mm nominal bore.
Month Year
Projects Name
If flushing of a system is carried out on a Sectional basis, it shall be done in such a manner that foreign material cannot be introduced into a section of pipework already flushed. The contractors proposals and timing for flushing out of pipework should be submitted to the Engineer. The entire flushing operation of a system shall e carried out of the satisfaction of the Engineer, and in accordance with the AwwA No. B300 recommendation. G. Chemical Cleaning of LTHW All pipe systems shall be chemically cleaned internally prior to commissioning and to the Engineer agreed programme. The systems shall first be treated to remove corrosion products, followed by a further treatment to inhibit corrosion. The Contractor shall provide suitable tapping points for chemical introduction and all necessary drainage/flushing connections etc. The Contractor shall allow in his tender for discharging the effluent including diluting the discharge to meet the local Authoritys requirements and all charges levied by the local Authority. The Contractor shall ensure tat the pipework system installed under this Contract is totally isolated from any other or existing systems before chemically cleaning out. The Contractor shall also include for the full duty to be treated such that sufficient protection remains to prevent corrosion occurring for a period of 6 months from the date of handover. Any equipment liable to deterioration due to the cleaning operation shall be removed from the pipeline and the necessary temporary make-up pieces installed. The Contractor shall also include for providing water heaters, circulator and bypass lines etc., where necessary. H. Buried Pipework Carrying Water The pipework shall be laid to a depth of not less than 900 mm from finish ground level to the crown of the pipe. Pipework shall be anchored by means of thrust blocks as required at all changes of direction, valves and stop ends. The pipework shall be given adequate bedding and side support, avoiding pockets or voids. The Contractor shall check the sizes of thrust blocks against his proposed installation drawings and gain approval from the Engineer for any variations proposed before proceeding with the installation. Where concrete thrust blocks on UPVC pipework are provided these shall incorporated a flexible membrane interposed between the concrete and the unit to protect against abrasion. The trench shall not be opened up too far in advance of pipe laying and shall be backfilled as soon as possible. The width of the trench at the crown of the pipe shall be as participle but not more than the outside diameter of the pipe plus 300 mm to allow for proper compaction of sidefill. _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-147
Month Year
Projects Name
Care shall be taken to ensure that the bed of the trench will support the pipeline so as to prevent localised loss of gradient or bridging and projections shall be removed to prevent point loading of the pipe, all pockets or voids shall be graded with granular material. Free draining coarse sand and/or granular material maximum particle size 22 mm to be used as sidefill material free of large objects, and capable of being compacted sufficiently to provide adequate support for the pipe. The pipework sidefill shall be firmly compacted between the side on the pipe and side of trench. Before backfilling is carried out any temporary packing shall be removed. The thickness of granular bedding under the barrel of the pipe shall not be less than one third of the diameter, and a minimum of 100 mm thick. Where soft spots occur in the bottom of the trench the thickness shall be increased as necessary to give a suitable bed. The granular bedding shall be thoroughly compacted in layers not more than 150 mm thick to give a uniform bed, true to gradient, on which the pipe is to be laid and placed directly on the bedding. Bricks or other hard materials shall not be placed under the pipes for temporary support. Further bedding material shall be placed around the pipe and thoroughly compacted in 65 mm layers, by careful tamping up to the crown of the pipe eliminating all cavities under the two lower quadrants of the pipe. To enable easy identification of the main, a warning tape shall be laid along the length of the pipe. The backfilling shall proceed in layers not exceeding 300 mm thickness each layer being thoroughly compacted. Heavy mechanical hammers shall not be used until the fill has reached a depth of 300 mm above the top of the pipe. The maximum particle size shall not exceed 22 mm but the presence of a particle between 22 mm and 40 mm is acceptable providing the total quantity of such particles is a very small fraction of the whole. If particles over 40 mm are present the material shall not be acceptable and be rejected. The route of the pipeline shall be permanently marked with an electronic traceable indicator tape laid 300 mm above the crown of the pipe. 3.02 APRESERVATION OF WATER QUALITY General All parts of hot and cold water circuits in contact with the water shall have clean disinfected surfaces before being installed. Materials specified and used shall be proof against the following hazards : Dezincification or galvanic action _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-148
Month Year
Projects Name
Chlorine treatments Imparting taste or odour to the water Contamination of water by lead, copper or other elements in excess of standards laid down by the EEC. Bacterial growth due to nutrients in pipework materials, jointing materials, pastes and compounds, fluxes, solders, thread sealant tapes, gaskets, grommets, tap washers, O rings, gland packings, valve seats, filters, hoses, greases, lubricants, protective coatings or linings. All materials and fittings shall be an approved type as tested and listed by the U.K. Water Research Centre as suitable for potable water and not capable of promoting bacterial growth. Pipework circuits for cold water shall be run below or away from hot pipes to minimize heat gain and keep water temperature below 20C to prevent the colonization of Legionnella bacteria. Backflow prevention devices or air graps shall be provided and specified herein based on BS 6700 and to BS 6281 Parts 1,2 and 3 and BS 6282 Parts 1,2,3 and 4 as appropriate. BDisinfecting of Hot and Cold Water Systems Disinfecting shall be carried out following satisfactory flushing pressure testing and setting to work prior to handover. The whole of each system including systems, vessels, pipework, shall be disinfected with chlorine by a specialist organization certified to BS 5750 Part 1 for this type of work or the Water Undertaking as agreed with the Engineer. The producers shall follow DOH Code of Practice The Control of Legionella in Health Care Premises and BS 6700 as outlined in the following clauses. Flushing and disinfection shall not be a substitute for a high degree of cleanliness during installation.
Month Year
Projects Name
C-
External Mains Chlorination The Contractor shall include for chlorination of pipework under pressure from the mains, to be carried out in accordance with the requirements to the local Water Undertaking. The chlorination shall be through suitable valved filling points located at one end of the system, for the introduction of the chlorine solution and shall be generally to the Department of Health Code of Practice The Control of Legioellae in Health Care Premises. The chlorine shall be introduced by means of chemical dosing apparatus connected upstream until a concentration of not less than 20 ppm can be measured along the pipe run of new mains. The main shall be static for not less than 24 hours before flushing through with fresh water until chlorine cannot be detected above that in the Water Authority and mains. Wash-out valves and valved filling points shall be included in the installation. The Contractor shall include for existing mains supplying new distribution systems to be chlorinated. Any insertions or repairs at junctions into an existing pipeline shall be disinfected by immersion in a solution of sodium hypochlorite containing 1000mg/1 of free available chlorine.
D-
Distribution Pipework Chlorination Chlorination shall be generally to the Department of Health Code of Practice The Control of Legionella in Health Care Premises. The mains supply to storage cisterns shall have been satisfactory chlorinated as necessary, and all cisterns cleared of all visible contaminants before services within buildings are treated. The capacities of the systems shall be calculated to determine amounts of chlorine to be added. All water shall be drained off and all draw off points closed and all isolating valves opened except on cistern outflow. After flushing, the system shall be filled with water and the servicing valve on the supply to the cistern shall be closed. Following this the capacity of the system shall be assessed and a calculated quantity of sodium hypochlorite of known strength shall be added to the cistern to give a free residual chlorine concentration of 50 ppm to the cistern water content. The chlorinated water shall be drawn around the system by successively opening each draw-off fitting. Working away from the cistern, and closing it when chlorinated water at 40-50 ppm is discharged, the concentration being determined by calorimetric methods. The cistern shall be refilled and chlorinated as above during these operations, to maintain a residual chlorine level of 50ppm in the cistern at all times. The contact time shall commence when the entire system is filled with chlorinated water, together with the cistern to overflow level. It is essential that the internal coatings of cisterns are thoroughly cured before disinfection take place and care must be taken not to exceed 5 ppm chlorine concentration. The above procedures shall apply to cold water services and to the secondary circuits of hot water systems before heat is applies and with the water cold. Care shall be taken not to use excessive amounts of chlorine which may effect pipework or other materials.
Month Year
Projects Name
Records shall be kept of all procedures, checks, tests and witnessing. EPrevention of Water Stagnation Regular draining off of water and re-filling with potable water shall be allowed for after chlorination. Draining down and re-filling shall be on a routine basis twice weekly until handover. FWater Quality Tests The Contractor shall allow for all systems to have been satisfactory set to work and disinfected before water samples are taken. Analysis of both hot and cold water supplies shall be allowed for taken from representative sampling points at draw off and storage positions with the system at working temperatures . Water quality tests shall include for all samples to be tested in accordance with the DoH/DoE Report No.71 - The Bacteriological Examination of Water Supplies, or any method approved and employed by the Public Analyst. All the samples shall be tested for E.Coli and chemical analysis including copper and lead content. The quality of potable water at outlets, ( as sampled ) and as supplied by the Water Authority, to be generally to EC Directive, 15th July 1980, 80/778/EEC Quality of Water intended for Human Consumption . Potable water from a borehole supply must comply with DoE Circular 25/84 and EC Directive 80/778/EEC. The Contractor shall provide for samples to be taken and analysed initially as a reference point as agreed with the Engineer. Samples shall be taken from : Main supply on site Storage cisterns ( Hot/Cold ) Selected hot and cold outlets ( to be agreed with the Engineer ) in each department The Contractor shall allow for the tests to be carried out by the Public Health Authority Laboratory Service or the local Water Undertaking as agreed with the Engineer. Two sets of tests shall be included, the first after setting-to-work and disinfecting and the second in conjunction with the handover date and the date for occupation of the premises.
Month Year
Projects Name
G-
Legionnaires Diseases Precaution Legionnaires Disease precautions shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Department of Health Code of Practice - The control of Legionellae in Health Care Premises ( HMSO) - Clause 2210 - 2207, Commissioning and Testing. The length of HWS system dead legs shall be revised to 5.0 metres. The Contractor shall include for taking water samples for Legionellae bacteria normal hot and cold water systems. The method for taking samples shall be in accordance with the Public Health Laboratory Service requirements. The Contractor shall provide for the tests to be carried out by the Public Health Laboratories on samples taken from representative sampling points when the systems are at working temperatures and conditions. Temperature of the water ( hot or cold ) at the sampling points shall be recorded at the time of taking each sample. Water samples for analysis shall be taken from three hot and three cold outlets, the location of the outlets to be determined by the Engineer. The Contractor shall provide for the samples and their analysis to be carried out prior to Practical Completion and the Engineer notified of the results.
H-
Analysis Reports All test reports shall be discussed with the Engineer and the Medical Officer for Infection Control and where results are not satisfactory, suitable remedial action shall be agreed upon and undertaken by the Controller. If the results are found to be unsatisfactory due to poor workmanship and/or use of unacceptable components , all remedial work shall be carried out at the Contractors expense. END OF SECTION
Month Year
Projects Name
SECTION 15405 SOIL, WASTE AND ROOF DRAINAGE PIPING SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. 1.02 A. B. C. D. 1.03 A. B. C. 1.04 A. B. C. D. 1.05 A. SCOPE The work described in this section of the specification is related to the soil, waste and ventilating pipework installation and the storm drainage system. RELATED WORK Section 15140 : Pumps. Section 15050 : Basic Materials and Methods. Section 15060 : Pipe & Pipe Fittings. Section 15991 : Testing and Commissioning. REFERENCES Refer to individual materials for reference standards. Uniform Plumbing Code ( UPC ) . American Society of Plumbing Engineers ( ASPE ) Standard as specified in this section. PIPE SERVICES SCHEDULE For soil, waste and ventilating shall be of cast iron as indicated on drawing. For waste and ventilating where indicated on drawing pipes shall be of galvanized steel buttwelded schedule 40 or UPVC as shown on drawings. For pressure sewage and waste water piping UPVC or CPVC Class E (1) 15 bar. Rain water pipes shall be UPVC pressure pipes 16 bar. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Building shall have a comprehensive system of soil, waste, anti-syphon ventilation and rainwater pipework so designed as to convey all soil, waste and rainwater to the main, city sewage and rainwater networks.
1.06
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with the provisions of ASME B31.9 " Building Services Piping " for materials, products _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-153
Month Year
Projects Name
and installations. B. Provide listing / approval stamp, label or other marking on piping made to specified standards.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 A. CAST IRON SOIL, WASTE, VENTILATION AND INTERNAL RAINWATER PIPES. Piping Cast iron pipes and fittings are to be EN877 for above ground & underground (or in concrete floor slab) applications, no-hub type with plain ends, factory coated internally and externally by dipping in bitumen base solution. Joints shall be by means of cast iron mechanical couplings with screws and nuts, and elastomer seal of high grade natural rubber to BS 2494 Part 1 or equivalent European Standard. Couplings for aboveground Pont a Mousson SMU rapid coupling stainless steel & for underground all stainless steel SMU rapid coupling or approved equal. All cast iron pipes shall be European origin similar to Pont a Mousson SMU-S for aboveground & SMU-plus for underground or approved equal. Local products are not approved. B. Fittings 1. The fittings compressing bends, junctions, traps, offsets, etc. shall be spigot and socket cast iron fittings, manufactured in strict accordance with ASTM A74. They shall be coated internally and externally with bituminous solution, of true form for the purpose, free from all imperfections and any defects to the coatings made good prior to installation. Fittings shall have ASTM C564 neoprene rubber gaskets and lubricants with compression joints. C. Access Pipes 1. Access pipe fittings shall be of the large door type with mating areas faced to receive grease felt or rubber washer and door. The washer is to be located truly on the face provided and the door evenly secured to form an air tight joint. D. Access Fittings 1. Where access is required on bends, junctions and traps the fittings are to be provided with access doors to ASTM A74 having faces faced to receive grease felt or rubber washer and access door. The washer is to be located truly on the stud bolts provided and the door evently secured to form an air tight joint.
E.
Boss Pipes 1. Boss pipe fittings shall be cast iron spigot and socket fittings, manufactured in strict accordance with ASTM A74, coated internally and externally with bituminous solution. Bosses shall be of the shouldered type cast as a homogenous mass with the fitting threaded internally A.S.P.T. for the branch waste size required and set to the correct angle of inclination.
Month Year
Projects Name
F.
Vent Pipe Terminations 1. Vent pipe terminations through roofs formed with asphalt shall be spigot and socket medium grade cast iron connectors having turned down luting flange homogeneously cast around the base of the socket. 2. Vent pipe terminations through roofs with materials other than asphalt are to be weathered with lead slates formed from 2.24 mm lead sheet. The upstand around the pipe shall be of the equivalent diameter and be of sufficient length to provide a minimum height of upstand of 225 mm from roof level at any point. The base of the slate shall be of sufficient size to enable a water-tight joint to be made with the roofing material. Lead burnt seams to upstand and base section shall be double loaded and formed in a sound workmanlike manner to the satisfaction of the engineer.
G.
Roof Vents and Vent Caps All vent pipes located above roof level shall be of cast iron with adaptor connection to PVC pipes located indoor. Supply and install all roof vents and vent caps on cast iron pipes wherever shown on the drawings and as specified herein. Each vent cap shall be of cast iron Vandal proof type, full size of vent pipe, caulked base connection for cast iron pipes. Vent caps shall be Zurn, Jasam or approved equal.
H. 1.
Floor Drains Floor Drains - Type FD Supply and install all floor drains wherever shown on the drawings and as specified herein where floor drains are connected to PVC pipes. Each floor drain shall be constructed of heavy duty UPVC or polypropylene (except where indicated on drawings. FD will be of cast iron material similar to Zurn Model or equal), with suitable adaptor and shall conform with the following requirements: a) b) Integral trap with cleaning plug. Adjustable level, heavy duty, large grate area, nickel bronze grate assemble with clamping flange, 200 mm x 200 mm fixed onto the drain body with cover similar to Marley Model DFG22 or approved equal.
I.
Area Drains (type AD-1) Area drain type (AD-1) shall be constructed of concrete 300 x 300 inner dimension and shall conform to the following requirements : a) b) c) d) Large sump with no trap. Heavy duty ductile iron grate 400 mm x 400 mm with frame similar to Saint Gobin Module RE 4053 HD or approved equal Integral flashing flange. Internal coal tar epoxy coating .
J. Trench Drains (TD/GD) _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-155
Month Year
Projects Name
Supply and install all trench drains in parking area as specified herein: a. Cast iron comprising drain body with integral seepage pan, clamping collar secured to drain body with screws and threaded adjustable head strainer body permitting up to 32 mm vertical adjustment of strainer height without disturbing flooring or connections during installation. Trench drains shall have adaptors to PVC pipes. Strainer to be nickel bronze secured to strainer body with vandal-proof brass screws. Trench drains shall be Zurn, Josam model or approved equal.
b. c. K.
BALCONY DRAIN - TYPE BD Each balcony drain shall be constructed of UPVC and shall conform to the following requirements: a) b) c) d) Large grate area body Adjustable level, heavy duty UPVC flat strainer fixed onto the drain body. Side or bottom outlet to suit installation in shallow finish height. Integral flashing guard.
L.
FLOWER BOX DRAIN (TYPE FD-1) UPVC flower box drain similar to Reddi Model 1971202, 75mm diameter but without trap. FBD shall have Geotextile cover surrounded with aggregate.
2.02 A.
UPVC PRESSURE PIPING Pressure UPVC pipes shall be as described in section 15060 Paragraph 2.02 D for water piping system suitable for pressure pipes up to 15 bars.
Month Year
Projects Name
2.03 A.
UPVC DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPES UPVC sewage and vent pipes shall be extruded unplasticized polyvinyl chloride conforming to the following European Standards for non pressure drainage pipes: Pipes 32 mm, 40 mm, 50 mm & 75mm installed above ground to EN 1329. Pipes 110 mm & above installed above ground to EN1401-SN4. Pipes 110 mm and above installed underground to EN1401-SN4. Pipes 110 mm and above installed underground deeper than 7 m to EN1401-SN8. Pipes shall be European make suitable for rubber ring pressure joint. Sealing rings to be rubber to EN681. Fire stop jackets shall be installed on all PVC pipes penetrating floor slabs or fire rated walls similar to HILTI model CP642 /CP643. Pipe fittings shall be UPVC of the same weight and quality as the pipe. Lubricant shall be as recommended by pipe manufacturer. All underground UPVC pipes shall be encased with reinforced concrete 150mm thick.
Contractor to provide all accessories and supports of UPVC system to suite high rise building applications and to provide all accessories to protect installation from the seismic action defined for this project. B. Perforated UPVC Pipes Perforated UPVC pipes shall be suitable for agricultural drainage wrapped with coconut fiber layer fixed to the pipe by means of plastic threads similar to Frankish type FE- KOKOFIL or approved equal. Pipe to be covered with 40 cm gravel bed & with Geotextile layer. C. Cast Iron Pipes Cast iron pipes and fittings are to be EN877 for above ground & underground (or in concrete floor slab) applications, no-hub type with plain ends, factory coated internally and externally by dipping in bitumen base solution. Joints shall be by means of cast iron mechanical couplings with screws and nuts, and elastomer seal of high grade natural rubber to BS 2494 Part 1 or equivalent European Standard. Coupling for Tower building and all offsetting pipes in 1st basement floor to outdoor shall be as defined in DIN 86128 part 1&2 Grip-Inox or Grip S similar to PAM-Global or approved equal. Couplings for basement floors Pont a Mousson SMU rapid coupling stainless steel & for underground all stainless steel SMU rapid coupling or approved equal. Stack support shall be used every 15m, bracketing system as manufactured by PAM-Global Series 6 from DN 40 to 250 and for 300 mm and over use Series 7 made from special stainless steel designed for a good sound insulation valve. Use Grip collars and stack support pipes when needed to bolting and anchoring of pipework in order to ensure an absolute mechanical stability in the networks as manufactured by Saint Goban. _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-157
Month Year
Projects Name
All cast iron pipes shall be European origin similar to Pont a Mousson SMU-S for aboveground & SMU-plus for underground or approved equal. Local products are not approved. Contractor to provide all accessories and supports of cast-iron system to suite high rise building applications and to provide all accessories to protect installation from the seismic action defined for this project. D. Roof Drains Provide roof drains of size as indicated on drawings, including features, as specified herein. Provide drains may have threaded or caulked outlets. Horizontal or vertical discharge with adaptor to galvanized steel pipes. Roof drains to be flashed with 2.7 kg ( 6 pound) sheet lead and secured with flashing clamps. Roof drain shall coated cast iron, large sump, elevated dome type, side or bottom discharge or angle type side discharge as required and approved by the Engineer, complete with lightweight, shock resistant, aluminum elevated dome strainer, non-puncturing flashing clamping collar with integral gravel guard and perforated extension sleeve for up to 50 mm thick roof insulation and bottom inside caulking outlet of same size as rainwater pipe. Roof drains shall be manufactured by Zurn, Josam or approved equal. In locations where specialized roof outlets or finishes are required the plumbing sub-contractor is reffered to the drawings concerned where the type of these units will be specified. Where traps are required they shall be P outgo. The trap shall be jointed to the bellmouth outlet by means of a caulked lead joint, or compression fitting with neoprene rubber gasket, as described hereinafter. 2.04 RAIN WATER PIPES Wherever indicated on drawings, rain water pipes shall be UPVC pressure pipes PN16 as described in paragraph 2.03 above. Underground UPVC pipes shall be encased with reinforced concrete 150mm thick. Acoustic type pipes shall be used where specified on drawings. 2.05 UPVC CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPE UPVC pipes shall be extructed unplasticized polyvinyl chloride conforming to the following European Norm. All pipes shall be of European origin. Pipes 32mm, 40mm & 50mm installed aboveground to EN 1329. Pipes shall be European make with solvent cement joints or rubber joints. Pipe fittings shall be of UPVC of same weight and quality of pipe. Fire stops shall be provided on pipes penetrating fire rated walls and slabs. 2.06 CLEANOUTS The cleanouts shall be of the same material and dimensions as the pipes to be cleaned and shall be placed under the floor slabs or extended through to terminate flush with the finished floor. Cleanouts on concealed piping shall be extended through and terminate flush with the finished floor. _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-158
Month Year
Projects Name
Cleanouts shall be installed at each change of direction greater than 45. They shall be also provided at or near the foot of each vertical soil and waste stack. Cleanouts shall be installed such that the cleanout opens in a direction opposite to the flow of the drainage line or at right angles thereto. Floor cleanouts with covers shall be formed with a "Y", "F" or 45 elbow fitting of the same material and size as the pipe accommodated and provided with an adapter and a threaded brass plug. Floor cleanout type FCO shall have cover plate and frame 20 x 20cm chrome plated brass. The cover shall be threaded to the frame to ensure an air tight closure. Floor cleanout type FCO-1 shall be of UPVC with nickel bronze Kessel 27196 washed out and as approved by the Engineer. Ground cleanout GCO-1 shall be of UPVC with PVC lockable air tight cover 200 x 200 mm. Ground cleanout GCO-2 shall be of cast iron with coated cast iron lockable cover. Zurn Model or approved equal. 2.07 GULLEY TRAPS Supply and install gulley traps manholes where shown on drawings and as specified and detailed. Gulley traps shall have internal water proofing with coal tar epoxy with heavy duty tiled ductile iron cover with air seal discharge sides. Gulley traps shall be vented. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 A. B. GENERAL Install cast iron soil pipes and fittings according to CISPI latest edition of cast iron soil pipe and fittings hand book volume I chapter IV , installation of cast iron pipe and fittings. Soil and waste stacks shall be carried up full bore 460 mm above roof level and in any case not less than 915 mm above the head of any window within a horizontal distance of 3 m from the pipe and shall be provided with wire balloon guards and roof connectors. Branch ventilating pipes shall be connected within the limits of 75 mm and 450 mm from the crown of the trap. From WCs they shall be connected to the cast iron/steel connectors or to branches immediately following thimbles from P traps. Main branch ventilating pipes shall be run above spill-over level of fitments except where shown, and if connected to main soil, soil-waste or waste pipes, the connections shall be at a point above spill-over level of the highest fitment connected to the main soil, soil-waste pipe. Single Stack ( i.e. Unventilated One-Pipe) Systems shall have branch pipes fixed accurately and to the correct gradients and heights. The connection to the main soil-waste pipes shall be made by means of approved fittings fixed accurately. The connection of galvanized steel branch soils and wastes from sanitary fittings to cast iron stacks shall be made using screwed iron .
C.
D.
E.
F.
Month Year
Projects Name
G. H.
Joints of length to length for galvanized steel pipework will be by means of fittings threaded only standard pipe fittings shall be used. Bending of pipes is prohibited. Where galvanized steel pipes are in contact with concrete or cement mortar, or clinker type blockwork they must be wrapped with self adhesive cellulose tape or coated externally to resist chemical attach. Pipework shall be installed to the routes and diameters indicated on the drawings and where exposed shall run in parallel lines when grouped together to obtain a neat and satisfactory appearance. Open ends of pipework left during the progress of work shall be blanked off with a temporary plug or cap to prevent the entry of any foreign matter. Make changes in direction for drainage and vent piping using appropriate Y - branches , Y branched with 1/8 bends, and long sweep 1/4 ,1/5, 1/6, 1/8, and 1/16 bends. Use long turn double Y branch and 1/8 - bend fittings where 2 fixtures are installed back to back or side by side and have a common drain. Where different sizes of drainage pipes and fittings are connected use standards increases and reducers. Branches on waste and soil pipe work must be swept in with the direction of flow. Pipes shall be spaced in ducts in a manner which will permit subsequent access to any pipe for maintenance or removal without disturbance to the remaining pipes. Long radius bends shall be provided at the connection of all soil and rain water stacks to the underground drain, with an access pipe above floor level. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PIPE INSTALLATION All pipes shall be installed in straight parallel lines. Pipes shall be spaced to permit their installation, maintenance and insulation. Concealed pipes shall be installed in such a way as to permit their maintenance and inspection. All pipes shall be so installed as to ensure easy and even flow of the water to and from all equipment and fixtures. Pipelines shall be installed in a manner to allow for easy air escape and system draining. It shall be endeavored to obtain this naturally by gravity. However, where this cannot be met, provision should be made to ensure quick and positive drainage and noiseless air discharge. Drain pipes shall be joined together in a manner satisfying perfect running condition. Vent pipes shall not be trapped and shall be graded to drip back to waste or soil line. All vents for waste and soil stacks shall extend above the highest point of the roof and shall be equipped with a vent head and cap as specified.
I.
J. K.
L. M. N. 3.02
Free discharge outlets of rain water drains shall be done in 45 or 90 combination of bends as found necessary by the Engineer. _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-160
Month Year
Projects Name
3.03
Sleeves shall be supplied and installed wherever pipes cross slabs, walls, partitions, etc. Connection of PVC underground pipes to manholes shall be made by means of a suitable manhole lining to ensure adequate bonding to the concrete. Cleanouts shall be placed at all changes in direction whether shown on the drawings or not. In case of welding work to be done in proximity of PVC pipes, special care shall be taken to avoid damaging the pipes.
CONDITIONS FOR PIPE ASSEMBLY Before installation, all pipes shall be cleaned of all foreign matter and shall be reamed smooth after cutting. All trenches shall be cleaned up. Pipes shall be carefully cut by hacksaw or by special pipe cutting machine. Steel pipe ends shall be cleaned and smoothed on edge to avoid all roughness and unevenness before welding or threading. Threading shall be done for the total length of joint or accessory with a reliable threading machine. PVC pipes when cut, shall be debarred and chamfered according to the instructions of the manufacturer to ensure a proper and easy assembly. All changes in pipe size shall be made with fittings. Eccentric reducing fittings shall be used to prevent pocketing. Change in direction of piping shall be made with long radius fittings. The exposed ends of incomplete or unconnected work shall be plugged. Plugging shall be perfect with gate valves, counter flange plugs or thread plugs. All piping subject to expansion and contraction shall be installed with expansion bends, swing joints made up of fittings or other approved methods or devices. Branch lines from lines subject to expansion and contraction shall have a swing joint at the point of connection with the main. Expansion joints shall be installed even if not shown on the drawings or count for in the bill of quantities.
3.04 A
JOINTING Cast Iron The spigot of the pipe shall be centralized in the receiving socket by tightly caulking sufficient turns of white jute gasket into the annular space formed . The gasket shall be caulked to leave a depth of annular space unfilled relative to 2/3rd total depth of socket. At no point during the operation shall caulking material be allowed to protrude within the pipe. Where the axis of the two pipes are included one to the other the joint shall in no part be less than 4.7 mm in thickness.
B.
An alternative procedure for pipe jointing shall be thru the use of compression joints with neoprene rubber gaskets conforming to specified standards.
C UPVC _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-161
Month Year
Projects Name
Solvent weld joints shall be made with the proper solvent cement furnished by the manufacturer for that purpose. Both, the inside of the socket and the outside of the spigot end of the pipe shall be roughened using sand paper. All grease and dirt shall be removed from the surface with a special cleaning fluid supplied by the manufacturer. Immediately after cleaning, solvent cement shall be applied and pipe pushed into the socket up to the shoulder without turning. Rubber ring joints shall be made with the proper sealing ring furnished by the manufacturer for that purpose. After the spigot end has been lubricated, it shall be pushed fully into the socket and then pulled out by about 3mm per meter of pipe length (but in no case less than 1cm) to allow for longitudinal thermal expansion. Cleaning and lubrication shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. No oil or grease should be used.
3.05 A.
CONNECTIONS TO SANITARY FITTINGS General 1. The following connections to sanitary fittings are to be provided where arrangements to the contrary are not indicated on the drawings.
Month Year
Projects Name
B.
Connections To Basins 1. Connection shall be made to the 35 mm BSPT male thread waste connector by means of a 35 mm diameter two piece copper compression outlet 75 mm water seal P trap.
C.
Connection To Baths 1. Unless otherwise shall stated connections to baths, shall be made with 42 mm two piece, deep seal copper trap with overflow connection and bent tail pipe.
Connections To Sinks. 1. Unless otherwise stated connections to sinks shall be made with a 42 mm two piece, deep seal copper trap.
E.
Connections To Shower Trays 1. Unless otherwise stated connections to shower trays shall be made with a 42 mm two piece, deep seal copper trap. 2. The waste outlet from the shower tray shall be of the clear-bore type with removal grid.
F.
Connections to W.C. s and slop Sinks 1. Connections to W.C.s and slop sinks shall be made by means of a flexible push fit connector manufactured from Ethol Vynel Acitate ( E.V.A.) and so constructed as to be self sealing. The connector being fitted strictly in accordance with the manufacturers instructions.
3.06 A.
FIXING The contractor shall be responsible for determining the nature of the materials to be fixed to and for marking out positions of fixing for the cutting of cavities where required. Where cast iron, galvanized steel and PVC pipes are fixed in a vertical plane they shall be plumb or in alignment with the structure, and provided with sufficient fixing to ensure a rigid installation on completion . Spacing of fixtures shall be in accordance with the Uniform Plumbing Code. At changes of direction in the vertical plane, fixings shall be located on the sockets of the bends. Where pipes are located against walls they shall be provided with sufficient clearance from same to permit maintenance and painting. Pipes laid horizontally or to gradients shall be fixed as shown as on the spacing chart and around the socket of pipe. All pipework shall be symmetrical and correctly aligned as required. The pipes shall be installed to true gradients free from high spots or depressions. Failure to comply with this requirements shall render the contractor liable at his own expense to any alteration, removal or replacement that is required.
Month Year
Projects Name
B.
Spacing 1. The contractor shall provide supports at the spacing outlined in the following table. Material Pipe size mm GS GS GS GS GS GS GS CI UPVC UPVC 32 40 50 65 80 100 150 All 65/50/40 75 & above Interval for Horizontal Pipes m. 2.00 2.50 2.50 2.50 2.50 2.50 2.50 1.5 1.2 1.8 Interval for Vertical Pipes m. 2.500 2.50 2.50 2.50 2.50 2.50 2.50 1.5 2.4 3.0
2. At changes in direction in the pipe run additional supports shall be provided adjacent to each side of the change of direction, On pipe runs that extend from floor to ceiling a minimum of one additional mid-way support shall be provided irrespective of greater distances specified in the table. 3. Hangers on PVC pipes shall be design which does not clamp the pipe tightly but permits axial movement. 4. Support but do not rigidly restrain PVC pipes at end of branches and at change of direction or elevation. Vertical piping shall be maintained in the straight alignment. Support trap arms in excess of 900 mm in length as close as possible to the trap. C. Brick or Blockwork Walls. 1. Where pipes are to be fixed against brick or blockwork walls they shall be secured thereto by bituminous coated 25 mm wide by 4.7 mm thick cast iron two piece brackets for securing to the socket of the pipe with tails for building into structure. The bracket band around the socket of the pipe shall be secured together by means of 8 mm hexagonal headed brass bolts, nuts and washers. The bracket tails shall be set into the structure of a depth to give clearance behind the pipes barrel when fixed 40 mm from the face of the finished wall. Where pipes are to be fixed against walls where building in is not permitted they shall be secured thereto by brackets of mild steel. The tails of the brackets shall be turned out at right angles and drilled to receive bolt or screw fixings plugged into wall. 2. Where pipes 50 mm and under are to be fixed to walls and partitions fixing shall be by means of two piece brass clip split pattern bracket of the appropriate size. The walls shall be drilled and plugged and the clip secured with dome headed black japanned screws of the required size. 3. Where pipes 50 mm are to be fixed to walls and partitions fixing shall comprise mild steel trice drilled and counter sunk back plate for screw fixing to structure incorporating female boss short extension rod and two piece brass ring clip of the appropriate diameter with securing brass screws and boss for extension rod. The walls shall be drilled and plugged as required and the ring dip backplate secured thereto by means of black japanned screws. On completion the pipe shall be fixed so that a clearance of 25 mm is provided to future finished surfaces. D. Duct Fixing _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-164
Month Year
Projects Name
1. Where pipes are to be fixed in ducts in conjunction with other pipes, the contractor shall provide angle iron bearers of approved size to bridge the duct cavity. The pipes shall be fixed to the angle bearers by means of brackets as before described but having welded boss on the back face to receive screwed extension rod tail. The angle bearer shall be drilled to the correct size to pass the extension rod which shall then be double bolted thereto. The burring out of holes in the angle bearers will not be permitted. 2. Where pipes are to be fixed in ducts to angle iron bearers the pipe shall be fixed by means of two piece ring pattern brass clip with threaded boss. The angle iron support shall be drilled to the correct size to receive the extension rod which shall be a maximum of 150mm long of the appropriate diameter for the pipe brackets, threaded both ends and secured to the angle support with nut and luck nut. The pipe fixing ring shall be threaded onto the extension rod and on completion the extension rod bracket shall be square to the pipe. E. Suspended Pipes Concrete Floors 1. Where pipes are to be suspended below slabs where floor screeds are to be formed they shall be supported by means of hangers comprising 100 x 100 x 6 mm mild steel plate set at structural slab level with 9.5 mm extension rods double bolted or welded thereto of the required length for suspension. The rod shall be complete with adjusting and locking nuts for adjustment of gradient and threaded end for insertion into the welded boss of the pipe bracket. 2. Where pipes are to be suspended from ceilings and soffits the pipes shall be fixed by a bracket comprising ring clip, extension rod and backplate. 3. The backplate shall be of the screw fixing pattern with A.S.P.T. female boss for extension rod. The structure shall be drilled and plugged and required and bracket secured with dome headed black japanned screws of suitable size. The extension rod shall be of sufficient diameter for the duty and of the required length for the application, with threaded end s to receive backplate ring clip. The ring clip shall be two piece pattern. 4. Where more than one pipe is required to be supported from one extension rod, Approval of the Engineer to the method proposed is to be obtained. 5 Where pipes are to be suspended below slabs where screeds are to be formed they shall be supported by means of hangers comprising 100 x 100 x 5 mm mild steel plate set at structural slab level with extension rod double bolted thereto or welded to the required length for suspension.
6. The extension rod shall have threaded end to receive two piece pattern ring clip.
Month Year
Projects Name
3.07 A.
CUTS IN PIPES Cut length to tubes shall be made by means of wheel type cutters or sharp hacksaws to give a clean true square face to the pipe . Irregularities to cut faces are to be filed smooth and the internal burr removed by means of a burring reamer. Reductions to the true bore of the pipe are to be made good by the insertion of a metal turn - pin. Cut lengths to cast iron pipes shall be made by means of wheel type cutting tools to give a clean true square face to the axis of the pipe. Exposed metal shall be coated to the axis of the pipe. Exposed metal shall be coated with tar based solution applied before installation of the pipe. SOUND INSULATION Where pipework due to its location is required to be insulated against sound transmission a.0.25 mm thick strip of rubber shall be inserted between the inner face of the pipe clip and the galvanized steel pipe. 50 mm thick Rockwool 50 kg/m3 shall be wrapped around the pipe with cartoon and cotton canvas on top not less than 272g/m2 and painted with two coats of heat resistant water paint. A coat of primary paint shall be applied of the color requested by the Engineer. The strip shall be trimmed in a workmanlike manner. PAINTING The contractor shall paint all pipe supports of mild steel to prevent corrosion with one coat of red oxide primer. CO - ORDINATION In areas such as false ceilings, builders work ducts, floor ducts, trenches and where different services are run in close proximity, the contractor shall ensure that his services do not prevent the installation of other services. In this respect the contractor will be deemed to have consulted other trades and all relevant drawings issued by the consultant and sub - contractors. The contractor shall not install any services in these areas until routing has been agreed with other trades. PROVISION OF ACCESS. Access points as before described are to be provided at the base of the soil pipes immediately prior to connection with the drainage system and elsewhere as required to be in such position that all times the location is accessible to ensure necessary clearance of the system. Where working is in confined ducts the contractor shall be responsible for determining this position in relation to any other service . PROTECTION OF WORKS Both during and on completion of the works the contractor is to be held responsible for the full protection of his works and freedom from blockages and obstructions. Prior to commissioning tests, grease felt washers to access doors shall be regreased and the whole installation presented as new for testing. PIPE SLEEVES -
B.
3.08 A.
3.09 A. 3.10 A.
B.
3.11 A.
3.12 A. B. 3.13
Provide all pipe openings through walls, partitions and slabs with sleeves having an internal diameter at least 2" larger than the outside diameter of the pipe for uninsulated lines or of the _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-166
Month Year
Projects Name
insulation for insulated pipes. Install sleeves through interior walls and partitions flush with finished surfaces; sleeves through outside walls to project 15 mm. on each side of the finished wall; and floor sleeves to project 50mm. above finished floors. Set sleeves in place before pouring concrete or securely fasten and grout in with cement. Sleeve construction : Interior Partitions - galvanized sheet iron. Interior & Exterior Masonry Walls and Floors-galvanized steel pipe. Fill the space between outside of pipe or insulation and the inside of the sleeve or framed opening with fibrous asbestos in interior walls and floors and pack with oakum, seal with lead and watertight mastic or asphalt in exterior walls. Sleeves in fire rated wall shall be of galvanized steel pipe 2 sizes bigger with fire resistant seal as wall rating.
3.14 A
PIPE ACCESSORIES AND FITTINGS General The accessories shall be of the same standard as the pipes on which they are fitted, they shall be flanged, threaded or welded depending on the type and the diameter of the pipe and the location in which the pipes are installed. For PVC pipes, all fittings shall be made of PVC from the same series and by the same manufacturer of the pipes.
B.
Clamps for PVC Pipes PVC pipes shall be supported with galvanized steel clamps with rubber pad as recommended by the pipes manufacturer. Anchorage of the PVC pipe work shall be provided by using clamps with an in-laid plastic strip to ensure a firm hold after each group of fittings immediately following the last coupling, and using loose clamps between the fittings. Horizontal lines shall be supported at intervals of 10 times the outside pipe diameter. Vertical lines shall be supported at no more than 2 meters interval.
Month Year
Projects Name
C.
Connection to Equipment and Control Valves Provide flanges or unions at all final connections to equipment and control valves to facilitate dismantling. Arrange connections so that the equipment being served may be removed without disturbing the piping. Install all supply piping, pumps and other equipment including gate valves and strainers therein, at line size with the reduction in size being made only at the outlet piping from the control valve at the full size of the tapping in the equipment served.
D.
Hangers, Supports, Anchors and Guides - General Support, anchor and guide all piping to preclude failure or deformation. Construct and install hangers, supports, anchors, guides and accessories to the approval of the Engineer. Do not use wire, tape or metal bands. Supports shall be designed to support weight of pipe, weight of fluid and weight of pipe insulation. Fasten piping securely to the structure without overstressing any portion of the supports or the structure itself. Secure pipe supports, anchors and guides to concrete by means of inserts or if greater load carrying capacity is required by means of steel fishplates embedded in the concrete. Arrange hanger to prevent transmission of vibration from piping to building and supports. Uninsulated copper or brass pipe and/or tubing shall be isolated from ferrous hangers or supports Support piping and tubing at intervals indicated in the schedule hereinafter and at all changes in direction. Maximum deflection shall not exceed 3 mm. Clearance for application of specified Vapor sealed insulation without cutting pipeline covering or fitting covering in installation of pipe hangers and fittings shall be provided. Furnish pipe hangers and supports complete with rods, bolts, lock nuts, swivels, couplings, brackets and all other components and accessories, to allow installation to freely expand and contract. Hangers shall be formed steel clevis type, unless otherwise specified, with adjustable attachment to hanger rod. For copper or brass pipe, use plastic sheathed hangers. Pipe hangers shall fit over vapor sealed insulated piping. Where pipe exceeds maximum loading recommended for clevis type hanger, provide steel pipe clamps. Provide trapeze hangers where several pipes can be installed parallel and at the same level. Trapeze shall be of steel channel sized to support load and drilled for rod hanger at each end. Provision should be made to keep the lines in their relative position to each other by the use of either clamps or clips. Use roller supports, where provision for expansion is required. Rollers shall have cast iron adjustable bases. For hanger rods on piping 10 mm thru 50 mm inclusive use 10 mm rods, and for piping 65 mm thru 125 mm use 16 mm rods, and for piping 150 mm thru 300 mm use 22 mm rods.
Month Year
Projects Name
Provide additional steel members required for hanging piping systems in areas with special conditions, or where vertical or horizontal structural steel supports are required other than those provided in the structure. C-type hangers on sprinkler piping shall have lock nuts. Provide lateral bracing for supporting rods over 450mm. long braced at every fourth hanger with diagonal bracing attached to slab or beam. Floor supports - provide for supporting horizontal piping from floors with cast-iron rests, with pipe nipples to suit. Fasten to floor. Where provision for expansion is required, provide pipe roll stands, without vertical adjustment. Provide concrete or steel pipe piers, fasten stands to piers. Wall supports - provide for supporting horizontal piping from wall with steel J-Hook for pipe located close to wall and not larger than 80 mm pipe. For greater loads, up to 680 Kg maximum loading provide welded steel bracket. Vertical piping supports - support cast-iron soil pipe at every floor and at base of stack, other pipes at every floor unless shown otherwise. Use steel extension pipe clamps. Refer to manufacturer's rated maximum loading for each size pipe. Bolt clamps securely to pipe, rest clamp-end extension on building structure. Place pipe clamps at ceiling below, support clamp and extension from inserts where pipe sleeves extend above floor. Pipe-covering (insulation) protection saddles. Provide hanger shields to protect vapor sealed pipe insulation within mechanical equipment rooms at each support point by a 360o insert of high density, 100 psi, waterproofed calcium silicate encased in a 120o sheet metal shield. Insert thickness shall be same as insulation. Shield length shall equal nominal pipe diameter, minimum but shall not be shorter than 100mm. and need not be longer than 300mm. if bearing load causes no discernible deformation. Insert shall extend 25mm. beyond sheet metal shield. 100mm. shields shall be 26 gauge minimum. Shields 130 to 230mm. long shall be 20 gauge minimum. Shields longer than 230mm. shall be 16 gauge. Provide penetration shields to encase insulated pipes penetrating fire walls or floors in a 360o, 24 gauge minimum sheet metal hanger shield with insert of high density, 100 psi. waterproofed calcium silicate the same thickness as insulation and further enclosed within the sleeve, sized for maximum 25mm. spacing between sleeve and insulation shield, pack annular space between sleeve and shield on both ends with double neoprene coated asbestos rope. Install an escutcheon plate to completely cover the wall penetration opening and fit snugly over the pipe insulation shield. Insert shall extend at least 25mm. beyond penetrated surface and escutcheon. Provide oversize hangers with blocking the same thickness as the insulation to pitch vapor sealed insulated pipes accurately at time of insulation. Except for fire protection systems, maximum horizontal spacing for pipe hangers are as follows:
3/4" and 1" (20 and 25 mm) steel pipe 2.5 meter 1 1/4"-2" (32 and 50 mm) steel pipe 3.0 meter 2 1/2"-4" (65 and 100 mm)steel pipe 4.0 meter 5"-6" (125 and 150 mm) steel pipe 5.0 meter 8" (200 mm) and above steel pipe 6.0 meter Up to 1 1/4" (32 mm) copper pipe 2.0 meter _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-169
Month Year
Projects Name
1 1/2" (40 mm) and over copper pipe3.0 meter 2 1/2" (65 mm) and smaller PVC pipe 1.2 meter 3" (80 mm) and over PVC pipe 1.8 meter
vertical spacing - PVC pipe twice as those of hor. spacing.- other pipes - at every floor level. Hangers on PVC pipes shall be of design which does not clamp the pipe tightly but permits axial movement. Support but do not rigidly restrain PVC pipes at end of branches and at change of direction or elevation. Vertical piping shall be maintained in the straight alignment. Support trap arms in excess of 900mm in length as close as possible to the trap. Approved Manufacturers Fee & Mason Mfg. Co. Inc. Grinnel ITT Corp. or approved equal. E. Cleaning of Piping Systems Plug all opening ends of piping, valves and equipment except when actual work is being performed to minimize accumulation of dirt and debris. After installation is complete, place temporary screens at connections to all equipment and at automatic control valves where permanent strainers are not provided. Prior to the performance of tests, flush out all piping that is to receive a hydrostatic test with clean water. Remove dirt and debris collected at screens, strainers and other points from the system. The Contractor shall disinfect water piping before it is placed in service. The Contractor shall furnish all equipment and materials necessary to do the work of disinfecting and shall perform the work in accordance with the procedure outlined in AWWA Standard for Disinfecting Water Mains Designation C 601-68. The dosage shall be such as to produce a chlorine residual for not less than 10 ppm after a contact period of not less than 24 hours. After treatment, the piping shall be flushed with clean water until the residual chlorine content does not exceed 0.2 ppm. During the disinfecting period, care shall be exercised to prevent contamination of water in steel main.
3.15. A.
MANHOLE Manhole Construction Manholes shall be constructed of class "B" concrete as shown on the drawings. The base (where required) shall be of precast class "B" reinforced concrete. The shaft shall be constructed of poured reinforced concrete to suit the required depth.
The top shall be of class "B" reinforced concrete. An opening suitable for the cover shall be left in the top around which the radial concrete bricks or concrete ring are built for proper adjustment of levels. Bricks shall be fully bedded in mortar and the inside surface of joints finished flush and clean. _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-170
Month Year
Projects Name
The benching shall be formed in the bottom of manholes in class "B" concrete. "U" channels shall be formed with bottom flush with inside surfaces of pipes and sides extending the full height of the largest pipe and then sloped back at a minimum fall of 10%. The benching and channels shall be finished with 2 cm thick rendering composed of 1/2 cement/sand mortar, and surface hardened with two coats of sodium silicate solution brushed on. The finished diameter of channels shall be the same as the diameter of pipes entering or leaving the manhole. The paint for the manhole and trenches interior shall be coal tar epoxy resin. B. Frames, Covers & Gratings The Contractor shall furnish and set level and to the proper grade, a ductile iron frame and cover or frame and grating of the form and dimensions shown on the Drawings and suitable for heavy load installation. The concrete masonry shall be neatly and accurately brought to the dimensions of the base of the frame. The frames shall be thoroughly embedded in mortar. All covers and frames shall be heavy duty quality. Manhole covers shall have double seal with air lock and shall be suitable for outdoor installations. All castings for frames, covers, and gratings shall be of ductile iron. All castings shall be made accurately to dimensions and shall be machined to provide even bearing surfaces. Covers and gratings must fit the frames in any position and if found to rattle under traffic, shall be replaced. Filling to obtain tight covers will not be permitted. No plugging, burning-in or filling will be allowed. All castings shall be carefully coated inside and out with coal tar pitch varnish of approved quality. 3.16 TRENCH GRATE & FRAME Supply and install wherever shown on drawings trench grates and frames as hereinafter specified. Grating in parking areas and ramps shall be ductile iron, heavy rectangular, sectional bar pattern, suitable for car parking. Grate openings shall be laid in wide dimensions in a steel frame with flat bar anchors and nailing clips. Grating and frame shall be Saint Gobain Model RE 40D3HD, 400 mm wide with frame Transilinea D400 Model RH40T6GR or approved equal. Grating in kitchen shall be of stainless 316 L with stainless steel frame 316L. Frame and grating shall be 100 mm wider than the inner dimension of the trench. 3.17 A. B. C. D. E. TESTING OF THE WORK On completion of the soil and waste pipe works or section of the work as may be required the contractor shall arrange the testing of the works and witnessing of the tests. The tests shall comprise an air test as set out in the Uniform Plumbing Code, and described below. Where the testing is to be carried out in sections the contractor shall retain on site a drawing indicating sections tested and recording dates on which the tests took place duly witnessed. The contractor shall be responsible for providing all skilled and unskilled labor necessary to carry out tests and ensure that all supplies and instruments are available. Water Test
a. Apply the water tests to every part of each drainage system. Test each system in its entirety or in sections. Tightly close openings in the piping. _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-171
Month Year
Projects Name
b. If testing the system in sections, tightly plug each opening, except the highest opening of the section being tested, and fill each section with water. Test every section with a head of water equivalent to the greatest floor-to-floor distance between floors with a minimum of at least a 10 foot head of water. c. Keep the water in the system, or in the portion under test, for at least 15 minutes before inspection starts. d. There shall be no leakage. F. Smoke Test a. After connecting fixtures, perform a smoke test on the sanitary and laboratory drainage systems. b. Fill traps with water, then produce a thick, penetrating smoke with one or more approved smoke machines and inject into the entire system. As the smoke appears at the stack openings on the roof, tightly close such openings and apply a pressure equivalent to a 1 inch water column. c. Maintain pressure of 1 inch water column for at least 15 minutes before inspection starts. d. Inspect traps. There shall be no leakage. G. 3.18 A. Correct defects detected by any test and retest. PROTECTION The Contractor shall be responsible for repairing and replacing plumbing materials and equipment, whether or not installed, which are damaged due to freezeups, until the systems are approved by the Engineer and turned over to the Employer. END OF SECTION
Month Year
Projects Name
SECTION 15450 PLUMBING FIXTURES & TRIM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. 1.02 Work in this section of the specification describes the various medical, non-medical and specialist plumbing fixture and their installation.
RELATED WORK A. B. C. Section 15401 : Domestic and Soft Water Piping Systems. Section 15405 : Soil, Waste, Rainwater Piping Systems. Section 15100 : Valves.
1.03
WORK INCLUDED A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. Western Water Closets. Lavatory Basins - Wall Mounted Lavatory Basins Counter Top Showers Bidets Cleaners Service Sink Kitchen Sink Drinking Water Cooler Urinal Bathtub
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. B. C. Sanitary fittings throughout the buildings will be white vitreous china of matching design. Where vitreous china is not available white glazed fireclay fittings shall be used, e.g. shower trays, heavy medical fittings , laboratory sinks and cleaners sinks. All taps, valves and sprays shall be made of good quality cast brass and chromium plated. All hand held sprays in whatever location shall be fitted with backflow (anti- vacuum ) preventors.
2.02
GENERAL REQUIREMENT A. Each plumbing fixture mentioned in this section shall be provided with individual chrome plated angle valve or chrome plated in wall valve as required to isolate the individual fixture for maintenance, complete with chrome plate escutcheon and copper pipe with all accessories. All sanitary fixtures shall be from one brand and supplier.
B. 2.03
WESTERN WATER CLOSETS (TYPE WC-1)
White vitreous china, European type, wall hung, P-trap back connection, coupled to recessed flush _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-173
Month Year
Projects Name
valve. Ideal Standard SAN REMO Model R3401 with wall support, complete with the following trim and accessories or approved equal: 2.04 White solid plastic seat and cover with metal hinge, rubber washers and plastic screws and nuts. Recessed flush tank shall be Grohe DAL Model or equal. Stainless steel toilet paper holder, with hood and plastic roller exposed surface mounted type, polished finish Bobrick B-6699. Spray assembly unit where shown on drawings with flexible hose, nozzle with aerator, mounting bracket, exposed vacuum breaker and self closing push button valve.
LAVORATORY BASINS (TYPE LAV-1, WALL HUNG) White, vitreous china, 650 x 520 mm, wall hung type, with one hole for mixer, Ideal Standard SAN REMO Model E7470 WHT or approved equal, complete with following trim and accessories or approved equal: 1/2" single hole chrome plated monobloc mixer with fixed cast spout projection 118 mm with pull-knob 1 1/4" diameter pop-up waste, Ideal Standard CERAPLAN Model B1109 AA or approved equal. 1 1/4" chrome plated P-trap with wall tube and wall flange, adjustable type. Trap cover, white, SAN REMO , Ideal Standard , or equal. Two 1/2" chrome plated angle valves with 300 mm long tubes and wall flanges, Ideal Standard or approved equal. Shelf, 600 mm long, chrome, Model INDA Moon or approved equal. Mirror, European make on all length of the shelf. Towel rail of stainless steel for patient bathroom and soap dispenser SD-1 where shown on drawings and hand dryers (HD).
Month Year
Projects Name
2.05
LAVATORY BASINS - ( TYPE LAV-2, COUNTER TOP ) White, vitreous china, 570 x 410 mm, oval type, with overflow for fitting in a counter top, Ideal Standard OVAL Model R4102 WHT or approved equal, complete with following trim and accessories or approved equal: 1/2" single hole chrome plated monobloc mixer with fixed cast spout projection 118 mm with pull-knob, 1 1/4" diameter pop-up waste, Ideal Standard CERAPLAN Model B1109 AA or approved equal. 1 1/4" chrome plated P-trap with wall tube and wall flange, adjustable type. Two 1/2" chrome plated angle valves with 300 mm long tubes and wall flanges, Ideal Standard or approved equal. Mirror, European make on all length of the counter top. Stainless steel surface mounted towel paper dispenser (for 2 lavatories) with slopping top, refill indicator and a pivot type door hinge, 290x375x100mm, Bobrick No.262 or approved equal. Towel rail of stainless steel for patient bathroom and soap dispenser SD-2 where shown on drawings and hand dryers (HD).
2.06
SHOWERS ( TYPE SH-1) White, shower tray 900 x 900 x 140 mm deep with anti-skid floor and 55 mm drain opening, Ideal standard Model T1004 WHT, complete with the following trim & accessories or approved equal: 2 waste fitting with strainer. Chrome plated shower mixer, with semi automatic diverter, exposed wall mounted with 1.5 m flexible hose, handspray and showering stay, Ideal Standard CERAPLAN Model B1458 AA and visentin baby Fiorella shower rod Model SAL 83521CHR. INDA MOON SOAP HOLDER Chrome. INDA MOON SOAP SPONGE BASKET CHROME. Grab bar chrome, INDA MOON. INDA MOON TOWEL BAR 600 mm chrome. Robe hook double chrome, INDA MOON. Washing line Model 4979 - KEUCO
Month Year
Projects Name
2.07
CLEANERS ( SERVICE) SINKS ( TYPE SS-1) White enameled fire clay 465 x 410 mm, 200 mm deep, wall hung with supporting legs, bucket grating and hardwood rim, Twyfords No. FC 1033 WH or approved equal, complete with the following trim and accessories or approved equal: 1/2" taps, wall mounted single tap (2 No) SF5204 CP (cold and hot water). 1 1/2" grid waste, Twyfords No. WF 4343 CP. stainless steel hinged bucket grating, Twyfords. supporting legs, 305 mm high, Twyfords. two built-in cantilever brackets Twyfords SR 1331 plastic 1 1/2" tubular P-trap, Twyfords.
2.08
KITCHEN SINK (TYPE KS-1) Kitchen Sink shall be of Stainless steel type 302, inset type for fixing into counter top, single bowl with two tap holes, 900 x 500 mm, stainless steel 16 gauge thickness by Elkay or approved equal, complete with the following trim and accessories. 50 mm sink waste with stainless steel grating. 50 mm P-trap with wall tube. Wall flange for 50 mm tube trap. Stainless steel detachable overflow. 15 mm pillar mounted sink tap with swivel nozzle for drinking water. 15 mm mixer with swivel spout. 15 mm swivel tube spout with jet regulator . Angle valves with copper tubing and wall escutcheons.
2.09
DRINKING WATER COOLER Drinking water cooler shall be electrically cooled vertical type wall hung unit. They shall have a tamper-proof bubbler and a remote control push button valve with flow regulator. Drinking fountain shall be capable of producing 75 lit/hour of water at 10C with incoming supply of 27C. The drinking water cooler shall be all of stainless steel with removable casing for easy access and maintenance. Drinking water cooler shall be complete with refrigeration circuit, compressor, isolating valve, UV sterilizer, cartridge filter, drain connection, power connection and all other accessories to the approval of the Engineer.
Drinking water cooler shall be manufactured by: _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-176
Month Year
Projects Name
Filtrine Oasis Cordlay
or approved equal 2.10. URINALS - TYPE UR White, vitreous china, wall mounted urinal with built-in trap, Fondo-Keramac Model 36010 or approved equal, complete with the following fittings and accessories or approved equal. 1/2" flush valve chrome plated heavy duty similar to Grohe ref. 37024 or approved equal. 1/2" chrome plated inlet connection with supply coupling and connection tube, Grohe. 40 mm outlet grating with dome strainer and 40 mm diameter bottle trap Keramac Model 521210. wall hangers and supports. 1/2" diameter stop valve Grohe Model 12409. Dividers between urinals, vitreous china. 2.11. BATHTUBS - TYPE BT White Bathtub, Acrylic type, size as per Architectural drawings, with slip resistant base, leg supports, for tiling in. Type as approved by the Engineer. Supplied complete with the following Grohe trim and accessories : waste and overflow with 1 " (40mm) waste fitting with strainer, 1 1/4" (32mm) overflow fitting with plug and chain, 1 1/2" x 2" (40 x 50 mm) trap with threaded outlet and plastic overflow pipe. chrome plated exposed wall mounted bath and shower mixer with automatic diverter, bathtub filler, handspray with high swivel wall bracket and 1.7 m shower hose, adjustable sprayer. Stainless steel soap holder and hand grip bar, surface mounted 300 mm x 51 mm polished finish. Stainless steel double robe hook, satin finish. 2.12 HOSE BIBB TYPE HB To consist of chrome plated metal bibcock, 15 mm male back inlet connection and 15 mm male, hose thread outlet, Grohe No. 30012 or approved equal, with 15 mm chrome plated metal hose coupling female threaded, Grohe No. 13914 or approved equal. 2.13 LIQUID SOAP DISPENSER TYPE SD-1 Wall mounted, heavy gauge stainless steel with concealed fixing wall plate similar to "Bobrick" model B2113 or approved equal. 2.14 LIQUID SOAP DISPENSER TYPE SD-2
Suitable for deck mounting on a counter top, complete with litre polyethylene container, chrome plated brass body valve and 150 mm long spout, similar to "Bobrick" B-822 or approved equal. _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-177
Month Year
Projects Name
2.15
TOWEL PAPER DISPENSERS TYPE TPD Stainless steel, surface mounted with sloping top, refill indicator slots, and a pivot type door hinge, 290 x 375 x 100 mm, Bobrick No. 262 or approved equal.
2.16
HAND DRYER TYPE HD Exposed, wall mounted type, with ribbed aluminum cover, electrically operated by push-button and provided with 1850 watts capacity heater. Drying time not to exceed 60 seconds. Hand dryer to be VDE approved, provided with radio and TV interference suppressor, protected against overheating and malicious treatment, supplied complete with mounting rails and similar to Siemens model TH 4210 or approved equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. B. C. D. Set plumbing fixtures tight, level, and rigid on proper grounds. Use setting compound under all setting s surfaces. Provide required trim including supplies, loose-keyed stops, wastes, traps, floor and wall escutcheon plates. Protect fixtures after they are set .Thoroughly clean them at the completion of the project. General Plumbing Criteria
1. Headers supplying flush valve fixtures shall run full size to last fixture. 2. Shut off valves shall be supplied in the furring for each fixture or to banks of two or more fixtures, where required for proper system control, entrances of buildings and to all equipment and controls. 3. Concealed valves shall be provided with access plates. 4. Install unions on one side of all valves, equipment connections and elsewhere as shown or required for ease of service and / or installation, unless flanged are indicated. E. Caulk around all plumbing fixtures with white silicone epoxy type, non-hardening compound, where fixtures meet floor or wall as required to present a finish appearance. See Section on Sealants and Caulking. Set shower receptors and janitor receptors in a leveling bed of cement grout and lead pan. The installation and connection of all sanitary fixtures shown on the drawings or provided later shall satisfy the following specifications: Ample application of petroleum jelly shall be applied to all surfaces of exposed chrome plated piping, valves and fittings and stainless steel fixtures immediately after installation. Concealed brackets, hangers and plates shall have a shop coat of paint. All exposed piping and trim shall be chrome plated and fully protected during installation. Strap or padded wrenches shall be used on chrome pipe fittings and valves. _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-178 -
F. G. -
Month Year
Projects Name
All exposed metal parts in the sanitary blocks shall be chrome plated. All exposed valves in the sanitary blocks shall be chrome plated of the recessed type. Plumbing fixtures shall be complete with all required trimmings, including faucets, waste plugs, traps, supplies, stop valves, escutcheons and casings and all necessary hangers, plates, brackets, anchors and supports. All fixtures shall be individually trapped. All fixtures shall be equipped with chrome plated angle valves, whether specified, shown on drawings or not. Fixtures shall be set in a neat, finished and uniform manner making the connection to all fixtures at right angles with the walls, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. Roughing for this work must be accurately laid out so as to conform with the finished wall material. Fixtures are not to be set until so directed by the Engineer. The location and disposition of all items shall be as indicated on the relevant drawings. It is to be noted that all fixtures mentioned below shall be approved for shapes and colors before ordering.
END OF SECTION
Month Year
Projects Name
SECTION 15606 OIL STORAGE TANKS AND PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Oil Storage Tank.
1.02 RELATED WORK A. B. C. D. E Section 15060 : Section 15100 : Section 15140 : Section 15602 : Section 15991 : Pipe and Pipe Fittings Valves. Pumps. Steam Generation Systems. Testing and Commissioning
1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. This Section covers: 1. The daily services tanks constructed of steel 2. Underground main fuel tanks. 3. The oil feed pumps and piping circuits. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers Qualifications 1. The manufacturer must be experienced in the manufacture of the type and size of tank using the materials specified and shall be approved. 1.05 REFERENCES A. B. Refer to individual materials for specified standards. American Petroleum Institute ( API ) 1. API - 650 Fabrication of Oil Tanks.
Month Year
Projects Name
1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data 1. Descriptive literature for each of the actual proposed equipment to be used including : a. b. c. d. e. B. Capacity. Test Reports. Certificates of Approval . Operating and Maintenance Data . Any other Technical Data.
Shop Drawings 1. Shop drawings for each of the actual proposed equipment shall include the following : a. b. c. d. e. f. g. Working or Manufacturing Drawings. Calculations. Installation Details. Connections by Other Services. Wiring Diagrams. Accessories Available Indicating Those Included. System Diagrams.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPES AND TUBES A. B. Refer to Part 3 Article Piping Applications for identification of system where pipe and tube materials specified below are used. Steel pipe : ASTM A53, Schedule 40, Seamless type, Grade B, black, with beveled ends.
2.02 PIPES AND TUBES FITTINGS A. B. C. Refer to Part 3 Article Piping Applications for identification of system where pipe and tube fitting materials specified below are used. Malleable-iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern, with threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Steel Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M, welded, for welded joints.
2.03 Oil Safety Valves : UL-listed for flammable or volatile liquids, 1725 kPa maximum working pressure, 288 deg C maximum operation temperature. Include ASTM B 61 bronze body, bronze bases and discs, and field adjustable cadmium- plated carbon steel springs, factory set at 20 percent above operating pressure. End connections have inside threads according to ASME B1.20.1.
2.04 OIL TANKS A. General _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-181
Month Year
Projects Name
1. Fuel oil storage tanks shall be provided where located on the drawings with capacities as scheduled. 2. Provide valved balance between storage tanks storing similar oil for like purpose. 3. Provide 3-way cocks on return oil systems to allow non-return to any one tank during maintenance periods, and balanced flow to all tanks under normal conditions. B. Above-Ground Storage(Horizontal Mounting) Tank shall be constructed of 4 mm. thick welded black steel sheet metal to the capacities indicated on the Drawings. Tank shall be tested for leaks before installation and shall be painted with two coats of red lead oxide or approved equal, and two coats black bituminous paint. Tank shall be mounted on a concrete pad and shall be equipped with the following:

Manhole and manhole cover, air tight. Protected oil level indicator fixed to the tank. Fill and vent pipes. Gate valves as shown on drawings. Overflow, drain and supply lines. Emergency fuel shut off valve on fill and discharge pipes. Digital level indicator. Level switches.
C.
Fuel Oil Strainers Y-pattern, full size of connecting piping. Include Type 304 stainless steel screens with 1.2 mm perforations. 1. 2. 3. 4. Pressure Rating: 860 kPa (125 psig) minimum steam working pressure. Size 65 mm and Smaller: Bronze body, with female threaded ends. Sizes 80 mm and Larger: Cast-iron body, with flanged ends. Screwed screen retainer with centered blow-down and pipe plug.
D.
Level Switches in Fuel Tank Level switches installed in daily fuel oil tank all on one stem to operate solenoid valve shall be of the type suitable for fuel oil with four level switches as indicated on drawings. Mounting and stem material shall be of brass, float shall be of polysulfone or polypropylene. Switches shall give signal for: Low level alarm Low level open valve. High level close valve. High level alarm.
Grip rings shall be of copper and collar of brass Stem size shall be 5/16 inches diameters of the adjustable type with length suitable for day tank height. _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-182
Month Year
Projects Name
Level switch shall be UL listed, Thomas products LTD level and flow switches mode 4000 or approved equal. Low level switch and high level switch in underground fuel tank shall be as described above but shall give low level signal BMS and high level signal to give alarm that tank is over filled with fuel oil by tanker and a signal to BMS. E. Emergency Fuel Shut-Off Valve Supply and install fuel shut off valves at fuel pipes crossing the fuel storage tank to the boiler and generator rooms. Valves shall be interlocked with fire alarm panel & BMS. Fuel shut off valve shall be of the free tall type suitable for horizontal or vertical installation, fusible link operated and consisting, of main valve, lever, counter weight and fusible link. Fusible link shall be located above the burner and connected through a system of ropes and pulleys to the valve linkage. Valve to be as manufactured by KINGSWAY or approved equal. F. Fuel Oil Solenoid Valves Fuel oil Solenoid valve shall be 2 way, 2 position motorized valve providing open-closed control of Diesel oil flow through operation of motor actuator and valve linkage in response to signal from an off-on switch. Single seated valve, straight-through pattern; screwed end connections, bronze body and removable brass seat on 15 to 40 mm sizes; flanged end connections, cast iron body and removable bronze seat on 50 to 80 mm sizes; stainless steel stem and composition disc with removable throttling plugs Reversing type motor, with oil-immersed gear train, die- cast aluminium case, dual-stroke (90 and 160 degrees), double-ended crankshaft and die-cast aluminium cover with built-in transformer linkage directly mounted on motor, without adjustment requirements and comprising roller, slide mechanism, cam and stem position indicator and with 160 lb. seal-off force Valve rated 240 deg. F maximum fuel oil temperature and 125 psi maximum pressure for flanged end connections and 150 psi for screwed end connections Motor rated 125 deg. F maximum ambient temperature.
G.
Digital Level Indicator Level indicator shall be for accurate level indication in percent for cylindrical fuel oil tanks and in liters for square level oil tanks in a flush panel mounting or wall mounting package. The level indicator shall be a fully electronic device using a solid state level transmitter with a receiver/indicator to display tank level or content. The level transmitter shall be installed in a 50 mm NPT pipe fitting in the tank top with a level transmitter probe length equal to the inside height of the tank.
Month Year
Projects Name
The receiver/indicator panel shall be enclosed in NEMA 4 X polycarbonate wall mountable enclosure. The level indicator shall be powered from either 120 VAC or 24 DC-Level indicator shall be similar to simplex model TC-2 tank commander digital level indicator or approved equal. H. Approved Manufacturers 1Fuel Oil Piping Specialties: a) b) c) d) e) 2Emco Wheaton, Inc. A.Y. McDonald Mfg. Co. OPW Fueling Components Group, Dover Corp. Preferred Utilities Manufacturing Corp. Universal Valve Co., Inc.
Fuel Oil Automatic Controls: a) b) c) d) e) f) Honeywell. Barber-Colman Co. Johnson Controls Inc. I.T.T Controls. Thomas Products LTD Simplex
3-
Instruments: a) March Instruments Co.
or approved equal. I) Fill Alarm Station Tank alarm system shall be a buzzer/light combination actuated by high level switch in underground fuel tank. Unit shall have ABS high impact gray housing with polycarbonate transparent cap complete with bulb and clamp with unit shall be CE approved similar to WERMA Model 481 or approved equal. FLAME ARRESTOR Flame arrestotr shall be installed at end of fuel oil vent pipes and shall consist of a series of sturdy round discs mounted on a duerable collor casing. Flame arrestor shall be constructed of light weight cast aluminum coller, weather hood and flame arrestor plates. Flame arrestors shall be UL listed with quality assurance from factory before shipment. Flame arrestor shall be Protectoseal Model No 6670 or approved equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PIPING APPLICATIONS A. Aboveground Piping, Sizes 50 mm and smaller : Steel pipe, malleable-iron fittings, and threaded joints. _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-184
2.06
Month Year
Projects Name
B. C.
Aboveground Piping, Sizes 65 mm and larger : Steel pipe, steel fittings, and welded joints. Under-slab Piping, Sizes 65 mm and larger : Steel pipe, steel fittings, and welded joints.
3.02 PIPE INSTALLATIONS A. B. C. Refer to Division 15 Section Pipes and Pipe Fittings for basic piping installation instructions. Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level side down. Install strainers on the supply side of each control valve, pressure regulating valve, oil burner connection, and elsewhere as indicated. Install 20 mm pipe nipple and ball valve in blow-down connection of strainers 50 mm and larger. Use same size nipple and valve as blow-off connection of strainer.
3.03 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. B. Refer to Division 15 Section Hangers & Supports for hanger and support devices. Install hangers for horizontal piping with following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes : Nominal Pipe Size ( Millimeters) 15 & smaller 20 25 32 40 50 65 Steel Pipe Max. Span (Meters) 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.7 3.0 3.4 Min. Rod Diameter (Millimeters) 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1
Support vertical steel pipe at each floor and at spacing not greater than 4.6 m.
3.04 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTIONS A. Refer to Division 15 Section Pipes & Pipe Fittings for basic pipe joint construction
3.05 VALVE INSTALLATIONS A. B. C. D. Install valves in accessible locations, protected from physical damage. Tag valves with a metal tag attached with a metal chain indicating the piping systems supplied. Install gate valves at each branch connection to supply mains and elsewhere as indicated. Install drain valves at low points in mains, risers, branch lines, and elsewhere as required for system drainage. Install swing check valves as required to control flow direction.
3.06 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Sediment raps : Install a T fitting with the bottom outlet plugged or capped as close to the inlet of the oil burning appliance as practical. Drip leg shall be a minimum of 3 pipe diameter in length. _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-185
Month Year
Projects Name
3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. B. Test fuel oil piping according to NFPA 31 . Remark leaking joints and connections using new materials. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment.
3.08 DEMONSTRATION A. B. C. Train Owners maintenance personal on procedures and schedules related to start-up and shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventive maintenance. Review data in Operating and Maintenance Manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section Project Closeout. Schedule training with Owner with at least 7 days advance notice
3.09 COMMISSIONING A. Before activating system perform these steps: 1234567Open valves to full open position and close bypass valves. Remove and clean strainer screens. Check pump for proper direction of rotation. Fill oil storage tank with proper fuel type. Check operating controls of fuel burner units. Check operation at automatic bypass valves. Check and set operating temperature controls on oil heaters. END OF SECTION
Month Year
Projects Name
SECTION 15616 CHIMNEY & FLUES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. 1.02 A. RELATED WORK Section 15991 : Testing & Commissioning.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION This Section describes the chimney and flue required for : 1. The main steam generators. 2. The standby generators.
B. 1.03 A.
The number of flues shall be as shown on the drawings. QUALITY ASSURANCE Manufacturers Qualifications 1. The manufacturer shall be presently engaged in the manufacturer of the equipment similar to that specified herein, In addition, manufacturer must have the necessary experience, technical qualifications, facilities, and engineering organization to undertake and execute all the required work. 2. The manufacturer shall be approved. 3. Manufacturer shall have not less than five (5) years experience in manufacturing the system specified herein, and will have supplied and have in operation at least 5 systems similar in magnitude to the system proposed for this installation. 4. Welder shall be certified according to AWS D9.1
1.04 A. B. C.
REFERENCES Uniform Building Code ( UBC). American Welding Society ( AWS ). 1. AWS D.1.1. American Society to testing and Materials ( ASTM ) 1. ASTM A678 : Carbon steel for structural applications. 2. ASTM A283 : Carbon steel, for structural quality for general purposes.. NFPA 211 SUBMITTALS Product Data
D. 1.06 A.
Month Year
Projects Name
1. Descriptive Literature for each of the actual proposed equipment to be used including : a) b) c) d) e) B. Capacity. Pressure Loses. Test Reports Certificates of Approval Any Other Technical Data.
Shop Drawings 1. Shop drawings for each of the actual proposed equipment shall include the following : a) b) c) d) e) Working or Manufacturing Drawings. Calculations. Installation Details Connections by other Services. Base Construction Drawings and Fixing Details.
C.
Manufacturers Details 1. Provide the name, full details and experience of the proposed designer, manufacturer and /or installer, who before the order is placed shall be approved by the Engineer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL The works covered by this part of the specification are for the supply, erection, and commissioning of flues. The Contractor shall employ the services of a suitably qualified specialist Sub- Contractor who shall be subject to he approval of the Engineer, for this installation. In this connection the Contractors attention is particularly drawn to the General Technical Requirements section of the Mechanical Specifications relating to the employment of Specialist Contractors. From the boilers and the Generators flues shall be run at high level connecting to vertical flue liners contained within a builders-work chimney casing rising p to the building as indicated on the drawings. The section of the specifications covers the entire flue installation from the connection to the plant to the discharge at the top of the chimney. Flues shall be suitable for pressurized flue gases and shall be tested at works to a pressure of 5 psig for a period of one hour. The Contractor shall submit details of the design of the flues for forwarding to the Structural Engineer. Chimney and breaching shall be painted with fire resistive primer and two finish coating all withstanding up to 500 deg. C. Chimney shall be supported at 3 m interval s and breaching at 2 m interval. And in every change in direction. 2.02 FLUE LINER CONSTRUCTION _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-188
Month Year
Projects Name
Each vertical flue liner shall be made in angle flanged sections of welded construction from 6mm thick mild steel plate to BS 4360 43A. All flanged joints to the inner flues shall only be made with asbestos gaskets and shall be completely gas tight when completed. The flue liners shall be laterally supported from the outer shell, arranged to permit both vertical and horizontal expansion of each liner as necessary. The flue gas carrying liners shall be so arranged that there is no metal contact between the individual flues, on to any supporting structures within the outer shell. Provide a cleaning and/or access door for each flue. Provide duplicate opening and closing handles on the inside of all cleaning and access doors having an opening larger than 370 mm x 170 mm. Each flue shall terminate external to the outer shell at the bottom with a drilled flange for the horizontal flues connecting the vertical flue to the plant. All the top of the chimney the liner discharges shall be so designed to ensure a minimum efflux velocity of 10m/s at the maximum output. A cap plate shall be provided at the top of the chimney through which the flues shall pass. The plate shall be arranged to give complete weatherproofing and allow for expansion. The design of the chimney will be such that, should it be necessary one flue can be removed and replaced without interference with the other flues. Chimney shall be designed to take any expansion of metal with all necessary expansion joints. 2.03 CHIMNEY SCAFFOLDING HOOKS Suitable access threads to enable steeplejacks to use hooks if necessary to assist in inspection producers, shall be provided at the top of the chimney or liners. 2.04 FLUE INSULATION Each boiler and generator flue shall be insulated with insulating materials suitable for the operating temperatures and shall be securely fitted to each flue. The insulation thickness shall be such to ensure a maximum temperature drop of 14C of the flue gases at the chimney outlet. The insulation shall be applied after testing and shall be not less than 100 mm thickness of mineral wool having a density of 120kg/m3 secured by 20 mm wide circumferential steel bands at 500 mm intervals. All horizontal and vertical seams of the mineral wool shall be staggered. Insulation shall be protected with 0.8 mm thick galvanized steel jacket. All flanged joints shall be insulated as for the liners. 2.05 LIGHTNING PROTECTION
The liners shall be bonded to the cap plate with either copper or aluminum PVC coated lightning conductor tape. The cap plate shall be similarly bonded to the structural shell. _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-189
Month Year
Projects Name
Provide four M16 x 2 coarse thread mild steel studs , for each liner which shall be screwed and welded to the bottom of the flue where the vertical liner enters the boiler-house. The Contractor shall ensure that the compete installation is adequately bonded to earth. 2.06 HORIZONTAL FLUES The Contractor shall include for providing and fixing the horizontal steel flues from each boiler and generator outlet to the flanged connection on the steel flue liners. All flues shall be manufactured from materials as specified for the liners, welded construction with flanged and bolted joints at not more than 2.4 m intervals. Flange jointing shall be asbestos tape or other approved heat resisting material to ensure gas tightness. All taper pieces shall have a taper not exceeding 1 in 8. All bends shall be easy and not abrupt to minimize friction loses. All duct supports from the building steelwork shall be purpose made. They shall be rigid construction fabricated from M.S. Section and fully braced to prevent bending. Any supports taken from the building structure shall only be done with the full approval of the Engineer. All supports from building steelwork shall be by clips of the Lindaptor type, welding will not be allowed. The horizontal flues shall be insulated as specified under item 2.04. A suitable mild steel access door shall be provided and fitted on each bend. The door opening shall be large enough to permit access and inspection and the door shall be hinged on one side with handle on the other and shall be secured with a suitable number of fixing bolts. Gas tight joints shall be provided as the boiler flues will be pressurized. Each boiler outlet flue shall be provided with five tappings, flanged pads, etc., at positions to be agreed for temperature, draught, CO2 and smoke density with one spare hand test connection. Immediately after the boiler outlet each flue shall also incorporate an open/closed damper controlled by interlocks with the burner controls as specified in the boilers section of this specifications. Expansion joints shall consist of connecting pieces of two layers of asbestos chemically clean. The inner layer of asbestos coated with P.T.F.E., bonded on by a special processed and facing internally to protect against flue gases, the outer layer of asbestos similarly coated with P.T.F.E facing outwards. The overall length of the expansion joint shall be 250 mm with ends turned back to form flanges 75 mm wide undrilled. The Contractor shall be required to provide the flanged connections on the flue including the backing flange and also to provide a spigot to act as an internal sleeve, and in accordance with the manufacturers requirements. 2.07 DAMPERS _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-190
Month Year
Projects Name
Provide each separate flue with an automatic motorized damper electricity interlocked with the burner control circuit included in boiler unit rate. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 A. B. C. D. GENERAL Install horizontal flue sections with upward grade from the boilers. Fit a drain complete with trap to waste at the lowest point of the main vertical flue. Flues shall be completely gastight and properly supported. Due allowance shall be made in the design for expansion.
END OF SECTION
Month Year
Projects Name
SECTION 15680 AIR-COOLED CHILLERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK Extent of Work: The extent of air-cooled chiller work is indicated by drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this section. Each unit is defined to include (but not by way of limitation), hermetic screw compressor, evaporator, air-cooled condenser, controls and panel including gages and indicating lights, auxiliary components, accessories and interconnecting piping. Required work also includes additional requirements as compressor and fan, motor starters, vibration isolators and seismic (earthquake) restrainers, evaporator insulation, anchor bolts and all required accessories by the manufacturer. 1.02 A. QUALITY ASSURANCE Manufacturer: A firm regularly engaged in manufacture of air-cooled chillers, of types, sizes and capacities required, whose products have been successfully used in similar service for not less than five years. Chiller Manufacturer must be ISO9001 registered. Certification: Certify performance of chiller at full-load scheduled values for capacity, power load, chilled water leaving temperature and flow and fouling factors. Include a report of expected performance at part-load conditions, for 80%, 60%, 40% and 20% of scheduled full-load capacity. Show data in terms of load versus actual capacity. For certified and expected performance capacities, include: Total heat rejection values (including effects of transmission for purge and refrigerant transfer systems) total power-input requirements, evaporator tube velocities. C. Typical Performance Data: Prepare data for (ANSI/ARI 590) schedules full-load capacity using "standard rating conditions" , part-load at 80%, 60% 40%, and 20% of scheduled full-load capacity using "application rating conditions". Certify that sound pressure level will not exceed scheduled values when tested in accordance with ARI 575. Include report of expected sound pressure level with chiller operating at scheduled capacity, and include also report of expected sound pressure level for each schedule capacity including part-load capacities. Ratings: Rate chiller in accordance with ARI 590. Safety: Comply with ANSI/ASHRAE 15, safety code for Mechanical Refrigeration. UL Labels: Provide chiller electrical components which have been listed and labeled by Underwriters laboratories. NEMA compliance: Comply with applicable portions of National Electrical Manufacturers Association standards pertaining to chiller motors and motor energy management. Standards for Design, Fabrication and Installation: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with following: 1.
B.
D.
E. F. G. H. I.
ASME boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section 8. Provide ASME stamp on chiller showing compliance with ASME Code. _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-192
Month Year
Projects Name
2. 3. 4. 1.03
National Electrical Code (NFPA No. 70). ANSI B31.1 Power Piping code. ASHRAE Standard 90-75, as applicable to air-cooled type water chillers. Show compliance with, but not by way of limitation, minimum energy efficiency ratio (EER).
SUBMITTALS Submit manufacturer's data on air-cooled chillers, including certified drawings showing overall dimensions of complete assembly, operating weights, foundation requirements, sizes, and locations of connection, accessories, auxiliary support requirements, and parts lists. Include the following information: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Performance certifications and reports. Wiring diagrams showing electric service for chiller electrical components, safety devices and indicator lights. Written instructions for installation and assembly. Written listing of limiting conditions for chiller operation. Written operating instructions including start-up, routine and normal operations, regulations and controls and shut-down for emergency. Written service instructions including manufacturer's recommendation on stocking of spare parts, including gaskets and O-rings. Report signed-by chiller manufacturer's representative, indicating that work has been properly installed in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Tool kit, including manufacturer's special tools and non-standard wrenches required for servicing chiller. Provide written warranty on air-cooled chiller work, agreeing to replace/repair inadequate and defective materials and workmanship, including leakage, breakage, improper assembly and failure to performs required. Include separate product warranties as indicated (if any) for specific parts or products in the work. Provide warranty signed by the Contractor. Include manufacturer's standard product warranty, covering chiller operation under normal conditions and use, where installed, operated and maintained in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Provide product warranty period terminating 12 months after start-up of the chiller installation. Special warranty period is 2 years after date of substantial completion.
10.
11.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 A) SCREW TYPE CHILLERS General The Contractor shall supply and install factory assembled air-cooled packaged cooling only chiller. The number and capacity of which shall be as indicated in the capacity schedule shown on the drawings.
Month Year
Projects Name
Each machine shall consist of at least two accessible hermetic fully modulating screw compressors air-cooled condenser, evaporator, interconnecting refrigerant piping, controls, safety devices, accessories, and control power transformer as applicable to limit control voltage to 240 volts maximum. No phase to neutral voltage shall be required. Each compressor shall have its independent circuit, evaporator, condenser, microprocessor-based controls and a unit mounted motor starter. The machine shall be completely charged at the factory with Refrigerant R 134a or R407c. All factory wiring and piping shall be contained within the machine enclosure. All electrical components shall be protected from the weather. The refrigerant circuit components shall include hot gas muffler, high side pressure relief valve, liquid line shut off valve filter drier, liquid line sight glass, liquid line solenoid valve and thermal expansion valve. Each machine shall be enclosed in a sound attenuating, galvanized steel casing, zinc phosphatized, with corrosion resistant finish, and shall be mounted on spring type vibration isolators. Unit shall have primary coating and an acrylic weather proof paint. Each machine shall be capable of operating satisfactorily at low outdoor air temperatures. Chiller manufacturer shall provide for each chiller a certified factory run test report. The manufacturer shall perform all field testing, balancing and final adjustment of the refrigeration machines in accordance with the applicable provisions of the relevant ASHRAE Standards. The following data shall be compiled and certified:

Temperature of chilled water "In and Out". Chilled Water flow (gpm). Pressure drop in chiller (Feet of Water). Operating power consumption from measured voltage, amperes and power factor.
Any part of the machines or system failing to meet the contract requirements shall be adjusted, repaired or replaced. Each chiller shall have protection grills. Chiller casing shall be capable of withstanding 500 hrs salt spray test in accordance with ASTMB-117 standard. Each packaged unit shall be factory equipped to connect to only one electrical power feeder with the necessary built-in circuit breakers, and one main disconnect switch. Disconnect switch shall be accessible from outside the chiller without opening the panel door. Each packaged unit shall be supplied with spring type vibration isolators flexible enough to dampen any vibrations supplied by chiller manufacturer.
Each chiller shall have sound proof enclosure on compressor, condenser fan air intake to maintain noise level of 60 dBA,10m away from chiller. Condenser fan shall be of the low RPM type. Sound proof enclosure shall be factory assembled and designed. Contractor shall provide additional sound treatment around chiller to attain a maximum noise level of 30NC in the nearest room included in the unit rate of the chiller. _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-194
Month Year
Projects Name
Each packaged unit shall have a microprocessor control unit to provide all the control and safety functions of the chiller with main circuit breaker for each chiller. Chiller shall be connected to building management system with pumps and all other equipment as indicated in electrical drawings. Chiller shall have all the necessary interface to connect to the selected BMS during execution. A computer interface shall be provided for all the chiller including all control and electrical works. The remote PC interface shall be connected to all chillers at the same time and shall display all the data available at each chiller microprocessor. This interface shall support the logging of alarms and all operating parameters. This item is provisional incase chillers interface with the selected BMS is not possible. The chiller supplier shall train the project maintenance staff on the installed chiller and the end of the training the attendees shall receive a certificate from manufacturer for the operation and maintenance of chiller.
B)
Compressor The compressor shall be of the accessible hermetic screw compressor direct drive 2950 RPM and 50 Hz with sound proof enclosure. The compressor shall have separately housed pressure lubricated rolling element bearing groups at each end of both rotors. The compressor shall have fully modulating capacity control by use of a slide valve in the rotor section of the compressors positioned by hydraulic action. The compressor shall have squirrel cage two pole induction motor, suction gas cooled Compressor shall be provided with oil separator and filtration devices. The compressor shall have sound attenuating enclosure. Motor and starter shall be in accordance with the requirements of these specifications regarding Electrical Equipment. Compressor motor shall be protected by internal overload thermisters. Each compressor shall be equipped with the following controls and instruments and their respective connections:

Part winding starters. Built-in automatic unloading capacity control unloaded starting. High and low pressure cutout with manual reset for the high pressure cut out and automatic reset for the low-pressure cutout. Internal discharge check valve to prevent reverse rotation at shut down.
Oil pressure failure cut out with manual reset. Suction and discharge refrigerant pressure gauges. Suction and discharge shut off valves. Oil Heater Oil pressure gauge. Oil drain valves. _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-195
Month Year
Projects Name
C)
The gauges shall comply with these specifications regarding instruments. The compressor shall have hot gas discharge muffler and liquid line sight glass and filter drier all as recommended by supplier.
Evaporator The evaporator shall be of the direct expansion shell-and-tube type, with removable heads. The shell shall be constructed and tested in accordance with ASME Code for Unfired Pressure Vessels. The tubes shall be made of seamless copper tubes of the individually replaceable type. Support sheets shall be provided to prevent sagging of the tubes. The shell shall be completely insulated with 2"(50mm) thick urethane foam insulation covered with a sheet steel jacket. The shell shall be provided with an electric heater cable under the insulation. The evaporator shall be supplied with the following controls and instruments and their respective connections:

Liquid line solenoid shut-off valve(s) and strainer(s). Thermostatic expansion valve(s). Control thermostat. Low limit thermostat (Freeze protection). Thermometer to measure the refrigerant gas temperature. Thermometers (well type) at the chilled water inlet and outlet. Pressure gauge to measure the refrigerant pressure.
D)
Air-Cooled Condenser The Condenser shall be air-cooled, upward air discharge type. Each condenser fan shall be in its own compartment to eliminate cross flow of condenser air during fan cycling. The condenser coil shall be made of seamless copper tubes, with aluminum fins mechanically bonded to the tubes. With unti-corrosion paint factory applied. The condenser shall have an integral sub cooler. The condenser fans shall be of the propeller type, constructed of corrosion resistant blades such as heavy gauge aluminum. The fan and drive shall be held in proper alignment. Fan assemblies shall be provided with heavy gauge, close mesh, electro- galvanized fan guards. Fan motors shall be drip-proof type, with built-in over load protection, and starting contactors. Motors shall be mounted on vibration isolators, and provided with lubricated ball bearings.
E)
Starter Panel Chiller shall include a starter panel containing motor starter, disconnect switches with fuses, 3 phase current transforment for motor overload protection.
F) Control Panel _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-196
Month Year
Projects Name
a) Control panel shall be a microprocessor unit control module that provides all the control and safety functions including startup and shut down, leaving chilled water control, compressor and electronic expansion valve modulation, fans sequencing, anti-recycle logic, automatic lead/lag compressor starting and load limiting. Unit protective functions shall include loss of chilled water flow, evaporator freezing, loss of refrigerant, low and high refrigerant pressure, reverse rotation, compressor starting and running over current, phase loss, phase unbalance, phase reversal and loss of oil flow. The unit shall include a menu driven digital display that indicate the chilled water setpoint, current limit setpoint, leaving chilled water temperature, evaporator and condenser refrigerant pressures and temperatures. b) the microprocessor shall have an LCD type display with a minimum of 32 characters with all messages in English. Coded messages and LED displays are not acceptable. LCD display to be with light-emitting diode back light for outdoor viewing of data. The control panel section shall include high and low pressure gauges. Microprocessor shall be able to equalize the number of starts and the operatings of each compressor in the chiller and to alternative between compressors to have equal running hours and start ups. The microprocessor shall be able to display the following readings. -
Entering and leaving chilled water temperature. Ambient air temprature. Evaporator and condensing refrigerant temperatures and pressures. Compressor suction temperature. Present RLA for each compressor. Present line voltage. Compressor starts and running hours. Active set points : Chilled water set point. Current limit set point. Low ambient lockout set point. Part failure diagnostics: Water temperature sensors Refrigerant temperature sensors Compressor contactors. Over 90 diagnostic and operating conditions.
1. Microprocessor to support the following functions: Password protection for critical parameters. Automatic control of compressor start/stop and load/unload. Automatic pump down at start-up and shut-down. Automatic control of anti-coincidence and anti-recycle timers. Automatic control of condenser fans, and evaporator pump. Water temperature control by monitoring the leaving and entering water temperatures. Soft load function to prevent the system from operating at full load during the chilled water pull-down period. Auto restart after a power failure. Safety shutdowns shall be date and time stamped with system temperatures and pressures recorded. At least six previous occurrences shall be kept in memory. Discharge pressure control through intelligent cycling of condenser fans. Pro-active compressor unloading in response to high discharge pressure or low _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-197
Month Year
Projects Name
evaporator pressure. Operating data or system fault shutdown history printout from a printer via an RS-232 port. System safeties shall cause individual compressor systems to perform auto-reset shutdown. Manual reset required after the third trip in 90 minutes. Safeties to include : high discharge pressure, low suction pressure, high/low motor current, high/low differential oil pressure, high oil temperature, and compressor motor protector, compressor motor protector shall protect against damage due to : low or high input current, phase reversal (reverse rotation), current unbalance, phase loss, thermal overload of windings, and low voltage. Automatic control of alarm contacts for: low leaving chilled water temperature, low voltage, and per compressor circuit: high discharge pressure, low suction pressure, low or high motor current, low or high differential oil pressure, and high oil pressure.
2. Microprocessor to include the following for connection to the BMS: On/off status contacts. Run signal contacts for each compressor. Demand load limit set point to be adjustable through the BMS using a0-10vDC or 420mA signal. General fault contact. Shall receive remote Start/Stop dry contact signal.
3. The microprocessor shall display the following in addition to the data listed on page 15680-6. Each circuit suction, discharge, and oil pressures and temperatures. Each compressor capacity control valve position. Fan operation. Last six faults-shutdown data. Cutout status and set-points for: supply water temperature, low suction pressure, high discharge pressure, high oil temperature, low and high ambient temperature, phase rotation safety, and low leaving chilled water temperature, compressor motor current percent limit, fan control discharge pressure set point. Training for chillers: Provide training for LAU personnel. Training to include but not limited to: i. Unit operation and maintenance. ii. Unit theory of operation and trouble shooting methods for all components. iii. Service of all components down to compressor service and microprocessor boards replaced. iv. Checking unit for correct refrigerant and oil charge. v. Unit refrigerant and oil charging and refrigerant recovery. H) APPROVED MANUFACTURERS PETRA Carrier Corp. Trane Co. York Corp. Lennox or approved equal. _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-198 (Jordan ) (USA, Europe ) (USA, Europe ) (USA, Europe ) (USA, Europe )
G)
Month Year
Projects Name
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 A. INSTALLATION General: Except as otherwise indicated, install air-cooled chiller work, including components and controls required for chiller operation, in accordance with chiller manufacturer's instructions, and with recognized industry practices, to ensure that chiller equipment complies with requirements and serves intended purposes. Locate chillers in general position indicated in relation to other work. Position chillers with sufficient clearance for normal service and maintenance, including clearance for cleaning and replacement of tubes and clearance for component replacement. Install chiller on vibration isolation mounts and earthquake restrainers as herein before in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, and as indicated. Charge chiller with refrigerant in quantity recommended by chiller manufacturer. Bleed-out noncondensable gases. Test chiller refrigerant system for leakage in manner recommended by manufacturer. Install pressure relief system in compliance with governing regulations, to vent refrigerant in manner indicated. Install auxiliary piping, solenoid valves, shut-off valves, protective devices, water strainers and controls within chiller work, and for ancillary systems. Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions. Interlock flow switches with chiller controls in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, except as otherwise indicated. Paint damaged and abraded factory finish with touch-up paint matching factory finish. Install gages in positions where machine vibrations will not interfere with taking readings. Grounding: Provide positive, equipment ground for chiller equipment and components. EXAMINATION OF RELATED WORK Observe installation of other work (related and connected to chiller work) and after completion check for inadequacies and protect operation and performance of chiller work to suit chiller manufacturer's requirements and to the Engineer satisfaction and approval, do not start chiller work until inadequacies have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Engineer. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Manufacturer's Supervision: Chiller manufacturer shall supervise field assembly (if any) and installation of chiller work, with a factory-trained technical service representative, for a minimum of 2 working days, plus one additional day for each chiller unit in excess of one. Prepare manufacturer's written report of installation. Include leak testing, evacuation, dehydration, vacuum pumping, and charging in scope of supervision by manufacturer's representative. 3.04 CHILLER START-UP
B.
C. D.
E. F.
G. H. I. J. 3.02
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, start-up chiller in accordance with chiller manufacturer's _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-199
Month Year
Projects Name
instructions. B. Sustained Operation: Do not place chiller in sustained operation prior to initial balancing of mechanical systems affected by chiller operation. Refer to requirements of Division 15 sections for testing, adjusting, and balancing. Cooperate with other trades of other work during the testing, adjusting, balancing and start-up of mechanical systems. TESTING General: Except as otherwise indicated, test chiller in accordance with ANSI/ARI Standard 590. END OF SECTION SECTION 15801 AIR DISTRIBUTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. B. C. D. E. F. 1.02 Section 15050 : Basic Materials and Methods. Section 15200 : Noise and Vibration Control. Section 15250 : Insulation. Section 15800 : General HVAC Requirements. Section 15900 : Automatic Controls . Section 15991 : Testing and Commissioning.
C. 3.05
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. B. Provide air distribution equipment and system as indicated on the drawings and specified herein. Work incorporated in this section includes : 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Air handling Units and Accessories. Fan Coil Units . Fans. Filters. Ductwork and Fittings. Grilles and Diffusers.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards.
1. Unit fans shall be tested and performance rated in accordance with the current _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-200
Month Year
Projects Name
2. 3. B.
AMCA standards. Unit coils shall be ARI certified and labeled. Electric heating coil shall be UL listed and labeled.
Manufacturer's Qualifications 1. Manufacturer shall be presently engaged in the manufacture of material and equipment similar to that specified herein. In addition, manufacturer must have the necessary experience, technical qualifications, facilities, and engineering organization to undertake and execute all the required work. The manufacturer shall be approved. Manufacturer shall have not less than five (5) years experience in manufacturing the system specified herein, and will have supplied and have in operation at least 5 systems similar in magnitude to the system proposed for this installation. Manufacturer must be able to demonstrate a sufficient inventory to assure readily available replacement parts as such items become necessary.
2. 3.
4. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data 1. Description literature for each of the actual proposed equipment to be used including : a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. Capacity Operating Pressure Ranges. Pressure Losses. Fluid Flows. Test Reports. Certificates of approval including noise level ratings for fans and terminal units. Operation and Maintenance Data. Any Other Technical Data.
B.
Shop Drawings 1. Shop drawings for each of the actual proposed equipment shall include the following : a. b. c. d. e. f. g. Working or Manufacturing Drawings. Calculations. Installation Details. Connections By Other Services. Wiring and Control Diagrams. Accessories available indicating those included. Pictures and System Diagrams.
1.05
REFERENCES A. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE ) Guide and Data Books.
Month Year
Projects Name
B.
Underwriters Laboratory ( UL ) 1. Standard 181 : Standard for Factory Made Air Duct Materials and Air Duct Connectors.
Month Year
Projects Name
C.
National Fire Protection Association ( NFPA ) 1. 2. 3. Standards 90 A: Standard for installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. Standard 90 B : Standards for Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems. Standards 101: Code for Safety to life in Buildings and Structures.
D.
Sheet metal and air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc.(SMACNA). 1. 2. Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards. High Pressure Duct Construction Standards.
E.
Uniform Mechanical Code ( UMC) 1. The international Conference of Building Officials.
1.06
APPROVED MANUFACTURES Air conditioning Equipment PETRA Carrier York Lennox Trane Fans Penn Greenheck Woods Kanalflakt Systemair Airoutlets Trox Anemostat Titus Tuttle & Bailey Golden Star Filters American Air Filters Co Cambridge Filter Corp.. FARR Co. Jordan USA / Europe USA / Europe USA / Europe USA / Europe USA USA England Sweden Sweden
PART 2 - GENERAL 2.01 AIRHANDLING UNITS
Month Year
Projects Name
A.
General 1. Central station air handling units shall be single packaged vertical or horizontal type (as shown on plans). All component parts shall be selected, manufactured and assembled by the same suppliers. All sections shall be of double skinned construction with the exception of the normal filter sections which shall be constructed in such a manner as to prevent leakage or passing of air, round the sides of the filter frames. Equipment design shall be such that the selected filter media, bearings insulation etc. will be suitable for the ambient temperature existing within the unit duct when heating coils are operating at their working temperature. All lubrication points shall be easily accessible with external lubrication nipples provided to enable recharging of bearing whilst equipment is running. Lifting lugs shall be provided to enable lifting of equipment by crane and to assist in the positioning of sections at site. Each unit shall be constructed to prevent drumming, distortion and vibration and shall be of a modular construction for ease of handling and replacement of sections.
2.
3.
4. 5. 6.
B.
Casings 1. Construction shall consist of a frame fabricated from heavy gage steel for maximum strength and rigidity with minimum strength and rigidity with minimum weight. Unit Framework : Frame construction shall be of sufficient strength and rigidity to support the components and fittings forming the air handling unit. The unit casing shall be suitable stiffened to conform to the pressure characteristics of the system under all operating conditions. Inspection panels shall be provided to facilitate access to all sections of the unit. Panels shall be easily removable. Where access doors are provided these shall be of the quick release type. Where applicable, fixed and removable sections and panels shall be insulated with an approved fire resistant thermal insulation, and double skinned. All components shall be phosphatized to resist corrosion. The primer shall be an enamel finish to provide an exceptionally hard, rust resistant finish. This shall be followed by an air-dried enamel top coat, applied before assembly. Finally, after assembly, the complete unit shall be given an external overspray of enamel for additional protection.
2.
3. 4.
5. 6.
C.
Insulation 1. All fan sections, humidifier sections, coil sections and mixing box sections shall be insulated using 50 mm thick, panel, with mineral wool 80 kg/m3.
Month Year
Projects Name
D.
Double Skin Construction 1. Sections shall be double skinned using 50 mm thick panel with 50 kg/m3 mineral wool and manufactured from solid galvanized steel sheet with outer panel 1.0 mm thick & perforated galvanized sheet metal 0.6 mm thick for inner panel. All panels associated with each section shall be double formed, and the cavity filled with 50mm mineral wool. Maximum noise transmitted to surroundings should not exceed 55 dbA. Contractor to provide all necessary sound proof protection externally & internally to unit and surrounding false ceiling, walls and slabs to attain specified noise level. Material used shall be mineral wool 50 kg/m3 with perforated galvanized sheet metal protection. All sound proof study shall be done by a specialized firm subject to the approval of the Engineer.
E.
Fan Section 1. Fans shall be double width double inlet centrifugal type with airfoil blades to suit the pressure and operating characteristics specified. Inlet guide vanes shall be provided where applicable. Fan housing shall be constructed from mild steel sheet with angle stiffeners utilized to prevent vibration and drumming. The casing shall be constructed to a truly volute form. Casing shall have rigid cone inlets truly circular and free from dents. All fan housings shall be welded on assembly irrespective of pressure and air volume to provide a rigid airtight housing. Impellers shall be robustly fabricated from steel sheet, with a cast iron boss and fabricated steel backplate. The boss shall be bored and keywayed to the shaft. Impellers shall be rigidly braced to ensure concentricity and eliminate vibration. They shall be statically and dynamically balanced on their shafts after assembly. Shafts shall be cold finished, turned, and polished steel sized so the first critical speed is at least 25% greater than the operating fan speed. Flats or keyways shall be machined on to the shaft to provide a means of securing the impeller. Keways shall be provided for all driving pulleys. Bearings shall be self-aligning, grease lubricated ball or roller type with extended greasing points carried to outside the casing. Minimum average life of bearing shall be 200,000 hours. Bearings shall be located on either side of the fan wheel. All parts of fans and motors liable to deterioration shall be protected by paint or grease before delivery to site. fan performance data shall be in accordance with ARI standard 430-66. The fan and motor assembly is to be mounted on a combined frame, isolated from the fan section by rubber-in shear isolators and flexible fan connection. A double ended fan shaft and extra mounting base for standby motor shall be provided where indicated.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7. 8. 9. 10. F.
Motors and Drives
Month Year
Projects Name
1. 2. 3.
Motors shall be unit mounted, internally arranged on fan bases with tensioners to provide adequate drive belt adjustment. All units with the exception of the operating rooms which have a complete AHU for standby , with a duty and standby motor included. The electric motor shall, unless otherwise stated, be squirrel caged induction type, as specified generally in Section 16150 but with class F insulation and shall be suitably rated for the duty as shown in the schedules. Fan drives shall be of the Vee-belt pattern with variable pitch ( adjustable ) pulley type taper lock pattern. Belts shall be matched and be of anti-static type. Motor Temperature Protection a. All fan motors above 4kw rating shall be fitted with bimetallic type temperature sensing winding protection. The temperature sensing circuits shall be connected to the central control and monitoring system ( BMS) .
4. 5.
G.
Mounting and Accessories 1. 2. Anti-vibration mounts shall be provided as necessary, selected and supplied in accordance with Section 15200. Flexible connections shall be of high density material and shall be securely fixed to the unit Sections by means of fixing strips and flanged connectors. All flexible connections shall be air-tight and suitable for the maximum operating pressures associated with the system.
H.
Mixing Box Section 1. Each mixing box shall be of double skinned construction fitted with two sets of dampers. These shall be parallel acting to give the most effective degree of mixing i.e. so that the air streams are directed towards each other. The dampers shall utilize painted steel blades with leading and trailing edges specifically designed so that adjacent blades interlock on closure to give a tight seal. Each blade shall be securely locked to its spindles by means of an adjustable locking device and the spindles rotate in self lubricating nylon brushes. Motorized dampers shall be Electrically/Electronically operated as required by the control system. Access doors shall be provided giving access to the dampers.
2.
3. I.
Cooling Coils/ Heating Coils 1. Cooling coils/ heating coils shall be manufactured from 16 mm O/D solid drawn seamless copper tube staggered in direction of air flow. Tube return bends shall be copper and brazed to tube ends. Fins shall be continuous aluminum, with factory applied anti corrosion paint having extended collars for spacing and bonding mechanically to the tube. Support plates shall be fitted as required to provide adequate support and rigidity to the fin tubes.
2.
Month Year
Projects Name
3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
Tube sheets and top and bottom plates shall be of minimum 0.95 mm galvanized steel . All tube sheets shall have die formed lipped holes to receive tubes. Coil headers shall be fitted with plugged vent tapings and plugged drain bosses to facilitate draining and venting. Coils shall be air pressure tested to 2MPa while immersing the coil in a tank of water after completion. Tubes shall be expanded on to the fin collar by hydraulic pressure only. All coils shall have ARI Certification. Cooling coil/ heating coils panels shall be removable for access purposes. No part of the coil tube ends or headers shall be external to the section. Air baffles shall be arranged to prevent air by-pass of the coil. Coils shall be suitably sealed with grommets where connection pass through unit casing. Each coil section incorporate a galvanized drain pan with integral insulation. Pan shall be fitted with galvanized drain socket connections for attachment to drain point. A manometric trap should be supplied and supplied and installed by the installing contractor. Where the duty of the coil is such that a multi-bank arrangement is necessary intermediate galvanized drain pans shall be fitted to collect and dispose of condensate formed on the elevated coil bank. Cooling coil/ heating coils shall include all valves shown on drawing including dynamic pressure compensating valve (Flowcon K). Motorized valve should be selected to withstand system pressure and operate at the selected pump pressure at no additional cost.
10.
11.
12.
L.
Filter Section 1. Filter shall be provided of the types detailed on the equipment schedules and herein. The filter section of the air handling unit shall adequately house the filters without by-pass leakage and offering adequate removal space.
2.02
FILTERS A. General 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Louvers shall be fitted to all outside connection. provide all air handling units with pre-filters and secondary filters to handle the full volume of air. provide secondary type filter to transfer air connections between dining and kitchen areas. Provide grease filters on kitchen exhaust systems. Provide Inertia type particle filters, as indicated . Filter section shall include pre filter and secondary filter.
Month Year
Projects Name
B.
Pre- Filters 1. 2. Provide pre-filters upstream of secondary filters. Pre-filters shall be of the washable panel filter type housed within a separate flat filter section. The section shall consist of galvanized metal frames and synthetic material filters of 85% efficiency against ASHRAE 52 Weight Arrestance Test. The section shall be insulated with glass fibre and of double skinned construction. A hinged access door shall be provided for filter changing.
3. C.
Secondary Filter 1. Shall be of the high efficiency disposable bag filter type. The bag filter section shall be capable of accepting 50mm thick pre-filters and a combination of 300mm by 600 mm ( nominal) bag filters. The bag filters shall be of 95% efficiency against ASHRAE 52 Atmospheric Duct Spot Test. The section shall be insulated with glass fibre and of double skinned construction. A hinged access door shall be provided for filter changing.
2. D.
Grease Filters 1. The grease filters shall be of the corrugated plate or crimped wire mesh type and shall be entirely of metal, and all ferrous metal shall be protected against corrosion. Where grease filters are fitted in Kitchen hoods, the assembly shall be include a drip tray and the element shall be secured in the frame by quick release clips.
Month Year
Projects Name
E.
Activated Carbon Filter USE on transfer air fans as shown on drawings and as specified. Filter to be high single pass efficiency, 200 mm thick, 1.25 m/s design velocity 50 kpa resistance at 1.25m/s, removable standard trays of epoxy coated steel. Each filter to contain approximately 45kg of activated carbon of tetrachloride activity rating of 50% per 100l/s of air flow. Filter casing to be of 14 gauge steel to permit stacking the filters one on top of other with filters foolted together and caulked. All parts of the filter casing and frame to be dual coated with corrosion resistant epoxy. Filter shall be similar to American air filters model AF-1000 or approved equal.
2.03
FAN COIL UNITS A. Fan coil units consist of centrifugal fans, cooling coil, electric heating coil, ( where specified) and drain pan assembly, filter, insulated cabinet, discharge grille, motorized valve kit, dynamic pressure compensating valve (Flowcon K) return air grille, motor and drive all factory assembled. Units shall be horizontal arrangement as scheduled or drawn. Motorized valve shall be of the high pressure rating to withstand the maximum system pressure and operate at the selected pump pressure at no additional cost. Fans shall be centrifugal double inlet drive coupled to permanent split capacitor, totally enclosed 3-speed motor suitable for 240V, 1-phase, 50 Hz supply. Filters shall be of the cleanable aluminum type. Cooling coils shall be of copper tube mechanically bonded to aluminum plate fins, with brass header. The connection side shall be field changeable. Coils shall have manual air vent and 15 mm FPT connections. Main drip pan shall be provided with 2x24 mm OD drains ( one at each end) for vertical units, one drain fitted with a removable plastic tap. Horizontal units shall be provided with 1x22 mm OD drain. Unit casing shall be fabricated from galvanized sheet steel internally insulated. Unit cabinet shall be fabricated from prepainted sheet steel with a baked enamel finish. Cabinet shall have doors for easy access to the fan switch and the connections on the coil. Units shall include speed control switch ( 3-speed/4 position) which shall select any of the three available fan speeds and also switch off the fan. When the switch is in the OFF position the unit shall be completely isolated from the mains. Fan coil units shall be of the quite type with maximum noise level as specified in various rooms. Unit shall be selected on medium speed, 35 dbA and specified static pressure. Fan coil units shall be concealed type with plenum box and filter or exposed type with cabinet decorative as shown on drawings.
B. C. D.
E.
F.
G.
H. J. K.
Fan coil units shall be complete with 2 way on-off motorized valves (3-way valves in specific locations), gate valves, self balancing valves, double regulating valves, strainers, di-electric fittings, unions and all other accessories as detailed on drawings. All to be _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-209
Month Year
Projects Name
supplied built in the FCU- Factory manufacture . L. Digital type thermostat shall include speed control switch ( 3-speed/4 position) which shall select any of the three available fan speeds and also switch off the fan. When the switch is in the OFF position the unit shall be completely isolated from the mains. Thermostat shall have cooling mode to control the 2-way or 3-way motorized valve thermostat in summer, or heating mode to control the electric heater (when specified) in winter. Refer to section 15900 for thermostat specifications. Fan coil units shall be interlocked with lights system and windows to readjust operation of FCU as shown on drawings.
M. 2.04
STEAM HUMIDIFIER Shall be of the packaged electrical self steam generating type, having an epoxy resin finished galvanized steel sheet casing and steel frame, a stainless steel cold water break tank with ball valve overflow and water level gauge, a stainless steel steam injection duct, a stainless steel generator with flanged maintenance manholes, water, steam and blow-down connection nozzles, stainless steel electric heating elements and contactors, an automatic time controlled blow-down with manual switch solenoid valve and anti-syphone switch, and controls including low water cut-out thermostat with manual reset, signal lights, operation controls, fuses, terminal blocks and neutral link. Steam humidifier shall be similar to defensor or approved equal. Steam humidifiers shall be suitable for 50 PPM water quality. Outdoor installed humidifiers shall have a weather proofed casing. Approved Manufacturers: Defensor ( Switzerland ), Devatic ( France ) or approved equal
2.05
FANS A. General 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. The Contractor shall supply and install where shown on the Drawings, fans as described hereinafter and of capacities indicated in the Capacity Schedule on the Drawings. The fan motors and starters shall be in accordance with the Electrical division of these specifications and shall have built in over load protection with disconnect switch factory assembled. Test and rate all fans in accordance with the standards of the AMCA. All fans must bear the AMCA certified rating seal. Make appropriate allowance for the effects on fan performance of all installation conditions including plenum enclosures and inlet and discharge arrangements so that actual installed fan performance equals that specified. Balance all fan wheels and all other moving components statically and dynamically. Where coating is specified and it affects the balance of the fan wheel, perform balancing after the coating has been applied. Drill all fan shafts on the center line to receive a tachometer. Belt driven fans shall be connected to the driving motor by means of an approved V-belt drive, with adjustable sheaves, unless otherwise designated. V-belt drives shall be designed for 50% overload capacity and the motors for such drives shall be equipped with adjustable bases or slide rails.
Bearings shall be self-aligning, grease lubricated, ball-bearing type, and shall be complete with grease fittings, extended for easy access where necessary. 9. Weather proof hoods should be provided for all motors and drives exposed to weather to the approval of the Engineer. _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-210
8.
Month Year
Projects Name
10. 11. 12. 13. 14.
15. 16. B.
Backdraft dampers, gravity type, shall be installed on the fan discharge of all fans discharging directly to the atmosphere except the kitchen hood fan. Fans scheduled for the high temperature exhaust systems (smoke exhaust) shall include an upblast arrangement on the discharge and insulated heat shield to protect motor and drive, all designed for high temperature services. Axial fans should have a maximum speed of 950 rpm. Centrifugal fans shall have drip proof fan cooled electric motor designed for a maximum speed of 1450 rpm. Fans are to operate steadily without pulsation at design conditions. Centrifugal fan characteristic curves must be such that the fan operating point falls below the point of no flow static pressure, to the right of the point corresponding to that of maximum mechanical efficiency, and a 15% increase in static pressure over that specified results in not more than a 15% reduction in cfm and does not affect the stability of fan operation. If necessary accomplish the foregoing by modifying the width of the wheel and/or by providing inlet vanes to change the characteristic curve. Smoke exhaust fans shall be rated for 300C for 2hrs. Performance curves shall be submitted for each fan for approval.
Axial Flow Fans 1. Axial flow fans shall be either the single stage type or the multi-stage contrarotating type, with each impeller mounted on an independents motor. Casings shall be rigidly constructed of mild steel stiffened and braced to obviate drumming and vibration . Cast iron or fabricated steel feet shall be provided where necessary for bolting to the base or supports . Inlet and outlet ducts shall terminate in flanged rings for easy removal . The length of the casing shall be greater than the length of the fan or fans and motor or motors in order that the complete section may be removed without disturbing adjacent ductwork . Flexible connections shall be provided as specified on the outlet and inlet connection to joining to the ductwork to prevent transmission of vibration to the ductwork system. Electrical connections to the motors shall be through an external terminal box secured to the casing. Impellers shall be of aluminum, the blades of which shall be secured to the hubs, or the blades and hub shall be formed in one piece. The hub shall be keyed to a substantial mild steel shaft and the whole statically and dynamically balanced. The blades shall be of aerofoil section. Shafts shall be carried in two bearings which may be ball, roller or sleeve type. Lubricators shall be extended to the outside of the casing. Fume extract fans shall generally comply with the requirements for axial flow fans but shall be of corrosion resistant and non-sparking construction, with steel casings lined internally minimum 3 mm PVC which is to be carried over the flange facings and externally with an epoxy enamel. Impellers shall be moulded glass fibre and motors and mountings shall be protected by a coating of polyurethane compound . Motors shall be in a compartment outside of the air stream.
2.
3.
C.
Propeller Fans, Wall and Window Fans 1. Impellers of wall fans shall be of aluminum and of window fans of PVC, the blades of which shall be fastened to the hub, or the blades and hub shall be formed in one piece. The bearings may be of ball , roller or sleeve type.
Propeller fans shall be either ring mounted or diaphragm mounted in a casing as indicated. Where they are mounted in casing, the casing shall not be longer than _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-211
2.
Month Year
Projects Name
the length of the motor and impeller. The casing shall be of steel and shall have flanged ends and shall incorporate an inspection door. A terminal box shall be mounted externally on the casing. 3. 4. The tip speed of fans shall not exceed 20 m/s. Fans shall be as detailed on the drawings. Fans shall be with outside grille, opposed blade damper that opens and closes automatically by means of electromagnet with enough length of electrical flexible cord ( including ground conductor ) with suitable connecting end.
D.
Roof Extract Fans 1. Roof extract units are to be of the up-blast vertical discharge type constructed from flat aluminum alloy panels, incorporating bird guards and air operated shutters. The impeller is to be of the Mixed Flow type having asymmetric blade spacing and to be dynamically balanced after manufacture. An electrical isolator is balanced after manufacture. An electrical isolator is to be incorporated in the unit , accessible from outside the casing through a quick release waterproof cover. It is required that all major components should be easily replaced and / or maintained via removable access panels. Fan shall be fitted with weather proof non fused disconnect switch under fan cowl with galvanized steel bird screen. Belt driven units are to have the motor and fan assembly supported on antivibration mountings. The fan shaft is to rotate in a one piece bearing assembly to facilitate quick maintenance and is to be sealed against dust. Motors shall be suitable for roof mounting and outdoor operation . Direct driven units are to incorporate the facility of complete fan and motor assembly removal easy maintenance. Motor shall be suitable for outdoor operation Smoke exhaust fans shall be rated to withstand 400C for one hour. Kitchen hood exhaust fan shall be up blast type and should withstand 200C for continuous operation.
2.
3. 4. 5. E.
Exhaust Fan Shall be of the centrifugal single or double inlet backward curved blades type with twopiece housing where wheel, shaft and inlet pan assembly installed in lower housing section. Fan shall be complete with: Electric motor mounted on one chassis with the fan. Reinforced heavy gauge fan casing. Metallic fixing frame and supports. Dust proof, non-fused disconnect switch. Pulleys, belt drive and belt guard. Vibration isolators. Heavy flanges on both sections of housing for assembly. Flanged joints shall be gasketed for air tightness.
F.
Fresh Air Fans
Fan shall be of the centrifugal single or double inlet width, backward curved blades type with non-overloading design wheel diameters and outlets areas shall be in accordance with _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-212
Month Year
Projects Name
the standard sizes adopted by the AMCA for non-overloading fans. Inlets shall be fully stream lined and housing shall be suitably braced to prevent vibration or pulsation. Fan shall be supplied complete with: Electric motor mounted on one chassis with the fan. Reinforced heavy gauge fan casing. Metallic fixing frame and supports. Pulleys, belt drive and belt guard (of expanded metal with tachometer hole). Vibration isolators. Fan wheels with die formed backward curved blades designed for maximum efficiency and quiet operations. Wheels shall be statically and dynamically balanced. Heavy flanges on both sides of housing. Flanged joints shall be gasketed for air tightness. Fan inertia should be checked against motor capability. If fan inertia is found larger, then a centrifugal or plate clutching service should be used to enable the fan to be brought up to speed without damaging the motor. Motorized damper at fan outlet to open and close with fan on/off operation.
G.
Smoke Relief Venting Units Supply and install wherever shown on the Drawings Smoke Relief Venting Units of the automatically operated type. Each unit shall be factory assembled ready for installation on the roof. The unit shall consist of the following: Insulated aluminum metal lid with extruded aluminum lid frame connected directly to the curb wall by means of heavy pintle type hinges, and secured by means of a UL. listed fusible link and a lid hatch arrangement. 250 mm high aluminum curb complete with integral cap flashing with curb insulation factory installed and 80 mm roof flange, the vents shall open automatically at 165 oF (74 oC) after the fusible link is melted.
H.
Duct Exhaust Fan This fan shall be duct-mounted , centrifugal exhauster. Wheels shall be aluminum with spun inlet cone to reduce turbulence. Wheels vanes must be welded to the inlet cone to insure permanent wheel stability and alignment. Motors shall be mounted out of air stream within a spun aluminum dome and shall be mounted on vibration isolators.
Centrifugal In-Line Fan Fan shall be of the centrifugal in-line type all aluminum construction and shall be complete with:
Month Year
Projects Name
2.06
Electric motor mounted outside the air stream, when air temperature inside the duct is above 200 oF (93 oC), otherwise inside air stream. Metallic fixing frame and supports. Dust proof, non fused disconnect switch under motor casing. Belt drive and belt guard or as stated in Capacity Schedule. Vibration isolators. Aluminium air foil blades impeller with non overloading horse power characteristic. Flexible duct connection at each end.
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE (VRD) The inverters shall be suitable for variable or constant torque applications. Suitable for speed control of induction motors. VRDs shall be able to control pumps and fans for heating, ventilation and airconditioning systems, and shall be of the torque inverters type. The VRD unit shall includes an AC choke, protecting against over voltages, and an internal RFI filter.
Month Year
Projects Name
Variable frequency drive shall have the following specifications and shall be similar to Honeywell model CXL series or approved equal: Power supply constant torque Power supply variable torque Power supply Input frequency Output voltage Continuous output current Starting torque Starting current Output frequency Frequency resolution Serial communication Protection class Immunity Safety Emissions 2.2 . 250 kW 2.2 . 315 kW 3ph, 415/440 Volts 45 66 Hz 0-Uin Ict + 50C ambient, overload : 1.5xIct, 1/10min. Ivt+40C no overload ability 200% from 0 rpm 2.5 Ict, max 2 s every 20 s max output frequency lower than 30 Hz and heatsink temperature lower than 60C. 0 . 500 Hz 0.01 Hz Interbus-S Modbus, Echelon. Ip21 The design fulfils EN 50082-1,2. According EN 500178, CE,UL,C-UL,FI EMC level I: EN50081-2; EMC level C: EN50081-1,2
Varible speed motors shall be inverter-duty motors and shall be with manual bypass for fixed speed operation incase the VFD is not operating. 2.07 ANTI-VIBRATION MOUNTINGS A. Mountings For Fans Motors and any other vibration inducting equipment shall be as specified in Section 15200. 2.08 DUCTWORK AND FITTINGS : GENERAL A. General 1. The Contractor shall supply and erect ductwork of the dimensions and in the positions indicated on the drawings. The Contractor shall be deemed to have checked building dimensions on site before the preparation of the ductwork manufacturing drawings and shall submit these drawings for approval before commencement of manufacture. The Contractor shall also be required to erect ductwork in such an order to maintain an overall continuity of work for all trades. All ductwork shall be manufactured and installed in accordance with SMACNA Standards and this Specification. All access opening shall be rigidly framed and fitted speedily removed and refixed. Multiple set screws or self tapping screws are not acceptable as a method of fixing, unless otherwise stated. Access doors and other openings in the duct work shall be provided for the purpose given below.
2. 3.
4.
Month Year
Projects Name
a. b. c. d. e.
Access for personal for maintenance and replacement of equipment. Access for routine maintenance , lubrication and adjustment of items not requiring full man access. Access for cleaning. Access for inspection of items concealed in ductwork ( e.g. dampers, fusible links, thermostats ). Hand holes required to permit proper jointing of ductwork sections in awkward location ( these should be kept to a minimum and as small as possible ). To be sealed after use.
5.
f. Test holes to permit entry of pilot tubes and other test equipment. Pressure- Velocity Classification. Duct Class Static Pressure Rating Pressure Seal Class Velocity
High Pressure Duct Standard High Pressure Medium pressure Medium Pressure Medium Pressure 2.5 Kpa Pos. 1.5 Kpa Pos. 1.0 Kpa Pos. 0.75 Kpa Pos.or Neg. A A A A 10 m/s Up 10 m/s Up 10 m/s Up 20 m/s Dn.
Low Pressure Duct Standard Low Pressure Low Pressure Low Pressure 0.50 Kpa Pos. or Neg. 0.25 Kpa Pos. or Neg. 0.125 Kpa Pos. or Neg. B C D 12.5 m/s Dn. 12.5 m/s Dn. 10 m/s Dn.
2.09
LOW VELOCITY DUCTWORK A. General 1. Materials shall be as specified in clauses 2.1 and 2.2 except that thickness stiffening and joints shall be as specified below.
Month Year
Projects Name
Supply and install sheet metal ductwork for the air conditioning and the ventilating systems as shown on the drawings and as detailed below. Ductwork galvanization shall be 275g/m2 (G90). The Contractor shall check the building dimensions and the dimensions and positions of plant on site before the fabrication of ductwork are started. All seems, joints and connections to plant shall be made so as to reduce air leakage to a minimum. Internal roughness and obstructions to airflow (other than dampers, vanes, etc.) will not be accepted. Sharp edges or corners on the outside of ductwork, flanges, supports, etc. will not be accepted. Any part of galvanized ductwork where the galvanizing is damaged during manufacture or erection shall be painted with two coats of aluminum, zinc rich or other corrosion resisting paint. B. Ductwork Provide all ductwork, plenums, fittings and related sheet metal work shown, noted and/or specified for the air conditioning and ventilating systems. Provide wood frames for air outlets fixing and duct passage through no fire rated walls and slabs. Conform accurately to the layout indicated on the drawings, and construct to be straight and smooth on the inside with all joints neatly finished. Securely anchored to the building construction in an approved manner, and installation to be completely free from vibration and pulsing under all operating conditions. Contractor shall be fully responsible for all off-sets, up-slopes, down-slopes, etc. necessary to avoid conflict with lighting fixtures, sanitary piping, etc. Bends and offsets shall have a minimum throat radius equal to the width of the duct. Where short radius elbows are indicated or are agreed by the Engineer as necessary due to site limitations the dimensions and internal vane(s) shall be in accordance with duct detail drawings. Low pressure flat ducts over 450 mm wide shall be stiffened by cross breaking. Fire rated and smoke ducts shall have two hour fire rating wrapping material shall be of asbestos light weight non combustible material board with square sawn edges and a smooth flat surface. Boards shall be resistant to water and should not promote corrosion. Boards shall be UL Listed. All exposed ductwork shall be painted with one coat of primer suitable to galvanized steel and two coats of finishing paint of type and color as approved by the Engineer. C. Rectangular Ductwork : Low Velocity 1. The ductwork construction shall be used on the Duct Construction Standards as laid by The Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association ( SMACNA )
Material thickness is to be based upon a pressure velocity classification as indicated below . Thickness is dependent upon the relationship between the _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-217
2.
Month Year
Projects Name
pressure class as depicted in this table and the frequency/type of supports. 3. Up to 125 Pa - Ductwork any be made in the following minimum thickness with no additional stiffening : Up to 400 mm ( Longest side ) 401 to 600 mm ( Longest side ) 601 to 650 mm ( Longest side ) 651 to 750 mm ( Longest side ) 751 to 900 mm ( Longest side ) 901 mm and over shall be made with stiffeners. 4. 0.6 mm 0.8 mm 1.0 mm 1.2 mm 1.6 mm
126 Pa to 250 Pa - Ductwork may be made in the following minimum thickness with additional stiffening. Up to 350 mm ( Longest side ) 351 to 450 mm ( Longest side ) 451 to 500 mm ( Longest side ) 501 to 650 mm ( Longest side ) 651 to 750 mm ( Longest side ) 751 mm and over shall be made with stiffeners. 0.6 mm 0.8 mm 1.0 mm 1.2 mm 1.6 mm
5.
250 Pa to 500 Pa - Ductwork may be made in the following minimum thickness with no additional stiffening. Up to 300 mm ( Longest side ) 301 to 350 mm ( Longest side ) 351 to 450 mm ( Longest side ) 451 to 500 mm ( Longest side ) 501 to 600 mm ( Longest side ) 601 mm and over shall be made with stiffeners. 0.6 mm 0.8 mm 1.0 mm 1.2 mm 1.6 mm
Month Year
Projects Name
6.
Thinner materials may be used but stiffening must be added to comply with tables 1-3 through 1-9 of the SMACNA Standards. Proposed thickness are : Sheet Metal Thickness 0.6 mm 0.7 mm 0.9 mm 1.0 mm
Largest duct size 0 300 mm 310 750 mm 760 1500 mm 1510 2200 mm D. Duct Fittings : Low Velocity 1.
All duct fittings except where stated otherwise, shall be made from the same material and specification of material as the adjoining ductwork. The specifications with regards to stiffeners, joints, seams and maximum distance between joints and stiffeners for straight ductwork shall also apply to the duct fittings. The distance between joints stiffeners of bends shall be taken around the centerline of the fitting, and stiffeners shall be , when required, arranged in a radial pattern. The larger dimension in all fittings shall determine the sheet thickness and stiffening. Rectangular Fittings a. b. The inside radius of bends shall be 100 mm or equal to the width of the duct, viewed on the bend, whichever is the greatest. Alternatively square bends with turning vanes shall be used. The turning vanes shall be provided at a maximum spacing of 300 mm across the angle of the bend, and shall be double skin aerofoil type. The recommended ratio between spacing and the distance between the leading and trailing edges of the vane, measured in a straight line, is 0.5. The vanes shall be securely fastened at each end, to internal runners and the runners attached to the duct by mechanically closed rivets, bolts or welds, at 150 mm maximum spacing. Branch piece shall conform to the standards American take-off that incorporates an aerofoil splitter damper pivoted at one end. The throat dimensions for branch ducts emanating from the side of the duct run shall be calculated from the equation 1. t = v1 . W ------- 1 v2 Throat dimensions for small branch ducts which maintain the depth of the branch duct on connection to the main duct shall be calculated from equation 2. t = v1 . W.D2 ------- 2 v2 D1
2.
c.
Throat dimension Air volume in branch Air volume in main duct before branch take off. D1 Depth of branch duct. _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-219
Where t V1 V2
Month Year
Projects Name
D2 W
Depth of main duct before branch take off. Width of main duct before branch take off.
The splitter damper shall be capable, in the case of a full depth branch, of isolating either branch of main. The splitter damper rod shall extend outside the ductwork to a hand control lever with a locking device. d. In all cases of change sections the larger dimensions shall determine the sheet thickness and stiffening . Where expansions and contractions are required, an expansion shall be made up stream of a branch connection and a contraction downstream of a branch connection. The slope of either an expansion or contraction shall not exceed 22 1/2 on any side. Change of shapes, used to avoid obstructions or to suit available space, shall , where the cross sectional area remains unchanged, have a maximum slope of 22 1/2 on each side of the obstruction. Where the cross sectional area changes temporarily, the percentage area reduction shall not exceed 15. Connections to equipment shall have a maximum slope of 30 on expansions and 45 on contractions on any side. The maximum slopes may be exceeded where space prevents the specified slope from being used, provided that splitters are fitted such that the angle of slope and the center line of the duct are divided into sections, and the angle between the splitter and the center line of the duct and the angle between splitters does not exceed the maximum specified. The splitters shall be securely fixed to the duct in a similar manner to turning vanes on bends.
e.
f. g.
E.
Fastening : Low Velocity 1. Permitted Sheet to Sheet Fastening Fastening mm RIVETS Solid Mechanically closed WELDS Spot Plug Continuous Maximum Spacing mm 60 60 30 60 Continuous
Month Year
Projects Name
2.
Permitted Sheet to Section Fastening s Fastening Maximum spacing for cross joints mm Maximum spacing for intermediate stiffeners 300 150 300 300 150 300 300
RIVETS Solid Mechanically closed LOCK BOLTS BOLTS & NUTS WELDS Spot Plug Tack
150 100 150 150 75 150 150
The minimum number of fastening per side or per stiffener relating to table shall be three. 3. Permitted Section to Section Fastening. Fastening mm LOCK BOLTS BOLTS & NUTS Maximum Spacing mm 150 150
The minimum number of fastening per side relating to Table above shall be two . F. Supports and Hangers : Low Velocity. 1. Length of longer side mm Drop rod or hanger Minimum bearing member mm Maximum spacing mm
M.S. rod mm M.S. flat mm Up to 500 10 25 x 3 25x25x3 angle 3000 501 - 800 10 25 x 3 40x40x4 angle 3000 801 - 1000 10 25 x 3 40x40x4 angle 2500 1001 - 1500 10 25x 3 50x50x5 angle 2500 1501 2250 12.5 40 x 3 100x50 channel 2000 Above 2250 to suit loading ----------------------------------------------------------------------2. 3. 4. The bearing member shall not be required on ductwork above 1500mm where the hanger supports are fixed to the duct joints, due to the provision of the angle flanges. No screws, bolts or other fittings for brackets or supports shall penetrate the air duct. The design of supports for vertical ducts is dictated by the site conditions and spacing may be greater than that of horizontal ducts . Vertical ducts shall be supported by the stiffening
Month Year
Projects Name
angles, or angle flanges, but where this is impractical, supporting angles shall be fixed to the duct. Fastenings shall be in accordance with the table for cross joints. G. Sealants 1. Sealants shall be of the liquid/mastic type which permanently retain adhesion and elastically throughout a temperature range of 0C to 70C . The sealant shall be applied with a brush or gun and shall completely seal the joints. Sealant shall be applied on all duct joints and seams.
H.
Duct Protection The Contractor shall by means of polyethylene or similar sheeting protects all openings in ductwork during erection to prevent the collection of dust and dirt during the building construction. He shall be responsible for removing all these sealers from the systems prior to the plan being commissioned. He shall nevertheless be responsible for cleaning all ducts internally before the plant is commissioned, the provision of the seals being a precaution aimed at reducing the amount of cleaning necessary.
I.
Duct Leak Test & Sealing The Contractor, shall when the main fans are operable, test all flanged joints, access doors or panels, hand holes and test points with soap and water. Any joints failing the test shall be remade. Insulation shall not be applied until this test has been made.
J.
Silencing & Acoustic The Contractor shall be responsible for the quietness of the equipment in respect of vibration and sound transmission to the structure and occupied spaces. Where it is necessary to provide silencing equipment, anti vibration inserts mountings and other acoustic devices, the Contractor shall include them in his tender.
K.
Duct Lining- Internal Insulation Where ducts are to be provided with internal absorbent linings to meet the Contractor's requirements in respect of silence, the Contractor shall provide 25 mm thick non-inflammable resin bonded mats of glass fiber 48 kg/m3 that have a strong film of PVC sheet on the air flow side. Such mats shall be secured to ducts with synthetic resin or other suitable adhesives and aluminum strips. See Section 15200. The type of external insulation required will be specified under normal insulation.
L.
Plenum Boxes Plenum boxes construction and installation shall be similar to ductwork with internal duct lining as specified above.
2.10
FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK
A. General _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-222
Month Year
Projects Name
1.
Where flexible connections are indicated or required between rigid ductwork and particular component or items of equipment the internal diameter of the flexible duct shall be equal to the external diameter of the rigid duct. The use of flexible ductwork between rigid sections of sheet metal ductwork to change direction or plane will not be permitted except where indicated. The flexible duct shall have a liner and a cover of rough heat-resistant fabric equal in durability and flexibility to glass fiber fabric and shall be impregnated and coated with plastic. It shall be reinforced with a bonded galvanized spring steel wire helix between the liner and the cover and an outer helix to glass fiber cord, or equal shall be bonded to the cover to ensure regular convolutions. Insulation shall be as specified for rigid steel. Alternatively, where indicated on drawings the flexible duct shall consist of flexible corrugated metal tubing of aluminum. The metal may be lined on the inside or the outside or both with plastic material. The joints to rigid spigots shall be sealed with a brush coat of pipe jointing paste or mastic compound. Ducts up to 150 mm diameter shall be secured with a worm drive type hose clip complying with BS 3628. Ducts over 150 mm diameter shall be secured with a band clip. Insulation shall comply with regulator rigid duct. The frictional resistance to the air flow per unit length of the flexible duct shall not exceed 50% more than the frictional resistance per unit length of the galvanized steel ducts of equivalent diameter. The radius ratio R/D for bends shall not be less than 2. Where R is the centre line radius and D is the diameter of the flexible duct. The leakage from any section of flexible air duct shall not exceed 1% of the design air flow rate at the static operating pressure. Flexible ducts shall be suitable for an operating temperature range of -18C to -120C and shall comply with BS 476 Part 1, Section 2, Clause 7 ( class 1 : surface of very low flame spread). Flexible ducts shall be supported at 1 meter centers.
2.
3.
4.
5. 6.
7.
Month Year
Projects Name
2.11
DAMPERS All dampers shall be fabricated by an approved Manufacturer and not by the Mechanical Subcontractor duct-man .
A.
Regulating Dampers 1. Sufficient dampers shall be provided to regulate and balance the system. Dampers on grilles or diffusers shall be used for fine or secondary control. All dampers shall be sufficiently rigid to prevent fluttering. The air leakage past dampers in the fully closed position shall not exceed 5% of the maximum design air flow in the duct. All duct dampers except fire dampers and self-closing dampers, shall be fitted with locking devices and position indicators. Each primary control damper shall be fitted with a non-corrodible label stating the actual air flow in m/s and the cross sectional area; alternatively, these figures shall be painted in a visible position on the adjoining ductwork or insulation. The position of a damper as set after final regulation and balancing shall be indelibly marked on the damper quadrant. Motorized dampers shall be fitted with a Electric actuator as described in Section 15900 of the specification.
2.
3. B.
Multileaf Dampers 1. Multileaf dampers shall be used in rectangular ducts having a short side dimension in excess of 300 mm. All multileaf dampers shall be constructed on demountable ductwork sections, which shall extend beyond the swing of the blades. The blades of the damper shall operate on the opposed blade principle unless required solely for isolation, in which case they may be arranged for parallel operation. No damper blade shall exceed 150 mm in width and where dampers are required for greater widths, the damper sections shall be constructed in multiple frames. Individual dampers blades shall not exceed 225 mm in height. Each leaf of a multileaf damper shall consist of two plates of material of the same thickness as the associated duct and rigidly fixed to each side of an operating spindle, the ends of which shall be housed in brass, nylon, oil impregnated sintered metal, PTFE impregnated or ball bearings. The ends of the spindles shall be linked so that one movement of the operating handle shall move each leaf an equal amount. An inspection door shall be provided adjacent to each multileaf damper. On low velocity systems only, multileaf damper blades may be of a single plate, at least 1.6 mm thick and suitably stiffened and the blade linkages may be within the duct. These dampers shall have bearings and inspection doors as specified above. Quadrants and operating handles shall be of die-cast aluminum with the words OPEN and CLOSED cast on the quadrant. Quadrants shall be securely fixed and the damper spindles shall be close fitting in the quadrant hubs to prevent any damper movement when the damper levers are locked.
2.
3.
4.
Month Year
Projects Name
C.
Single Blade Dampers 1. In ductwork 300 mm or less, single blade dampers may be used. The blade shall be made from a single plate, at least 1.6 mm thick and suitably stiffened. One end of the damper spindle shall be housed in brass, nylon, oil impregnated sintered metal, PTFE impregnated or ball bearings. The other end shall extend beyond the damper casing with an operating handle and quadrant. Quadrants and operating handles shall be of die-cast aluminum with the words Open & Closed cast on the quadrant. Quadrants shall be securely fixed and the damper spindles shall be close fitting in the quadrant tubes to prevent any damper movement when the damper levers are locked.
2.
D.
Pressure Relief Dampers Pressure relief dampers shall be combination of weather resistant louvers and multileaf pressure relief dampers with masonry sub-frames . Masonry sub-frames and pressure relief dampers casing shall be of galvanized sheet steel with weather resistant louver of extruded aluminum sections. Pressure relief dampers blades shall be of anodized extruded aluminum. All other accessories shall be of stainless steel. Relief damper shall be fitted with pressure deferential regulator to maintain specified pressure with stairwells. Relief damper installed on roof slab shall be mounted in a louvered pent house. Louvered pent house shall be made of 4 louvered sides and one cover. The sides are joined at the four corners by sheet metal screws in each louver. The cover is securely fastened to the unit by stainless steel sheet metal screws. The louvered pent house shall be designed for low pressure drop and shall be constructed of aluminum. The removable cover shall be lined with fiber glass to prevent condensate. Louvered pent house shall include bird screen and relief damper with pressure differential as described before louvered penthouse shall be similar to Greenheck model WRH or approved equal.
E.
Back Draft Dampers Supply and install gravity dampers wherever shown on the Drawings and with the airflow direction indicated therein. Gravity dampers shall consist of: Galvanized sheet steel frame. Aluminum blades. Stainless steel bearing shafts and brass bearings. Neoprene seal to withstand 120 deg.C. air temperature. Aluminum blade travel stop.
All blades shall be coupled together by means of an aluminum bar.
2.12
FLEXIBLE JOINTS
A. General _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-225
Month Year
Projects Name
1.
Flexible joints shall be provided on the fan inlet and outlet connections and elsewhere on the ductwork where indicated. They shall be of the full cross sectional area of the mating fan inlet, outlet or duct section. The ends of the ducts or the duct and the fan connection shall be in line. Flexible joints shall consists of , or be protected by material having a fire penetration time of at least fifteen minute when tested in accordance with the BS 476 Part 1, Section 3. The material shall be of the glass fibre cloth type; canvas will not be accepted. The width of joints from metal edge to metal edge shall not be less than 80 mm and not more than 250 mm. All flexible joints other than fan inlet connections shall be between flanged ends. The flexible material flange shall be backed by an angle or flat iron flange and the flexible joint shall be securely held between the metal flanges. Flat iron bands used with fan inlets shall be not less than 5 mm thick.
2.
3.
2.13 A.
DIFFUSERS AND GRILLES General 1. 2. 3. Provide diffusers and grilles as scheduled and detailed on the drawings. Diffusers and grilles shall be of heavy gauge extruded aluminum mechanically assembled and anodized. construction,
Grilles and diffusers shall be not less than the size indicated; where no size is given they shall be capable of dealing with the air flow and distribution as indicated with a maximum neck velocity of 4 m/s. All grilles except those on exposed ducting shall incorporate an edge seal. All grilles and diffusers shall have suitable colour finish as approved by the Engineer. The fixing of grilles and diffusers to the ductwork shall be by means of spring. External screws will not be accepted. Grilles and diffusers shall be as manufactured by Trox, Goldenstar, Euroregister, Titus or approved equal.
4. 5. 6. 7.
Month Year
Projects Name
B.
Sidewall Grilles & Registers 1. Each sidewall supply air grille shall have two sets of separately adjustable blades, one set horizontal and one set vertical, and shall be complete with an opposed blade multi-leaf damper . The blades and the dampers shall be adjustable from the front of the grille. Sidewall return air grilles shall have a single set of horizontal blades. Each return air grille shall be complete with an opposed blade multi-leaf damper operable from the front. All supply and return air grilles shall have quick release subframes.
2. 3. C.
Ceiling Diffusers and Grilles 1. Four-way supply diffusers shall have adjustable core pattern, shall be provided with opposed blade volume control damper, and shall be compatible with the ceiling system provided. Perforated face shall be finished in black enamel. Four-way return air grille shall be similar in appearance to the Four-way supply diffusers provided and shall be compatible with the ceiling system provided. Egg crate return air grilles shall be fabricated of aluminum with extruded frame and shall be compatible with the ceiling system provided. Diffusers and grilles shall be provided with volume control dampers of the opposed blade type which shall be adjustable from the front of the diffuser. Liner diffusers shall include a control damper at the rear of the vanes giving volume control down to complete shut-off and operated from the face of the diffuser. Liner diffuser for supply air shall have adjustable blades to give directional control of air flow. Where linear diffusers are mounted in a continuous line, there shall be means of ensuring alignment between consecutive diffusers and of equalizing pressure behind the vanes. Return air linear grilles shall match supply diffusers. Linear diffusers shall have factory supplied plenum box, internally lined as specified under ductwork. All diffusers shall have a quick-release center to facilitate easy cleaning.
2. 3. 4. 5.
6. D.
Air Transfer Grilles 1. Air transfer grilles shall be V core sight proof type.
External Louvers All louvers for fresh air and exhaust air shall be fabricated from heavy duty aluminum extrusions. The horizontal blades shall be angle down towards the front of the louvers and each blade shall have a down turn at the front and up turn at the back edges in such a manner that the ingress of rain is prevented. Each blade shall be securely fixed to the surrounding frame. All louvers shall be fitted with an aluminum bird wire screen on the inside face.
F.
Linear Bar Grilles (Continuous Diffusers)
Each linear bar diffuser shall be of the fixed bar blades type with 6 mm bars, 13mm spacing or as indicated on drawings, complete as specified below: _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-227
Month Year
Projects Name
a) b) c)
Supply grilles shall include flow equalizing dampers and continuous plenum box over the entire diffuser length. Plenum size shall be as indicated on the drawings. Return grilles shall not require adjusting blades or equalizing dampers. Fixing frame for outlet mounting on walls and false ceiling, etc... Frame may be of wood of metallic construction as site conditions dictate. Fixing for linear grilles shall be of the concealed fixing type; screws shall not be accepted. All necessary supports and fixing accessories. The drawings indicate the length and neck width of each linear bar diffuser. When diffuser length is omitted on the drawings, diffuser length shall fill space allocated for it, as required by interior decoration schemes.
d)
G.
Door Louvers Supply and deliver door louvers to the door manufacturer for installation. The door louvers shall be sized so that the face velocity does not exceed 250 fpm (1.3 m/s) unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. The louver shall be extruded aluminium completely lightproof V-Section with double frame.
2.14
AUTOMATIC AIR DAMPERS Automatic air dampers: vertical, back draught or barometric type that open under air pressure to allow air to escape from room, fan plenum or duct and that close by weight of blades to prevent air from passing in reverse direction. Automatic air dampers to consist of multiple blades of light aluminium, mounted inside aluminium of galvanized steel frame on nylon bearings and linked together to operate in parallel. Blades to have seamed-in, felted edges to hold air leakage and noise to a minimum. Frame to be suitable for installation in duct or wall. Barometric air dampers used as pressure relief for staircase pressurization shall have weights that can be adjusted to the required differential pressure at which they should open.
Month Year
Projects Name
2.15
PRESSURE RELIEF DAMPERS Pressure relief dampers shall be combination of weather resistant louvers and multileaf pressure relief dampers with masonry sub-frames . Masonry sub-frames and pressure relief dampers casing shall be of galvanized sheet steel with weather resistant louver of extruded aluminum sections. Pressure relief dampers blades shall be of anodized extruded aluminum. All other accessories shall be of stainless steel. Relief damper shall be fitted with pressure deferential regulator to maintain specified pressure with stairwells. Relief damper installed on roof slab shall be mounted in a louvered pent house. Louvered pent house shall be made of 4 louvered sides and one cover. The sides are joined at the four corners by sheet metal screws in each louver. The cover is securely fastened to the unit by stainless steel sheet metal screws. The louvered pent house shall be designed for low pressure drop and shall be constructed of aluminium. The removable cover shall be lined with fiber glass to prevent condensate. Louvered pent house shall include bird screen and relief damper with pressure differential as described before louvered penthouse shall be similar to Greenheck model WRH or approved equal.
2.16
JET DIFFUSERS Jet diffusers shall be manually adjustable allowing variation in discharge angle to compensate for changing temperature difference. Jet diffuser shall be adjusted 30 upwards to 30 downwards. The nozzle mounting plate shall also be rotated though 360 which enables the air jets to be fully directional. Jet nozzles shall be installed singularly or in banks as required. Construction of jet diffusers shall be of aluminum, the border being extruded from aluminum to BS- 1474 grade 6063 T6 and the mounting plate from aluminum sheet to BS 1470 grade NS4. Jet diffuser shall be supplied in different colors to suit the engineer requirement Jet diffuser shall be supplied with a plenum box which is manufactured from galvanized sheet steel to BS 2989 Z2 G275 M. For supply air jet diffuser supply an opposed blade damper shall be installed in the rear of the plenum box. Construction is of galvanized mild steel to BS2989 Z2 G275 M for the border and BS 1472 grade 6063T6 for the extruded aluminum blades. All visible surfaces of plenum box and damper unit shall be finished stove enamel paint matt black. Jet diffusers shall be similar to TROX Model AJA or approved equal by Engineer
Month Year
Projects Name
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 A. GENERAL Air- handling units, fans and equipment generally shall be floor mounted on 100 mm raised concrete housekeeping pads and supported from building structural frame using vibration isolators. Provide all supporting steel, anchors etc. required to properly support the unit. Replace throwaway filters just prior to building acceptance and after the system has been balanced. CONNECTIONS TO BUILDERS WORK Where metal ducts and fan inlets and outlets connect to builders work, connections shall be by either built-in timber frames or built-in companion rings or flanges. Built-in timber frames shall be used except where the connection is to be made in fire barrier walls or in the fixing of fire dampers. Timber frames shall be constructed in hardwood of 50 mm minimum thickness. Companion rings or flanges shall be provided with an adequate number of suitably sized rag bolts or similar fixing devices. In all cases the duct end shall be finished with a mating flange and where this is fixed to a timber frame the flange shall be wide enough to overlap the joint between timber and masonry by least 15 mm. The material of the duct shall be extended in the form of a spigot, beyond the flanged connection and into the builders work cavity. Joints between mating flanges and companion rings or hardwood frames shall be fitted with a sealing gasket as specified previously. DUCTWORK INSTALLATION General 1. All external ductwork shall be galvanized after manufacture. Ducting passes through the roof, it is to be fitted with angle flanges and a weather cravat welded to the ducting or other approved method. External ductwork shall be protected by one coat of calcium phumbate primer followed by two coats of zinc chromate paint. Where ductwork is to be galvanized after manufacture in order to restrict the distortion encountered in galvanizing such ductwork it shall be manufactured from thick sheet. Where a continuous vapor barrier is required, supports shall not be connected directly to the duct stiffening or flanges. The insulation and vapor barrier should be abutted to an insulator incorporated with the duct support. The insulator shall be incompressible and made from hardwood, rot-proofed soft wood or other approved material Support drop rods and bolts shall be bright steel, nuts and washers shall be sheradized.
B. 3.02 A.
B.
C. D. 3.03 A.
2. 3.
4. B.
Access Doors and Panels, Test Holes 1.
Hinged access doors should not be larger than 600 mm high by 600 mm wide unless necessary for equipment handling. Doors should preferably open against the air pressure. Both the opening in the duct and the access door itself should be adequately reinforced to _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-230
Month Year
Projects Name
prevent distortion. A suitable sealing gasket shall be provided together with sufficient clamping type latches to ensure an air-tight and water-tight seal between the door and the duct. The latches shall have handles to operate from both the inside and outside of the door. 2. Removable access covers shall not be larger than 375 mm wide by 300 mm high, unless essential for access to equipment, in which case the size shall be agreed. The opening in the sufficiently rigid shall be provided distortion. A suitable sealing gasket shall be provided with sufficient fastenings to ensure an air-tight seal. Access openings in insulated ducts shall have door frames extended beyond the face of the duct by a measurement equal to the thickness of the insulation and be so arranged that the insulation and finish can be dressed into the frame, thereby ensuring that the opening is not concealed and that the edges of the insulation are protected from accidental damage. The access door shall be dished to contain the insulation. Test holes for instruments shall be provided at regular intervals along the ductwork and to enable fan duties to be tested and the performance of regulating dampers to be accessed. All holes shall be 25 mm diameter and provided with an effective seal.
3.
4.
C.
Flexible Joints 1. 2. Flexible joints shall be of full cross-sectional area of the mating equipment connections and duct section and the ends of the duct and equipment connection shall be in line. The flexible joints shall be manufactured from fire rated reinforced Neoprene or glass fibre cloth and not be less than 75 mm wide ( metal edge to metal edge) and not more than 250 mm wide. Flexible joints shall be normally fitted to suction and delivery connections of all fans and at expansion joints in buildings. Any other requirements shall be indicated on the drawings. On rectangular connections, the flexible material shall be held in place by a mating flange with a backing plate. If proprietory material is used, the metal edge shall be held in position by a backing plate or angle flange. Backing plates shall be not less than 3 mm thick. On spirally wound circular ducts, a coupling shall be attached to duct ends to provide a smooth surface and ends carefully cleaned with a suitable solvent over a length of 100 mm. On all circular spigots, the flexible material is to be secured by a clipband with adjustable screw or toggle fittings. Unless a proprietry metal edged material is used when screws and sealant may be used. Flexible ducts may be used to overcome difficult connections between rigid components but the minimum amount shall be used to prevent excess pressure drop. In normal circumstances, connections should not exceed six diameters. Adequate support must be installed to prevent the ductwork sagging. The Contractor shall ensure that the properties of the flexible duct comply with the fire regulations applying to the building.
3.
4.
5. 6.
7.
D.
Sealants and Gaskets 1.
The sealant shall be applied with a brush or gun and shall completely seal the joint. The ductwork must not be pressurized until the sealant has cured. The jointing between angles _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-231
Month Year
Projects Name
shall be suitable gaskets or mastic sealant. 2. The gasket shall not be less than 3mm thick for ducts of up to 1mm sheet thickness or not less than 4mm for ducts of up to 1.2mm sheet thickness. Before application of the sealant, all surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned.
E.
Connections 1. Ends of sections where connecting to grilles and diffusers shall be flanged or shaped according to the connection required. Sharp edges or corners on ducts, associated equipment, supports, angle stiffeners etc., shall not be permitted. All duct edges shall be painted with zinc chromate paint. Ductwork where the galvanized protection is damaged during manufacture or erection, shall only be accepted, by applying two coats of zinc chromate paint and a final coat of aluminum paint. Exposed ductwork shall have 75 mm clearance from walls and ceilings for cleaning purposes.
2. F.
Supports 1. Supports and brackets for ductwork shall be purpose made and adjustable, fixed to the building structure with special brackets and cantilevers and spaced to ensure adequate support and where practicable, should be fitted at each joint of the ductwork. Vertical ducts shall be supported by the stiffening angles or angle flanges but where this is impractical, supporting angles should be fixed to the duct. Spacing of supports for vertical ducts may be at greater intervals than for horizontal ducts.
2.
G.
Air Leakage Tests 1. For testing of ductwork and equipment see Section 15050.
3.04 A. B.
INSTALLATION OF AIR GRILLES Install air outlets and inlets in accordance with manufacturers written instructions and in accordance with recognized industry practices to insure that products serve intended functions. Coordinate with other work, including ductwork and duct accessories, lighting, structural and Architectural elements, as necessary to interface installation of air outlets and inlets with other work. Locate ceiling air diffusers, registers, and grilles, as indicated on general construction "Reflected Ceiling Plans" or as approved by Engineer. Unless otherwise indicated, locate units in center of acoustical ceiling modules. Diffuse supply air to assure air velocities not in excess of (50 fpm) 0.017 m/s at 1.8m or less above the floor line. Mix room air with the primary air by induction to effect subsequent equalization of the room temperature without stratification. Install all outlets in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. For outlets used with under-the-window or wall units, coordinate the outlet dimensions, arrangement and pressure drop with the units and enclosure to assure compatibility. Outlets shall comply with applicable noise criteria specifications.
C.
D.
E. F.
Month Year
Projects Name
3.05 A.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Tests During Construction 1. During construction of the duct systems and before the application of insulation, one or more designated duct sections shall be tested for each Duct Construction Class and for each Leakage Class for each system as designated by and in accordance with the SMACNA"HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual", including casings and flexible runouts in the presence of the Engineer. The Engineer shall establish the sizes and locations of test sections. The designated duet section shall represent a minimum of 25% of each system. If any section has three (3) section failures, the entire system shall be tested. The testing shall be performed by the Mechanical Subcontractor and supervised by Engineer familiar with testing procedures. See Section "Testing and Balancing of Mechanical Systems." The size of the test section may vary from a complete supply or exhaust system to a portion of a system, depending on its complexity and size. The Engineer shall use Appendix F in the aforementioned SMACNA Manual as a guide in determining test section sizes and locations. Refer to Section 15991 for Testing & Commissioning. END OF SECTION
2.
3.
4.
Month Year
Projects Name
SECTION 15802 HEATING SYSTEM PART I GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. B. C. D. E. F. 1.02 Section 15060 : Section 15100 : Section 15160 : Section 15250 : Section 15900 : Section 15991 : Pipe and Pipe Fittings. Valves. Pumps. Insulation. Control & Instrumentation. Testing and Commissioning.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. General 1. System shall comprise low temperature hot water heating distribution circuits providing connections from hot water boilers to heating coils within air handling units, fan coil units and domestic hot water storage heaters as detailed on the drawings. Provide and install where indicated on the drawings sealed expansion unit for each separate heating system.
2. 1.03 REFERENCES A. 1.04
Refer to individual materials for specified standards.
SUBMITTALS A. Product Data 1. Descriptive literature for each of the actual proposed equipment to be used including : a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. Capacity Operating Pressure Ranges Pressure Losses Fluid Flows Test Reports Certificates of Approval Operation and Maintenance Data Any other Technical Data
Month Year
Projects Name
B.
Shop Drawings 1. Shop Drawings for each of the actual proposed equipment shall include the following : a. b. c. d. e. f. g. Working or Manufacturing Drawings. Calculations. Installation Details. Connections by other services. Wiring and Control Diagrams. Accessories Available Indicating Those Included. System Diagrams.
PART II - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. B. C. 2.02 A. The pipework shall be as specified in Section 15060. Seamless black steel , schedule 40, ASTM A53 Grade B. Valves shall be as specified in Section 15100. Insulation shall be as specified in Section 15250.
PUMPS - The pumps shall be of the horizontal end suction centrifugal, as specified in Section 15160 and shown on the schedules. - Pump capacities and head (for snow melting system only) should be calculated based on brine composed of 35% ethylene glycol by weight.
2.03
BOILERS A. Cast Iron Hot Water Heating Boiler Type: cast iron, sectional type, design for firing by forced draught burner, with pressurized combustion chamber. It is to be factory assembled, sealed and hydrostatically tested to 10 bars for an operating pressure of 6 bars at 100C. Combustion Chamber: to be water cooled by being completely surrounded with water. It is not to require firebrick or refractory except at limited locations such as on rear wall and at bottom in front of burner to evaporate oil drippings from burner nozzle. Boiler Sections: high grade cast Iron ribbed to provide continuous path for combustion gases for best efficiency of heat transfer. Boiler to have integrally cast supporting legs to permit it to rest directly on concrete support with uniform distribution of load throughout length. Boiler to be assembled with steel tie rods and nuts and externally sealed with special high temperature mastic for complete gas tightness.
Access Doors: cast iron cleanout doors to be provided on front section to permit easy access to internal combustion gas passages Hinged cast iron burner mounting door to be provided for full access to combustion chamber. Doors to be sealed gas-tight with asbestos _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-235
Month Year
Projects Name
rope gaskets, stud bolts and brass nuts. Burner Mounting Door to be fitted with thick; steel front plate for securing burner. supplied undrilled and provided with internal frame to support factory supplied refractory. Hole for burner nozzle to be formed in refractory. Door to have pyrex observation port with cover for inspecting flame condition. Boilers shall be supplied with motorized air damper installed on boiler chimney and interlocked with the boiler. Accessories: boiler to have cast iron real smoke hood with horizontal smoke outlet fitted to boiler with asbestos rope gasket to ensure permanent gas-tight seal. Necessary threaded connections to be integrally cast with boiler sections for boiler fill, boiler drain, altitude gauge, thermometer and two thermostats. Connections to be plugged at factory. Accessories: the following are to be packed separately for field installation: all-around fiber glass insulated heavy gauge sheet steel jacket, sectionalized for fitting to boiler without removal of door fittings or pipe connections, cast iron flanged outlet and return headers with steel counter flanges, gaskets, bolts and nuts, brass separable socket wells for insertion of thermometer and thermostat bulbs into boiler and decorative control panel designed for fitting on boiler. Maintenance Equipment: boiler to be provided complete with set of cleaning brushes with handle, special tools required for maintenance and installation, gun for application of sealing mastic and recommended quantity of sealing mastic in sealed containers required for field sealing of joints. Fuel Oil Burner - The Burner shall be designed for firing light-oil #2, with full modulation firing. It shall be of the gun-type, forced draft, pressure mechanical atomizing type, attached directly to the furnace tube. - It shall be supplied factory mounted to the boiler by the Boiler Manufacturer. - Boiler-Burner package shall be single source responsibility. - The Burner shall use a triple oil by-pass nozzle arrangement with an air swirl for maximum combustion efficiency. - The full Modulation Arrangement shall be controlled by the boiler temperature, and use a single modulating motor with built-in end switch for guaranteed low-fire start. - The maximum firing rate shall be as detailed in the Technical sheet. - The Burner shall include a bolted access plate removable for easy access to the noz-zle/ Electrode assembly. The plate shall include an observation port for viewing the flame. - Burner Flame And Programming Relay: A solid state Flame Detector and Flame Safeguarding and programming Relay, shall equip the burner. It shall be of the microprocessor type with digital display of the status, flame signals and causes of lock-outs. - It shall be equipped with Infra-Red scanner cell, factory-mounted, wired and fire-tested at the factory.
Month Year
Projects Name
Boiler Control Panel & Electricals - A fully factory prewired, tested and mounted Boiler Electric panel shall be installed at the front end or side of the boiler. - The control panel shall be fully enclosed, hinged, dust-proof. The control panel shall be of the PLC type fully programmable. The cascade operation of the two boilers shall be fully automatic, with the first boiler with the main controller being the master and the second boiler being the slave with a PCB. The connection between the two boilers shall be using a bus cable. - All sensors shall be connected to the main control panel. The system shall include the following sensors: Outside temperature sensor. Indoor temperature sensor with automatic mode, night mode or off mode. Aquastat sensors . Supply water temperature sensor. - The Control Panel shall include:. 1. A step-down Control Transformer. 2. Control and Power Fuses. 3. All relays and transformers. 4. A blower motor starter with overloads and auxiliary contacts. 5. A oil pump motor starter with overloads and auxiliary contacts. 6. The Flame safeguard and Programming Relay complete: Base. 7. Chassis and Modules as outlined elsewhere. 8. Terminal strips, numbered for easy tracing of wiring, complete with all hardware. - All wires running out of the panel shall be installed within metallic conduits and terminated at the punched holes to the panel sides, with the required hardware as per IEC Code. - Refer to Division 16 section for wiring recommendations shall stay on until the failure condition has been corrected. - The control panel shall be able to be programmed for a full week. It shall take also night or day mode in addition to weekend mode. - The reading of the outside temperature sensor shall regulate the supply water temperature to meet the required load and comfort. Boiler & Burner Manufacturers: obtain unit from one of the following: De Dietrich Buderus (France) (Germany)
1. 2. 3. 4.
Month Year
Projects Name
2.04
CAST IRON RADIATORS Radiators type and material shall be of cast iron or as selected by the Architect and Interior designer to the capacities shown on mechanical drawings. Each radiator shall be complete with the following: Supply valve. Return valve Manual air vent Manual flow adjusting bronze elbow Wall brackets or floor support as approved by the Engineer as shown on drawings. Each radiator shall have two coats of fire resistant finishing paint over the fire resistant base paint. Radiators shall be Chappee (France) with type as shown drawings. All radiators shall be fitted with thermostatic valves. Thermostatic valves of ground, 1st and 2nd floors shall be fitted with electronic radiators. Controller similar to Siemens Model REH90 or approved equal.
2.05
TOWEL WARMER ACOVA Model AST complete with all supports, valves, thermostatic valve, with controllers similar to Siemens Model REH90 or approved equal. Towel warmer shall be colored, all to the approval of the Engineer.
2.06
CHEMICAL FEEDER POT The unit shall be of a quality construction with dished ends for safe operation at pressure and shall be supplied complete with all valves and funnels all factory assembled. The feeder unit shall be supplied with a stand and shall be pressure tested with a certificate from the factory. Chemical feeder pot shall be similar to Houseman dosage pots or approved equal.
2.07
EXPANSION TANK 1. Provide compression tank ( expansion tank) as shown on the drawings, constructed for 930 Kpa working pressure, stamped with U symbol and supplied with National Board From U-1 denoting compliance with ASME boiler and pressure vessel code or any equivalent European standards. Provide fittings and connections to related equipment in accordance with tanks manufacturers recommendations. Tank shall be insulated externally. Insulation shall be same type used for exposed ductwork, specified hereinbefore. Tank diaphragm shall withstand 10 deg. C up to 120C suitable for heating water systems. Refer to drawings for tank support.
2.
Month Year
Projects Name
2.08
HEATING WATER TREATMENT Contractor shall assign a chemical specialist to execute all chemical treatment works subject to the approval of the Engineer. The scope of work for the chemical treatment specialist is as follows : 1. 2. 3. Chemical Supply Supervision of treatment program applied Water analysis and recommendations.
The mechanical contractor shall make sure that the following are completed and handed over to the engineer prior to commencement of water treatment work s: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 2.09 System is electromechanical operating. System is tested and pressurized for leaks. System to be cleaned should be final and any new loops to be connected should be separately. Drain points should be provided and sufficient for quick system draining. Make up water supply should match with system volume.
HEATING WATER CHEMICAL TREATMENT PROGRAM Expected water holding capacity is to be verified by the contractor and submitted for review. AChemical Flushing Program Alkatreat 20 or approved equal is added into the system during the initial water fill and circulated to remove oil & grease deposits. System solution is drained completely and flushed then refilled again. During refilling and draining phases, strainers has to be removed and cleaned and reinstalled after final flushing. This should include the strainers ( FCU & Pumps & AHU). System should be flushed until water PH is as raw water or neutral and TDS is within 10% of raw/make-up water supply. Chemtreat 248 or approved equal should be introduced during system refill to ensure efficient dispersion through out the system. Circulate this solution for 10-16 hours. Time will be specified by the specialized chemist who is attending the site. On the completion of the above procedure, system water should be drained and flushed thoroughly. Strainers are to be cleaned as above. System is to be flushed completely until system water is neutral or as raw water.
Refill system with raw water and add Alkatreat 20 or approved equal. On completion of above strainers should be cleaned as above properly. System is to be refilled and flushed thoroughly to ensure removal of all suspended and solubilized debris. Cooltreat 011 or approved equal is to be added & circulated for 1 hour & drained. Strainers are to checked & cleaned before the chemical treatment injection ( final) When strainers check test reveal that they are clean, fresh water is to circulate for 1-2 hours to ensure that circulating water parameters are within 10% of raw/make-up supply. _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-239
Month Year
Projects Name
B-
Individual strainers will be checked at random for the presence of any residual suspended material which may have accumulated from low flow areas and/or restricted/small bore pipe work following the above procedures. If strainers are blocked or system water values are greater than 10% of the incoming supply, the Cooltreat 011 flush should be repeated until strainers and water quality meet the required parameters given below. On completion of above treatment chemicals are to be added.
Chemical Treatment Program Heatreat 502 (or approved equal). Initial shot dose Annual running dose Microtreat 2200 ( or approved equal ) Initial shot dose Annual running dose
The Contractor should make sure that the make up water before chemical injection should be soft water of maximum total hardness around 50-70 PPM as CaCO3. CGeneral The Contractor should make sure that the water treatment specialist execute the following tasks during the one year guarantee period. Schedule visits frequency: 6 per annum. The following is carried out on every visit by the chemist: 12345Full on-site analysis of all waters connected with the system. Wiring a report on his findings and any recommendations he may have. Checking the operation of the dosage/ control equipment. Checking the record chemical treatment stock levels. Training the Hotel staff at start up.
Plant inspection : observe/ monitor the water treatment program in action.
Month Year
Projects Name
PART III - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL INSTALLATION A. Piping 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. B. The piping shall be installed generally as described in Section 15060 and as shown on the drawings for heating water. Install thermometers in piping system adjacent to the heat exchanger inlet and outlet secondary connections. Install strainers in water piping a head of all pumps, automatic modulating valves, and heating coils. Provide balancing valves and pressure gage cocks in all returns from equipment and three way valve bypass loops to balance the system. Balancing valves shall be required on the return of each branch main to balance the system. Provide flexible connections at the inlet and outlet to all major equipment which require vibration isolation.
General: Except as otherwise indicated, install heating plant work, including components and controls required for boiler operation, in accordance with boiler manufacturer's instructions, and with recognized industry practices, to ensure that boiler equipment complies with requirements and serves intended purposes. Locate boilers in general position indicated in relation to other work. Position boilers with sufficient clearance for normal service and maintenance, including clearance for cleaning and replacement of tubes and clearance for component replacement. Paint damaged and abraded factory finish with touch-up paint matching factory finish. EXAMINATION OF RELATED WORK Observe installation of other work (related and connected to boiler work) and after completion check for inadequacies and protect operation and performance of boiler work to suit boiler manufacturer's requirements and to the Royal Commission's satisfaction and approval, do not start boiler work until inadequacies have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Engineer.
C.
D. 3.02
3.03
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Manufacturer's Supervision: Boiler manufacturer shall supervise field assembly (if any) and installation of boiler work, with a factory-trained technical service representative, for a minimum of 2 working days, plus one additional day for each boiler unit in excess of one. Prepare manufacturer's written report of installation.
Month Year
Projects Name
3.04 A. B.
BOILER START-UP General: Except as otherwise indicated, start-up boiler in accordance with boiler manufacturer's instructions. Sustained Operation: Do not place boiler in sustained operation prior to initial balancing of mechanical systems affected by boiler operation. Refer to requirements of Division 15 sections for testing, adjusting, and balancing. Cooperate with other trades of other work during the testing, adjusting, balancing and start-up of mechanical systems. TESTING General: Except as otherwise indicated, test boiler as directed by the Engineer.
C. 3.05
Month Year
Projects Name
SECTION 15803 COOLING SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. 1.02 Section 15672 : Section 15060 : Section 15100 : Section 15140 : Section 15250 : Section 15801 : Section 15990 : Section 15991 : Air cooled Chillers. Pipe and Pipe Fittings. Valves. Pumps. Insulation. Air Distribution. Instrumentation. Testing and Commissioning.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. General 1. 2. 3. 4. The chilled water system shall comprise of a primary and secondary circuits as detailed on the drawings. Connections shall be made between air-cooled chillers, and all cooling coils within air-handling and fan coil units. Connect all diverting valves, balance connections, pumps etc. as shown on the drawings. Provide and install in the position shown on the expansion/pressurization unit for the total chilled water system. drawings an
1.03
REFERENCES A. Refer to individual materials for specified standards.
1.04
SUBMITTALS A. Product Data 1. Descriptive literature for each of the actual proposed equipment to be used including : a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. B. Shop Drawings 1. Shop Drawings for each of the actual proposed equipment shall include the Capacity Operating Pressure Ranges Pressure Losses Fluid Flows Test Reports Certificates of Approval Operation and Maintenance Data Any other Technical Data
Month Year
Projects Name
following : a. b. c. d. e. f. g. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. General 1. 2. B. C. 2.02 The pipework shall be as specified in Section 15060. Seamless black steel, DIN 2440 medium weight. Condensate runs from drip trays under cooling coils shall be of UPVC when concealed above false ceiling or galvanized steel when in plant room or on roof. Working or Manufacturing Drawings. Calculations. Installation Details. Connections by other services. Wiring and Control Diagrams. Accessories Available Indicating Those Included. System Diagrams.
Valves shall be as specified in Section 15100. Insulation shall be complete with vapor barrier as specified in Section 15250.
PUMPS A. General 1. B. Type 1. 2. Primary pumps pipe mounted clause 2.02. Secondary pumps - horizontal end section clause 2.03. As specified in Section 15140.
2.03
CHEMICAL FEEDER POT The unit shall be of a quality construction with dished ends for safe operation at pressure and shall be supplied complete with all valves and funnels all factory assembled. The feeder unit shall be supplied with a stand and shall be pressure tested with a certificate from the factory. Chemical feeder pot shall be similar to Houseman dosage pots or approved equal.
2.04 1.
EXPANSION TANK
Provide compression tank ( expansion tank) as shown on the drawings, constructed for 930 Kpa working pressure for chilled water system and 1500 KPA for condenser water system, stamped with U symbol and supplied with National Board From U-1 denoting compliance with ASME boiler and pressure vessel code. Provide fittings and connections to related equipment in accordance with tanks manufacturers recommendations. Tank shall be insulated externally. _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-244
Month Year
Projects Name
Insulation shall be same type used for exposed ductwork, specified hereinbefore. Tank diaphragm shall withstand 10 deg. C up to 120 deg C suitable for heating water systems. 2. 2.05 Refer to drawings for tank support. CHILLED WATER TREATMENT Contractor shall assign a chemical specialist to execute all chemical treatment works subject to the approval of the Engineer. The scope of work for the chemical treatment specialist is as follows : 1. 2. 3. Chemical Supply Supervision of treatment program applied Water analysis and recommendations.
The mechanical contractor shall make sure that the following are completed and handed over to the engineer prior to commencement of water treatment work s: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. System is electromechanical operating. System is tested and pressurized for leaks. System to be cleaned should be final and any new loops to be connected should be separately. Drain points should be provided and sufficient for quick system draining. Make up water supply should match with system volume.
Estimated volume of chilled water system and condenser water system are to be verified by the Contractor and submitted for approval. 2.06 CHILLED WATER CHEMICAL TREATMENT PROGRAM Expected water holding capacity is to be verified by contractor and submitted for review. AChemical Flushing Program -
Alkatreat 20 or approved equal is added into the system during the initial water fill and circulated to remove oil & grease deposits. System solution is drained completely and flushed then refilled again. During refilling and draining phases, strainers has to be removed and cleaned and reinstalled after final flushing. This should include the strainers ( FCU & Pumps & AHU). System should be flushed until water PH is as raw water or neutral and TDS is within 10% of raw/make-up water supply. Chemtreat 248 or approved equal should be introduced during system refill to ensure efficient dispersion through out the system. Circulate this solution for 10-16 hours. Time will be specified by the specialized chemist who is attending the site. On the completion of the above procedure, system water should be drained and flushed thoroughly. Strainers are to be cleaned as above. System is to be flushed completely until system water is neutral or as raw water. Refill system with raw water and add Alkatreat 20 or approved equal. On completion of above strainers should be cleaned as above properly. System is to be refilled and flushed thoroughly to ensure removal of all suspended and solubilized debris. _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-245
Month Year
Projects Name
B-
Cooltreat 011 or approved equal is to be added & circulated for 1 hour & drained. Strainers are to checked & cleaned before the chemical treatment injection ( final) When strainers check test reveal that they are clean, fresh water is to circulate for 1-2 hours to ensure that circulating water parameters are within 10% of raw/makeup supply. Individual strainers will be checked at random for the presence of any residual suspended material which may have accumulated from low flow areas and/or restricted/small bore pipe work following the above procedures. If strainers are blocked or system water values are greater than 10% of the incoming supply, the Cooltreat 011 flush should be repeated until strainers and water quality meet the required parameters given below. On completion of above treatment chemicals are to be added.
Chemical Treatment Program Heatreat 502 (or approved equal). Initial shot dose Annual running dose Microtreat 2200 ( or approved equal ) Initial shot dose Annual running dose The Contractor should make sure that the make up water before chemical injection should be soft water of total hardness around 50-70 PPM as CaCO3.
C-
Hot Water System Same as chilled and quantities will be : Flushing Chemicals: Alkatreat 20 Chemtreat248 Cooltreat 011
Month Year
Projects Name
Treatment Chemicals: Heatreat 502 Microtreat 2200. DGeneral The Contractor should make sure that the water treatment specialist execute the following tasks during the one year guarantee period. Schedule visits frequency : 6 per annum.
The following is carried out on every visit by the chemist: 12345Full on-site analysis of all waters connected with the system. Wiring a report on his findings and any recommendations he may have. Checking the operation of the dosage/ control equipment. Checking the record chemical treatment stock levels. Training the Hospital staff at start up.
Plant inspection : observe/ monitor the water treatment program in action. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL INSTALLATION A. Piping 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. The piping shall be installed generally as described in Section 15060 and as shown on the drawings for chilled water. Install thermometers in piping system adjacent to the heat connections of each chillers evaporator. inlet and outlet
Install strainers in water piping ahead of all pumps, automatic modulating valves, and heating coils. Provide balancing valves and pressure gage cocks in all returns from equipment and three way valve bypass loops to balance the system. Balancing valves shall be required on the return of each branch main to balance the system. Provide flexible connections at the inlet and outlet to all major equipment which require vibration isolation. END OF SECTION
Month Year
Projects Name
SECTION 15860 AIR-CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and services, and perform operations required for complete installation of the packaged heating and cooling units and related work as indicated on the drawings and specified herein. Work Included: The work shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. Extent of packaged heating and cooling units work required by this section is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this section. Types of packaged heating and cooling units specified in this section include the following: a. 2. C. A/C split units
B.
Provide factory-mounted and wired controls and electrical devices as specified in this section.
Related Work Specified Elsewhere 1. 2. Basic Mechanical Requirements - Section 15010. Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods - Section 15050.
1.02
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Materials shall conform to the latest edition of industry standards and reference specifications specified herein and to applicable codes and requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent. 2. ASHRAE Compliance: Construct refrigerating system of packaged heating and cooling reverse cycle units in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 15 "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration."
1.03
SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following accordance with requirements specified under Submittals in Section 15010. 1. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including rated capacities of selected model clearly indicated, weights, furnished specialties and accessories and installation and startup instructions. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawings indicating dimensions, weight loadings, required clearances and methods of assembly of components. Wiring Diagrams: Submit manufacturer's electrical requirements for power supply wiring to packaged heating and cooling units. Submit manufacturer's ladder-type
2.
3.
Month Year
Projects Name
wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring required for final installation of packaged heating and cooling units and controls. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory-installed and portions to be field-installed. 4. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts list for each packaged heating and cooling unit, control and accessory, including "troubleshooting" maintenance guide. Include this data and product data in maintenance manual in accordance with requirements of Section 15010.
1.04
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Handle packaged heating and cooling units and components carefully to prevent damage, breaking, denting and scoring. Do not install damaged packaged heating and cooling units or components; replace with new. Store packaged heating and cooling units and components in clean dry place. Protect from weather, dirt, fumes, water, construction debris and physical damage. Comply with manufacturer's rigging and installation instructions for unloading packaged heating and cooling units, and moving units to final locations for installation.
B. C. 1.05
WARRANTY A. Warranty on Motor/Compressor: Provide written warranty, signed by manufacturer, agreeing to replace/repair, within warranty period, motors/compressors with inadequate and defective materials and workmanship, including leakage, breakage, improper assembly or failure to perform as required. Manufacturer's instructions for handling, installing, protecting and maintaining units must be adhered to during warranty period. Replacement includes component replacement and labor for removal, reinstallation and retesting and balancing. 1. 2. Warranty Period: one year from Date of Substantial Completion. Contractor shall include separate service Contract for Labor, if required.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - Lennox - Daiken - Mitsubishi (USA). (Japan). (Japan).
or approved equal. Controls and Thermostats shall be as Manufactured by HONEYWELL, STAEFA, LANDYS & GYR, SATCHWELL or any approved equal.
Month Year
Projects Name
2.02 A)
MINI-SPLIT UNIT General Mini split system shall be heat pump type and shall consist of a condensing unit, an evaporator blower unit, and refrigerant piping network between the blower coil and the condensing unit.
B)
Condensing Unit Condensing unit shall be of the air cooled type completely assembled at the factory and shall consist of the following: Phosphatized zinc coated steel casing. Hermetic Compressor. Air cooled condenser and condenser fan. four way solenoid reversing valve. All necessary controls and accessories for automatic and proper operation.
C)
Evaporator blower Unit The evaporator blower unit shall be installed indoors and shall be of the type indicated on the Drawings. The unit shall be complete with: D) Evaporator cooling unit. Centrifugal 3-speed blower and blower motor. Cleanable filter. Thermostat and speed selector switch. Decorative cabinet if installed exposed. Approved Manufacturers (USA). (Japan). (Japan).
- Lennox - Daiken - Mitsubishi
or approved equal.
Month Year
Projects Name
2.03 A.
SPLIT UNIT General Furnish and install heat pump split system Air conditioning unit consisting of outdoor unit and matching evaporator blower. Each unit shall provide the total cooling capacity shown on the drawings. Units to be ARI certified for capacity rating. Split unit shall be suitable for the existing static height between the condensing units located on roof and the airhandling units located in attics of apartments
B.
Condensing Unit (Heat Pump Type) 1. Cabinet Cabinet shall be of sheet metal zinc coated galvanized steel finished with a weather resistant paint. 2. Condenser Coil Condenser coil shall be constructed of aluminum fins mechanically bonded to seamless copper tubes arranged in multiple rows, flat or "v" type. 3. Compressor Compressor shall be of the hermetic type equipped with overheat and overload protection. Protection to be of the automatic reset type. The compressor shall be isolated from the cabinet floor by rubber vibration isolators. 4. Condnesor Fan and Motor Condenser fan to be with up flow discharge direct driven, propeller type, statically and dynamically balanced. Fan motor to be of the permanently lubricated type with thermal and current overload protection. 5. Controls Compressor control shall include but not limited to the following: High pressure cutout. Low pressure cutout. Time delay on restart to eliminate short cycling. Contactor for compressor. Contactor for condenser fan.
Control shall be factory prewired designed for 24 Volts operation. Three phase compressors shall be also equipped with field installed phase failure and phase inversion detector.
Month Year
Projects Name
6.
Refrigerant Circuit
C.
The condensing unit suction and liquid refrigerant lines shall terminate with shut off valves for units larger or equal to 5 Tons and with quick connect type connections for smaller units. Circuits shall be field equipped with a filter dryer and sight glass. Evaporator Blower 1. Casing Casing shall be of sheet metal zinc coated galvanized steel finished with baked enamel finish. 2. Coil Evaporator shall be constructed of aluminum fins mechanically bonded to seamless copper tubes. Each coil shall be provided with drain pan to catch condensate from coil, fabricated of heavy gauge galvanized steel, and insulated with a minimum of 1/4" layer of insulating mastic. Drain shall be pitched of 1/4" toward the drain hole. 3. Fan and Motor Fan shall include one or more aluminum centrifugal type fan, forward curved, directly driven by a two- bearing motor, equipped with built in thermal overload protection. Motors shall be quiet running and shall have sleeve bearings factory lubricated for life. Motor windings and electrical components shall be impregnated or protected to avoid trouble from condensation. 4. Air Filters Air filters shall be nylon fiber, glass fiber or cellular plastics material and shall have a minimum efficiency of 60% when tested in accordance with B.S. 2831 using Test Dust No 3. Filter to be of the throw away type. 5. Control Each unit shall be fitted with thermostat with a three speed switch. The thermostat shall be located as required by the engineer. The thermostat, the speed selector shall be of the package type. 6. Noise Level Casing shall be lined with material to act as both thermal and acoustic insulation. Fan and motor assemblies shall be complete with anti-vibration mountings. Noise level produced by the unit and measured at a distance of one meter from the closest air register shall not exceed 35 DBA. In case the above figures are being exceeded, sound absorbers shall be installed, at no additional cost.
7. Refrigerant Pipes _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-252
Month Year
Projects Name
Refrigerant pipes shall be of seamless copper tube type "L", jointed by silver brazing, using 45% silver brazing alloy. Pipe carrying cold refrigerant gas in summer and winter shall be insulated with preformed, flexible, sectional, plastic foam glass pipe insulation, 3/4" thick similar to Armaflex 22 as manufactured by Armstrong or approved equal. A trap shall be provided to prevent liquid return to compressor. Size of refrigerant lines between condensing unit and evaporator blower shall be as recommended by the manufacturer and shall be submitted to the engineer for approval. 2.03 CABLES Electric power shall be supplied only to the evaporator, contractor to supply and install electric power and control cables between condensing unit, evaporators and thermostats. Cables shall be of NYH type with the required number of conductors. PART 3 - EXECUTION A. EXAMINATION 1. Examine Conditions at the job site where work of this section is to be performed to insure proper arrangement and fit of the work. Start of work implies acceptance of job site conditions.
B.
PREPARATION 1. Examine the Contract Drawings and specifications in order to insure the completeness of the work required under this Section. Provide supplementary parts necessary to complete all insulation work, though not specifically indicated or specified herein. Verify all measurements and dimensions at the job site and cooperate in the coordination and scheduling of the work of this section with the work of related trades, so as not to delay job progress.
2.
C.
INSTALLATION 1. Install package cooling units in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. Install units plumb and level, firmly anchor in locations indicated and maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Install units on 4 inches high concrete pad, 4 inches larger on each side than equipment base. Cast anchor bolt inserts into pad. Electrical Wiring a. Turn over to Electrical Contractor devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory-mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal to Electrical Contractor.
2. 3.
b. Verify that electrical wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer's _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-253
Month Year
Projects Name
submittal and installation requirements of Division 16 sections. Do not proceed with equipment startup until wiring installation is acceptable to equipment manufacturer. 4. Ductwork a. Refer to Division 15 section "Ductwork". connect supply and return ducts to unit with flexible duct connections. Provide transitions to exactly match unit duct connection size. Connect condenser supply and exhaust ducts to unit with flexible connections.
b. 5. D.
Drain Piping - Connect unit drain to nearest indirect waste connection. Provide trap at drain pan, construct at least 1 inch deeper than fan pressure in inches of water.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 1. Startup packaged cooling units, in accordance with manufacturer's startup instructions. Test controls and demonstrate compliance with requirements. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment
E.
DEMONSTRATION 1. Provide services of manufacturer's technical representative for one-half day to instruct Employer's personnel in operation and maintenance of packaged cooling units. a. b. Schedule training with Employer, provide at least 7-day notice to Contractor and Engineer of training date. Provide operating and maintenance manuals as approved.
END OF SECTION
Month Year
Projects Name
SECTION 15900 CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK The contractor shall supply and install all the control equipment, auxiliary devices, instruments, etc. to perform satisfactory operations of all systems described in the specifications and/or indicated on the drawings. The drawings and the specifications are complemented each to the other. The sequence of operation of each system or piece of equipment is specified either under the equipment specification section or detailed on the drawings. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE Materials shall conform to the latest edition of industry standards and reference specifications specified herein and to applicable codes and requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent. Controls shall comply with NFPA and shall be UL Listed and certified. 1.03 SUBMITTALS Submit the following in accordance with the requirements specified under Submittals in Section 15010. 1. Product Data: Submit names of manufacturer and copies of latest published literature including types, applications and thermal characteristics for materials specified herein for approval; obtain written approval before ordering materials. Samples: Submit samples of materials specified herein for approval; obtain approval before ordering materials. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. B. C. Deliver materials specified herein in manufacturer's unopened containers, with manufacturer's name and point of origin on each container. Deliver materials and handle to prevent the inclusion of foreign materials and the damage of materials by water or breakage. Store materials and equipment where designated and within the manufacturer's recommended temperature range. Assume responsibility and security for materials and equipment and take precautions for protection from detrimental conditions.
2. 1.04
Month Year
Projects Name
1.05 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Control system shall be of the electric, or electronic, (solid state) or a combination of them to provide the required sequence of operation. Provide all relays, switches, gauges, sources of electricity and all other auxiliaries, accessories and connections necessary to make a complete operable system. Install controls so that adjustments and calibrations can be readily made. Unless otherwise noted, install all wall mounted thermostats 1400 mm above the floor, measured to the center line of the instruments. Insertion type thermostats shall have adjusting head at eye level, wherever practicable, for adjustment and calibration. Install all control valves horizontally with the power unit up. Unless stated otherwise temperatures shall be controlled within plus or minus 2 oF (1 oC) and humidity within plus or minus 5 per cent of the set point. Provide positive positioner devices on all controls operated in sequence and/or where specified or required to maintain the set point within the required limits without override. After completion of installation, all automatic controls shall be regulated and adjusted and placed in complete operating conditions subject to the approval of the Engineer and a maintenance brochure including all operating instructions, specifications and sheets for all instruments shall be submitted by the Contractor. Electric control systems shall conform to the requirements shown on the Drawings and shall effect the operation of the air conditioning systems contemplated by the design. After all controls, valves and motors have been connected, test the systems in the presence of the Engineer to demonstrate the capability of each automatic control system to meet contract requirements. Basic components shall be standard catalogue products of single reputable Manufacturer. Do not duplicate factory furnished controls of unitary equipment like refrigeration machines, fan coil units, etc. but modify them to conform to these specifications: Obtain from the manufacturer of unitary equipment, and submit written certification that proposed control circuit modifications do not conflict with or invalidate Manufacturer's equipment warranty. Instrument wire shall be run in conduits separate from other types of wiring and shall terminate on identified terminal strips. The wire terminals on instruments shall not be used as junction points to facilitate removal of instruments without disturbing others. Instruments shall have laminated plastic name tags with tag numbers and service engraved on the tag. Tags shall be securely fastened to the instrument. Tags shall be black with white lettering.
The equipment shall be restarted after a power failure in the same sequence and with the same time _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-256
Month Year
Projects Name
delays as specified for normal start-up. 1.06 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS HONEY WELL JOHNSON CONTROLS LANDIES & Gyr. STAEFA CONTROL SYSTEM BILLMAN DELTA CONTROLS Or approved equal PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 A. DESCRIPTION OF OPERATION Boilers 1. 2. Boilers shall be arranged to operate 24 hours per day. four boilers shall operate in parallel Sequence control System The sequence control of : 4 off steam boilers Turn down ratio 5.1 Working pressure max. Maximum required load a. ( USA ) ( USA ) ( Switzerland ) ( Switzerland ) (Sweden ) ( Canada )
10 bar 4 boilers
The duty selection of each boiler shall be by means of a duty selection switch, one per boiler, which shall be mounted as part of the facia controls. Each duty selection switch shall have four positions . Duty No.2, No.3 & No.4 and standby. Each boiler can now be selected to do any duty and complete flexibility of sequencing can be achieved. An auto/manual selection switch shall be fitted per boiler as part of the facia controls. When the switch is in the manual position the sequence controls are inhibited and the boiler shall operate under its own controllers. When the switch is in the Auto position the sequence controls shall control the lighting up, shutting down and modulation of that boiler according to the duty selected. The safety controls on the boiler will not be by-passed. When the switch is in the Auto position the standby pressure stat shall also be brought into operation. ( see standby status). The control circuit shall be so arranged that should a change of duty be required the Auto/Manual switch may be switched to manual without the burner shutting down. The duty selection switched changed to the new duty and then the auto/manual switched back to the auto position without the boiler having shut down. A lockout indicator light shall be fitted as part of the facia, one per boiler. The controls will be so arranged that if lockout occurs on any duty boiler , the 2nd boiler shall be switched into the sequence and take the place of the boiler that has failed.
b.
c.
A boiler ON/OFF switch shall be fitted as part of the facia, one per boiler. If the auto / manual switch is in the auto position the boiler ON/OFF switch can be used _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-257
d.
Month Year
Projects Name
to switch that particular boiler off . e. A low pressure alarm and indication light and a muting button shall be fitted as part of the facia. This shall give warning of a malfunction of the sequence controls and allow the operator to change to manual control. A plug-in relay logic system shall be fitted in the control panel which shall accept the lockout signals from each individual burner control system and also supply clean contacts to switch the boilers on and off . The control circuit will be so arranged that all relays shall be fail safe and will leave the plant in a safe condition should a relay fail to operate. A biasing system shall be fitted in the control cabinet such that the boiler that has been selected as Duty NO. 1 shall be biased by a maximum of 50% should Duty NO.2 boiler be required to fire . The bias applied shall be adjustable from 0 to 50% but will be initially set at 50%. If site conditions dictate that this should be altered, this can be done only from inside the control panel. A sequence controller shall be fitted in the control cabinet which will accept a signal from the steam header sensor and convert into ON/OFF signals and modulation signals for the individual boilers. The set point and differentials of the ON/OFF signals shall be fully adjustable and shall be pre-set. A steam pressure sensor shall be supplied to be mounted on the steam header. This shall be fully adjustable for set point and differential and will be set on site. The initial setting should be 10 bars with a differential of 100 Kpa . A low pressure sensor shall be supplied to be mounted on the steam header . This shall supply the signal for the low pressure alarm system in the control cabinet and shall be set on site. If a boiler has been selected as the 4th boiler or as Duty No. 2 or No.3 but is not yet required to fire, the boiler shall be kept up to pressure and temperature by means of the Standby Stats . When the standby stats cause the boiler to fire , the boiler will remain at low fire and shall not modulate up to high fire. Standby stats shall be fitted to each boiler drum and shall be set to keep the boiler up to temperature and pressure which shall be below the normal working pressure to the boiler. The time taken for a lag boiler to come up to working pressure shall be no more than 30 seconds. For complete description of control sequence refer to design drawings. B. H.W.S Calorifiers 1. 2. All calorifiers shall have boiler heating water as a primary heating medium. Immersion temperature sensor located in the calorifier & heat exchangers shall control the electrically operated valve via an Electronic/electric relay to maintain a constant calorifier temperature. An electric high limit thermostat also located in the calorifier shell will close valves upon a high limit condition occurring. All heat exchangers and calorifiers shall include safety relief valves.
f.
g.
h.
j.
k.
l.
m.
C.
Air Handling Systems
Month Year
Projects Name
Refer to design drawings for control sequence of various type of Air-handling Units. D. Fan Coil Units Refer to design drawings for control sequence of fan coil units. 2.02 A. B. C. SMOKE AND FIRE CONTROL OF AIR HANDING SYSTEMS Under smoke or fire conditions all air-handling systems except fan coil units in the particular fir zone shall upon alarm signal shut down the supply fan, and the return air fan. Under smoke evacuation conditions , the supply fan and return air fan shall run with the circulation damper closed and the exhaust and outside air intake dampers open. Smoke detection and alarm signals shall be provided separately as part of the Electrical Services fire alarm sub-contract . Allow for electro-pneumatic relays for damper operation. CONTROL PANEL AND CONTROL SYSTEM Control panels shall be installed where shown and as required on the Drawings. Each panel shall include start-stop and pilot lights for all major equipment being controlled together with their starters and necessary heat detector, alarm and other related safety and fire alarm systems. The control system shall be of DDC type complete with all necessary transformers, thermostats, valves, dampers, damper operators, and associated regulators required to maintain the conditions desired together with the thermometers, gauges, and other necessary accessories and the control wiring. Shop drawings shall be schematic diagrams showing all the components of the control systems and the interconnection scheme. Each component shall be identified by name and/or schedule number of equipment item it controls. Manufacturer's detailed Shop Drawings, specifications, and data sheets for all equipment to be furnished shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
2.03
2.04 A)
CONTROL DEVICES Temperature Controllers (With Remote Sensors) Shall be supplied complete with metal cases and manual set point adjusters. Room type controllers shall be mounted 1800 mm above the floor and in an accessible location . Panel-mounted controllers shall be supplied with metal mounting adaptor plate and mounting assembly. Controllers shall be designed for a throtling range of 2 oF (1 oC) for a 3Vdc output change with a control dial range 55- 85 oF (13-29 oC) and shall be suitable for ambient operating limits 40-135 oF (4-57 oC).
Month Year
Projects Name
B)
Dampers Motorized automatic dampers shall be of the louver type with not less than 13 gauge welded steel frames and galvanized finish. Blades shall have interlocking edges, stainless steel side springs (or vinyl or neoprene gaskets), and teflon-coated stainless steel thrust washers. Blades shall be edged with neoprene if the damper is to operate in outside air service either as an intake or discharge damper. Damper blades shall have steel trunnions mounted in nylon or oilite bearings. Dampers shall be not more than 1200mm. in length between bearings. Modulating dampers shall be of the opposed blade type unless specified otherwise. Blades shall be not over 200mm. in width and shall not be less than 16 gauge galvanized steel. Hardware shall be zinc plated. One damper actuator shall be provided for each 1.5 sq. meter of damper area. Provide parallel blade dampers arranged for maximum turbulance and mixing of outside air with return air. Arrange dampers as necessary to prevent stratification or provide baffles necessary to correct stratification problems. Provide dampers of low leakage construction, so designed that the maximum leakage shall be 10 cfm/ft2 (0.005 m3/s/m2) of damper with 4" WG. (1 Kpa) pressure differential applied.
C)
Temperature Sensors Duct temperature sensors shall have their sensing elements immersed inside the duct and the wiring enclosure mounting on the outer surface of the duct and shall be of the averaging duct type with linear output and suitable for ambient limits -40 to 250 oF (-40 to 120 oC). Sensor shall be complete with a steel wiring enclosure with 1/2" (13mm) conduit knockout (top and bottom) and a 5 feet (1.5m) long sensing element. Sensors shall be of corrosion proof construction. Sensing elements for water pipe mounting shall be of the rod and tube type with linear output and shall be furnished complete with separable stainless steel bulb wells filled with heat conductive compound. Sensors shall be factory calibrated and tamperproof. If easily adjustable sensors are provided, they shall be located inside metal enclosures with cylinder lock and key to prevent unauthorized setting.
D)
Room Thermostats Shall have metal locking covers and shall be provided with concealed adjustment means, and with thermometers. Each room thermostat shall be supplied with metal auxilliary mounting bases and metal subbase for surface mounting applications; plus a plastic guard to protect thermostat from damage. Line voltage on/off thermostats shall be of the bimetal operated snap action switch. They shall be underwriters' laboratories inc., listed at an electrical rating appropriate to the application. Thermostat shall operate on 2 oF (1 oC) differential and shall have a control
Month Year
Projects Name
dial range 55-85 oF (13-29 oC). Low voltage thermostats shall be of the self contained type with a 1000 ohm sensing element and an amplifier. Thermostat shall have a control dial range 55-85 oF (13-29 oC) and a throttling range of 2 oF (1 oC) for a 3 Vdc output change.
E)
FCU Thermostats (Digital Type) To provide line voltage, on-off control of fan coil unit valve and fan through spdt switching. To have following features: -12 -13 Cooling/ heating modes Wall mounted, with silver bronze finish and moulded cover Manual fan speed and on/off selection ( on/off -lo-med-hi) 3 speed switches. Horizontal temperature scale range with set point control lever Provision to break cooling circuit when fan is off Range approximately 40-90 deg. F with fixed differential of 2 deg. F Accessories including outlet box and adjustable range stops. Thermostat controlling cooling and electric heating coil valves of guest rooms shall have feature to switch FCU to low speed automatically when door access card is not in and to start FCU when temperature exceeds high limit including all controls, sensors and related accessories. Automatic switching of fan speed and to readjust room temperature during un-occupancy shall be as detailed on drawings.
-14
Where shown on drawings 2 or 3 FCUS can be controlled by one thermostat especially designed for this purpose.
F)
Return Air Duct Thermostat and Temperature Controllers Type T-2: to provide line voltage, proportional control of damper or valve motor through sensing element and capillary adjusting potentiometer in proportion to temperature variations. To have the following features: set point adjustment knob on dial differential adjustment dial with 135 ohms resistance potentiometer liquid filled, fast response coiled capillary element for duct applications or sensing bulb with immersion well components for chilled and heating water pipes applications 6 meters copper capillary tube range 55-175 deg. F with adjustable proportioning range of 3-30 deg. F accessories including controller mounting, capillary holder for mounting sensing element in air duct or immersion well assembly with compression fitting and tube clip for mounting bulb in tank or with T-strap for clamping bulb on pipe.
G)
Sequence Controller Type SC-1: to provide sequence control for multiple water chiller units or multiple boiler units according to the preset temperatures and provide programmed permutations
Month Year
Projects Name
for lead / lag chillers or boilers for equal use. Advanced proportional plus derivative microprocessor control algorithm, with the required number of steps for 3 water chiller units and for 2 water boiler heating units. To be used with electronic temperature sensors. H) 1. Sensors Temperature Sensor TS-1 To provide proportional single output for electronic temperature controller. To have the following features: electronic type insertion or immersion type for mounting on air duct or liquid line set point range -40 to + 257oF accessories including 125 to 450mm insertion element for duct mounting and 100mm immersion element with pressure rating for 150 psi for liquid line mounting. 2. Humidity Sensor - Type H-1 To provide proportional or proportional plus integral control action, electronic type. Range 15-90% RH with adjustable throttling range 1-10% RH. I) Low Limit Thermostat and Temperature Controller Type T-3: to provide line voltage, on-off control of damper or valve by sensing temperature of air in duct or liquid through spdt switch. To have the following features: set point adjustment knob on dial differential adjustment dial with snap-acting switch liquid filled, fast response coiled capillary element for duct applications and sensing bulb with immersion well components for pipe applications 6 meter copper capillary tube range 55-175 deg. F with adjustable differential of 3-10 deg. F accessories including wiring knock-outs, controller mounting, capillary holder for mounting sensing element in air duct with bag assembly or immersion well assembly with compression fittings and tube clip for mounting bulb in tank or with T-strap for clamping bulb on pipe. Motorized Valves and Actuatores Motorized Valves Type A: low voltage, 3-way, mixing, proportional reversing type, providing modulating control of water by-pass flow through operation of motor actuator and valve linkage in response to signal from proportional controller. To have the following features: -
J) 1.
valves 15 mm to 50 mm sizes, with two inlets and one outlet screwed end connections, cast bronze body, stainless steel stem, brass plug, integral brass seat and spring loaded, selfadjusting, Teflon cone packing _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-262
Month Year
Projects Name
valves 65 mm and larger, with two inlets and one outlet flanged end connections, cast iron body, stainless steel stem, brass plug, replaceable bronze seat and spring loaded, selfadjusting, Teflon cone packing reversing type motor, oil-immersed gear train, die-cast aluminium case, single 160 degree stroke, double-ended crankshaft, die-cast aluminium cover with built-in transformer and direct drive feedback potentiometer linkage directly mounted on motor, without adjustment requirements and comprising roller, slide mechanism, cam and stem position indicator and with 150 lb. seal-off force valve rated 250 deg. F maximum water temperature and 150 psi maximum water pressure motor rated 125 deg. F maximum ambient temperature.
2.
Motorized Control Valves - Type B Motorized Control Valve shall be low voltage, 2-way, 2-position, providing open-closed control of water flow through operation of motor actuator and valve linkage in response to signal from an onoff switch. To have the following features: single seated valve, straight-through pattern; screwed end connections, bronze body and removable brass seat on 15 to 40 mm sizes; flanged end connections, cast iron body and removable bronze seat on 50 to 80 mm sizes; stainless steel stem and composition disc with removable throttling plugs reversing type motor, with oil-immersed gear train, die- cast aluminium case, dual-stroke (90 and 160 degrees), double-ended crankshaft and die-cast aluminium cover with built-in transformer linkage directly mounted on motor, without adjustment requirements and comprising roller, slide mechanism, cam and stem position indicator and with 160 lb. seal-off force valve rated 240 deg. F maximum water temperature and 125 psi maximum pressure for flanged end connections and 150 psi for screwed end connections motor rated 125 deg. F maximum ambient temperature. Valve shall be sized to produce a full flow pressure drop approximately 1.5 times the full flow pressure drop of the unit by-passed, unless noted otherwise. Valve shall be selected to withstand system pressure and operate at the selected pump pressure at no additional cost.
3.
Motorized Control Valve - Type C Applicable to fan coil units. Electric, 2-way, 2-position valve (where shown on drawing valve shall be 3-way motorized on/off type) Forged brass swing ball type.
Complete with motor operator assembly. _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-263
Month Year
Projects Name
4.
Valve shall be sized to produce a full flow pressure drop approximately 1.5 times the full flow pressure drop of the unit by-passed, unless noted otherwise. Valve shall be selected to withstand system pressure and operate at the selected pump pressure at no additional cost.
Control Motor (Actuator) Electric, reversible, spring-return, proportional type complete with linkage. Suitable for damper operation. Shall be sized to operate with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth modulating action or two-position action as specified.
Month Year
Projects Name
5.
Differential Bypass Valve (Self balancing Valve) The differential by-pass valve shall modulate, open or close, according to the set differential pressure between the chilled water supply and return pipes. The differential by pass valve shall be complete with pressure controller , two way modulating valve and all related accessories and controls. Pressure controller shall be suitable for converting subranges of positive pressure, negative pressure and pressure differential into electrical output signals and to control operation of modulating valve accordingly. Manufacturer to be proposed by Tenderer as part of his tender, in all cases to be approved by consultant. Pressure controller shall be suitable for liquids with differential pressure up to 10 bars. Output signals shall be from Zero to 20 mA (0 to 10V). The sensor section and the terminal connection box shall be made of die cast aluminium from one unit. The evaluation electronics shall be housed in a module casing of makrolon.
K) 1.
THERMOMETERS AND GAUGES General Mount pressure gauges directly at the sensing point unless otherwise indicated. Select the instrument so that the normal range of operating temperatures and pressures falls within the middle-third of the instrument range. Use compound gauges when normal operating pressure is near or below atmospheric. Locate temperature sensing devices in a portion of the fluid stream where it will measure the average fluid temperature without obstructing flow. Increase pipes 1 1/2" (40 mm) in diameter and smaller at least one pipe size at the point of insertion. Where thermometer sensing bulbs are inserted in air ducts or casings, provide perforated bulb housing with a 3" (80 mm) diameter union flange to permit removal. Connections for sensing elements are to be brass except where otherwise specified. Provide all thermometers in piping systems with stainless steel wells and 3/4" (20 mm) seperable sockets. Provide extension necks where thermometers and pressure gauges are located in insulated piping, vessels, ductwork, casings or equipment. All thermometers and gages shall have both english and metric units gradings.
2.
Thermometers Permanently installed thermometers shall be mercury-in-steel dial type 150mm diameter having a suitable length of copper covered steel capillary tubing to connect the dial with the bulb, shall be supplied and installed as specified and as approved by the Engineer. Each thermometer shall be provided with back flange or arranged for flush mounting. Mercury-in-glass type thermometers with metal guard shall be supplied and installed as specified or as approved by the Engineer.
Unless otherwise specified, thermometer bulbs shall be of steel type, screwed 3/4" (20mm) British Standard pipe and supplied with stainless steel separable pockets suitable for screwing, brazing or welding into the pipe carrying the medium to be measured. _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-265
Month Year
Projects Name
Thermometers shall be tested to read alike on the midscale band, with their bulbs immersed in water, and the discrepancy between the highest and the lowest thermometer shall not exceed 0.5 oC. A red mark on each thermometer scale shall indicate the working temperature at the point of measurement. Thermometers shall be marked in both Degree C and Degree F. 3. Pressure Gauges Bourdon-tube type with 120 mm. diameter cast aluminium case with moisture-proof and dustproof blowout discs. Panelmounted gauges to have steel or aluminium hinged rings; direct mounted gauges to have back flange, black numerals on a white background face. Pressure gauge shall be furnished with a lever-operated gauge cock, and shall have snubbers installed between the gauge cock and the gauge to eliminate pulsations. Bourdon Tube shall be Phosphor bronze, (beryllium copper bellows). Socket shall be Stainless steel. Accuracy shall be at least 1% of scale range , range shall be equal to twice the rated working pressure of the unit ( pumps, chillers,....) reading shall be in psi. and Kpa. Gauges for combined pressure and vacuum service to have compound seal. 4. Gauge Test Points Gauge test points for temperature and pressure of flow shall be installed in all systems and particularly pairs of valves for regulating mains at flow and return connections to all plant and at all thermostatic elements and sensors. Pressure gauge test points shall consist of 6mm. bore bosses in the pipe work fitted with a test cock and plugged off. Air flow test points shall be provided in the air ducting at all branches and regulating dampers adjacent to each plant item and automatic control element at all fan inlets and discharges and elsewhere as required. Test points shall consist of a 40mm. diameter hole drilled through the ducting and covered with a removable spring clip fastened cover.
5.
Filter Condition Indicators Indicators shall be provided for all air filter units on air handlers and main fresh air louvers. The indicators shall be spirit or moving vane type suitably calibrated and provided with flexible pressure tubes to a test point on each side of all 'roughing' and 'fine' filters.
Month Year
Projects Name
6.
The position on the gauge dial at which the filters require cleaning or changing shall be clearly marked.
Water Flow Switches Water flow switches shall be of the paddle type electric as manufactured by the McDonnell and Miller Company. Those flow switches used in chilled water applications shall be of the vaporproof type to prevent condensation on the electrical switch. Paddles shall be properly trimmed for the pipe sizes in which they are installed. The flow switches shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations regarding locations in horizontal piping and proper distance from fittings.
7.
Firestats Provide manual reset firestate for each fan of 750 cfm (0.35 m3/sec) or larger capacity, to stop the fan on rise above set point temperature 136 oF (58 oC).
8.
Freezestats Provide a freezestat for each water coil subject to freezing to protect coil by deenergizing the supply fan when triggered. Freezestats shall be remote bulb, 20 ft (6 m) averaging type, with manual reset, adjustable setpoint, 15 oF to 55 oF., (-9 to 13 oC) mechanical stop to limit control point adjustment below predetermined minimum.
9.
Smoke Detectors Supply and install smoke detectors as shown on the Electrical drawings and as required by NFPA code. Smoke detectors shall be as specified under the Fire Alarm System section of the specifications. Smoke detectors shall be supplied complete with the necessary power relays and control wiring to perform the proper operations and function specified. Smoke detectors shall be connected to the fire alarm system with independent zoning designated on the fire alarm control panel.
Month Year
Projects Name
10.
Ammeters One 100 mm dial ammeter shall be supplied for each motor 10 HP (7.5KW) or larger, and for all electrical apparatus fed from the control panel. Ammeter shall be red lined at the normal running load.
11.
Voltmeters One 150 mm dial voltmeter shall be supplied to indicate the voltage of the motor control center in each Plant-Room. The Voltmeter shall be complete with a seven-position, rotary switch to enable reading the voltage between all phases and neutral.
12)
Electric Smoke Curtain The smoke curtain shall be electrically operated automatic curtain for use as part of the integral smoke control system. The smoke curtain shall be a roller blind incorporating heat resistant fabric normally held retraced at ceiling level. In the event of a fire a signal to the electric motor drive is given to allow the curtain to unroll at a controlled rate and drop to a preset height as indicated on drawings. A triangular bottom bar shall be fixed to the lower edge of the fabric to drive gravity deployment and to reduce movement by air currents and provide a neat finish when retracted. The curtain shall be fabricated incompliance with HBS476 and unit to BS 7346. Motor to be low voltage normally type taken from mains via an emergency power (EPU) and a battery back up in event of power failure. Smoke curtain panel to give signals to BMS and fire alarm panel on status of curtain weather open or shut. Curtin to be rated to at least 600C for 30 minutes.
L)
Carbon Monoxide Detection and Control System Supply and install a carbon monoxide central detection and control system as specified herein and as shown on drawings. a. The system shall basically consist of but not limited to the required number of remote carbon monoxide detectors, transmitters and multiple centralized control panels. The number of centralized control panels shall be dependent on the maximum allowable distance between sensors, transmitters and panels. The central panels shall incorporate the required number of modules connected to remote sensors. Modules shall be fully electronic incorporating solid state circuitry, microprocessor based control, with decontamination sequence to periodically remove water vapour and other contaminants from the sensor elements surface. The panel shall incorporate all the necessary logic circuits to operate the 2 speed exhaust fans as per the control diagram shown on the drawings. c. Carbon monoxide detectors or sensors shall be of the semi conductor type, micro-processor based with multi-stage output levels, sensitive to CO gas. Sensor is to be housed in a heavy duty enclosure with IP64 protection and of vandal proof construction. The sensor is to be provided with a filter for protection from contaminants. Detection range shall be from 0500ppm.
b.
Supply and install a carbon monoxide central detection and control system as specified herein and as shown on drawings: _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-268
Month Year
Projects Name
d.
Each module on the central panel shall have the following indications: Low level High level Alarm Fault Power on
e.
The system shall be compatible with and be linked to the "Building Automation and Control System" (BACS) and is to be provided with all necessary accessories required for connection to the BACS. The system shall be provided complete with all wiring, conduits, contactors, relays, transformers, circuit breakers, etc.... necessary for proper operation of the system.
f. 2.05
HARDNESS MONITOR Hardness monitor installed on soft water blending valves shall be capable to read the hardness of the water after blending zero ppm soft water with ordinary water to produce 30 ppm soft water. The hardness monitor shall readjust automatically the 3-way motorized mixing valve in order to result with a 30 ppm soft water. The hardness monitor shall be of the high range type 5 to 100 mg/L. Alarm points shall be expressed in mg/L of CaCo3 with an easy to read LED indicator with built in alarm relay to actuate an external annunciator. Monitor shall be complete with power cord kit with strain relief. The hardness monitor shall continuously sample water every two minutes thru pump and necessary tubing and automatically control the mixing process. Hardness monitor shall be HACH Model SP 510 or approved equal. Power supply 240 V/ 1 PH/ 50Hz. END OF SECTION
Month Year
Projects Name
SECTION 15910 FIRE DAMPERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK Extent of Work: The extent of fire dampers work is shown on drawings and by the requirements of this section. 1.02 A. QUALITY ASSURANCE Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of fire damper products of the types and capabilities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. ANSI Compliance: Comply with American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Z233.1 (UL 555), "Fire Dampers". UL Labels: Provide units which have been approved and listed by Underwriters' Laboratories (UL) and bear the UL Label, for 1 1/2 hour fire rating unless otherwise indicated. NFPA code: Comply with National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) No. 90A, "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning Ventilating Systems" pertaining to fire dampers. NEC Code: Comply with National Electrical Code (NFPA No. 70), as applicable to installation of electrical smoke detection and activation devices. Industry Standards: Comply with SMACNA (Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association, Inc.) recommendations for fabrication, construction and installation procedures as contained in applicable guides and manuals on fire dampers and low velocity and high pressure ductwork. SUBMITTALS Submit manufacturer's data on fire dampers together with dampers fire rating certifications. 1.04 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS GREEN HECK RUSKIN TROX Or approved equal. ( USA ) (USA ) (UK)
B. C. D. E. F.
1.03
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FIRE DAMPER CURTAIN TYPE.
Month Year
Projects Name
Fire dampers shall be provided wherever ductwork passes through a fire barrier or protected shaft in walls, floor and ceilings or as described in schedules. Dampers shall meet the requirements of NFPA 90A. Dampers shall be tested, rated and labeled in accordance with UL 555 Standards (Sixth Edition). Dampers shall have a UL555 fire rating of 1 hours. Damper blades shall be roll formed 22Gauge galvanized steel interlocked between each other folding in a curtain. Blades shall be held open (in the air stream or out of the air stream) depending on the size of the fire damper and the calculated friction loss) by a heat responsive device (fusible link) melting at a temperature rating of 165F, 212F or 285F according to the application. If the closing of the fire damper should be controlled by the fire alarm or the building management system an electro-thermal fusible link should be used. Damper frames shall be roll formed 22Gauge galvanized steel with reinforced corners. Fire damper should be equipped with a closure spring to ensure correct operation regardless of whether the damper is horizontally or vertically mounted. Fire damper should be equipped with a factory-mounted sleeve; the type of sleeve should be selected according to the application. For partition less than 4 or for wood partition, a thin type fire damper should be used with the same specification as the normal fire damper. Contractor should follow the installation instruction of the manufacturer. Damper to be similar to KBE model: K75 2.02 MULTI-BLADE FIRE DAMPER. OR MOTORIZED FIRE DAMPER. Fire Dampers meeting the following specifications shall be furnished and installed where shown on plans and/or as described in schedules. Dampers shall meet the requirements of NFPA 90A. Dampers shall be tested, rated and labeled in accordance with UL 555 Standards (Sixth Edition). Dampers shall have a UL555 fire rating of 1 hours. Each damper shall be equipped with a heat responsive device, which has been tested and approved, for use with the damper assembly in accordance with UL555. The heat responsive device shall have a temperature rating of 165F, 212F. Dampers shall be UL labeled for use in dynamic systems. The damper shall have a dynamic closure pressure rating of 4Wg. UL555 Dynamic Closure Ratings shall be qualified for airflow and pressure in either direction through the damper. UL ratings shall allow for mounting damper vertically (with blades running horizontal) or horizontally. Damper air performance data shall be developed in accordance with the AMCA Standard 500-D. Damper blades shall be 16Gauge galvanized steel 3 V type with three longitudinal grooves for reinforcement. Blades shall be linked together with external linkage (out of air stream). Damper frames shall be 16 Gauge galvanized steel formed into a structural hat channel shape with reinforced corners. Bearings shall be sintered bronze, oil impregnated type, rotating in extruded holes in the damper frame. _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-271
Month Year
Projects Name
Damper actuators, spring return, UL listed, shall be factory mounted and shall be electric type for 240,120 or 24 volts operation (depending of the control system). Manufacturer's submittal data shall indicate actuator space requirements around the damper. Contractor should follow the installation instruction of the manufacturer. Damper to be similar to KBE model: KFD 555 2.03 SMOKE DAMPER. Smoke Dampers meeting the following specifications shall be furnished and installed where shown on plans and/or as described in schedules. Dampers shall meet the requirements of NFPA 90A, 92A, and 92B. Dampers shall be tested, rated and labeled in accordance with the latest edition of UL Standards 555S (Forth Edition). Dampers shall be UL labeled for use in dynamic systems. The damper shall have a dynamic closure airflow rating equal to or greater than the airflow at the damper's installed location and a dynamic closure pressure rating of 4Wg. Dampers shall have a UL555S Leakage rating and a Temperature rating of 250F. Dampers shall have a UL555S operational airflow rating equal to or greater than the airflow at its installed location and an operational pressure rating of 4Wg. Damper actuators shall be factory mounted and qualified for use with the damper in accordance with UL555S. Damper actuators, spring return, UL listed, shall be electric type for 240,120 or 24 volts operation (depending of the control system). Manufacturer's submittal data shall indicate actuator space requirements around the damper. All UL555S Dynamic Closure Ratings, Operational Ratings and Leakage Ratings shall be qualified for airflow and pressure in either direction through the damper. UL ratings shall allow for mounting damper vertically (with blades running horizontal) or horizontally. Damper air performance data shall be developed in accordance with AMCA Standard 500-D. Damper blades shall be 16Gauge galvanized steel 3 V type with three longitudinal grooves for reinforcement. Blades shall be linked together with external linkage (out of air stream). Blade shall have a stainless steel or fire rated silicon blades seal to provide airtight seal between two blades. Damper frames shall be 16Gauge galvanized steel formed into a structural hat channel shape with reinforced corners. Bearings shall be sintered bronze, oil impregnated type rotating in extruded holes in the damper frame. Jamb seals shall be stainless steel compression type to provide airtight seal between blades and frame. Damper to be similar to KBE model: KSD 333 2.04 FIRE SMOKE DAMPER Combination Fire Smoke Dampers meeting the following specifications shall be furnished and installed where shown on plans and/or as described in schedules. Dampers shall meet the requirements of the latest edition of NFPA 90A, 92A, and 92B. Dampers shall be tested, rated and labeled in accordance with the latest edition of UL Standards 555 (Sixth Edition) and UL 555S (Forth Edition). Dampers shall have a UL555 fire rating of 1 hour. Each damper shall be equipped with a heat responsive device, which has been tested and approved, for use with the damper assembly in accordance with UL555. The heat responsive device shall have a temperature rating of 165F, 212F. Dampers shall be UL labeled for use in _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-272
Month Year
Projects Name
dynamic systems. The damper shall have a dynamic closure airflow rating equal to or greater than the airflow at the damper's installed location and a dynamic closure pressure rating of 4Wg. Dampers shall have a UL555S Leakage rating and a Temperature rating of 250F. Dampers shall have a UL555S operational airflow rating equal to or greater than the airflow at its installed location and an operational pressure rating of 4Wg. Damper actuators shall be factory mounted and qualified for use with the damper in accordance with UL555S. Damper actuators, spring return, UL listed, shall be electric type for 240, 120 or 24 volts operation (depending of the control system). Manufacturer's submittal data shall indicate actuator space requirements around the damper. All UL555 and 555S Dynamic Closure Ratings, Operational Ratings and Leakage Ratings shall be qualified for airflow and pressure in either direction through the damper. UL ratings shall allow for mounting damper vertically (with blades running horizontal) or horizontally. Damper air performance data shall be developed in accordance with the latest edition of AMCA Standard 500-D. Damper blades shall be 16Gauge galvanized steel 3 V type with three longitudinal grooves for reinforcement. Blades shall be linked together with external linkage (out of air stream). Blade shall have a stainless steel or fire rated silicon blades seal to provide airtight seal between two blades. Damper frames shall be 16Gauge galvanized steel formed into a structural hat channel shape with reinforced corners. Bearings shall be sintered bronze, oil impregnated type rotating in extruded holes in the damper frame. Jamb seals shall be stainless steel compression type to provide airtight seal between blades and frame. Contractor should follow the installation instruction of the manufacturer. Damper to be similar to KBE model: KFSD 111
Month Year
Projects Name
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 A. INSTALLATION General: Install fire damper products in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that product serve the intended function. Comply with applicable portions of NFPA's Installation Standard 90A. Coordinate with other work including ductwork, as necessary to interface installation of fire dampers properly with other work. Damper Access Doors: Refer to Section 15860 for installation of damper access doors in ductwork. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Test installed units for compliance with the requirements including those of governing regulations. 3.03 PERSONNEL TRAINING Fire Damper Maintenance Training: Train employer's personnel (maintenance persons) by demonstrating to them how to visually inspect and test damper operation and how to reset frangible and fusible link assemblies, and how to replace used links. END OF SECTION
B. C. 3.02
Month Year
Projects Name
SECTION 15975 BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (BMS) (PROVISIONAL) PART 1 - GENERAL A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Particular Conditions and Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. WORK INCLUDES A fully integrated building, automation and control system (BACS), UL listed, incorporating direct digital control technology where applicable, equipment monitoring and control including colour graphic workstations. System major elements include, without being limited to, the following: C. Computer based processing units. Personal computer operator workstations. Data storage units. Stand alone Data terminal units. Data communication units. Stand alone Remote control units. Portable operators terminals. Data interface units. Communication cable. System software.
RELATED WORK The following divisions contain requirements that relate to this section: Division 14 Conveying System Division 15 Mechanical Division 16 Electrical
D.
SCOPE OF WORK 1. General: all materials and/or equipment, necessary for proper operation of the systems, not specified or described herein are to be deemed part of the Specification. Perform the work under this section and provide all labour, materials, services, equipment and accessories necessary to furnish and install all instrumentation and equipment as indicated by the Drawings and/or as required by the Specification, which without limiting the generality thereof, consists of the following:
Month Year
Projects Name
a)
Master Control Communication Station: to be located in the central control room where shown on the Drawings and to be the primary operators position for the systems being monitored and controlled. From this position the operator is to monitor and control all systems of the Building (pumps, ventilation control, fans, smoke detection, switch-gear, unit sub-stations, lighting control, etc..) via a communication network at a minimum of 16 Kbaud communication speed. Secondary Station: to be located as required by the Engineer. Field Processing Unit (FPU): to monitor and control all functions specified on the function list. Field Procession Units or controllers (FPU) are to be of the preprogrammed and/or programmable type of appropriate number of input/output points for the specified application. Interfacing Panels to enable connection to physical control points via transducers, signal conditions, interposing relays and the like. Instrumentation, including sensors/transducers, transformers, sensing piping, tubing as required. Field wiring conducting communication trunks from DDC/FPU back to central processors in addition to interconnections between processors peripherals, etc. to yield a complete system. This to include power supply connection from nearest emergency panels/substations. Shop drawings, as-built drawings, instruction manuals, source code programme listing and all other documentation as required. Testing and commissioning of installations to take over.
b) c)
d) e) f)
g) h) 2.
BMS supplier shall furnish the following programs as part of the system : a) b) Supervisory workstation software as specified for monitoring and control. License for ten users or more and installed on five separate workstations. One complete set of software programs that has the full feature to program all quoted controllers and the graphic workstation, including program download and upload from controllers. License for two users or more and installed on two different workstations. Software program to check the operation of all quoted controllers both via physical connection to a controller and by using simulation software to mimic controller operation. License for two users or more and installed on two different workstations. Portable operator terminal software application that allows the use of a laptop as an interface to all types of quoted controllers. License for two users or more and installed on two different workstations. All other software designed and provided by the BMS manufacturer and required for modification or implementation of control logics, graphics, and addition/deletion of points for future usage of available spares and system expansion.
c)
d)
e)
f) All required software programs shall be the manufacturer's latest released versions _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-276
Month Year
Projects Name
at the time of system handing over and shall be licensed uniquely to the Lebanese American University. For each required software, two copies of the installation CD's or diskettes shall be provided. E. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 1. Building Automation and Control System: Distributed process control system consisting of central control, central communications, and remote control systems to monitor and control but not limited to the following building systems: 2. Plumbing systems controls. HVAC Systems control. Smoke control. Fire alarm and detection. Security and access control systems. Fire protection system. Emergency power generator. Power supply. Gas and fuel oil systems. Orrigation system.
The communication method between the different components of the BACS system shall be LONMARK Compatible system should also support the "BACNET" Building Automation and Control Networking Protocol as per ASHRAE Standard 135-95. All systems shall be compatible with the above standard protocol as applicable. General Product Description: a) The Building Automation and Control System (BACS) shall integrate multiple building functions including equipment supervision and control, alarm management, energy management and historical data collection. The system shall be modular in nature and shall permit expansion of both capacity and functionality through the addition of sensors, actuators, field processing units (FPUs), Application Specific Controllers and operator devices. System architectural design shall eliminate dependence upon any single device for alarm reporting and control execution. Each FPU shall operate independently by performing its own specified control, alarm management, operator I/O and data collection. The failure of any single component or network connection shall not interrupt the execution of control strategies at other operational devices. FPUs shall be able to access any data from, or send control commands and alarm reports directly to, any other FPU or combination of FPUs on the network without dependence upon a central processing device. FPUs shall also be able to send alarm reports to multiple operator workstations without dependence upon a central processing device.
3.
b)
c)
d)
F.
SCHEDULE OF CONTROL FUNCTIONS 1.
Schedule of control functions included in the Drawings or in this Specification is for the control and monitoring functions related to HVAC, Plumbing and Electrical Works. Contractor should refer to the control sequence shown on drawings and all equipment specified for this project and should generate his own point schedule during tender phase _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-277
Month Year
Projects Name
and should not in any means claim for additional price during the execution of the project. G. DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 1. Design central processing unit with modular system architecture to allow expansion of processor memory and addition of application software programs, terminal units, and central memory units. Minimum System Configuration: Accommodate input and output points, building systems data base, and functions specified and allow for 20% additional input/output points and related expanded data base, without modifying system hardware or software. Future System Expansion: Design system to be expanded to accommodate 50% additional input/output points and related expanded data base, without modifying system hardware or software. Design application software programs and system data base to be transportable to expanded central processing unit if required to accommodate specified future expansion.
2.
3.
H.
QUALIFICATIONS 1. Manufacturer and installer to have an office staffed with factory trained engineers and technicians fully capable of providing instructions, routine maintenance and emergency maintenance service on all system components. Manufacturer and installer to have at least 10 years experience in design and installation of computerized building systems similar to performance to that specified herein and to provide evidence of experience as condition of acceptance and approval. Supplier to have an in-place support facility within 100 km of the site with spare parts inventory and all necessary test and diagnostic equipment.
2.
3. J.
QUALITY ASSURANCE 1. 2. All electronic equipment shall conform to the requirements of FCC Regulation, Part 15, Section 15, Governing Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Interference and be so labeled. BACS shall comply with UL 916 PAZX and 864 UDTZ and be so listed at the time of bid. All equipment used in system is to bear appropriate UL listing label/mark to ensure compliance. Systems conforming to other equivalent international regulatory requirements will be accepted. The burden of proof for equivalent is on the Contractor.
3. K.
SUBMITTALS 1. 2. Submit in accordance with the Contract Documents. Shop Drawings: Indicate system configuration; interconnection wiring diagrams; location, data characteristics, range and units for each input and output point; logic diagram for each type of control routine; programming and operating reference for processing unit operating system; programming and operating reference for each application and programming language provided.
Product Data: Provide for each component, including sensors, control drives and elements, plug-in circuit boards, and enclosed equipment units. Include cabinet dimensions, weights, and support point locations for each item of enclosed equipment. _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-278
3.
Month Year
Projects Name
4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
Design Data: Indicate basis of optimization algorithms. Manufacturers Installation Instructions: Indicate installation instructions. Manufacturers Certificate: Certify system meets or exceeds listing requirements of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. for fire alarm and security equipment. Submit software providers license agreement stating limits on use, copying, and transferring software. Manufacturers Field Reports: Indicate acceptance of component and equipment installation, interconnecting wiring, and weekly progress on installation and start-up of system software. Where installation procedures, or any part thereof, are required to be in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer of the material being installed, printed copies of these recommendations shall be furnished to the Engineer prior to installation. Installation of the item will not be allowed to proceed until the recommendations are received. P & I or process flow diagrams: to be completed for each system and submitted for approval. Technical Data Sheets: control and instrumentation technical data sheets (TDS) to be prepared for each advice. Loop Diagrams: control and instrument loop diagrams prepared and furnished for all instrument systems. Typical diagrams are not permitted. Loop diagrams are to be unique for each loop. Equipment Installation Plans: to indicate location of instrument junction boxes, individual field instruments, transmitter racks, and routing of cable duct from junction boxes to respective remote processing units and back to Central Control Room. This is to be accompanied by a list of control points connected by each FPU, with indication of related control functions. Interfacing provided is to be listed; these are to be grouped as per standard sub-module size of digital and analog input/output boards, comprising similar requirements; such as interposing relays amplifiers, level translators, etc.. Operating Consoles: drawings detailing operating consoles, instrument panel layouts and dimensions and control room plans. Instrument Installation: detail drawings for each field installation are to be furnished. Details are to include but are not limited to instrument piping details, transmitter rack details and pipe mounted equipment installation details. Logic Diagrams detailing the operational logic are to be completed for the digital binary operations. In addition to these drawings, operational logic descriptions are to be prepared detailing the sequence of operation and operational constraints and limitations. Instrument schedule listing all devices to be keyed to instrument loop number and device numbers.
9.
10. 11. 12.
13.
14. 15.
16.
17. 18.
Instrument Schedule to provide a comprehensive data source indicating where all specific information may be found for each service. Schedule to include not only balance of plant equipment but also that equipment furnished as part of packaged systems and is to be noted _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-279
Month Year
Projects Name
as such. 19. Prior to procurement of equipment submit for approval the following drawings and documents: 20. Process and instrumentation flow diagrams. Equipment Specifications and completed technical data sheets. Control logic diagrams and logic descriptions. Input/output points charts for every processing unit.
Prior to start of system installation and construction submit for approval the following drawings and documents: Shop drawings for valves, dampers, transducers, transmitters, signal conditioners, indicators, recorders, miscellaneous instruments, central operator processing unit, consoles and ancillary. Control loop diagrams. Electrical elementary diagrams. Instrument installation plans. Detailed panel diagrams. Point to point wiring diagrams. Instrument schedule, including processing unit panel termination/interface.
21.
Prior to commencing start-up activities the following documents to be submitted for approval: System construction inspection procedures. Points calibration procedures. Calibrated control checkout procedures. Plant operational system test procedures. Operator and maintenance personnel training curriculum.
22.
Prior to system acceptance and turnover and as a condition of system acceptance, the following documents are to be submitted in four copies in accordance with contract requirements. System user manual. Systems maintenance manual including Specifications of each piece of equipment, trouble-shooting charts, and preventing maintenance instructions, technical data sheet for each instrument referenced for each application. As-built drawings including equipment outlined dimension drawings, equipment wiring and or piping connection drawing. Complete supplementary information about software and hardware of system supplied. This to include: a) b) c) d) system block diagram (hardware) software functional flow diagram memory map of all units specific tasks performed by each processor, especially where a distributed processing architecture is provided. These are to be clearly indicated in functional form. e) source and object lists of software program
L. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-280
Month Year
Projects Name
1. 2. 3. M.
Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of the Contract Documents. Accept products on site and verify damage. Protect products from construction operations, dust and debris by storing in conditioned space.
MAINTENANCE SERVICE 1. 2. Furnish service and maintenance of building management system for one year from Date of Substantial Completion. Include installation of software revisions issued during maintenance service period.
N.
SPARE PARTS 1. As soon as practicable after approval of materials and equipment and, if possible, not later than 4 months prior to the date of beneficial use, submit spare parts data for each different item of equipment furnished. Data to include a complete source of supply, a list of parts and supplies that are either normally furnished at no extra cost with the purchase of the equipment, or specified hereinafter as EXTRA MATERIALS to be furnished as part of the Contract; and a list of additional items recommended by the manufacturer to assure efficient operation for a period of 360 days at the particular installation. The foregoing is not to relieve the Contractor of any responsibilities under the guarantee condition.
P.
EXTRA MATERIALS 1. 2. 3. Provide special tools required for maintenance. Provide two of each plug-in circuit board. Provide 1000 sheets of continuous form paper.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS A. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS Honeywell Landis & GYR power Johnson controls Delta Control CSI or any approved equal. B. NETWORKING COMMUNICATIONS 1. 2. The design of the BACS shall network operator workstations and stand-alone FPUs.
Access to system data shall not be restricted by the hardware configuration of the Building Management System. The hardware configuration of the BACS network shall be totally transparent to the user when accessing data or developing control programs. _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-281
Month Year
Projects Name
a) Operator workstations and FPUs shall directly reside on a network such that communications may be executed directly between FPUs, directly between workstations and between FPUs and workstations. b) Network design shall include the following provisions: Provide high-speed data transfer rates for alarm reporting, quick report generation from multiple controllers and upload/download efficiency between network devices. System performance shall insure that an alarm occurring at any FPU is displayed at workstations and/or alarm printers within 5 seconds. Support of any combination of FPUs and operator workstations directly connected to the network. Message and alarm buffering to prevent information from being lost. Error detection, correction and retransmission to guarantee data integrity. Synchronization of real-time clocks.
Month Year
Projects Name
3.
Telecommunication Capability: a) Auto-dial/auto-answer communications shall be provided to allow FPUs to communicate with remote operator stations and/or remote terminals on an intermittent basis via telephone lines, as indicated in the sequence of operations. b) Provide all necessary hardware and software for remote communications with all remote processors, back-up processors and all operator input/output peripheral devices.
C.
CENTRAL PROCESSING 1. BACS hardware to be totally solid-state using computer oriented digital technology. System to have a fully modular architecture permitting expansion by adding computer memory, additional processing units application software, operator peripherals and field hardware. Main Station Processing Unit to be microprocessor based mini-computer, Pentium IV, 2.4 GHZ, 16 bit word, with minimum resident random access memory (RAM) capacity of 250 mega-bytes. Processor to be provided with hard disk of mass memory storage/access, based totally on Winchester Technology, with storage capacity of at least 40 Gega bytes. Secondary Station Processing Unit to be microprocessor based mini-computer, Pentium IV, 2.4GHZ, 16 bit word, with minimum resident random access memory (RAM) capacity of 256 mega-bytes. Processor to be provided with hard disk of mass memory storage/access, based totally on Winchester technology, with storage capacity of at least 40 Gega bytes. Field Processing Unit or Controller to be distributed stand alone for control of various unitary and terminal equipment or controls with built in network communication for integration into the BACS system. Loading/Backup Facilities: provide as an integral of an IBM PC or compatible, all hardware required to load, reload, or backup the memory of the system and the software to execute specified functions. Loading of system to be through use of high-speed, mass storage media, such as magnetic tape cartridge or floppy diskette. This same media to be used for making on-line system backups and for remote historical data storage. Data Dumpings: if FPU memory fails, the operator shall not have to manually re-enter system data. Necessary hardware and software are to be supplied to: Allow periodic dumping of operator entered data onto another storage media on line. Reload this data as the operator desires.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Data dumpings are not to interrupt any other system operation (such as operator input/output, scanning of field hardware, application software execution, etc...).
Month Year
Projects Name
D.
FPU/DDC CONTROLLERS 1. Stand-alone Controllers shall be microprocessor based with a minimum word size of 16 bits. They shall also be multi-tasking, multi-user, real-time, digital control processors consisting of modular hardware with plug-in enclosed processors, communication controllers, power supplies and input/output point modules. Controller size shall be sufficient to fully meet the requirements of this Specification and the attached function list. Each FPU shall have sufficient memory, to support its own operating system and database. Each FPU shall have a minimum of 10% spare capacity for future point connection. The type of spares shall be in the same proportion as the implemented I/O functions of the panel, but in no case shall there be less than two spares of each implemented I/O type. Provide all processors, power supplies and communication controllers complete so that the implementation of a point only requires the addition of the appropriate point input/output termination module and wiring. a) Provide sufficient internal memory for the specified control sequences and have at least 25% of the memory available for future use. 4. FPU shall provide at least One RS-232C serial data communication ports for operation of operator I/O devices such as industry standard printers, operator terminals, modems and potable operators terminals. FPUs shall allow temporary use of portable devices without interrupting the normal operation of permanently connected modems, printers and terminals. FPU shall also support one port from communication to ECHELONS LONMARK approved devices. FPUs shall provide local LED status indication for each digital input and output for constant, up-to-date verification of all point conditions without the need for an operator I/O device. Graduated intensity LEDs or analog indication of value shall be provided for each analog output. Status indication shall be visible without opening the panel door. Each FPU shall continuously perform self-diagnostics, communication diagnosis and diagnosis of all panel components. In the event of the loss of normal power non-volatile memory shall be incorporated for all critical controller configuration data and battery backup shall be provided to support the real-time clock and all volatile memory for a minimum of 72 hours. a) Upon restoration of normal power, the Controller shall automatically resume full operation without manual intervention.
2. 3.
5.
6. 7.
Month Year
Projects Name
E.
FPU/DDC RESIDENT SOFTWARE FEATURES 1. General: a) All necessary software to form a complete operating system as described in this specification shall be provided. b) The software programs specified in this Section shall be provided as an integral part of FPU/DDC Controllers and shall not be dependent upon any higher level computer for execution. 2. 3. The DDC programming software shall be user friendly objet oriented programming language. DDCs : a) DDCs shall be of the programmable type only. Programmed, application specific DDCs may be used for FCUs and VAVs only. b) DDCs shall communicate with each other on a peer to peer communication. Workstations shall be switched on and off without any interruption to control and monitoring sequences. DDCs shall be stand-alone in terms of operation, control, and alarming, and shall have sufficient memory to support its own operating system and data base. c) Each DDC shall be able to be connected to remote input/output I/O modules through a communication bus. d) Output modules shall have override switches for each point (on/off/auto switches for digital outputs, gradual switches for analog outputs). DDC controllers shall monitor the status of all overrides and inform the operator that automatic control has been inhibited. The supervisory software shall be able to report override activity information. e) Each DDC shall perform self diagnostics and report to the supervisory workstation any component failures, such as low battery condition. f) All Points for a given piece of equipment shall be monitored and controlled from one DDC, division of points related to the same equipment, chilled water plant, heating plant, between DDCs is not allowed. i. ii. iii. iv. g) DDCs shall be able to perform the following algorithms: Two position control Proportional control Proportional plus integral control Proportional, integral, plus differential control
h) DDCs shall use any of the following in a custom process : i. Any system measured point data or status ii. Any calculated value iii. Any results from other processes iv. User-defined constants v. Arithmetic functions (+,-,*,/, square root, exp, etc.) vi. Boolean logic operators (and, or, exclusive or, etc.) _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-285
Month Year
Projects Name
i) Custom processes can be triggered based on time interval, time of day, events, or any combination of the above. Custom processes shall be able to incorporate measured or calculated data from any DDC on the network. Trend logging. i. Any point, physical or calculated may be designated for trending. Two methods of collection shall be allowed either by a predefined time interval or upon a predefined change of value, Sample intervals of 1 minute to 7 days shall be selectable. Trend data shall be uploaded to the connected Supervisory workstation for points for which trend logging is activated on the Supervisory software. All trend data shall be available for use with 3rd party personal computer applications. Display of trend data shall be selectable for the same above intervals. Where minimum, maximum, and average values of each interval are displayed.
ii.
iii. k) Alarms i.
All alarms shall include the point's English language name, time of occurrence, and an assigned alarm message. Each DDC shall be able to store a minimum of 50 different alarm messages, each 200 characters long to fully describe the alarm condition and the required operator action. These messages shall be assigned to any number of points. Each point shall have at least four levels of alarm. The user shall be able to define specific system reaction for each level of alarm for any point. Alarm levels shall be combined with user definable destinations, such as Supervisory workstation, Printer, dial-up connection, DDC only etc or any combination of the above destination. Controller shall automatically inhibit the reporting of selected alarms during system shutdown and start-up. Users shall have the ability of manually inhibiting alarm reporting for any point.
ii. iii. iv.
v. vi. l) i.
Totalizers
DDCs shall automatically accumulate and store run-time hours for digital input and output points, and shall automatically calculate and store consumption totals, such as K Wh, gallons, tons, etc., on a daily, weekly or monthly basis for analog and digital pulse input type points. The totalization routine shall have a sampling time of one minute or less. The user shall have the ability to define a warning limit for totalizers. Unique, user defined messages and events shall be activated when the limit is reached. DDC's shall have the ability to count events such as the number of times a pump or a fan is cycled on and off. _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-286
ii. iii. iv.
Month Year
Projects Name
4. Provide one operator interface to be plugged directly to DDCs. Operator shall have a minimum LCD display of 30 characters per line and 6 lines and a fully featured keyboard. Provide user friendly, English language prompted interface for quick access to system information, codes requiring look-up charts are not acceptable. The following functions shall be available from the operator interface: a. Display all points on a DDC b. Display trending and totalizing information c. Command, change set-point, enable/disable any system point F. PORTABLE OPERATORS TERMINAL (POT) 1. Provide one portable operator terminal with a minimum LCD display of 80 characters by 25 lines and a full featured keyboard. The POT shall be handheld and plug directly into individual distributed control panels. Provide a user friendly, English language prompted interface for quick access to system information, not codes requiring look-up charts. If the same Portable Operators Terminal cannot be used for all control processors, provide separate POTs to accomplish the above functional requirements. Portable operator terminal access to controller shall be password controlled. The portable operator terminal, POT, software application shall be installed on a laptop and plugged directly to DDCs. The Portable operator terminal software application shall provide the following functions : Back-up and/or restore DDC data bases Display all points on a DDC Display trending and totalizing information Command, change set-point, enable/disable any system point Load and/upload DDC logic programs.
2. 3. 4. a) b) c) d) e)
Month Year
Projects Name
G.
OPERATOR PERIPHERAL DEVICES 1. General: operator peripheral device communications, here designated as Man-Machine Interface (MMI) to be handled simultaneously through various devices generally categorized as software and hardware. Each device may be connected in a direct proprietary, leased phone line, or dial-up phone line application. Standards: all peripheral devices to utilize ASCII (American Standard Code for Information Interchange) code and to be interfaced to the processing units with standard RS 232 port. Communication versatility is to comply with all methods previously specified herein. Operator Station to comprise multiple operator peripheral input/output devices which can all be used simultaneously. Operator Access to system to be restricted by a software coding process. Systems which provide only manual key lock accessibility are not acceptable. Printers: system printers to provide hard copy data retention of change of state, operator initiated actions, management reports, graphics and trended information. Printers which can be interfaced include the following: colour printer receive only (RO) printer
2.
3. 4. 5.
Main control station to be provided with one colour and two receive only printers. Secondary stations to be provided with one colour and one receive printer. Provide a printer (RO) for recording alarms, operator transactions and systems reports, meeting the following minimum requirements: a) Wide carriage 160 character per second print speed. b) 9 x 9 DOT matrix character structure switchable to 9 x 18 DOT matrix for letter quality output. c) Compressed mode option for 220 characters per line. d) Software selectable under line, emphasized, double strike and expanded (double width) characters capability. e) Adjustable line spacing. f) Adjustable tractor for 5 inch to 15 inch paper widths. Provide an A3 inkjet type colour printer for printing of graphics and any other screen displays. Printer shall include as a minimum: a) 80 Column tractor feed for normal use with ability to switch to friction feed of single sheets of paper without any mechanical adjustments. b) 360 x 360 Dot/inch image resolution. c) Draft and letter quality print selection for alpha-numeric operations. _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-288
Month Year
Projects Name
d) 32 K Buffer to store complete graphics for printing. H. CATHODE RAY TUBE (CRT) 1. General: provide colour Cathode Ray Tubes (CRT) with direct video capability and keyboards to display real-time data, allow operator commands, perform data base generation and report system activity.
J.
FIELD DEVICES AND CONTROLS 1. 2. 3. Provide all necessary transducers, flow and level switches, pressure and temperature sensors, transmitters, etc.. where applicable to satisfy all functions required. Proof of fan operation shall be by means of air flow switches. Proof of pump operation shall be by means of water flow switches. Water temperature sensors shall be Resistance Temperature Detector (RTD) type of 1000 ohm platinum, or 20,000 ohm. Sensors shall have + or - 1.0 degrees F accuracy between 32 degrees and 212 degrees. Duct temperature sensors shall be rigid stem or averaging type as specified in the sequence of operation. Water sensors shall be provided with a separable copper, monel or stainless-steel well. Water flow analog sensors shall be provided complete with flow element and shall be an all solid state precision industrial type with stainless-steel meter body, maximum error of no more than .5% of span, and 4 to 20 ma output. Sensor shall be rated for 250 psi minimum and installed in strict accordance to the manufacturer's instructions complete with three-valve manifold for calibration and maintenance.
4.
5.
6.
Kilowatt transducers shall be the integrated electronic type with accuracy of .2% of scale. For balanced (such as motors) three phase loads, two current transformers (CTs) shall be provided and for unbalanced loads, three CTs shall be provided. Two or three potential transformers (PTs) shall be provided as recommended by the manufacturer for the application. Analog output transducers shall be designed for precision closed loop control with pneumatic repeatability error no greater than 1 %. Unless specified otherwise elsewhere, relative humidity sensors shall be capacitance type with 10% to 90% range. Duct mounted humidity sensors shall be provided with a sampling chamber. Current sensing relays used for proof-of-loading for fans and pumps shall be suitable for 2 to 200 amperes and shall have adjustable trip thresholds of plus or minus two percent of range. Each relay shall be provided with an LED to allow ready observation of the relay status. 10. Fan proof-of-flow switches shall be adjustable set point and differential pressure type. Switches shall be piped to fan discharge except where fans operate at less than one inch WC, they shall be piped across the fan. For fractional horsepower and non-ducted fans, relays or auxiliary contacts may be used. Maximum pressure rating shall be at least 10 inches WC. Pump proof-of-flow switches shall be adjustable differential pressure or flow type as specified in the sequence of operation or data point summary. Devices shall be 150 psi with IP65 protection class. Switch to be SPDT with 250 VAC, 8 Amp rating.
7. 8.
9.
11.
Month Year
Projects Name
12.
On-off motorized butterfly valves shall be have a housing of ductile iron GGG40 with stainless steel shaft. They shall have PN16 rating and be suitable for temperatures of -10 to 130 Deg C. Actutaor shall be provided with a manual operator and should be suitable to provide the necessary torque for tight close-off. Differential water pressure transducer shall have 0-10 volt output and a protection class of IP65. Housing to be aluminium diecast with stainless steel sensing element. Transducers should be suitable for temperatures up to 70 Deg C Current transducers should have a rated input of 1 amp. or 5 amp. Accuracy to be 0.2% minimum and linearity to be less than 0.1%. Response time to be less than 250 ms. Output signal to be 4-20 ma or 0-20 ma. Transducer should be able to withstand a continous overload of 4 times the rated input current and a maximum overload of fifty times the rated current for 1 second. Voltage transducers should have a rated input of 600 Volts. Accuracy to be 0.2% minimum and linearity to be less than 0.1%. Response time to be less than 250 ms. Output signal to be 4-20 ma or 0-20 ma. Transducer should be able to withstand a continous overload of 1.5 times the rated input current and a maximum overload of two times the rated voltage for 1 second. Current transformers should be instrument grade split core type with outputs of 1 Amp. or 5 Amp. Accuracy to be 0.5% from 10% to 100% of rated current. Insulation class to be 600 VAC Water pressure switches should be suitable for media temperature of -25 to 70 Deg C. Switch should have IP54 protection and should be supplied with SPDT microswitch rated at 5 Amps inductive or 8 Amps resistive current. Switch to have an adjustable setting for the setpoint and the hysterisis Air pressure transmitter should be suitable for media temperature of -25 to 70 Deg C. It should have IP54 protection and should have an output of 0-10 Volts DC output. Transmitter should also be supplied with necessary accessories for installation on ducts. Air flow switches shall be paddle type suitable for a maximum pressure of 0.25 bars. Devices shall be IP65 protection class. Switch to be SPDT with 250 VAC, 8 Amp rating. Occupancy sensor shall use Dual Sensing Verification Principle for coordination between ultrasonic and passive infrared technologies. Detection verification of both technologies must occur in order to activate lighting systems. Upon verification, detection by either shall hold lighting on. CO sensor should be suitable for ranges of 0-100 ppm to 0-500 ppm. Sensor to have IP65 protection and to provide 4-20 ma output. Wind speed sensor should be suitable for speeds up to 90 m/s. It should be provided with a contact output suitable for 0-100 VDC, 0.5 Amps. Switch to have IP65 protection. Rain sensor should have IP65 protection and should be supplied with a switching unit to provide a SDPT contact suitable for 230 VAC, 5 Amps.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19. 20.
21. 22. 23. 24.
Level switches to be magnetic float types with a guide tube and should allow single or multilevel switching types. Switch to be top mounted. Switch should be suitable for water and oil applications. For gas applications and explosive atmostpheres a switch with intrinsic safety approval should be used. _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-290
Month Year
Projects Name
25. 26.
Level transmitters for oil and water should be of the ultrasonic type, top mounted with 4-20 ma output. Sensor to have IP 68 protection while the housing should have IP67 protection. Level transmitters for gas tanks should work on the float principle with magnetic transmission (permanent magnet, reed switches and resistance chain). Level to be read by contiuously measuring the total resistance as the float moves along the guide. Transmitter should be supplied with an intrinsically safe control unit to convert the resistance into a 4-20 ma current. Conductiviy sensor should provide accurate temoerature compensated measurement over the ranges of 0.055 to 1,000,000 micromhos/cm and 0-18.2 Megohms-cm. Sensor should provide an output of 0-10 volts or 4-20 ma DC corresponding to linear concentration output signals Accuracy to be less than 0.5% of span. It should be supplied
27.
K.
SCHEDULE OF SYSTEM GRAPHICS 1. HVAC monitoring and control a) Equipment: Show layout of all equipment includingchillers, boilers, AHUs, FCUS,VAV boxes, pumps, dampers, etc...., as per mechanical drawings. b) Monitoring and control Points: Show all monitoring and control points related to all equipment indicated above as per schedule of functional point list. 2. Ventilating monitoring and control: a) Equipment: Show layout of all fans and motorized dampers, as per mechanical drawings. b) Monitoring and control Points: Show all monitoring points related to all equipment indicated above as per schedule of functional point list.
3.
Plumbing monitoring and control a) Domestic Cold and Hot Water System: Show all monitoring and control functions as per design drawings. b) Drinking and Irrigation Water System: Show all monitoring and control functions as per design drawings. c) Lift station: Show all control and monitoring functions as per design drawings. d) Water treatment plant: show layout with monitoring and control functions for all water treatment equipment. e) LPG & fuel oil systems : show all monitoring and control functions as per design drawings. f) Fire Pump: Show layout plan, with location, by colour change status.
g) Fire Fighting System: Show all monitoring and control functions as per design drawings. _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-291
Month Year
Projects Name
h) Location plan for each floor, indicating flow alarm devices and zone limits with colour change status. i) 4. Irrigation system show all monitoring and control points.
Fire Detection and Alarm a) Fire Detection System: Overview schematic of detection / protection scheme. b) Zone Alarm/Fault: Layout plans of each basement floor with colour change to indicate condition. c) Zone Alarm/Fault: Allow for backup advisory messages in case of alarms generation. Relay for action to be taken; mechanical equipment shutdown, etc..
5.
Electrical Control: a) Power Distribution System: System overview with indication of list feeders, main feeders, tie breaker status, by colour change. Show all control functions as per control sequence shown on design drawings. b) General Switchgear: Show all monitoring functions as per design drawings. c) Diesel Engine System: Show all monitoring functions as per design drawings. d) Unit Substation: Show all monitoring functions as per design drawings. e) Lighting Panel Boards: System overview with status indication of all contactors.
6. Required Graphics shall include but not limited to the below list : a) Main graphic shall be a digital photograph of the buildings faade from which an Auto-cad elevation drawing of the Library, Business School, or Parking buildings can be selected. b) From the Auto-cad elevation drawings an Auto-cad floor layout can be selected where room temperatures are displayed. c) Selecting a technical room will open the equipment layout graphic of the room with basic readings. The drawn equipment shall resemble the actual equipment. Selecting equipment will open the graphic containing the schematic of the equipment with all related readings. d) Selecting other rooms will open the graphic of HVAC equipment serving that room, e.g. FCU, VAV box or AHU, with available readings and with a link to the graphic of the main equipment, e.g. AHU serving that VAV box, Chiller Plant or Heating Plant Serving that FCU. e) For smoke exhaust under fire conditions an Auto-cad elevation drawing shall show the position of all smoke fire dampers, the status of AHU's, smoke exhaust fans, and pressurization fans. PART 3 - EXECUTION _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-292
Month Year
Projects Name
A.
EXAMINATION 1. 2. 3. 4. Verify that conditioned monitoring rooms are ready to receive work. Verify field measurements are as shown on shop drawings and as instructed by manufacturer. Verify that required utilities are available, in proper locations, and ready for use. Correct unsatisfactory conditions.
B.
INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS 1. 2. Connect HVAC monitoring devices under provisions of Division 15 related Sections. Connect motor controllers, lighting controls, fire alarm and smoke detection devices, intrusion detection and security access devices, electrical sensing and measurement devices, electrical controls and relays, programmable logic controller, under provisions of Divisions 14 and 16 related Sections.
C.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 1. Test each sequence of building management system by simulation of normal, off-normal, and alarm conditions.
D.
ON-SITE TESTING 1. 2. Provide Engineer-approved operation and acceptance testing of the complete system. The Engineer will witness all tests. Field Test: When installation of the system is complete, calibrate equipment and verify transmission media operation before the system is placed on line. All testing, calibrating, adjusting and final field tests shall be completed. Provide a detailed cross check of each sensor within the system by making a comparison between the reading at the sensor and a standard traceable to the National Bureau of Standards. Provide a cross check of each monitoring point within the system by making a comparison between the monitoring command and the field controlled device. Verify that all systems are operable from local controls in the specified failure mode upon panel failure or loss of power. Submit the results of functional and diagnostic tests and calibrations to the Engineer for final system acceptance. Compliance Inspection Checklist: Submit in the form requested, the following items of information to the Engineer for verification of compliance to the project specifications. Failure to comply with the specified information all constitute non-performance of the contract. The Contractor shall submit written justification for each item in the checklist that he is unable to comply with. The Engineer will initial and date the checklist to signify Contractors compliance before acceptance of system. a) Verify to the Engineer in letter form that supplier has in-place support facility. Letter shall show location of support facility, name and titles of technical staff, engineers, supervisors, fitters, electricians, managers and all other personnel responsible for the completion of the work on this project.
3.
Month Year
Projects Name
b) Submit in data sheet form or official government approval form compliance to F.C.C. Regulation, Part 15, Section 15. c) Manually generate an alarm at a remote Controller as selected by the Engineer to demonstrate the capability of the workstation and alarm printer to receive alarms within 5 seconds. d) Disconnect an operator workstation in the central monitoring room and manually generate an alarm at a remote Controller to demonstrate the capability of the system printer to receive alarms when the workstation is disconnected from the system e) Disconnect one Controller from the network to demonstrate that a single device failure shall not disrupt or halt peer-to-peer communication. Panel to be disconnected shall be selected by the Engineer. f) At a Controller of the Engineers choice, display on the portable operators terminal: 1) Setpoints and status conditions, i.e., on or off for a system or piece of equipment attached to that panel as well as for points at another Controller on the network, as selected by the Engineer. 2) The diagnostic results as specified for a system or piece of equipment attached to that panel as well as for a system or piece of equipment attached to another Controller. 3) The ability to add a new point to the Controller with the POT and have it automatically uploaded to the workstation to modify that panels stored database. E. FIELD SERVICES 1. 2. 3. F. Adjust setpoints, alarm points, and display configurations so that system performs as specified. Include installing and debugging hardware and software. Perform hardware configuration revisions required to accommodate software patches. Enter building management data base and provide backup copy.
CLEANING 1. Clean equipment finishes interiors of equipment cabinets.
G.
SERVICE AND GUARANTEE 1. General Requirements: Provide all services, materials and equipment necessary for the successful operation of the entire BACS system for a period of one year after completion of successful performance test. Provide necessary material required for the work. Minimize impacts on facility operations when performing scheduled adjustments and non-scheduled work. Description of Work: The adjustment and repair of the system includes all computer equipment, software updates, transmission equipment and all sensors and monitoring devices. Provide the manufacturers required adjustment and all other work necessary.
2.
3. Personnel: Provide qualified personnel to accomplish all work promptly and satisfactorily. _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-294
Month Year
Projects Name
Owner shall be advised in writing of the name of the designated service representative, and of any changes in personnel. 4. Schedule of Work: Provide two minor inspections at 6 month intervals and two major inspections offset equally between the minor inspections to effect quarterly inspection of alternating magnitude, and all work required as specified. Minor inspection shall include visual checks and operational tests of all equipment delivered. Major inspections shall include all work described for minor inspections and the following work: a) Clean all equipment, including interior and exterior surfaces. b) Perform signal, voltage and system isolation checks of system workstations and peripheral. c) Check and calibrate each field device. Check all analog points and digital points. d) Run all diagnostics and correct all previously diagnosed problems. e) Resolve and correct any previous outstanding problems. Provide detailed report after each inspection. 5. Emergency Service: Owner will initiate service calls when the system is not functioning properly. Qualified personnel shall be available to provide service to the complete system. Furnish Owner with a telephone number where service representative can be reached at all times. Service personnel shall be at the site within 24 hours after receiving a request for service. Restore the monitoring system to proper operating condition within 3 days. Operation: Performance of scheduled adjustments and repair shall verify operation of the system as demonstrated by the initial performance test. Systems Modifications: Provide any recommendations for system modification in writing to Owner. Do not make any system modifications, including operating parameters and monitoring settings, without prior approval of Owner. Any modifications made to the system shall be incorporated into the operations and maintenance manuals, and other documentation affected. Software: Provide all software updates and verify operation in the system. These updates shall be accomplished in a timely manner, fully coordinated with the system operators, and shall be incorporated into the operations and maintenance manuals, and software documentation.
6. 7.
8.
H.
DEMONSTRATION 1. Provide systems demonstration under provisions of the Contract Documents.
J.
TRAINING 1. The Contractor shall provide competent instructors to give full instruction to designated personnel in the adjustment, operation and maintenance of the system installed rather than a general training course. Instructors shall be thoroughly familiar with all aspects of the subject matter they are to teach. All training shall be held during normal work hours as follows:
2. Training shall include: _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-295
Month Year
Projects Name
a) b) c) d) e)
Explanation of drawings, operations and maintenance manuals. Walk-thru of the job to locate monitoring components. Operator workstation and peripherals Controller operation/function Operator monitoring functions including graphic generation and field panel programming. f) Operation of portable operators terminal. g) Explanation of adjustment, calibration and replacement procedures. 3. MANUALS Provide four sets of manuals in hard copy an one set in soft copy for the following : a. b. c. d. e. All System Graphics; indicate the tag number of the equipment and each control point name and address All control logic; indicate the tag number of the equipment and each control point name and address List of all control points parameters with the values used for commissioning Operator manuals for the supplied software Operation and maintenance manual Provide additional training quarterly for a period of one year from final completion of the project.
K. CONTROL WIRING 1. 2. All control wires are to be numbered with 5-digit scheme using legrand or 3M numbers. All input and output cables should be routed separately from lines with voltages greater than 48 volts and cables transmitting a switching action. All temperature and humidity input cables should be routed alone. All wiring for inputs shall be shielded cables. All low voltage cables should be routed separately from line voltage cables. Low voltage cables from each field item to be routed back to the BMS panel, i.e. connections to transformer output to be done at the panel. Communication cable should be routed alone. Electric power connections to field equipment to be done via terminal blocks. Electric power to each transformer to be separately protected via fused terminal blocks. Electric power circuits from a transformer to be separately protected via fused terminal blocks. Terminal blocks to be rail mounted terminal blocks with disconnect feature. Provide 10% spare terminal blocks per panel. Terminal Blocks Approved manufacturers: Wago Legrand Or approved equal. Provide an intermediate external 24v relay, outside the DDC, for all digital outputs. Cable selection shall be based on the load they supply, but in circumstance shall be less than 1.0 mm2. Contractor shall make sure that the voltage drops on every line (cable) is within the permissible range of the devices installed, and this shall be calculated based on the worst case scenario (i.e. all devices on the same line and/or power supply) are operational at the same time. This calculation sheet shall be submitted prior to the installation of conduits.
3.
4. 5.
Month Year
Projects Name
6. 7. 8.
Conduit size shall be selected based on the 40% fill criteria. To obtain a step down in voltage use transformers only. All transformers are to be located in the control panel. Each DDC is to be housed in a separate lockable panel; transformers, relays and terminal blocks to be housed in another panel. Panel to be IP55 with back mounting plate and lockable door. Panel to be as specified for electric panels. END OF SECTION SECTION 15991 TESTING & COMMISSIONING
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. 1.02 A. 1.03 A. RELATED WORK Division 15 - Mechanical SYSTEM DESCRIPTION This Section covers the testing and commissioning requirements for air handling, piping controls and mechanical systems generally. QUALITY ASSURANCE Testing and Balancing Agency Qualifications 1. The testing and balancing shall be conducted by a specialist agency other than the Mechanical Contractor subject to the approval of the Engineer, professional in balancing and testing such systems as herein specified.
1.04 A.
SUBMITTALS Testing and Balancing 1. Certificate a. 2. Submit Warning Certificate.
Data Sheets a. b. c. Submit typewritten data sheets on each item of testing equipment to be used. Include name of device, manufacturers name, model number, latest data calibration, calibration due data and correction factors. All products and instrumentation used shall be subject to approval. of
3.
Report Forms a. b. Submit specimen copies of report forms, for approval for their use on this project. Forms shall be quarto paper for loose leaf binding, with blanks for listing of the required test ratings and for certification of report.
Month Year
Projects Name
Provision Of Test Point And accessories. All required test points, although not mentioned in the BOQ, are deemed to be included in the pipework and ductwork installations and included in the unit rate of these systems. The contractor shall allow sufficient points and where required by the Engineer for the correct and complete regulation, testing and commissioning. All test points shall be indicated on the working and record drawings. Test points shall be fitted with removable plugs, flanges or other approved devices appropriate to the service concerned . Balancing valves and dampers shall be included on every main branch and subcircuit to facilitate system commissioning. All such devices shall be identified on the working drawings and submitted for approval. Each volume control damper and fire damper shall be complete with adjacent access panel. Balancing valves shall be propriety commissioning sets consisting of double regulating valve and close coupled orifice plate. The Contractor shall prepare system loading diagrams for each system including control dampers, regulating valves and test points and shall indicate their physical location in pipework or ductwork. Recording of Test Results : The Contractor shall give 7 days notice, to the Engineer in writing, prior to any regulation, testing and balancing being undertaken to enable he Engineer to witness the work. The Contractor shall formulate and provide all test sheets to a format agreed by the Engineer. Each sheet shall contain the project title, the logos of the Employer and the Engineer . Each sheet shall have witnessing signatory space specific to the Contractors Engineer, and the Engineers designed representative. The test result sheets shall be fully cross-referenced to the system loading diagrams which shall be updated to include the actual test results. Duplicate signed test certificates shall be provided after each test which will be countersigned by the Engineer who witnesses the test. The test certificate shall give the following particulars : Apparatus or Section under test Makers number ( if any ) Nature, duration and conditions of test Result of test No test shall be valid until the test certificate is provided. Duplicate copies of test certificates carried out at manufacturer works shall be forwarded to the Engineer for approval prior to dispatch of the article to site. No Section of the works shall be insulated or in any other way concealed prior to testing and inspection and subsequent concealment where applicable shall only take place following written authority from the Engineer. All necessary facilities, measuring and recording instruments including test pumps and gauges for inspection/testing and commissioning requirements shall be provided and shall be checked or calibrated as necessary before use. The Engineer reserves the right to call for a demonstration of the accuracy of any instruments provided. _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-298
Month Year
Projects Name
Testing Instruments : The Contractor shall submit with his Tender a full list of instruments, together with relevant standards, which he intends to use in the regulation, testing and balancing of the Contract Works. The Contractor shall include the full cost of regular calibration test to be carried out on all instruments used and the cost of any necessary recalibration. Certified documentation confirming current certificate calibration shall be available for examination by the Engineer at all times. Instruments not supported by up-to-date calibration certificates shall not be used. All instruments necessary for conducting the test shall be provided including the following minimum range : Tube type velometer ( Range 1.5 to 13 m/sec). Sloping tube manometers. Pitot tubes of various length to suit duct sizes. Mercury in glass thermometers. Weekly recording thermometers. Weekly recording R.H. meters. Specially mounted anemometers fixed in a conical sheet metalwork hood for measuring accurately air flow from diffusers. Ammeters. Tachometers. Surface contact dial indicating pyrometer. Hot wire digital anemometers. Sound meters. Digital touch thermometers. Multi-channel digital thermometers ( where necessary ). U tube manometers. Commissioning set electronic flow meters. Brass cased certified thermometers. The Contractor shall prepare and submit with his Tender a schedule of recommended test equipment suitable for Technician Grade maintenance staff to assess whether the commissioned standards are being maintained. Whilst the level of equipment need not be comparable to the Specialist Commissioning Contractors own test equipment it should meet the following requirements : a) b) c) Measurement of air and water temperatures including all test probes. Air flow measurement, both in duct and at diffuser discharge. Water flow measurement using commissioning valves sets provided under the Mechanical Services Contract.
4.
Final Report
a. Upon completion, all information shall be neatly typed accompanying schematic diagrams _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-299
Month Year
Projects Name
of systems tested. b. All test reports shall be assembled, indexed, and submitted to the Engineer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 A. OPERATIONS OF EQUIPMENT & SYSTEMS. The Contractor shall make the necessary adjustments for each system and piece of apparatus installed, using factory-trained technicians wherever practicable, and shall thoroughly instruct the client appointed representatives in the roper operation of the apparatus. Printed instructions written in both Arabic and English, shall be permanently attached to the relevant equipment. TESTING GENERALLY Where an individual inspection or test takes place at a sub-contractors work, a representative of the client will be required to be present. Unless otherwise indicated, the Contract shall include the cost of all tests, necessary instruments, equipment, supervision and labour both at the manufacturers plant and on site. The accuracy of the test instruments shall be demonstrated where so directed. The site test shall be of at least six hours duration. On large installations, the site test may last several days and shall be long enough to allow the taking of all the measurements required in subsequent clauses of this Section and to demonstrate the performance of the installation. Any defects of workmanship materials and performance, maladjustments or other irregularities which become apparent during the tests shall be rectified by the Contractor at his expense and the tests shall be repeated at the Contractors expense to the satisfaction. The Contractors representative present at the site tests shall be fully conversant with the operation of the thermostatic controls, the control panel and the refrigeration system, representatives of the manufacturers of the equipment shall be present, TESTS AT MANUFACTURERS WORKS Unless otherwise indicated, tests shall be carried out in accordance with the appropriate Standard or Code or Practice. Test certificates for works tests shall be submitted induplicate.
3.02 A. B.
C.
D.
3.03 A.
Month Year
Projects Name
B.
Test certificates shall be submitted : 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. For Fans : Type test certificates showing fan characteristic curves and type test certificates for sound levels. For Pumps : Type test certificates for head, discharge, speed and power input. For Electrical Motors : Type test certificates for motors of 40 KW output and above, routine ( individual ) test certificate. For Starters and Control Gear : Type test certificates for control panels as a whole, routine ( individual ) high voltage test. For Other Electrical Equipment : Such as air heaters ( but excluding thermostatic control equipment ) test certificates. For Hydraulic Equipment : Test certificates for hydraulic and air pressure testing at works.
3.04 A.
PRESSURE TESTING OF PIPEWORK SYSTEMS Upon the completion of each length or section of the pipework the Contractor shall subject the length or section to a hydraulic test and demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Engineer that the length of the section is sound and watertight. The test pressure shall be one and a half times the maximum working pressure or 700 KPa, whichever is the greater, for a period of two consecutive hours. Items of equipment, e.g. safety valves, bursting discs, set to operate at or below this pressure shall be isolated or removed prior to applying this test. All faults discovered during such-test- shall be remedied by the Contractor at his own expense and the test re-applied until the Engineer is satisfied that the section is sound and watertight. Installations sections thereof which will be embedded in the structure or concealed in permanently sealed ducts, trenches etc., shall be individually tested as they are laid and before being embedded or concealed. All pressure tests shall be carried out before the application of thermal insulation. On completion of the test, the water is to be released and drained completely away as rapidly as possible, the section then being thoroughly sluiced through to ensure the removal of as much dirt and foreign matter as possible before being refilled and put into service. AIR LEAK TESTING OF DUCTWORK SYSTEMS General 1. All ductwork and equipment items shall be checked for air leakage. This shall be completed before installation or enclosure of ductwork and before any terminal units are fixed. The air leakage tests shall be based on the measurement of air leakage at constant pressure. The test pressure shall be the design static pressure of the section to be tested plus 250 pa. The aggregate of air leakage shall not exceed 1% of the system design air flow rate, and leaks shall not be audible. The air leakage rate for any section shall not be in excess of the permissible rate, in m3/s per meter, for the whole system. Sufficient time shall be allowed, before testing, for the sealant to cure. The ductwork system, or section to be tasted shall be sealed by the incorporation of, blanking plates fitted at flanged joints, for main ducts and for small open ends, polythene bags may be used. The polythene bags may be retained to aid in preventing the ingress of dirt into the system.
B. C.
D. E.
3.05 A.
2.
3.
4. Care shall be exercised in jointing tested sections of the ductwork system together, as it _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-301
Month Year
Projects Name
will generally be impracticable to test such joints. B. Test Apparatus and Method 1. Portable test apparatus shall be provided by the Contractor and shall comprise the following equipment: Electrically driven fan capable of delivering not less than 0.03m3/s against a duct pressure of 2.5 Kpa, a static pressure gage suitable for recording the duct static pressure test, an inclined pressure gage, a variable speed type, and a flow measuring device complete with test cocks. The accuracy of the measuring device shall be +/-5% of the permitted air leakage rate. The apparatus shall be connected to the blanking plate inserted in the section of ductwork to be tested. With the bleed valve fully open or the variable speed motor set to minimum speed, start-up fan, and adjust fan speed or close bleed valve until static pressure reading on static pressure gage reaches desired value. If pressure cannot be obtained, the ductwork shall be checked for obvious leaks and rectified. With the duct section maintained at the test pressure, the ductwork shall be checked for major and audible leaks. The leakage rate, as indicated on the inclined pressure gage, connected across the flow measuring device, shall be recorded and checked that it is within the permitted limits. This leakage rate shall be maintained for at least 15 consecutive minutes without increasing. The fan shall then be turned off and the pressure in the test section of duct returned to zero before starting the fan again and establish that the air leakage rate has not increased from the previous reading. Any results not within the permitted limits shall require that the ductwork be examined and any leaks rectified. Time shall be allowed for the sealant to cure before the test is restarted. Readings of the test for each section of ductwork shall be recorded and presented to the Engineer before any further work is carried out on the section of ductwork tested.
2.
3.
4. 5. 3.06 A. B.
TESTING OF SOIL, WASTE AND ROOF DRAINAGE PIPING SYSTEMS On completion of the soil and waste pipe works or section of the work as may be required the plumbing contractor shall arrange the testing of the works. The tests shall comprise an air test as set out in the Uniform Plumbing Code, and described in section 15405, and a performance discharge test as required. Should the Engineer deem the test unsatisfactory his visit shall at his desecration be considered abortive and all costs incurred in respect of time, travel and expenses shall be recoverable from the contractor who shall then rectify the works and arrange for a further test to be witnessed at his own expense. Where the testing is to be carried out in sections the Contractor shall retain on site a drawing indicating sections tested and recording dates on which the tests took place duly witnessed. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing all skilled and unskilled labor necessary to carry out tests and ensure that all supplies and instruments are available. COMMISSIONING GENERALLY General 1.
C. D. 3.07 A.
Each installation shall be fully commissioned. Commissioning shall include the balancing and regulation of air and water distribution systems and the final adjustment of control system. _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-302
Month Year
Projects Name
2.
Particular attention shall be paid to : a) b) c) The maintenance of cleanliness of all equipment and distribution and distribution systems during construction and ensuring that distribution systems are cleared through as part of commissioning. The protection of equipment, particularly sensitive of fragile items, from the activities of other trades during construction and from dirt and maloperation during commissioning. The protection of Electrical equipment from damp during construction and commissioning.
B.
Adjustments 1. Adjustments shall be made to the following items : a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) Adjust blowers, fans and ducts to deliver or exhaust design air flow rate. Adjust diffusers, register, and grilles to deliver or exhaust design air flow rate. Adjust relief dampers and vents. Adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to minimize drafts. Adjust all zones for design supply and return air flow rates. Adjust blowers and fans to design revolutions. Balance cooling water systems to achieve design flow characteristics. Balance domestic hot water return loop.
3.08 A.
COMMISSIONING AIR SYSTEMS Preparation : Prior to system testing and balancing. 1. 2. 3. 4. Systems shall be fully operational. All filters shall be clean. Temperature and system controls shall be checked for proper operation. Fan rotation shall be checked.
B.
Air handling System 1. 2. Fan air handling quantities and other major air flow quantities where required, shall be measured by pitot tube and inclined manometer using multi-point traversing techniques. The following items shall be specifically checked and/or adjusted and recorded on the Site Test Certificate for each air handling unit. a) b) c) d) e) f)
External air dry bulb temperature and relative humidity. Air dry bulb temperature and relative humidity in each space. Air dry bulb temperature and relative humidity in each main return duct. Air dry bulb temperature and relative humidity before and after each air heater. Air dry bulb temperature and relative humidity before and after each air cooler. Air dry bulb temperature and relative humidity before and after a humidifying equipment. g) Air dry bulb temperature and relative humidity before and after a fresh and return _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-303
Month Year
Projects Name
h) j) k) l) m) n) 3.
air mixing chamber. Air dry bulb temperature and relative humidity in each main supply air duct. Fresh air quantity ( m3/s). Air flow ( m3/s) and resistance ( Pa or mm of water ) across a main fan . Air flow ( m3/s) and resistance ( Pa or mm of water ) across each heater. Air flow ( m3/s) and resistance ( Pa or mm of water ) across each cooler. Air flow ( m3/s) and resistance ( Pa or mm of water ) across each humidifying equipment.
Perform the following minimum air system tests balancing. a) b) c) d) e) f) Air flow (m3/s) in each main supply, return a grille and diffuser. Air flow (m3/s) at each supply grille and diffuser. Fan and ,motor speeds, air quantity and dry bulb temperature and relative humidity, both on and off the cooling coil, for at least two of each size fan of the cooler unit. Main fan and motor speeds. Current taken under running conditions for each fan above 4 KW and each electric air heater, and maximum current for each electric air heater. In cooperation with the temperature control system installer, set adjustments of automatically operated dampers to operate as specified, indicated and noted.
C.
Record Data Record the following minimum data : 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Air flow rate delivery and rpm of blowers and fans. Static pressure at inlet and outlet of blowers and fans. All equipment nameplate data. Actual running current and voltage of fan motors. Air flow rate, delivery or exhaust at each diffuser, register and grille.
3.09 A.
COMMISSION WATER SYSTEMS Preparation : Prior to system testing and balancing
Open all valves to full open position. Close coil bypass stop valves. Set mixing valves to full coil flow. 2. Remove and clean all strainers. 3. Examine water in system and determine if water has been treated and cleaned. 4. Check pump rotation. 5. Clean and set automatic fill valves for required system pressure. 6. Check expansion tanks to determine that they are not air bound and the system is completely full of water. 7. Check air vents at high points of water systems and determine if all are installed and operating freely. 8. Set all temperature controls of all coils calling for full cooling. Same procedure when balancing hot water coils : set for full heating. 9. Check operating of automatic bypass valve, if furnished. 10. Check and set operating temperatures of chillers to design requirements. _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-304
1.
Month Year
Projects Name
11. B.
A complete air balance must be accomplished before beginning the water system test and balance.
Water Handling Systems 1. General a. The satisfactory operation of all make-up, drain and overflow arrangement shall be checked. Where water treatment is included initial commissioning shall be carried out and then rates of flow, dosing quantities etc., shall be calibrated and set for routine operation.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.
Perform the following minimum water system test and balance : Set water pumps to proper flow rate. Adjust water flow through equipment. Check leaving water temperatures and return water temperature. Reset to correct design temperatures. Check water temperatures at inlet side of coils. Note rise or drop of temperatures from sources. Proceed to balance each water coil. Upon completion of flow readings and adjustments at coils, mark all settings and record data. After adjustments to coils are made, recheck settings at pumps and readjust if required. Install pressure gages in gage fittings provided on coil, read pressure drop through coil at set flow rate for full cooling and on full heating. Set pressure drop across bypass valve to match coil full flow pressure drop.
C.
Record Data Record the following minimum data at each cooling element : 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Inlet water temperature. Leaving water temperatures. Pressure drop of each coil. Pressure drop across bypass valve. Pump operating suction and discharge pressures. List all mechanical specifications of pumps. Check and record starter size, heater sizes, etc. Rated and actual running amperage of pump motor. Water balance device readings and settings.
Month Year
Projects Name
3.10 A.
COMMISSIONING OF REFRIGERATION SYSTEM During erection, commissioning and at the end of commissioning particular attention shall be paid to competent workmanship adequate sealing of valves and fittings and comprehensive leak testing, to minimize future leakage of refrigerant. 1. The following items shall be checked and/or tested and entered on the Site Test Certificate: a. b. c. d. e. f. Chilled water flow and return temperature. Refrigerant suction and discharge pressure and temperatures. Compressor and motor speeds. Compressor oil pressure. The satisfactory operation and set operating pressures of high pressure, low pressure and oil pressure failure cut-outs. Current taken by each compressor at full load and at each step of capacity reduction.
Month Year
Projects Name
3.11 A.
COMMISSIONING BOILER EQUIPMENT Maximum Continuous Rating Test 1. 2. During the commissioning period a maximum continuous rating test shall be carried out on each of the boilers. The test shall be for a period of 4 consecutive hours exclusive of the time required for preparation, attaining test conditions and running down. During this test it shall only be necessary to measure the evaporation of the boiler, the amount of fuel fired and the exit flue gas temperature.
B.
Acceptance Tests 1. On completion of the installation the Contractor shall carry out thermal efficiency tests on all the boilers. These tests shall take place during periods of maximum loads and the Contractor shall allow for adequate visits to satisfactorily test the thermal efficiency of the boilers and performance of ancillary equipment. Test and record flue gas exit velocity, temperature and CO2 content by volume, fuel consumption. The following shall be checked and /or tested and recorded on the Site Test Certificate: a. The boiler relief valves and any other relief valves in the steam system shall be tested and proved to lift at their required pressure using live steam.
2. 3.
3.12 A.
CONTROL SYSTEMS Particular attention shall be paid to the following features : 1. 2. Satisfactory operation of any automatic or manually operated sequences to be used in the event of fire. Safety in the event of failure and of sudden resumption of electric supply.
B.
The following items shall be checked and/or tested and recorded on the Site Test Certificate : 1. 2. 3. Set desired value of all control devices. Satisfactory operation of equipment protection devices. Satisfactory operation of all sequencing operations and alternate working selections, and automatic or manual change-over or duplicate equipment.
Month Year
Projects Name
3.13 A.
NOISE AND SOUND CONTROL Sound level readings shall be taken with a simple sound level meter using the A scale weighting network. The spaces in which readings shall be taken as agreed but will in general, be the following : 1. 2. 3. Equipment rooms. Occupied rooms adjacent to equipment rooms. Outside equipment rooms facing air intakes and exhausts and condensing discharge, to assess possible nuisance to adjacent accommodation, if the adjacent accommodation is private residential building tests may be required at night. In the space served by the first grille or diffuser after a fan outlet. In at least two of the spaces served by fan coil units.
4. 5. B.
Alternatively, sound level readings shall be taken using a sound analyses to give an octave band analysis of the sound spectrum and to pinpoint the frequency values of peak sound levels. END OF SECTION

Division 15 Sample

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Division 15 Sample

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Month Year

The indoor room conditions shall be as indicated on drawings.

_____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-2

_____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-4

_____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-5

_____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-9

PART 2 - PRODUCTS NOT USED

_____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-10

_____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-11

_____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-15

_____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-16

i. ii. iii. iv. v. vi. f. g. h. j.

_____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-19

_____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-21

_____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-22

_____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-25

_____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-27

_____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-28

3.02 PREPARATION _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-29

_____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-31

SECTION 15051 WELDING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK

A. Division 15 : Mechanical 1.02 A. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

_____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-32

_____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-33

_____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-34

4. Connections to other services _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-35

_____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-36

10. 11. 12. 13. 14 15 B.

_____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-37

_____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-40

_____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-41

_____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-42

_____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-43

_____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-45

_____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-46

_____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-47

_____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-48

_____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-55

_____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-56

_____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-57

_____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-58

_____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-59

_____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-60

FLANGES AND GASKETS

_____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-61

_____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-62

_____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-63

_____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-66

A. Reference Standards _____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-67

A395 A536 B62 B148 B584

_____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-68

4. National Fire Protection Association ( NFPA ): a. 20 Centrifugal Fire Pumps.

6. International Organization for Standardization ( ISO): a. Refer to ISO 2585.

_____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-69

_____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-71

_____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-73

_____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-74

Air tight access cover and frame.

_____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-77

_____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-83

_____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-84

_____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-87

_____________________________________________________________________________________ Division 15 - Mechanical Works Page 15-88